SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Form S-1
BofI Holding, Inc.
Delaware
6035
33-0867444
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
(Primary Standard Industrial
Classification Code Number)
(I.R.S. Employer
Identification No.)
BofI Holding, Inc.
Gary Lewis Evans
Copies to:
Allen Z. Sussman, Esq.
|
Ellen R. Marshall, Esq. | |
Charles C. Kim, Esq. | Ivan A. Gaviria, Esq. | |
Morrison & Foerster LLP | Manatt, Phelps & Phillips, LLP | |
555 West Fifth Street | 695 Town Center Drive, 14th Floor | |
Los Angeles, CA 90013-1024 | Costa Mesa, CA 92626 | |
(213) 892-5200 | (714) 371-2500 |
Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public: As soon as practicable after the effective date of this Registration Statement.
If any of the securities being registered on this form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box. o
If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering. o
If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering. o
If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering. o
If delivery of the prospectus is expected to be made pursuant to Rule 434, please check the following box. o
CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE
|
||||
|
||||
Title of Each Class of | Proposed Maximum Aggregate | Amount of | ||
Securities to be Registered | Offering Price(1) | Registration Fee | ||
|
||||
Common stock, par value $0.01 per share
|
$23,000,000 | $2,707.10 | ||
|
||||
|
(1) | Estimated solely for the purpose of determining the registration fee in accordance with Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933. |
The Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933 or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the SEC, acting pursuant to Section 8(a), may determine.
The information in this
prospectus is not complete and may be changed. We may not sell
these securities until the registration statement filed with the
Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This prospectus
is not an offer to sell these securities and is not soliciting
an offer to buy these securities in any state where the offer or
sale is not permitted.
|
SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED
DECEMBER 16, 2004
BofI Holding,
Inc.
Shares
of Common Stock
This is our initial public offering and no public
market currently exists for our shares. We expect that the
public offering price will be between
$ and
$ per
share.
THE OFFERING
PER SHARE
TOTAL
$
$
$
$
$
$
The offering involves a high degree of risk. You should purchase
Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission or other regulatory body has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.
These securities are not savings or deposit
accounts or obligations of any bank and are not insured by the
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, Bank Insurance Fund,
Savings Association Insurance Fund or any other governmental
agency.
The date of this prospectus
is ,
2005.
The
Seidler
Companies
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page | ||||||||
|
||||||||
1 | ||||||||
7 | ||||||||
19 | ||||||||
20 | ||||||||
20 | ||||||||
21 | ||||||||
23 | ||||||||
25 | ||||||||
28 | ||||||||
50 | ||||||||
68 | ||||||||
81 | ||||||||
83 | ||||||||
85 | ||||||||
90 | ||||||||
97 | ||||||||
99 | ||||||||
106 | ||||||||
106 | ||||||||
107 | ||||||||
F-1 | ||||||||
Exhibit 3.4 | ||||||||
Exhibit 10.2 | ||||||||
Exhibit 10.3 | ||||||||
Exhibit 10.4 | ||||||||
Exhibit 10.5 | ||||||||
Exhibit 10.6 | ||||||||
Exhibit 10.7 | ||||||||
Exhibit 10.8 | ||||||||
Exhibit 10.9 | ||||||||
Exhibit 23.2 |
You should rely only on the information contained in this prospectus. We have not, and the underwriters have not, authorized any other person to provide you with different information. If anyone provides you with different or inconsistent information, you should not rely on it. We are not, and the underwriters are not, making an offer to sell these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted. You should assume that the information contained in this prospectus is accurate only as of the date on the front cover of this prospectus. Our business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects may have changed since that date.
i
PROSPECTUS SUMMARY
This summary provides an overview of
information contained elsewhere in this prospectus and does not
contain all of the information you should consider. You should
read the following summary together with the more detailed
information set out in this prospectus, including the Risk
Factors section beginning on page 7 and our
consolidated financial statements and notes to those
consolidated financial statements that appear elsewhere in this
prospectus.
Unless otherwise stated, all information in
this prospectus assumes that the underwriters will not exercise
their over-allotment option to purchase any of
the shares
of our common stock subject to that option.
Unless the context requires otherwise,
references to BofI, our company,
we, us and our refer to BofI
Holding, Inc. and our wholly owned subsidiary, Bank of Internet
USA. References to Bank of Internet USA, Bank
of Internet and our bank refer to Bank of
Internet USA, a federal savings bank.
BofI Holding, Inc.
General
We are the holding company for Bank of Internet
USA, a consumer-focused, nationwide savings bank operating
primarily through the Internet from a single location in
San Diego, California. Since the inception of our bank in
2000, we have designed and implemented an automated
Internet-based banking platform and electronic workflow process
that we believe affords us low operating expenses and allows us
to pass these savings along to our customers in the form of
attractive interest rates and low fees on our products. Our bank
was designed from the ground-up to use this platform, providing
us with an advantage in leveraging technology to handle routine
banking transactions with lean staffing.
We believe that our business model is highly
scalable, allowing us to expand into new regions and products
and rapidly increase deposits and, to a lesser extent, loans,
without significant delays or significant increased costs, and
with limited additional fixed assets and personnel. We are able
to operate in all 50 states and can be selective in
entering new geographic markets and targeting demographic groups
such as seniors or students.
At September 30, 2004, we had total assets
of $453.9 million, net loans held for investment of
$355.1 million and total deposits of $295.7 million.
Our deposits consist primarily of interest-bearing checking and
savings accounts and time deposits. Our loans are primarily
first mortgages secured by multifamily (five or more units) and
single family (one to four units) real property.
During the past three fiscal years, we have
achieved strong growth. From the fiscal year ended June 30,
2002 to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, we have:
1
Business Strategy
Our business strategy is to lower the cost of
delivering banking products and services by leveraging
technology, while continuing to grow our assets and deposits to
achieve increased economies of scale. Our strategy includes a
number of key elements:
Corporate Information
We were incorporated in the State of Delaware on
July 6, 1999 for the purpose of organizing and opening an
Internet-based bank. Bank of Internet USA, our wholly-owned
subsidiary, is a federal savings bank that opened for business
over the Internet on July 4, 2000. Our executive offices
are located at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220,
San Diego, California 92130, and our telephone number is
(858) 350-6200. We maintain a number of websites, including
www.BankofInternet.com, www.BancodeInternet.com, www.BofI.com
and www.ApartmentBank.com. Information contained on our websites
is not a part of this prospectus.
2
increased our net income from $1.0 million
to $2.2 million and diluted earnings per share from $0.21
to $0.39;
increased our total assets at year end from
$217.6 million to $405.0 million, while only
increasing our employment base from 20 to 24 full time employees;
increased net loans held for investment at year
end from $167.3 million to $355.3 million, increased
originations of multifamily loans from $30.0 million to
$57.3 million and increased originations of single family
loans held for sale from $7.0 million to $76.6 million;
increased total deposits at year end from
$167.6 million to $269.8 million and the number of
online deposit accounts from 6,400 to 13,700; and
improved our efficiency ratio, or noninterest
expense as a percentage of net interest income plus noninterest
income, from 79.3% to 49.5%.
Table of Contents
Leverage Technology.
We have designed our automated Internet-based banking platform
and workflow process to handle traditional banking functions
with reduced paperwork and human intervention. We intend to
continue to improve our systems and implement new systems with
the goal of providing for increased transaction capacity and
scalability in our systems without materially increasing
personnel costs.
Exploit Advantages of Nationwide
Presence.
Our thrift charter allows us
to operate in all 50 states. Our nationwide, online
presence allows us increased flexibility to target a large
number of loan and deposit customers based on demographics,
geographic location and price. It also provides us with a low
cost of customer acquisition and the ability to be selective in
approving prospective loan customers. We can rapidly shift and
target our marketing based on the demographics and location of
the target audience nationwide and establish a presence in new
geographic and demographic markets with relatively low entry
costs.
Continue to Grow Online Deposits and Expand
Services.
We offer a broad selection
of retail deposit instruments and plan to continue to develop
new products and services to serve specific demographics. We
intend to expand the volume and breadth of our deposit marketing
over the Internet.
Increase Loan Originations and
Purchases.
We intend to increase
single family and multifamily loan originations through our
websites, including our ApartmentBank and
Broker Advantage websites. We also plan to continue
to purchase high-quality multifamily and, to a lesser extent,
single family loans.
Table of Contents
The Offering
The number excludes:
3
Risk Factors
See Risk Factors beginning on
page 7 for a discussion of material risks related to an
investment in our common stock.
4
Summary Consolidated Financial
Information
You should read the summary consolidated
financial information set forth below together with our
consolidated financial statements and related notes and
Managements Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations included elsewhere in
this prospectus. Our consolidated income statement information
for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 and
the consolidated balance sheet information as of
September 30, 2004 are derived from our unaudited
consolidated financial statements, which are included in this
prospectus and, in the opinion of management, include all
adjustments necessary for fair presentation of the results of
such periods. The consolidated balance sheet information as of
September 30, 2003 is derived from our unaudited
consolidated financial information. The consolidated income
statement information for the fiscal years ended June 30,
2004, 2003 and 2002 and the consolidated balance sheet
information as of June 30, 2004 and 2003 have been derived
from our audited consolidated financial statements included
elsewhere in this prospectus. The consolidated income statement
information for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2001 and the
period from July 6, 1999 (inception) to June 30,
2000 and the consolidated balance sheet information at
June 30, 2002, 2001 and 2000 have been derived from our
audited consolidated financial statements that are not included
in this prospectus. Historical results are not necessarily
indicative of future results.
5
NM means not meaningful.
6
RISK FACTORS
An investment in our common stock involves
risk, and you should not invest in our common stock unless you
can afford to lose some or all of your investment. You should
carefully read the risks described below, together with all of
the other information included in this prospectus, before you
decide to buy any of our common stock. Our business, prospects,
financial condition and results of operations could be harmed by
any of the following risks or other risks which have not been
identified which we believe are immaterial or
unlikely.
Risks Relating to Our Business
We commenced banking operations in July 2000. We
remain subject to the risks inherently associated with new
business enterprises in general and, more specifically, the
risks of a new financial institution and, in particular, a new
Internet-based financial institution. Our prospects are subject
to the risks and uncertainties frequently encountered by
companies in their early stages of development, including the
risk that we will not be able to implement our business
strategy. In addition, we have a limited history upon which we
can rely in planning and making the critical decisions that will
affect our future operating results. Similarly, because of the
relatively immature state of our business, it will be difficult
to evaluate our prospects. Accordingly, our financial
performance to date may not be indicative of whether our
business strategy will be successful.
We have grown substantially, from
$217.6 million in total assets and $167.6 million in
total deposits at June 30, 2002 to $453.9 million in
total assets and $295.7 million in total deposits at
September 30, 2004. We expect to continue to grow our
assets, our deposits, the number of our customers and the scale
of our operations generally and will seek to grow at an
accelerated rate following completion of the offering. Our
future success will depend in part on our continued ability to
manage our growth. We may not be able to achieve our growth
plans, or sustain our historical growth rates or grow at all.
Various factors, such as economic conditions, regulatory and
legislative considerations and competition, may also impede our
ability to expand our market presence. If we are unable to grow
as planned, our business and prospects could be adversely
affected.
Our business strategy involves, among other
things, continuing to grow our assets and loan portfolio and our
customer base. We intend to use the net proceeds from the
offering to help us achieve this objective. Our ability to
achieve profitable growth depends in part upon our ability to
identify favorable loan and investment opportunities and
successfully attract deposits. Our management may not be able to
use the net proceeds from the offering to implement our business
strategy effectively, and we may encounter unanticipated
obstacles in implementing our strategy. If we are unable to
expand our business as we anticipate, we may be unable to
benefit from the investments we have made to support our future
growth. If this occurs, we may not be able to maintain
profitability.
We anticipate that our asset size and deposit
base will continue to grow over time, perhaps significantly. To
manage the expected growth of our operations and personnel, we
will be required to, among other things:
If we are unable to manage growth effectively,
our business, prospects, financial condition and results of
operations could be adversely affected.
7
Our profitability depends substantially on our
net interest income, which could be negatively affected by
changes in interest rates. Net interest income is the difference
between the income we earn on interest-earning assets, such as
mortgage loans and investment securities, and the interest we
pay on interest-bearing liabilities, such as deposits and other
borrowings. Because of the differences in both maturities and
repricing characteristics of our interest-earning assets and
interest-bearing liabilities, changes in interest rates do not
produce equivalent changes in interest income earned on
interest-earning assets and interest paid on interest-bearing
liabilities. Accordingly, fluctuations in interest rates could
adversely affect our net interest income and therefore
profitability. We may not be able to manage our interest rate
risk.
Interest rates are highly sensitive to many
factors which are beyond our control, including general economic
conditions and policies of various governmental and regulatory
agencies and, in particular, the Federal Reserve Board, or the
FRB. Changes in monetary policy, including change in interest
rates, will influence not only the interest we receive on our
loans and investment securities and the amount of interest we
pay on deposits, it will also affect our ability to originate
loans and obtain deposits and our costs in doing so. When
interest rates rise, the cost of borrowing also increases. Our
business model is predicated on our operating on levels of net
interest income that other banks might find unacceptable or
unsustainable, as we typically pay interest rates on deposits in
the higher end of the spectrum and often charge lower interest
rates and fees than those charged by competitors. Accordingly,
changes in levels of market interest rates could materially and
adversely affect our net interest income, asset quality, loan
origination volume, business and prospects.
We expect more of our interest-bearing
liabilities will mature or reprice within one year than will our
interest-earning assets, resulting in a one year negative
interest rate sensitivity gap (the difference between our
interest rate sensitive assets maturing or repricing within one
year and our interest rate sensitive liabilities maturing or
repricing within one year, expressed as a percentage of
interest-earning assets). In a rising interest rate environment,
an institution with a negative gap generally would be expected,
absent the effects of other factors, to experience a greater
increase in its cost of liabilities relative to its yield on
assets, and thus a decrease in its net interest income. For a
further discussion of our interest rate risks and the
assumptions underlying our interest rate risk calculations, see
Managements Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations Quantitative and
Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk.
Due to applicable capital adequacy regulations
and sound banking practices, our growth will require that we
generate additional capital either through retained earnings or
the issuance of additional shares of common stock or other
capital instruments. We may choose to raise additional capital
even if we believe we have sufficient funds for our current
operating plan. Additional capital may not be available on terms
acceptable to us, if at all. Any equity financings could result
in dilution to our stockholders or reduction in the earnings
available to our common stockholders. If adequate capital is not
available or the terms of such capital are not attractive, we
may have to curtail our growth and our business, and our
business, prospects, financial condition and results of
operations could be adversely affected.
We are an independent Internet-based bank, as
distinguished from the Internet banking services of an
established brick and mortar bank. Independent
Internet-based banks often have found it difficult to achieve
profitability and revenue growth. Several factors contribute to
the unique problems that Internet-based banks face. These
include concerns for the security of personal information, the
absence of personal relationships between bankers and customers,
the absence of loyalty to a conventional hometown bank,
customers difficulty in understanding and assessing the
substance and financial strength of an Internet-based bank, a
lack of confidence in the likelihood of success and permanence
of Internet-based banks and many
8
Conventional brick and mortar banks,
in growing numbers, are offering the option of Internet-based
banking services to their existing and prospective customers.
The public may perceive conventional banks as being safer, more
responsive, more comfortable to deal with and more accountable
as providers of their banking services, including their
Internet-based banking services. We may not be able to offer
Internet-based banking services that have sufficient advantages
over the Internet-based banking services and other
characteristics of conventional brick and mortar
banks to enable us to compete successfully.
Moreover, both the Internet and the financial
services industry are undergoing rapid technological changes,
with frequent introductions of new technology-driven products
and services. In addition to improving the ability to serve
customers, the effective use of technology increases efficiency
and enables financial institutions to reduce costs. Our future
success will depend in part upon our ability to address the
needs of our customers by using technology to provide products
and services that will satisfy customer demands, as well as to
create additional efficiencies in our operations. We may not be
able to effectively implement new technology-driven products and
services or be successful in marketing theses products and
services to our customers. If we are unable, for technical,
legal, financial or other reasons, to adapt in a timely manner
to changing market conditions, customer requirements or emerging
industry standards, our business, prospects, financial condition
and results of operations could be adversely affected.
Many of our competitors have substantially
greater resources to invest in technological improvements. To
remain competitive, we must continue to enhance and improve the
responsiveness, functionality and features of our Internet-based
services. Most of our software and computer systems are
comprised of off-the-shelf applications, and we have
limited proprietary computer software, information databases and
applications. Others may develop and offer superior banking
products and services that may gain greater acceptance among
potential customers. Our success will depend in part on our
ability both to license and develop leading technologies to
enhance our existing services, develop new services and
technologies that address the increasingly sophisticated and
varied needs of our customers and respond to technological
advances and emerging industry standards and practices on a cost
effective and timely basis.
Our business strategy depends on our ability to
remain competitive. There is strong competition for customers
from existing banks and other types of financial institutions,
including those that use the Internet as a medium for banking
transactions or as an advertising platform. Our competitors
include:
Some of these competitors have been in business
for a long time and have name recognition and an established
customer base. Most of our competitors are larger and have
greater financial and personnel resources. In order to compete
profitably, we may need to reduce the rates we offer on loans
and investments and increase the rates we offer on deposits,
which actions may adversely affect our business, prospects,
financial condition and results of operations.
To remain competitive, we believe we must
successfully implement our business strategy. Our success
depends on, among other things:
9
If we are unable to implement our business
strategy, our business, prospects, financial condition and
results of operations could be adversely affected.
We are based in San Diego, California, and
approximately 63.5% of our total loan portfolio was secured by
real estate located in California at September 30, 2004. In
addition, the computer systems that operate our Internet
websites and some of their back-up systems are located in
San Diego, California. Historically, California has been
vulnerable to natural disasters. Therefore, we are susceptible
to the risks of natural disasters, such as earthquakes,
wildfires, floods and mudslides. Natural disasters could harm
our operations directly through interference with
communications, including the interruption or loss of our
websites which would prevent us from gathering deposits,
originating loans and processing and controlling our flow of
business, as well as through the destruction of facilities and
our operational, financial and management information systems. A
natural disaster or recurring power outages may also impair the
value of our largest class of assets, our loan portfolio, which
is comprised substantially of real estate loans. Uninsured or
underinsured disasters may reduce borrowers ability to
repay mortgage loans. Disasters may also reduce the value of the
real estate securing our loans, impairing our ability to recover
on defaulted loans through foreclosure and making it more likely
that we would suffer losses on defaulted loans. California has
also experienced energy shortages which, if they recur, could
impair the value of the real estate in those areas affected.
Although we have implemented several back-up systems and
protections (and maintain business interruption insurance),
these measures may not protect us fully from the effects of a
natural disaster. The occurrence of natural disasters or energy
shortages in California could have a material adverse effect on
our business, prospects, financial condition and results of
operations.
At September 30, 2004, our multifamily
residential loans held for investment were $318.9 million,
or 90.0% of our total loans held for investment, and the average
loan size of our multifamily residential loans was $673,000. At
September 30, 2004, our commercial real estate loans held
for investment were $11.7 million, or 3.3% of our total
loans held for investment, and the average loan size of our
commercial real estate loans was $617,000. The payment on such
loans is typically dependent on the cash flows generated by the
projects, which are affected by the supply and demand for
multifamily residential units and commercial property within the
relative market. If the market for multifamily residential units
and commercial property experiences a decline in demand,
multifamily and commercial borrowers may suffer losses on their
projects and be unable to repay their loans.
We may incur significant losses because
approximately 90.0% of our loans are secured by multifamily
properties. Loans secured by multifamily properties may have a
greater risk of loss than loans secured by single family
properties because they typically involve larger loan balances
to single borrowers or groups of related borrowers. Significant
losses on loans secured by multifamily properties are possible
because the cash flows from multifamily properties securing the
loans may become inadequate to service the loan payments. The
payment experience on these loans typically depends upon the
successful operation of the related real
10
Multifamily underwriting typically requires
inspection of each property and familiarity with the location of
the property and the local real estate market. While we have a
policy to conduct a site visit of the property underlying every
multifamily loan and focus our multifamily originations in only
four states with which we believe we have greater familiarity,
we intend to expand our multifamily loan originations beyond
those four states. We may not be able to develop the requisite
experience with other markets to be able to underwrite
successfully multifamily loans in additional communities and
states. We also may not be able to assess correctly relevant
criteria such as the level of vacancies with respect to a
particular property or the community in which it is located or
that we will be able to continue to physically inspect each
multifamily property. Our inability to successfully underwrite
multifamily loans could lead to delinquencies and charge-offs
and could adversely affect our business, prospects, financial
condition and results of operations.
Our loans are generally secured by multifamily
and, to a lesser extent, commercial and single family real
estate properties, each initially having a fair market value
generally greater than the amount of the loan secured. However,
even though our loans are typically secured, the risk of
default, generally due to a borrowers inability to make
scheduled payments on his or her loan, is an inherent risk of
the banking business. In determining the amount of the allowance
for loan losses, we make various assumptions and judgments about
the collectibility of our loan portfolio, including the
creditworthiness of our borrowers and the value of the real
estate serving as collateral for the repayment of our loans.
Defaults by borrowers could result in losses that exceed our
loan loss reserves. We have originated or purchased many of our
loans recently, so we do not have sufficient repayment
experience to be certain whether the allowance for loan losses
we have established is adequate. We may have to establish a
larger allowance for loan losses in the future if, in our
judgment, it is necessary. Any increase in our allowance for
loan losses will increase our expenses and consequently may
adversely affect our profitability, capital adequacy and overall
financial condition.
Substantially all of the loans in our portfolio
are secured by real estate. At September 30, 2004,
approximately 63.5% of our total loan portfolio was secured by
real estate located in California. If there is a significant
decline in real estate values, especially in California, the
collateral for our loans will become less valuable. If such an
event were to occur, we may experience charge-offs at a greater
level than we would otherwise experience, as the proceeds
resulting from foreclosure may be significantly lower than the
amounts outstanding on such loans. Declining real estate values
frequently accompany periods of economic downturn or recession
and increasing unemployment, all of which can lead to lower
demand for mortgage loans of the types we originate. These
changes would likely have a material adverse effect on our
business, prospects, financial condition and results of
operations.
From time to time, we purchase loans in bulk or
pools. When we determine the purchase price we are
willing to pay to purchase loans in bulk, management makes
certain assumptions about, among other things, how fast
borrowers will prepay their loans, the real estate market and
our ability to collect loans successfully and, if necessary, to
dispose of any real estate that may be acquired through
foreclosure. When we purchase loans in bulk, we perform certain
due diligence procedures and we purchase the loans subject to
customary limited indemnities. To the extent that our underlying
assumptions prove to be inaccurate or the basis for those
assumptions change (such as an unanticipated decline in the real
estate market), the purchase price paid for the pool
of loans may prove to have been excessive, resulting in a lower
yield or a loss. For example, if we purchase a pool
of loans at a premium and some of the loans are prepaid before
we expected, we will
11
Acquiring loans through bulk purchases may
involve acquiring loans of a type or in geographic areas where
management may not have substantial prior experience. We may be
exposed to a greater risk of loss to the extent that bulk
purchases contain such loans.
The amount that we can lend to a single borrower
is limited to 15.0% of the unimpaired capital and surplus of our
subsidiary bank. At September 30, 2004, no single loan was
larger than $2.9 million and our banks largest single
lending relationship had an outstanding balance of
$4.3 million. We expect that our lending limit will
increase to approximately
$ million
immediately following the offering, assuming
$ million
is raised in the offering and that
$ million
of the net proceeds are contributed to our bank, based on the
assumptions set forth below the table in
Capitalization. Because our lending limits may be
significantly lower than those of our competitors, we may be at
a competitive disadvantage in pursuing relationships with larger
borrowers in our market areas. Notwithstanding our loan limits,
we may elect not to make loans up to our maximum loan limit for
any reason. If we do elect to make larger loans, we may seek to
reduce our exposure by making the loan with one or more other
financial institutions which become solely liable for their
portion of the loan. We may not be successful in securing other
institutions to make loans with us or in successfully
administering those loans, if we elect to make larger loans.
Our success depends substantially on the skill
and abilities of our senior management team, including our
President and Chief Executive Officer Gary Lewis Evans, our
Chief Financial Officer Andrew J. Micheletti and our banks
Chief Credit Officer Patrick A. Dunn, each of whom performs
multiple functions that might otherwise be performed by separate
individuals at larger banks, as well as our Chairman Jerry F.
Englert and our Vice Chairman Theodore C. Allrich. These
individuals may not be able to fulfill their responsibilities
adequately, and they may not remain with us. The loss of the
services of any of these individuals or other key employees,
whether through termination of employment, disability or
otherwise, could have a material adverse effect on our business.
In addition, our ability to grow and manage our growth depends
on our ability to continue to identify, attract, hire, train,
retain and motivate highly skilled executive, technical,
managerial, sales and marketing, customer service and
professional personnel. The implementation of our business plan
and our future success will depend on such qualified personnel.
Competition for such employees is intense, and there is a risk
that we will not be able to successfully attract, assimilate or
retain sufficiently qualified personnel. If we fail to attract
and retain the necessary technical, managerial, sales and
marketing and customer service personnel, as well as experienced
professionals, our business, prospects, financial condition and
results of operations could be adversely affected. We maintain a
key man life insurance policy on Gary Lewis Evans
and bank-owned life insurance on other executive officers.
We rely substantially upon third-party service
providers for our core banking technology and to protect us from
bank system failures or disruptions. This reliance may mean that
we will not be able to resolve operational problems internally
or on a timely basis, which could lead to customer
dissatisfaction or long-term disruption of our operations. Our
operations also depend upon our ability to replace a third-party
service provider if it experiences difficulties that interrupt
operations or if an essential third-party service terminates. If
these service arrangements are terminated for any reason without
an immediately available substitute arrangement, our operations
may be severely interrupted or delayed. If such interruption or
delay were to
12
A deterioration in economic conditions, whether
caused by national events or local events, in particular an
economic slowdown in California, where approximately 63.5% of
our total loan portfolio was located at September 30, 2004,
could result in the following consequences, any of which could
hurt our business materially:
The State of California continues to face its own
fiscal challenges, the long term effect of which on the
States economy cannot be predicted.
We rely on other companies to administer and
service some of our loans by collecting payments, disbursing
proceeds of collection and, if necessary, conducting
foreclosures. We also rely on other companies to support our
loan underwriting process by providing us with, among other
things, appraisals, credit reports, environmental inspections
and reports and title searches. The value to our customers of
the services we offer and the success of our business ultimately
depend in large part on third parties providing these ancillary
services without errors, interruptions, delays and fraud. If
third parties commit fraud or perform their services
negligently, such as by intentionally or negligently reporting
false or misleading information, we could suffer losses by
relying on that information in conducting our business. Errors,
interruptions or delays by third parties providing these
ancillary services could also cause losses, as well as delays,
in the processing and closing of loans for our customers. If we
cannot manage these third parties so that they deliver these
ancillary services as we expect, we likely will experience
customer dissatisfaction, and our business, prospects, financial
condition and results of operations could be adversely affected.
We are subject to a large body of laws governing
our business, such as laws governing our charter, state laws
determining our remedies as lenders, laws governing labor
relations, taxation, contracts, consumer issues and many other
aspects of our business. We are regulated primarily by the OTS,
the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, or the FDIC, and, to
a lesser extent, the FRB. Because we are an Internet-based bank,
we are subject to various electronic funds transfer rules
adopted by the FRB. We are also subject to various general
commercial and consumer laws and regulations, such as the
Truth-in-Lending Act, the Truth-in-Savings Act, the Real Estate
Settlement Procedures Act of 1974 and the Uniform Commercial
Code, among many others. Any significant change in applicable
laws, rules and regulations, as well as new laws, rules and
regulations could significantly increase our cost of compliance
and adversely affect our business, prospects, financial
condition and results of operations.
Laws and regulations directly applicable to the
Internet and electronic commerce may become more prevalent in
the future. In the event Congress or state legislatures or
regulators such as the OTS, the FDIC, the FRB, the Federal Trade
Commission or other governmental authorities enact or modify
laws or adopt regulations relating to the Internet, our
business, prospects, financial condition and results of
operations could
13
As a public company, we will incur significant
legal, accounting and other expenses that we did not incur as a
private company, including costs associated with our public
company reporting requirements. We also anticipate that we will
incur costs associated with recently adopted corporate
governance requirements, including requirements under the
Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, as well as new accounting
pronouncements and new rules implemented by the Securities and
Exchange Commission, or the SEC, and the Nasdaq National Market.
Any expenses required to comply with evolving standards may
result in increased general and administrative expenses and a
diversion of management time and attention from our business. In
addition, these new laws and regulations could make it more
difficult or more costly for us to obtain certain types of
insurance, including director and officer liability insurance,
and we may be forced to accept reduced policy limits and
coverage or incur substantially greater costs to obtain the same
or similar coverage. The effect of these events could also make
it more difficult for us to attract and retain qualified persons
to serve on our board of directors, on our board committees or
as executive officers. We are presently evaluating and
monitoring developments with respect to these laws and
regulations and cannot predict or estimate the amount or timing
of additional costs we may incur to respond to their
requirements.
Our executive officers, directors and their
affiliates beneficially owned or controlled approximately 33.0%
of our outstanding common stock at November 30, 2004, and
will beneficially own or control
approximately %, or
approximately % assuming full
exercise of the underwriters over-allotment option, of our
outstanding common stock following the offering, in each case
assuming the exercise of all outstanding warrants held by them
and the conversion of all shares of Series A preferred
stock held by them into common stock (based on current
conversion terms). Accordingly, these executive officers,
directors and their affiliates, acting as a group, will have
substantial influence over the outcome of corporate actions
requiring stockholder approval, including the election of
directors, any merger, consolidation or sale of all or
substantially all of our assets or any other significant
corporate transactions. This concentration of ownership may also
delay or prevent a change of control of us, even if such a
change of control would benefit our other stockholders, and
might affect our stock price.
Provisions of our certificate of incorporation
and bylaws may delay or prevent a change in control, discourage
bids at a premium over the market price of our common stock and
adversely affect the market price of our common stock and the
voting or other rights of the holders of our common stock. These
provisions, among other things:
14
We are subject to the provisions of the Delaware
corporation law that, in general, prohibit any business
combination with a beneficial owner of 15.0% or more of our
common stock for five years unless the holders acquisition
of our stock was approved in advance by our board of directors
or other conditions are met.
Acquisition of control of a federal savings bank
such as Bank of Internet USA requires advance approval by the
Office of Thrift Supervision, Department of the Treasury, or the
OTS. Under federal law, acquisition of more than 10.0% of our
common stock would result in a rebuttable presumption of control
of Bank of Internet USA and the ownership of more than 25% of
the voting stock would result in conclusive control of Bank of
Internet USA. Depending on the circumstances, the foregoing
requirements may prevent or frustrate a change in control of us,
discourage bids at a premium over the market price of our common
stock and adversely affect the market price of our common stock
and the voting or other rights of the holders of our common
stock.
In the course of our business, we may foreclose
and take title to real estate and could be subject to
environmental liabilities with respect to those properties. We
may be held liable to a governmental entity or to third parties
for property damage, personal injury, investigation and clean-up
costs incurred by these parties in connection with environmental
contamination or may be required to investigate or clean up
hazardous or toxic substances or chemical releases at a
property. The costs associated with investigation or remediation
activities could be substantial. In addition, if we are the
owner or former owner of a contaminated site, we may be subject
to common law claims by third parties based on damages and costs
resulting from environmental contamination emanating from the
property. If we become subject to significant environmental
liabilities, our business, prospects, financial condition and
results of operations could be adversely affected.
Our earnings will be affected by domestic
economic conditions and the monetary and fiscal policies of the
U.S. government and its agencies. The monetary policies of
the FRB have had, and will continue to have, an important effect
on the operating results of commercial banks and other financial
institutions through its power to implement national monetary
policy in order, among other things, to curb inflation or combat
a recession.
The monetary policies of the FRB, effected
principally through open market operations and regulation of the
discount rate and reserve requirements, have had major effects
upon the levels of bank loans, investments and deposits. For
example, in 2001, several drops in the discount rate by the
Federal Open Market Committee placed tremendous pressure on the
profitability of all financial institutions because of the
resulting contraction of net interest margins. Any increase in
prevailing interest rates due to changes in monetary policies
may adversely affect banks such as us, whose liabilities tend to
reprice quicker than their assets. It is not possible to predict
the nature or effect of future changes in monetary and fiscal
policies.
The computer systems and network infrastructure
utilized by us and others could be vulnerable to unforeseen
problems. This is true of both our internally developed systems
and the systems of our third-party service providers. Our
operations are dependent upon our ability to protect computer
equipment against
15
Our operations depend upon encryption and
authentication technology to provide secure transmission of
confidential information and upon our ability to generally
protect the computer systems and network infrastructure utilized
by us against damage from security breaches and other disruptive
problems associated with Internet-related technological problems
or malicious behavior of other users. Advances in computer
capabilities, new discoveries in the field of cryptography or
other developments could result in a compromise or breach of the
processes and systems used to protect customer data.
Notwithstanding such possible advances and developments,
hackers and other disruptions could jeopardize the
security of information stored in, and transmitted through, such
computer systems and network infrastructure, which may result in
significant liability to us and deter potential customers. With
the rise in business conducted over the Internet, incidents of
identity theft have become more frequent. Although
management has implemented security technology and established
operational procedures to prevent these and other threats to
security, these security measures may not continue to be
successful. A failure of such security measures, or the failure
of our third-party service providers to design, implement and
monitor their own security systems, could adverse affect our
business, prospects, financial condition and results of
operations.
Any disruption in our operations due to systems
failure or security breach could deter potential customers or
cause existing customers to leave, could cause losses for which
we would be liable and could adversely affect our reputation.
Any such system failure or security breach could adversely
affect our business, prospects, financial condition and results
of operations.
Risks Relating to the Offering
Prior to the offering, there has been no public
market for our common stock. The offering price for our common
stock in the offering will be determined by negotiations between
us and the representatives of the underwriters participating in
the offering. Among the factors to be considered in determining
the offering price of our common stock, in addition to
prevailing market conditions, are our historical performance,
estimates regarding our business potential and earnings
prospects, an assessment of our management and the consideration
of the above factors in relation to market valuation of
companies in related businesses. The initial public offering
price of our common stock may bear no relationship to the price
at which our common stock will trade upon completion of the
offering, and you may not be able to resell your shares at or
above the initial public offering price.
Investors purchasing shares of our common stock
in the offering will pay more for their shares than the amount
paid by existing stockholders who acquired shares prior to the
offering. Accordingly, if you purchase common stock in the
offering, you will incur immediate dilution in pro forma net
tangible book value of approximately
$ per
share. In the past, we issued options and warrants to acquire
common stock at exercise prices significantly below the initial
public offering price and Series A preferred stock that is
currently convertible at a conversion price of $10.50 per
share. If the holders of outstanding options and warrants
exercise those securities or, depending on the per share initial
public offering price, holders of Series A preferred stock
convert their securities into common stock, you will incur
further dilution. See Dilution.
We have applied to have our common stock listed
for quotation on the Nasdaq National Market under the symbol
BOFI. However, we cannot assure you that an
established and liquid trading market for our common stock will
develop, that it will continue if it does develop or that after
the completion of the offering the common stock will trade at or
above the initial public offering price. The representatives of
the underwriters have advised us that they intend to make a
market in our common stock. However, neither the
16
We have never paid cash dividends on our common
stock and do not expect to pay cash dividends on our common
stock following the offering. Rather, we intend to retain
earnings and increase capital in furtherance of our overall
business objectives. We will periodically review our dividend
policy in view of our operating performance and may declare
dividends in the future if such payments are deemed appropriate
and in compliance with applicable law and regulations. Cash and
stock dividends are subject to determination and declaration by
our board of directors, which will take into account our
consolidated earnings, financial condition, liquidity and
capital requirements, applicable governmental regulations and
policies and other factors deemed relevant by our board of
directors. Our ability to pay dividends, should we elect to do
so, depends largely upon the ability of our bank to declare and
pay dividends to us, which are subject to, among other things,
the regulations of the OTS and the FDIC. The principal source of
our revenues is dividends paid to us by our bank.
We intend to contribute approximately
$ million
of the net proceeds of the offering to Bank of the Internet USA
to provide additional capital to support its growth, including
the addition of loans secured by single family and multifamily
residential properties and commercial real estate and
U.S. government agency mortgage-backed and other
securities, as well as to increase deposits and advances from
Federal Home Loan Bank, or the FHLB. We also intend to use
a portion of the net proceeds of the offering to prepay in full
a note payable. Although we have no current plans, agreements or
commitments with respect to any acquisition, we may, if the
opportunity arises, use an unspecified portion of the net
proceeds to acquire or invest in products, technologies or
companies. Our management will have broad discretion in the use
of the net proceeds from the offering and may spend the proceeds
in ways that our stockholders may not deem desirable. The timing
and amount of our actual expenditures will be based on many
factors, including cash flows from operations and the growth of
our business.
Until we use the net proceeds of the offering for
the above purposes, we intend to invest the funds in short term,
investment grade securities and other qualified investments,
such as federal funds sold. We cannot predict whether the net
proceeds invested will yield a favorable return.
The market price of our common stock could
decline as a result of sales of substantial amounts of our
common stock in the public market after the offering, or even
the perception that such sales could occur. We have agreed, and
our directors, executive officers and certain holders of our
outstanding common stock have also agreed, not to sell, offer,
agree to sell, contract to sell, hypothecate, pledge, grant any
option to purchase, make any short sale or otherwise dispose of
or hedge, directly or indirectly, any of our common stock or
securities that are substantially similar to our common stock,
including but not limited to any securities that are
convertible into or exchangeable for, or that represent the
right to receive, our common stock or any substantially similar
securities, or publicly announce an intention to do any of the
foregoing for a period of 180 days in the case of
directors, executive officers and certain holders of our common
stock, and 90 days in the case of certain other holders of
our common stock, after the date of this prospectus without the
prior written consent of WR Hambrecht + Co, LLC.
Notwithstanding the restrictions, and based on
the number of shares of common stock outstanding at
September 30, 2004 and on the assumptions set forth below
the table in Capitalization, there will be
17
Risks Relating to the Auction
Process
We will determine the initial public offering
price for the shares sold in the offering through an auction
conducted by us and our underwriters. We believe the auction
process will reveal a clearing price for the shares of our
common stock offered in the offering. The clearing price is the
highest price at which all of the shares offered (including the
shares subject to the underwriters over-allotment option)
may be sold to potential investors. Although we and our
underwriters may elect to set the initial public offering price
below the auction clearing price, the public offering price may
be at or near the clearing price. If there is little to no
demand for our shares at or above the initial public offering
price once trading begins, the price of our shares would decline
following the offering. If your objective is to make a short
term profit by selling the shares you purchase in the offering
shortly after trading begins, you should not submit a bid in the
auction.
Our underwriters may require that bidders confirm
their bids before the auction for the offering closes. If a
bidder is requested to confirm a bid and fails to do so within a
required time frame, that bid will be rejected and will not
receive an allocation of shares even if the bid is at or above
the initial public offering price. In addition, we, in
consultation with our underwriters, may determine, in our sole
discretion, that some bids that are at or above the initial
public offering price are manipulative and disruptive to the
bidding process, in which case such bids will be rejected.
If the initial public offering price is at or
near the clearing price for the shares offered in the offering,
the number of shares represented by successful bids will equal
or nearly equal the number of shares offered by this prospectus.
Successful bidders may therefore be allocated all or nearly all
of the shares that they bid for in the auction. Therefore, we
caution investors against submitting a bid that does not
accurately represent the number of shares of our common stock
that they are willing and prepared to purchase.
18
CAUTIONARY STATEMENT REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING
STATEMENTS
A number of the presentations and disclosures in
this prospectus, including any statements preceded by, followed
by or which include the words may,
could, should, will,
would, hope, might,
believe, expect, anticipate,
estimate, intend, plan,
assume or similar expressions, constitute
forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements,
implicitly and explicitly, include the assumptions underlying
the statements and other information with respect to our
beliefs, plans, objectives, goals, expectations, anticipations,
estimates, intentions, financial condition, results of
operations, future performance and business, including our
expectations and estimates with respect to our revenues,
expenses, earnings, return on equity, return on assets,
efficiency ratio, asset quality and other financial data and
capital and performance ratios.
Although we believe that the expectations
reflected in our forward-looking statements are reasonable,
these statements involve risks and uncertainties that are
subject to change based on various important factors (some of
which are beyond our control). The following factors, among
others, could cause our financial performance to differ
materially from our beliefs, plans, objectives, goals,
expectations, anticipations, estimates, intentions and other
forward-looking statements:
If one or more of the factors affecting our
forward-looking information and statements proves incorrect,
then our actual results, performance or achievements could
differ materially from those expressed in, or implied by, our
forward-looking information and statements. We caution you not
to place undue reliance on our forward-looking information and
statements.
We do not intend to update our forward-looking
information and statements, whether written or oral, to reflect
events or circumstances after the date of this prospectus. All
forward-looking statements attributable to us are expressly
qualified by our cautionary statements.
19
USE OF PROCEEDS
Our net proceeds from the sale of our shares of
common stock in the offering are expected to be approximately
$ million
(or approximately
$ million
if the underwriters over-allotment option is exercised in
full), assuming an initial public offering price of
$ per
share and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and
commissions and estimated offering expenses.
We intend to contribute approximately
$ million
of the net proceeds of the offering to Bank of Internet USA to
provide additional capital to support its growth, including the
addition of loans secured by single family (one to four units)
and multifamily (five or more units) residential properties and
commercial real estate and U.S. government agency
mortgage-backed and other securities, as well as to increase
deposits and advances from the FHLB. We also intend to use a
portion of the net proceeds of the offering to prepay in full a
note payable. At November 30, 2004, the note payable had an
outstanding principal balance of $5.0 million. The note
payable bears interest at prime plus one percent per annum,
which at November 30, 2004 was 6.0% per annum, and
interest is payable quarterly. Principal on the note payable is
due quarterly in 36 equal installments beginning on
January 24, 2005 and ending on October 24, 2013. As a
result of repaying the note payable, our banks common
stock that is collateral for the note payable will be released.
Pending these uses, we will invest the net proceeds initially in
short term, investment grade securities and other qualified
investments, such as federal funds sold.
DIVIDEND POLICY
We have never paid cash dividends on our common
stock, electing to retain earnings for funding our growth and
business. We currently anticipate continuing our policy of
retaining earnings to fund growth. Our ability to pay dividends,
should we ever elect to do so, depends largely upon the ability
of our bank to declare and pay dividends to us as the principal
source of our revenues is dividends paid to us by our bank.
Future dividends will depend primarily upon our earnings,
financial condition and need for funds, as well as government
policies and regulations applicable to us and our bank, which
limit the amount that may be paid as dividends without prior
approval. See Regulation Regulation of Bank of
Internet USA Capital Distribution Limitations.
20
CAPITALIZATION
The following table sets forth our capitalization
at September 30, 2004. Our capitalization is presented:
The following information should be read together
with our consolidated financial statements and the related notes
thereto.
21
22
DILUTION
If you invest in our common stock, your interest
will be diluted to the extent of the difference between the
public offering price per share of our common stock and the pro
forma net tangible book value per share of our common stock
after the offering. Net tangible book value per share is equal
to the amount of our common stockholders equity less
intangible assets, divided by the number of shares outstanding.
The net tangible book value of our common stock at
September 30, 2004 was $25.7 million, or
$5.68 per share, based on the number of shares of common
stock outstanding at September 30, 2004.
After (1) giving effect to the sale of
the shares
of common stock in the offering, at an assumed initial public
offering price of
$ per
share, assuming that the underwriters over-allotment
option is not exercised, and (2) deducting estimated
underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering
expenses payable by us, our pro forma net tangible book value at
September 30, 2004 would be approximately
$ million,
or
$ per
share. The offering will result in an immediate increase in net
tangible book value of
$ per
share to existing stockholders and an immediate dilution of
$ per
share to new investors, or
approximately % of the assumed
initial public offering price of
$ per
share. Dilution is determined by subtracting pro forma net
tangible book value per share after the offering from the
assumed initial public offering price of
$ per
share. The following table illustrates this per share dilution:
We expect warrants for 728,000 shares of
common stock with an exercise price of $4.19 per share to
be exercised on a cash basis prior to the offering because they
terminate if not exercised prior to that time. If these warrants
are exercised, then the dilution per share to new investors
would be
$ .
The following table summarizes the tangible book
value of the outstanding shares and the total consideration paid
to us and the average price paid per share by existing
stockholders and new investors purchasing common stock in the
offering. This information is presented on a pro forma basis at
September 30, 2004, after giving effect to the sale of
the shares
of common stock in the offering at an assumed initial public
offering price of
$ per
share.
23
To the extent that any outstanding options or
warrants are exercised or, depending on the per share initial
public offering price, Series A preferred stock is
converted into common stock, there will be further dilution to
new investors. In addition, we may choose to raise additional
capital even if we believe we have sufficient funds for our
current or future operating plans. To the extent that additional
capital is raised through the sale of equity or convertible debt
securities, the issuance of such securities could result in
further dilution to our stockholders.
24
SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
INFORMATION
You should read the selected consolidated
financial information set forth below together with our
consolidated financial statements and related notes and
Managements Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations included elsewhere in
this prospectus. Our consolidated income statement information
for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 and
the consolidated balance sheet information as of
September 30, 2004 are derived from our unaudited
consolidated financial statements, which are included in this
prospectus and, in the opinion of management, include all
adjustments necessary for fair presentation of the results of
such periods. The consolidated balance sheet information as of
September 30, 2003 is derived from our unaudited
consolidated financial information. The consolidated income
statement information for the fiscal years ended June 30,
2004, 2003 and 2002 and the consolidated balance sheet
information at June 30, 2004 and 2003 have been derived
from our audited consolidated financial statements included
elsewhere in this prospectus. The consolidated income statement
information for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2001 and the
period from July 6, 1999 (inception) to June 30,
2000 and the consolidated balance sheet information at
June 30, 2002, 2001 and 2000 have been derived from our
audited consolidated financial statements that are not included
in this prospectus. Historical results are not necessarily
indicative of future results.
25
26
NM means not meaningful.
27
MANAGEMENTS DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS
OF
The following discussion and analysis contains
forward-looking statements that are based upon current
expectations. Forward-looking statements involve risks and
uncertainties. Our actual results and the timing of events could
differ materially from those anticipated in our forward-looking
statements due to various important factors, including those set
forth under Risk Factors and elsewhere in this
prospectus. The following discussion and analysis should be read
together with the Selected Consolidated Financial
Information and our consolidated financial statements,
including the related notes, included elsewhere in this
prospectus.
General
Our company, BofI Holding, Inc., is the holding
company for Bank of Internet USA, a consumer-focused, nationwide
savings bank operating primarily over the Internet. We generate
retail deposits in all 50 states and originate loans for
our customers directly through our websites, including
www.BankofInternet.com, www.BofI.com and www.ApartmentBank.com.
We are a unitary savings and loan holding company and, along
with Bank of Internet USA, are subject to primary federal
regulation by the OTS.
Our deposit customers are acquired and serviced
exclusively over the Internet. Using online applications on our
websites, our customers apply for deposit products, including
time deposits, interest-bearing demand accounts (including
interest-bearing checking accounts) and savings accounts
(including money market savings accounts). We specialize in
originating and purchasing small- to medium-size multifamily
mortgage loans. We manage our cash and cash equivalents based
upon our need for liquidity, and we seek to minimize the assets
we hold as cash and cash equivalents by investing our excess
liquidity in higher yielding assets such as loans or securities.
Our ability to increase our assets is limited
primarily by the capital we are required to maintain by
regulation. Our bank must maintain certain minimum ratios of
capital to assets. Thus, to enable us to increase the rate at
which our bank grows its assets, we have raised additional
capital in three separate private placements totaling
$14.5 million between September 2001 and June 2004.
Following each of these private placements, we increased our
total assets. Other than the constraints of these capital
requirements, we believe that our business model is highly
scalable, allowing us to expand into new regions and products
and rapidly increase deposits and, to a lesser extent, loans,
without significant delays and with a significantly slower
growth rate of noninterest expenses and fixed assets.
At June 30, 2001, the end of our first
fiscal year of operations, our total deposits were
$127.2 million and total assets were $156.6 million.
We have since grown our deposits and assets to
$295.7 million and $453.9 million, respectively, at
September 30, 2004. During the last three fiscal years, we
have operated with net interest margins (the difference between
the rate on average interest-earning assets and the rate on
average interest-bearing liabilities) ranging from 1.83% to
2.11%. During the same three-year period, our efficiency ratio
(noninterest expense divided by the sum of net interest income
and noninterest income) improved from 79.3% to 49.5%.
During our first two years of operation, we
focused primarily on building our online franchise and deposit
growth. We became profitable during the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2002, as we grew sufficiently to generate enough
net interest income to exceed our operating expenses. In our
deposit gathering business, we initially sought time deposits
because of their large average size and their relatively simple
application and processing. This initial focus gave us time to
develop our CRM software and manage workflow, as well as develop
our online advertising strategy. The proceeds from our deposits
were invested primarily in single family mortgage loans, which
we purchased in pools with servicing retained by the sellers.
The initial pool purchases and third-party servicing provided us
the time to hire and train loan origination and servicing staff.
In the last half of the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, we
began to shift our focus from purchasing single family mortgage
loans to originating and purchasing multifamily mortgage loans.
At June 30, 2002, we had 20 full time employees and
$217.6 million in assets. For the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2002, our net interest income, the primary
28
During the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003
and 2004, we developed and strengthened our online loan
origination capabilities. We launched our single family loan
origination website in March 2002. We originated single family
mortgage loans for sale of $7.0 million for the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2002, $124.7 million for the fiscal
year ended June 30, 2003 and $76.6 million for the
fiscal year ended June 30, 2004. We launched our
multifamily loan origination website in December 2002. We
originated multifamily mortgage loans of $30.0 million for
the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, $49.9 million for
the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 and $57.3 million
for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004.
At June 30, 2004, we had $405.0 million
in assets, or $16.9 million in assets per full time
employee. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, our net
interest income was $6.5 million which resulted in a net
interest margin of 2.0% on average interest-earning assets. Our
asset growth, the shift in our loan portfolio toward multifamily
loans and the relative increase in demand and savings accounts,
combined with the relatively slower growth in our operating
expense as result of our Internet platform, are principally
responsible for our increase in earnings from $1.0 million
for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 to
$1.7 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003
and $2.2 million for the fiscal year ended June 30,
2004.
At September 30, 2004, we had
$453.9 million in assets, or $18.9 million in assets
per full time employee. For the three months ended
September 30, 2004, our net income was $661,000 and
increased 86.7% compared to the same period ended
September 30, 2003. The earnings increase was a result of
asset growth after incurring a contract termination expense
incurred in the period ended September 30, 2003.
Critical Accounting Policies
The following discussion and analysis of our
financial condition and results of operations is based upon our
consolidated financial statements and the notes thereto, which
have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles
generally accepted in the United States of America. The
preparation of these consolidated financial statements requires
us to make a number of estimates and assumptions that affect the
reported amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial
statements. On an ongoing basis, we evaluate our estimates and
assumptions based upon historical experience and various factors
and circumstances. We believe that our estimates and assumptions
are reasonable in the circumstances. However, actual results may
differ significantly from these estimates and assumptions that
could have a material effect on the carrying value of assets and
liabilities at the balance sheet dates and our results of
operations for the reporting periods.
Our significant accounting policies and practices
are described in Note 1 to our June 30, 2004 audited
consolidated financial statements, which are included in this
prospectus. Following is a summary of the accounting policies
and practices that require managements judgment and
estimates:
Investment
Securities.
Investment securities
generally must be classified as held-to-maturity,
available-for-sale or trading. The appropriate classification is
based partially on our ability to hold the securities to
maturity and largely on managements intentions with
respect to either holding or selling the securities. The
classification of investment securities is significant since it
directly impacts the accounting for unrealized gains and losses
on securities. Unrealized gains and losses on trading securities
flow directly through earnings during the periods in which they
arise, whereas for available-for-sale securities, they are
recorded as a separate component of stockholders equity
(accumulated comprehensive other income or loss) and do not
affect earnings until realized. The fair values of our
investment securities are generally determined by reference to
quoted market prices and reliable independent sources. We are
obligated to assess, at each reporting date, whether there is an
other-than-temporary impairment to our investment
securities. Any impairment must be recognized in current
earnings rather than in other comprehensive income. We have not
had any impaired investment securities.
Allowance for Loan
Losses.
We maintain an allowance for
loan losses at an amount that we believe is sufficient to
provide adequate protection against probable losses in our loan
portfolio. Quarterly, we evaluate the adequacy of the allowance
based upon reviews of individual loans, recent loss experience,
current
29
Under our allowance for loan loss policy,
impairment calculations are determined based on loan level data
(specific reserves) and general portfolio data (general
reserves). Specific loans are evaluated for impairment and are
classified in accordance with OTS regulation when they are
90 days or more delinquent, nonperforming or in
foreclosure. Under our allowance for loan loss policy, a loan is
considered impaired when, based on current information and
events, it is probable that the bank will be unable to collect
the scheduled payments of principal or interest when due
according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement.
Factors that we consider in determining impairment include
payment status, collateral value and the probability of
collecting scheduled principal and interest payments when due.
Loans that experience insignificant payment delays and payment
shortfalls generally are not classified as impaired. Impairment
is measured on a loan by loan basis by either the present value
of expected future cash flows discounted at the loans
effective interest rate or the fair value of the collateral if
repayment of the loan is expected primarily from the sale of
collateral.
Under our policies, specific reserves are
calculated when an internal asset review of a loan identifies a
significant adverse change in the financial position of the
borrower or the value of the collateral. We calculate our
general loan loss reserves by grouping each loan by collateral
type (
e.g.
, single family, multifamily) and by grouping
the loan-to-value ratios of each loan within the collateral
type. An estimated impairment rate for each loan-to-value group
within each type of loan is multiplied by the total principal
amount in the group to calculate the required general reserve
attributable to that group. We believe that absent any other
evidence of impairment (
e.g.
, delinquent payments), the
greater the loan-to-value ratio the greater the risk the loan
will be impaired. We use a calculation methodology that provides
a larger loss allowance for loans with greater loan-to-value
ratios, measured at the time the loan was funded. The internal
asset review committee of our board of directors reviews and
approves the calculation methodology.
For every quarter from inception to June 30,
2004, we had no loan defaults, no foreclosures, no nonperforming
loans and no specific loan loss allowances. During the quarter
ended September 30, 2004, one loan in the amount of
$152,000 became nonperforming. We received payment in full from
the borrower in September 2004. At September 30, 2004, we had no
loan defaults, no foreclosures, no nonperforming loans and no
specific loan loss allowances. Our history is limited, and we
expect to have over time additional loans default or become
nonperforming. We have provided general loan loss allowances as
an estimate of the impairment inherent in our portfolio. See
Risk Factors for more information regarding the
risks associated with our loan portfolio.
Comparison of Financial Condition at
September 30, 2004 and June 30, 2004
Total assets increased by $48.9 million to
$453.9 million at September 30, 2004 from
$405.0 million at June 30, 2004. The increase in total
assets resulted primarily from the purchase of mortgage-backed
securities during the three months ended September 30,
2004, resulting in an increase in investment securities
available for sale of $47.5 million. Total liabilities
increased by $48.3 million to $421.6 million at
September 30, 2004 from $373.3 million at
June 30, 2004. The increase in total liabilities resulted
from growth in deposits of $25.8 million, growth in
advances from the FHLB of $20.0 million and growth in notes
payable of $2.0 million.
Stockholders equity increased by
$0.5 million during the three months ended
September 30, 2004. The increase was the result of $661,000
in net income which increased retained earnings and $101,000 in
dividends paid to holders of our Series A preferred stock.
Comparison of Financial Condition at
June 30, 2004 and 2003
Total assets increased by $131.5 million, or
48.1%, to $405.0 million at June 30, 2004 from
$273.5 million at June 30, 2003. The increase in total
assets resulted primarily from a $109.3 million increase in
net loans due to loan purchases and originations totaling
$193.7 million, which were offset by loan principal
repayments of
30
Stockholders equity increased by
$8.9 million, or 38.9%, during the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2004. The increase is primarily due to
$6.6 million in net cash received from our issuance of
Series A preferred stock and an increase of
$2.2 million in retained earnings from net income, less a
total of $140,000 in dividends paid to holders of our
Series A preferred stock.
Comparison of Financial Condition at
June 30, 2003 and 2002
Total assets increased by $55.9 million, or
25.7%, to $273.5 million at June 30, 2003 from
$217.6 million at June 30, 2002. The increase in total
assets resulted primarily from loan purchases and originations
of $140.4 million, 70% of which were multifamily mortgage
loans. The increase was offset by principal repayments during
the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, which totaled
$60.9 million, consisting primarily of single family
mortgage prepayments by borrowers who refinanced during a period
of low interest rates. Loans held for sale increased
$3.5 million to $3.6 million at June 30, 2003
from $128,000 at June 30, 2002, due to increased
originations of single family mortgage loans which were held for
sale.
Total liabilities increased by
$52.5 million, or 26.5%, to $250.6 million at
June 30, 2003 from $198.1 million at June 30,
2002. The increase in total liabilities resulted from growth in
deposits of $26.4 million and $26.0 million in
advances from the FHLB.
Stockholders equity increased by
$3.4 million, or 17.4%, during the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2003. The increase is primarily due to
$1.7 million in new common stock issued in a private
placement, which closed on July 31, 2002, and
$1.7 million in net income which increased retained
earnings.
31
Average Balances, Net Interest Income, Yields
Earned and Rates Paid
The following tables sets forth, for the periods
indicated, information regarding (i) average balances;
(ii) the total amount of interest income from
interest-earning assets and the weighted average yields on such
assets; (iii) the total amount of interest expense on
interest-bearing liabilities and the weighted average rates paid
on such liabilities; (iv) net interest income;
(v) interest rate spread; and (vi) net interest margin.
32
33
Results of Operations
Our results of operations depend on our net
interest income, which is the difference between interest income
on interest-earning assets and interest expense on
interest-bearing liabilities. Our net interest income has grown
primarily as a result of the growth in our assets and, to a
lesser extent, from the shift in our loan portfolio and the
relative increases in demand and savings accounts, as compared
to time deposits. We also earn noninterest income from gains on
sales of single family mortgage loans and prepayment fee income
from multifamily borrowers who repay their loans before
maturity. During the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, lower
interest rates resulted in higher mortgage refinancing activity.
Interest rates increased during the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2004 and, as a result, mortgage loan refinancing
activity declined. In the near term, we believe that prepayment
penalty fee income and gain on sale income will be reduced as a
result of rising interest rates. The largest component of
noninterest expense is salary and benefits, which is a function
of the number of personnel, which increased from 20 full time
employees at June 30, 2001 to 24 full time employees at
June 30, 2004. We are subject to federal and state income
taxes, and our effective tax rate has changed from a benefit of
72.6% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 to an expense
of 42.2% and 40.4% for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003
and 2004, respectively. We recognized the benefit of prior tax
operating losses for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2002
and 2003. No such benefit was recognized for the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2004. Other factors that affect our results
of operations include expenses relating to occupancy, data
processing and other miscellaneous expenses.
Net income for the three months ended
September 30, 2004 totaled $661,000 compared to $354,000
for the three months ended September 30, 2003. The $307,000
increase resulted from a $683,000 increase in net interest
income, reduced by a decrease in noninterest income of $119,000.
Net income totaled $2.2 million for the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2004, compared to $1.7 million for the fiscal
year ended June 30, 2003. The $445,000 increase resulted
from a $1.4 million increase in net interest income,
reduced by a $661,000 increase in noninterest expense, a
$207,000 increase in income tax expense and a $159,000 decrease
in noninterest income. The increase in noninterest expense for
the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 was due to increased
salaries and benefits and the termination of a services
contract. Net income increased $710,000 to $1.7 million for
the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 compared to
$1.0 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002.
The increase in net income resulted from a $1.6 million
increase in net interest income and a $1.1 million increase
in noninterest income, a $90,000 increase in loan loss
provisions, a $150,000 increase in noninterest expense and
a $1.7 million increase in income tax expense.
Net Interest Income.
Net interest income is determined by our interest rate spread
(
i.e.
, the difference between the yields earned on our
interest-earning assets and the rates paid on our
interest-bearing liabilities) and the relative amounts (volume)
of our interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities.
Net interest income totaled $2.1 million for the three
months ended September 30, 2004 compared to
$1.4 million for the
34
Interest Income.
Interest income for the three months ended September 30,
2004 totaled $4.8 million, an increase of
$1.2 million, or 33.3%, compared to $3.6 million in
interest income for the three months ended September 30,
2003. Average interest-earning assets for the three months ended
September 30, 2004 increased by $127.3 million
compared to the three months ended September 30, 2003 due
primarily to an $112.5 million increase in the average
balance of the loan portfolio as a result of our emphasis on
building our multifamily loan portfolio. Also, our average
balance of investment securities increased to $21.5 million
during the three months ended September 30, 2004 compared
to the $423,000 average balance for the same period in 2003 as a
result of the purchase of $53.0 million of mortgaged-backed
securities. Average interest earning balances associated with
our stock of the FHLB increased by $1.9 million for the
three months ended September 30, 2004 compared to the three
months ended September 30, 2003 because our required
minimum investment increased, in line with increased advances
from the FHLB. The average yield earned on our interest-earning
assets declined to 4.8% for the three months ended
September 30, 2004 from 5.1% for the same period in 2003
due primarily to the lower yield on our loan portfolio as market
interest rates declined. The widespread increase in prepayments
or refinancing of mortgage loans during 2003 and 2004 reduced
the higher-yielding older loans which were replaced with lower
yielding new loans, causing the average yield on the loan
portfolio to decline to 5.0% for the three months ended
September 30, 2004 from 5.6% for the same period in 2003.
Thus, the loan portfolio volume increase in the three months
ended September 30, 2004 would have increased interest
income $1.6 million, but the average rate decline and the
higher volume of loans originated at the lower average rates
reduced the interest income by $0.6 million, resulting in a
net increase in interest income of $1.0 million.
Interest Expense.
Interest expense totaled $2.7 million for the three months
ended September 30, 2004, an increase of $562,000, compared
to $2.2 million in interest expense during the three months
ended September 30, 2003. Average interest-bearing balances
for the three months ended September 30, 2004 increased
$123.1 million compared to the same period in 2003, due to
higher deposit totals from increased customer accounts and
additional borrowings from the FHLB. The average
interest-bearing balances of advances from the FHLB increased
$41.5 million as new 2-, 3-, 4-, 5- and 7-year fixed-rate
advances were added. In addition, $15.9 million of advances
scheduled to mature during the fiscal year ended June 30,
2004
35
Provision for Loan
Losses.
Provision for loan losses was
$15,000 for each of the three months ended September 30,
2004 and 2003. The provisions were made to maintain our
allowance for loan losses at levels which management believed to
be adequate. The assessment of the adequacy of our allowance for
loan losses is based upon a number of quantitative and
qualitative factors, including levels and trends of past due and
nonaccrual loans, change in volume and mix of loans and
collateral values. We did not have any nonperforming loans at
September 30, 2004 or 2003. We believe that our history is
limited and it is unlikely that every loan in our investment
portfolio will continue to perform without exception so we
provide general allowances based upon the overall volume of
loans, the loan types and the estimated collateral values.
Because there were very small changes in the size and the mix of
the loans held for investment portfolio between the three months
ended September 30, 2004 and 2003, the loan loss provisions
during those periods were relatively small.
Noninterest Income.
The following table sets forth information regarding our
noninterest income for the periods shown.
Noninterest income totaled $169,000 for the three
months ended September 30, 2004 compared to $288,000 for
the same period in 2003. The decrease in 2004 is due to lower
gains on sale of loans, partially reduced by higher bank service
fees collected and gains in cash surrender value in key man life
insurance. Our gain on sale income decreased $153,000 as result
of the general decline in mortgage loan refinance volumes in the
three months ended September 30, 2004 compared to refinance
volumes in the same period in 2003.
36
Noninterest Expense.
The following table sets forth information regarding our
noninterest expense for the periods shown.
Noninterest expense totaled $1.1 million for
the three months ended September 30, 2004, an increase of
$62,000 compared to the same period in 2003. This increase was
due primarily to a $143,000 increase in salaries and employee
benefits for additional operations staff, increased existing
staff wages and new management bonus plans, a $53,000 increase
in professional services which was due primarily to an increase
in audit, legal and professional fees. This was offset by a
$197,000 reduction in unrecoverable expenses associated with the
termination of a contract for advice and placement of a capital
funding.
Income Tax Expense.
Income tax expense was $442,000 for the three months ended
September 30, 2004 compared to $247,000 for the same period
in 2003. Our effective tax rates were 40.1% and 41.1% for the
three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003,
respectively.
37
Net Interest Income.
Net interest income totaled $6.5 million for the fiscal
year ended June 30, 2004, compared to $5.1 million for
the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. The following table
reflects net changes in interest income and interest expense
attributable to changes in volume and interest rates of
significant assets and liabilities:
Interest Income.
Interest income for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004
totaled $15.8 million, an increase of $2.3 million, or
17.0%, compared to $13.5 million in interest income for the
fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. Average interest-earning
assets for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 increased by
$79.1 million compared to the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2003 due primarily to an $81.7 million
increase in the average balance of the loan portfolio as a
result of our emphasis on building our multifamily loan
portfolio. We reduced our average balances in interest-earning
deposits in other financial institutions and investment
securities by $8.4 million during the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2004 compared to the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2003, as we redirected maturing time deposits into
higher yielding mortgage loans. Average interest-earning
balances associated with our stock of the FHLB increased by
$1.6 million during the fiscal year ended June 30,
2004 compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003
because our required minimum investment increased, as a result
of increased advances from the FHLB. The average yield earned on
our interest-earning assets declined to 4.9% for the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2004 from 5.6% for the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2003 due primarily to the lower yield on our loan
portfolio as market interest rates declined. The widespread
increase in prepayments and refinancing of mortgage loans during
the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2004 reduced the
amount of higher yielding older loans, which were replaced with
lower yielding loans, causing the average yield on the loan
portfolio to decline to 5.3% for the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2004 from 6.3% for the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2003. Thus, the average rate declined, reducing
interest income from what it otherwise would have been by
$2.7 million, resulting in a net increase in interest
income of $2.5 million. The average rate on all other
interest-earning assets declined in the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2004 due to the general decline in market interest
rates in the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2004.
Interest Expense.
Interest expense totaled $9.2 million for the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2004, an increase of $816,000 from
$8.4 million in interest expense during the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2003. Average interest-bearing liabilities
in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 increased
$77.4 million compared to the fiscal
38
Provision for loan
losses.
Provision for loan losses was
$255,000 and $285,000 for the fiscal years ended June 30,
2004 and 2003, respectively. We have not had any nonperforming
loans through June 30, 2004. Our history is limited, and we
expect over time to have some defaulted and nonperforming loans.
As there were no nonperforming loans for the fiscal years ended
June 30, 2004 and 2003, the provisions for loan losses
represent increases in general allowances which are determined
based upon the overall volume of loans, the loan types and the
estimated collateral values. Our loans held for investment
increased by net amounts of $109.3 million and
$78.7 million during the fiscal years ended June 30,
2004 and 2003, respectively. The provisions for loan losses were
approximately 23 basis points and 36 basis points on
the net increase in our loans held for investment for the fiscal
years ended June 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively. The
provision for loan losses for the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2004 declined by 13 basis points primarily
due to the addition of more multifamily loans with lower
loan-to-value ratios in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004
compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. Management
estimates that the lower average loan-to-value ratio should
result in a smaller percentage of impairment.
Noninterest income.
The following table sets forth information regarding our
noninterest income for the periods shown:
Noninterest income totaled $1.2 million for
the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, compared to
$1.3 million for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003.
The decrease is attributable to lower gains on sale, partially
reduced by higher prepayment penalty fee income and income from
banking services fees. Prepayment penalty fee income
39
Noninterest Expense.
The following table sets forth information regarding our
noninterest expense for the fiscal years ended June 30,
2004 and 2003:
Noninterest expense totaled $3.8 million for
the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, an increase of
$661,000 compared to $3.2 million for the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2003. This increase was due principally to a
$342,000 increase in salaries and employee benefits for
additional operations staff, increased existing staff wages and
new management bonus plans, and a $197,000 charge for
unrecoverable expenses associated with the termination of a
contract for advice regarding a capital funding.
Income Tax Expense.
Income tax expense was $1.5 million for the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2004, compared to $1.3 million for the
fiscal year ended June 30, 2003. Our effective tax rates
were 40.4% and 42.2% for the fiscal years ended June 30,
2004 and 2003, respectively. The lower effective tax rate for
the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004 included the benefit
primarily from nontaxable income from our investment in
bank-owned life insurance.
40
Net Interest Income.
Net interest income totaled $5.1 million for the fiscal
year ended June 30, 2003 as compared to $3.5 million
for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. The following
table reflects net changes in interest income and interest
expense attributable to changes in volume and interest rates of
significant assets and liabilities:
Interest Income.
Interest income totaled $13.5 million for the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2003, an increase of $1.9 million, or
16.4%, from $11.6 million during the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2002. Average interest-earning assets in the
fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 increased
$50.1 million compared to the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2002 due primarily to the $44.9 million
increase in the average balance of our loan portfolio. Our
average balances in interest-earning deposits in other financial
institutions and investment securities increased by
$10.0 million in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003
compared to the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. The
average interest-earning balance associated with our stock of
the FHLB increased $684,000 in the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2003 compared to the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2002 because our required minimum investment
increased due to increased advances from the FHLB. The average
yield earned on interest-earning assets declined to 5.6% for the
fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 from 6.1% for the fiscal
year ended June 30, 2002, due primarily to the decline in
interest rates generally during this period. The widespread
increase in prepayments and refinancings of mortgage loans
during the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003 and 2002
reduced the higher yielding loans which were replaced with lower
yielding loans, causing the average yield on the loan portfolio
to decline to 6.3% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003
from 6.8% for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. Thus,
the loan portfolio volume increase in the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2003 was partially offset by the decline in
average rate, thereby reducing the interest income by
$1.1 million, resulting in a net increase in interest
income of $1.9 million. The average rate on all other
interest-earning assets declined in the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2004 due to the general decline in market interest
rates in the fiscal years ended June 30, 2002 and 2003.
Interest Expense.
Interest expense for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003
totaled $8.4 million, an increase of $282,000 from
$8.1 million in interest expense during the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2002. Average interest-bearing liabilities
in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 increased
$44.2 million compared to the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2002 due to higher deposits in customer accounts
and additional advances from the
41
Provision for loan
losses.
Provision for loan losses was
$285,000 and $195,000 for the fiscal years ended June 30,
2003 and 2002, respectively. Since we did not have any
nonperforming loans during these periods, our loan loss
provisions were added to general loan loss reserves. Our loans
held for investment increased by net amounts of
$78.7 million and $27.6 million during the fiscal
years ended June 30, 2003 and 2002, respectively. The
provisions for loan losses were approximately 36 basis
points and 71 basis points on the net increase in our loans
held for investment for the fiscal years ended June 30,
2003 and 2002, respectively. The provision declined to
36 basis points in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003
because the prior fiscal year included a large shift away from
single family loans with lower estimated loss rates towards
multifamily loans with higher estimated loss rates. During the
fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, our mix of loans held for
investment moved from 9.2% to 75.2% in multifamily loans, while
during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 the mix moved a
smaller amount, from 75.2% to 78.0% in multifamily loans.
Noninterest income.
Noninterest income totaled $1.3 million for the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2003, compared to $297,000 for the fiscal
year ended June 30, 2002. The increase in the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2003 is attributable to greater prepayment
penalty fee income and increased gains on sale of loans.
Prepayment penalty income increased $332,000 due to our
increased investment in multifamily loans and declining mortgage
rates. Our gain on sale of loans increased $711,000 in the
fiscal year ended June 30, 2003, the first full year of
operation of our single family mortgage loan origination
website. Also, in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003,
declining interest rates encouraged high levels of mortgage
refinancing nationwide. Our single family mortgage loan
originations in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2003 were
primarily refinancings which were sold.
42
Noninterest expense.
The following table sets forth information regarding our
noninterest expense for the fiscal years ended June 30,
2003 and 2002:
Noninterest expense was $3.2 million and
$3.0 million for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2003
and 2002, respectively. The increase of $150,000 in noninterest
expense was due principally to a $238,000 increase in salaries
and employee benefits for additional operations staff and
reduced by a $254,000 decrease in other general and
administrative expenses. The decrease in other general and
administrative expenses is due to a $318,000 non-cash expense
incurred in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002 for a
two-year extension of previously issued warrants to acquire
736,750 shares of common stock.
Income Tax Benefit.
Income tax expense was $1.3 million for the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2003, compared to an income tax benefit of
$429,000 in the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002. During the
fiscal year ended June 30, 2002, we began to operate
profitably, making it likely that our deferred tax benefits
accumulated from operating losses incurred since inception could
be realized. The valuation allowance of $823,000 at
June 30, 2001 associated with the tax benefit of operating
loss carryforwards was reversed in the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2002, reducing our effective tax rate. The
reversal of the valuation allowance was large enough to create a
net tax benefit for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2002.
Liquidity and Capital Resources
Liquidity.
Our
sources of liquidity include deposits, borrowings, payments and
maturities of outstanding loans, sales of loans, maturities or
gains on sales of investment securities and other short term
investments. While scheduled loan payments and maturing
investment securities and short term investments are relatively
predictable sources of funds, deposit flows and loan prepayments
are greatly influenced by general interest rates, economic
conditions and competition. We invest excess funds in overnight
deposits and other short term interest-earning assets. We use
cash generated through retail deposits, our largest funding
source, to offset the cash utilized in lending and investing
activities. Our short term interest-earning investment
securities are also used to provide liquidity for lending and
other operational requirements. As an additional source of
funds, we have three credit agreements. Bank of Internet USA can
borrow up to 35% of its total assets from the FHLB. Borrowings
are collateralized by the pledge of certain mortgage loans and
investment securities to the FHLB. Based on the loans and
securities pledged at September 30, 2004, we had total
borrowing capacity of approximately $158.7 million, of
which $121.9 million was outstanding and $36.8 million
was available. At September 30, 2004, we also had a
$4.5 million unsecured fed funds purchase line with a major
bank under which no borrowings were outstanding.
On October 24, 2003, we entered into a
$5.0 million loan facility with a commercial bank
consisting of a one-year revolving line of credit plus a fully
amortizing term loan of up to nine years. Interest is payable
quarterly under the credit line at prime plus 1% per annum.
Principal is payable in 36 equal quarterly installments starting
on January 24, 2005. We may prepay all or a portion of the
principal at anytime without a prepayment penalty. At
November 30, 2004, the note payable balance was
$5.0 million and the interest rate
43
The loan facility is secured by our banks
common stock held by BofI Holding, Inc. Under the terms of the
loan facility, we are bound by a number of significant covenants
that restrict our ability, out of the ordinary course of
business, to dispose of assets, to incur additional debt or
guarantees, to invest in or acquire any interest in another
enterprise and to suffer a change in ownership of 51% or more of
our common stock. The loan facility also requires us to maintain
a debt coverage ratio of 1.50 as calculated by the lender. At
November 30, 2004, management believes we were in
compliance with all such covenants and restrictions and does not
anticipate that such covenants and restrictions will limit our
operations.
On December 13, 2004, we entered into an
agreement to form a trust and to establish $5.0 million of
trust preferred securities in a transaction expected to close on
December 16, 2004. When consummated, the net proceeds from
the offering will be used to purchase a like amount of junior
subordinated debentures of our company. The debentures will be
the sole assets of the trust. The trust preferred securities are
expected to be mandatorily redeemable upon maturity, or upon
earlier redemption as provided in the indenture. We will have
the right to redeem the debentures in whole (but not in part) on
or after specific dates, at a redemption price specified in the
indenture plus any accrued but unpaid interest through the
redemption date. When consummated, we expect the principal
balance of the debentures to be approximately $5.2 million,
with a stated maturity of 30 years. Interest will accrue at
the rate of three-month LIBOR plus 2.4%, with interest to be
distributed quarterly starting in February 2005.
Contractual
Obligations.
At September 30,
2004, we had $10.8 million in loan commitments outstanding.
Time deposits due within one year of September 30, 2004
totaled $101.0 million. We believe the large percentage of
time deposits that mature within one year reflects
customers hesitancy to invest their funds long term when
they expect interest rates to rise. If these maturing deposits
do not remain with us, we may be required to seek other sources
of funds, including other time deposits and borrowings.
Depending on market conditions, we may be required to pay higher
rates on deposits and borrowings than we currently pay on time
deposits maturing with one year. We believe, however, based on
past experience, that a significant portion of our time deposits
will remain with us. We believe we have the ability to attract
and retain deposits by adjusting interest rates offered.
The following table presents certain of our
contractual obligations as of June 30, 2004.
Capital
Requirements.
Bank of Internet USA is
subject to various regulatory capital requirements set by the
federal banking agencies. Failure by our bank to meet minimum
capital requirements could result in certain mandatory and
discretionary actions by regulators that could have a material
adverse effect on our consolidated financial statements. Under
capital adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for
prompt corrective action, our bank must meet specific capital
guidelines that involve quantitative measures of our banks
assets, liabilities and certain off-balance-sheet items as
calculated under regulatory accounting practices. Our
banks capital amounts and classifications are also subject
to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components,
risk weightings and other factors.
Quantitative measures established by regulation
require our bank to maintain certain minimum capital amounts and
ratios. The OTS requires our bank to maintain minimum ratios of
tangible capital to tangible
44
At September 30, 2004, our bank was
well capitalized under the regulatory framework for
prompt corrective action. To be well capitalized,
our bank must maintain minimum leverage, tier 1 risk-based and
total risk-based capital ratios of at least 5.0%, 6.0% and
10.0%, respectively. No conditions or events have occurred since
that date that management believes would change the banks
capital levels. To maintain its status as a well
capitalized financial institution under applicable
regulations and to support additional growth, we anticipate the
need for additional capital, which includes raising funds in
this offering. From time to time after the offering, we may need
to raise additional capital to support our banks further
growth and to maintain its well-capitalized status.
Bank of Internet capital amounts, ratios and
requirements at September 30, 2004 were as follows:
Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About
Market Risk
Market risk is defined as the sensitivity of
income and capital to changes in interest rates, foreign
currency exchange rates, commodity prices and other relevant
market rates or prices. The primary market risk to which we are
exposed is interest rate risk. Changes in interest rates can
have a variety of effects on our business. In particular,
changes in interest rates affect out net interest income, net
interest margin, net income, the value of our securities
portfolio, the volume of loans originated, and the amount of
gain or loss on the sale of our loans.
We are exposed to different types of interest
rate risk. These risks include lag, repricing, basis, prepayment
and lifetime cap risk, each of which is described in further
detail below:
Lag/ Repricing Risk.
Lag risk results from the inherent timing difference between the
repricing of our adjustable rate assets and our liabilities.
Repricing risk is caused by the mismatch of repricing methods
between interest-earning assets and interest-bearing
liabilities. Lag/repricing risk can produce short term
volatility in our net interest income during periods of interest
rate movements even though the effect of this lag generally
balances out over time. One example of lag risk is the repricing
of assets indexed to the monthly treasury average, or the MTA.
The MTA index is based on a moving average of rates outstanding
during the previous 12 months. A sharp movement in interest
rates in a month will not be fully reflected in the index for
12 months resulting in a lag in the repricing of our loans
and securities based on this index. We expect more of our
interest-bearing liabilities will mature or reprice within one
year than will our interest-earning assets, resulting in a one
year negative interest rate sensitivity gap (the difference
between our interest rate sensitive assets maturing or repricing
within one year and our interest rate sensitive liabilities
maturing or repricing within one year, expressed as a percentage
of total interest-earning assets). In a rising interest rate
45
Basis Risk.
Basis
risk occurs when assets and liabilities have similar repricing
timing but repricing is based on different market interest rate
indices. Our adjustable rate loans that reprice are directly
tied to indices based upon U.S. Treasury rates, LIBOR,
Eleventh District Cost of Funds and the prime rate. Our deposit
rates are not directly tied to these same indices. Therefore, if
deposit interest rates rise faster than the adjustable rate loan
indices and there are no other changes in our asset/liability
mix, our net interest income will likely decline due to basis
risk.
Prepayment Risk.
Prepayment risk results from the right of customers to pay their
loans prior to maturity. Generally, loan prepayments increase in
falling interest rate environments and decrease in rising
interest rate environments. In addition, prepayment risk results
from the right of customers to withdraw their time deposits
before maturity. Generally, early withdrawals of time deposits
increase during rising interest rate environments and decrease
in falling interest rate environments. When estimating the
future performance of our assets and liabilities, we make
assumptions as to when and how much of our loans and deposits
will be prepaid. If the assumptions prove to be incorrect, the
asset or liability may perform different from expected. In the
last three fiscal years, the mortgage industry and our bank have
experienced high rates of loan prepayments due to historically
low interest rates. Market rates began rising in the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2004 and, if they continue, mortgage loan
prepayments are expected to decrease. In addition, if that
occurs, we may experience increased rates of customer early
withdrawals of their time deposits.
Lifetime Cap Risk.
Our adjustable rate loans have lifetime interest rate caps. In
periods of rising interest rates, it is possible for the fully
indexed interest rate (index rate plus the margin) to exceed the
lifetime interest rate cap. This feature prevents the loan from
repricing to a level that exceeds the caps specified
interest rate, thus adversely affecting net interest income in
periods of relatively high interest rates. On a weighted average
basis, our adjustable rate loans at September 30, 2004 had
lifetime rate caps that were 500 basis points or more
greater than the effective rate at September 30, 2004. If
market rates rise by more than the interest rate cap, we will
not be able to increase these customers loan rates above
the interest rate cap.
The principal objective of our asset/liability
management is to manage the sensitivity of net income to
changing interest rates. Asset/liability management is governed
by policies reviewed and approved annually by our board of
directors. Our board of directors has delegated the
responsibility to oversee the administration of these policies
to the asset/liability committee, or ALCO. ALCOs members
are board members Theodore C. Allrich and Robert Eprile, our
President and Chief Executive Officer Gary Lewis Evans and our
Chief Financial Officer Andrew J. Micheletti. ALCO meets
regularly to consider investment and financing alternatives with
particular emphasis on duration and interest rate risk. The
interest rate risk strategy currently deployed by ALCO is to use
natural balance sheet hedging (as opposed to
derivative hedging) or to avoid holding loans which ALCO views
as higher risk. Specifically, we attempt to match the effective
duration of our assets with our borrowings. To reduce the
repricing risk associated with holding certain adjustable loans,
which are fixed for the first three or five years, we have
matched estimated maturities by obtaining long-term three year
or five year advances from the FHLB. Other examples of ALCO
policies designed to reduce our interest rate risk include
limiting the premiums paid to purchase mortgage loans or
mortgage-backed securities to 3% or less of mortgage principal.
This policy addresses mortgage prepayment risk by capping the
yield loss from an unexpected high level of mortgage loan
prepayments. Once a quarter, ALCO members report to our board of
directors the status of our interest rate risk profile.
46
We measure interest rate sensitivity as the
difference between amounts of interest-earning assets and
interest-bearing liabilities that mature within a given period
of time. The difference, or the interest rate sensitivity gap,
provides an indication of the extent to which an
institutions interest rate spread will be affected by
changes in interest rates. A gap is considered positive when the
amount of interest rate sensitive assets exceeds the amount of
interest rate sensitive liabilities and negative when the amount
of interest rate sensitive liabilities exceeds the amount of
interest rate sensitive assets. In a rising interest rate
environment, an institution with a positive gap would be in a
better position than an institution with a negative gap to
invest in higher yielding assets or to have its asset yields
adjusted upward, which would result in the yield on its assets
to increase at a faster pace than the cost of its
interest-bearing liabilities. During a period of falling
interest rates, however, an institution with a positive gap
would tend to have its assets mature at a faster rate than one
with a negative gap, which would tend to reduce the growth in
its net interest income. The following table sets forth the
interest rate sensitivity of our assets and liabilities at
September 30, 2004:
47
Although gap analysis is a useful
measurement device available to management in determining the
existence of interest rate exposure, its static focus as of a
particular date makes it necessary to utilize other techniques
in measuring exposure to changes in interest rates. For example,
gap analysis is limited in its ability to predict trends in
future earnings and makes no assumptions about changes in
prepayment tendencies, deposit or loan maturity preferences or
repricing time lags that may occur in response to a change in
the interest rate environment.
We have not entered into any derivative financial
instruments such as futures, forwards, swaps and options. Also,
we have no market risk-sensitive instruments held for trading
purposes. Our exposure to market risk is reviewed on a regular
basis by management.
We attempt to measure the effect market interest
rate changes will have on the net present value of assets and
liabilities, which is defined as market value of equity. At
June 30, 2004 (the most recent period for which data is
available), we analyzed the market value of equity sensitivity
to an immediate parallel and sustained shift in interest rates
derived from the current treasury and LIBOR yield curves. For
rising interest rate scenarios, the base market interest rate
forecast was increased by 100 and 200 basis points. For the
falling interest rate scenarios, we used a 100 basis point
decrease due to limitations inherent in the current rate
environment. The following table indicates the sensitivity of
market value of equity to the interest rate movement described
above at June 30, 2004:
The board of directors of our bank establishes
limits on the amount of interest rate risk we may assume, as
estimated by the net present value model. At June 30, 2004,
the boards established limit was 8.0%, meaning that the
net present value after a theoretical instantaneous increase or
decrease in interest rates must be greater than 8.0%. At
June 30, 2004, the net present value for a 200 basis
point and 100 basis point increase in interest rates exceed
the board requirement by 116 basis points and
154 basis points, respectively.
The computation of the prospective effects of
hypothetical interest rate changes is based on numerous
assumptions, including relative levels of interest rates, asset
prepayments, runoffs in deposits and changes in repricing levels
of deposits to general market rates, and should not be relied
upon as indicative of actual results. Furthermore, these
computations do not take into account any actions that we may
undertake in response to future changes in interest rates.
Recent Accounting Pronouncements
In March 2004, SEC Staff Accounting Bulletin, or
SAB, No. 105 was issued, which provides guidance regarding
loan commitments that are accounted for as derivative
instruments under Financial Accounting Standards Board, or the
FASB, No. 133 (as amended),
Accounting for Derivative
Instruments and Hedging Activities
. In this Bulletin, the
SEC ruled that the amount of the expected servicing rights
should not be included when determining the fair value of
derivative interest rate lock commitments. This guidance must be
applied to rate locks initiated after March 31, 2004. The
adoption of SAB No. 105 did not have a material effect on
our consolidated financial statements.
In December 2003, the FASB issued Interpretation
No. 46R, or FIN 46R, which revised the January 2003,
FASB issued Interpretation No. 46, or FIN 46,
Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities
. FIN 46R
is a revision to the original FIN 46 that addresses the
consolidation of certain variable interest entities
(
e.g.
, nonqualified special purpose entities). The
revision clarifies how variable interest entities should be
48
In December 2003, the Accounting Standards
Executive Committee of the AICPA issued Statement of Position
No. 03-3, or SOP 03-3,
Accounting for Certain Loans
or Debt Securities Acquired in a Transfer
. SOP 03-3
addresses the accounting for differences between contractual
cash flows and the cash flows expected to be collected from
purchased loans or debt securities if those differences are
attributable, in part, to credit quality. SOP 03-3 requires
purchased loans and debt securities to be recorded initially at
fair value based on the present value of the cash flows expected
to be collected with no carryover of any valuation allowance
previously recognized by the seller. Interest income should be
recognized based on the effective yield from the cash flows
expected to be collected. To the extent that the purchased loans
or debt securities experience subsequent deterioration in credit
quality, a valuation allowance would be established for any
additional cash flows that are not expected to be received.
However, if more cash flows subsequently are expected to be
received than originally estimated, the effective yield would be
adjusted on a prospective basis. SOP 03-3 will be effective
for loans and debt securities acquired after December 31,
2004. Management does not expect the adoption of this statement
to have a material effect on our consolidated financial
statements.
In May 2003, the FASB issued Statement of
Financial Accounting Standards No. 150,
Accounting for
Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of both
Liabilities and Equity
. This Statement establishes standards
for how an issuer classifies and measures certain financial
instruments with characteristics of both liabilities and equity.
It requires that an issuer classify a financial instrument that
is within its scope as a liability (or an asset in some
circumstances). Many of these instruments were previously
classified as equity. This Statement is effective for financial
instruments entered into or modified after May 31, 2003,
and otherwise is effective for public companies at the beginning
of the first interim period beginning after June 15, 2003.
The adoption of this standard did not have a material effect on
our consolidated financial statements.
49
BUSINESS
General
We are the holding company for Bank of Internet
USA, a consumer-focused, nationwide savings bank operating
primarily over the Internet. Since the inception of our bank in
2000, we have designed and implemented an automated
Internet-based banking platform and electronic workflow process
that affords us low operating expenses and allows us to pass
these savings along to our customers in the form of more
attractive interest rates and fees on deposits and loans. This
approach to banking is the foundation of our business model,
allowing us to leverage technology and handle routine banking
functions electronically.
We believe that our business model is highly
scalable, allowing us to expand into new regions and products
and rapidly increase deposits and, to a lesser extent, loans,
without significant delays or significant increased costs, and
with limited additional fixed assets and personnel. We operate
in all 50 states without the need for branches or
regulatory approval to enter new markets. Therefore, we can be
selective in entering new geographic markets and targeting
demographic groups, such as seniors or students.
We operate our Internet-based bank from a single
location in San Diego, California. At September 30,
2004, we had total assets of $453.9 million, net loans held
for investment of $355.1 million and total deposits of
$295.7 million. Our deposits consist primarily of
interest-bearing checking and savings accounts and time
deposits. Our loans are primarily first mortgages secured by
multifamily (five or more units) and single family (one to four
units) real property. To a lesser extent, we also make
commercial real estate and consumer loans.
Since inception, we have achieved strong growth
while controlling our operating costs. From the fiscal year
ended June 30, 2002 to the fiscal year ended June 30,
2004, we have:
Business Strategy
Our business strategy is to lower the cost of
delivering banking products and services by leveraging
technology, while continuing to grow our assets and deposits to
achieve increased economies of scale. Our strategy includes a
number of key elements:
50
Lending and Investment Activities
General.
We
originate single family mortgage loans on a nationwide basis,
and currently originate multifamily loans primarily in
California, Arizona, Texas and Washington. We currently sell
substantially all of the single family loans that we originate
and retain all of our multifamily loan originations. In
addition, we purchase single family and multifamily mortgage
loans from other lenders to hold in our portfolio. All
originations and purchases are sourced, underwritten, processed,
controlled and tracked primarily through our customized websites
and software. We believe that, due to our automated systems, our
lending business is highly scalable, allowing us to handle
increasing volumes of loans and enter into new geographic
lending markets with only a small increase in personnel, in
accordance with our strategy of leveraging technology to lower
our operating expenses.
Loan Products.
Our
loans consist of first mortgage loans secured by single family
and multifamily properties and, to a lesser extent, commercial
properties. We also provide a limited amount of home equity
financing and unsecured consumer loans. Further details
regarding our loan programs are discussed below:
51
Loan Portfolio
Composition.
The following table sets
forth the composition of our loan portfolio in amounts and
percentages by type of loan at September 30, 2004 and at
each fiscal year-end since inception of our operations:
The following table sets forth the amount of
loans maturing in our total loans held for investment at
September 30, 2004 based on the contractual terms to
maturity:
52
Our loans are secured by properties primarily
located in the western United States. The following table shows
the largest states and regions ranked by location of these
properties at September 30, 2004:
Percent of Loan Principal Secured by Real
Estate Located in State
Another measure of credit risk is the ratio of
the loan amount to the value of the property securing the loan
(called loan-to-value ratio or LTV). The following table shows
the LTVs of our loan portfolio on weighted average and median
basis at September 30, 2004.
53
Lending Activities.
The following table summarizes the volumes of real estate loans
originated, purchased and sold for the three months ended
September 30, 2004 and for each fiscal year since inception
of our operations:
54
The following table summarizes the amount funded,
the number and the size of real estate loans originated and
purchased for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and
for each fiscal year since inception of our operations:
Loan Marketing.
We
market our lending products through a variety of channels
depending on the product. We market single family mortgage loans
in all 50 states to Internet comparison shoppers through
our purchase of advertising on search engines, such as Google
and Yahoo, and popular product comparison sites, such as
Bankrate.com. We market multifamily loans primarily in four
states through Internet search engines and through traditional
origination techniques, such as direct mail marketing, personal
sales efforts and limited media advertising.
Loan Originations.
We originate loans through three different origination channels:
online retail; online wholesale; and direct.
55
Loan Purchases.
We
purchase selected single family and multifamily loans from other
lenders, allowing us to utilize excess cash when direct
originations are not available and diversify our loan portfolio
geographically. We currently purchase loans primarily from three
major banks or mortgage companies. We evaluate each purchased
loan as an independent credit decision and apply the same
lending policies as our originated loans. Each purchased loan is
internally underwritten pursuant to our credit policies for the
applicable loan type, and subject to the same loan credit
quality scrutiny and approval levels as originated loans. As
part of the underwriting and due diligence process for purchased
multifamily loans, additional techniques are employed, including
a full credit file review for each loan, on-site property
inspection, acquisition of independent third party reports as
needed, and compliance/documentation quality control audits. At
September 30, 2004, approximately $160.7 million, or
45.4%, of our loan portfolio was acquired from other lenders who
are servicing the loans on our behalf, 87.9% of which are
multifamily loans and 12.1% are single family loans.
56
Loan Servicing.
We
typically retain servicing rights for all multifamily loans that
we originate. We typically do not acquire servicing rights on
purchased single family and multifamily loans, and we typically
release servicing rights to the purchaser when we sell single
family loans that we originate. At September 30, 2004, we
serviced 295 mortgage loans with two full time employees.
Loan Underwriting Process and
Criteria.
We individually underwrite
all multifamily and commercial loans that we originate, and all
loans that we purchase. We outsource to a third-party processor
the underwriting of all single family loans that we originate,
based on underwriting criteria that we establish and provide to
the processor. Our loan underwriting policies and procedures are
written and adopted by our board of directors and our loan
committee, consisting of President and Chief Executive Officer
Gary Lewis Evans and board members Thomas Pancheri and Robert
Eprile. Each loan, regardless of how it is originated, must meet
underwriting criteria set forth in our lending policies and the
requirements of applicable lending regulations of the OTS.
Our staff of loan underwriters operates
independently of commissioned loan officers. Utilizing our
required format, policies and procedures, the underwriters
analyze the credit request and prepare credit memoranda and
financial analyses for submission to the Chief Credit Officer
and loan committee. Loans under $1.0 million require the
approval of both the Chief Credit Officer and one loan committee
member, while loans over $1.0 million require the approval
of the Chief Credit Officer and two loan committee members.
We have designed our loan application and review
process so that much of the information that is required to
underwrite and evaluate a loan is created electronically during
the loan application process. Therefore we can automate many of
the mechanical procedures involved in preparing underwriting
reports and reduce the need for human interaction, other than in
the actual credit decision process. We believe that our systems
will allow us to handle increasing volumes of loans with only a
small increase in personnel, in accordance with our strategy of
leveraging technology to lower our operating expenses.
We apply different underwriting criteria
depending on the type of loan. Each single family loan is
underwritten by our third-party processor based on standard
FNMA/ FHLMC guidelines, and we may from time to time implement
additional underwriting guidelines determined by the expected
purchaser of the loan. For example, a purchaser may specify
single family loans that meet additional underwriting criteria,
such as loan size and type of property.
We perform underwriting directly on all
multifamily and commercial loans that we originate and purchase.
We rely primarily on the cash flow from the underlying property
as the expected source of repayment, but we also endeavor to
obtain personal guarantees from all borrowers or substantial
principals of the borrower. In evaluating multifamily and
commercial loans, we review the value and condition of the
underlying property, as well as the financial condition, credit
history and qualifications of the borrower. In evaluating the
borrowers qualifications, we consider primarily the
borrowers other financial resources, experience in owning
or managing similar properties and payment history with us or
other financial institutions. In evaluating the underlying
property, we consider primarily the net operating income of the
property before debt service and depreciation, the ratio of net
operating income to debt service and the ratio of the loan
amount to the appraised value. We typically require a debt
service coverage ratio, after operating expense adjustments, of
at least 1.25 times for multifamily and 1.50 times for
commercial loans, based on the actual operating history of the
property over the prior two calendar years and assuming an
interest rate equal to the greater of the contractual start rate
or the fully indexed margin. We also prepare a pro forma debt
service coverage ratio, which must also meet or exceed a 1.25 or
1.50 multiple, based on assumptions including current macro,
regional and local economic trends, recent financial statements
and current rent rolls. In evaluating multifamily and commercial
properties securing loans we originate, we obtain third-party
reports, including title and environmental risk reports,
third-party appraisals and review appraisals. One of our
employee underwriters typically visits each multifamily or
commercial property before loan approval and may also visit
related properties owned by the borrower or its affiliates or
comparable properties in the area, to further our comfort with
the loan.
57
Lending Limits.
As a
savings association, we generally are subject to the same
lending limit rules applicable to national banks. With limited
exceptions, the maximum amount that we may lend to any borrower,
including related entities of the borrower, at one time may not
exceed 15% of our unimpaired capital and surplus, plus an
additional 10% of unimpaired capital and surplus for loans fully
secured by readily marketable collateral. We are additionally
authorized to make loans to one borrower, by order of the
Director of the OTS, in an amount not to exceed the lesser of
$30.0 million or 30% of our unimpaired capital and surplus
for the purpose of developing residential housing, if certain
specified conditions are met. See Regulation
Regulation of Bank of Internet USA.
At September 30, 2004, Bank of
Internets loans-to-one-borrower limit was
$5.2 million, based upon the 15% of unimpaired capital and
surplus measurement. At September 30, 2004, no single loan
was larger than $2.9 million and our largest single lending
relationship had an outstanding balance of $4.3 million. We
expect that our lending limit will increase to approximately
$ million
immediately following this offering, assuming that
$ million
in net proceeds are raised in the offering,
$ million
are contributed to our bank, based on the assumptions set forth
below the table in Capitalization.
Asset Quality and Credit
Risk.
For every quarter from inception
to June 30, 2004, we had no nonperforming assets or
troubled debt restructurings. Since that time, one loan with a
principal balance of approximately $152,000 at June 30,
2004 defaulted, but the loan was repaid in full. Since our
history is limited, we expect in the future to have additional
loans that default or become nonperforming. Nonperforming assets
are defined as nonperforming loans and real estate acquired by
foreclosure or deed-in-lieu thereof. Nonperforming loans are
defined as nonaccrual loans and loans 90 days or more
overdue but still accruing interest to the extent applicable.
Troubled debt restructurings are defined as loans that we have
agreed to modify by accepting below market terms either by
granting interest rate concessions or by deferring principal or
interest payments. Our policy in the event of nonperforming
assets is to place such assets on nonaccrual status when, in the
judgment of management, the probability of collection of
interest is deemed to be insufficient to warrant further
accrual. When a loan is placed on nonaccrual status, previously
accrued but unpaid interest will be deducted from interest
income. Our policy is to not accrue interest on loans past due
90 days or more.
Investment
Portfolio.
In addition to loans, we
invest available funds in investment grade fixed income
securities, consisting mostly of federal agency securities. We
also invest available funds in term deposits of other
FDIC-insured financial institutions. Our investment policy, as
established by our board of directors, is designed primarily to
maintain liquidity and generate a favorable return on investment
without incurring undue interest rate risk, credit risk or
portfolio asset concentration. Our investment policy is
currently implemented by an investment committee of the board of
directors, comprised of Messrs. Evans, Allrich and Eprile,
within overall parameters set by our board of directors. Under
our investment policy, we are currently authorized to invest in
obligations issued or fully guaranteed by the United States
government, specific federal agency obligations, specific time
deposits, negotiable certificates of deposit issued by
commercial banks and other insured financial institutions,
investment grade corporate debt securities and other specified
investments.
58
The following table sets forth changes in our
investment portfolio for the three months ended
September 30, 2004 and for each fiscal year since 2002:
The following table sets forth, at
September 30, 2004, the dollar amount of our investment
portfolio by type, based on the contractual terms to maturity
and the weighted average yield for each range of maturities:
Allowance for Loan
Losses.
We maintain an allowance for
loan losses in an amount that we believe is sufficient to
provide adequate protection against probable losses in our loan
portfolio. We evaluate quarterly the adequacy of the allowance
based upon reviews of individual loans, recent loss experience,
current economic conditions, risk characteristics of the various
categories of loans and other pertinent factors. The evaluation
is inherently subjective, as it requires estimates that are
susceptible to significant revision as more information becomes
available. The allowance is increased by the provision for loan
losses, which is charged
59
Under our allowance for loan loss policy,
impairment calculations are determined based on loan level data
(specific reserves) and general portfolio data (general
reserves). Specific loans are evaluated for impairment and are
to be classified in accordance with OTS regulation when they are
90 days or more delinquent, nonperforming or in
foreclosure. Under our allowance for loan loss policy, a loan is
considered impaired when, based on current information and
events, it is probable that we will be unable to collect the
scheduled payments of principal or interest when due according
to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Factors that we
consider in determining impairment include payment status,
collateral value and the probability of collecting scheduled
principal and interest payments when due. Loans that experience
insignificant payment delays and payment shortfalls generally
are not classified as impaired. Impairment is measured on a loan
by loan basis by either the present value of expected future
cash flows discounted at the loans effective interest rate
or the fair value of the collateral if repayment of the loan is
expected from the sale of collateral.
Under our policies, specific reserves are to be
calculated when an internal asset review of a loan identifies a
significant adverse change in the financial position of the
borrower or the value of the collateral. We calculate our
general loan loss reserves by grouping each loan by collateral
type (
e.g.
, single family, multifamily) and by grouping
the loan-to-value ratios of each loan within the collateral
type. An estimated impairment rate for each loan-to-value group
within each type of loan is multiplied by the total principal
amount in the group to calculate the required general reserve
attributable to that group. Our belief is that absent any other
evidence of impairment (
e.g.
, delinquent payments), the
greater the loan-to-value ratio, the greater the risk the loan
will be impaired. We have constructed a calculation methodology
that provides a larger loss allowance for loans with greater
loan-to-value ratios, measured at the time the loan was funded.
The internal asset review committee of our board of directors
reviews and approves the banks calculation methodology.
For every quarter from inception to June 30,
2004, we had no loan defaults, foreclosures, nonperforming loans
or specific loan loss allowances. Since that time, one loan with
a principal balance of approximately $152,000 at June 30,
2004 defaulted, but the loan was repaid in full. Since our
history is limited, we expect in the future to have additional
loans that default or become nonperforming. We have provided
general loan loss allowances as an estimate of the impairment
inherent in our portfolio.
60
The following table sets forth the changes in our
allowance for loan losses, by loan type, from inception through
September 30, 2004. We have not recorded any specific loan
loss reserves or any loan charge-offs or recoveries in the
period from inception through September 30, 2004:
Deposit Products and Services
Deposit Products.
We
offer a full line of deposit products over the Internet to
customers in all 50 states. Our deposit products consist of
demand deposits (interest bearing and non-interest bearing),
savings accounts and time deposits Our customers access their
funds through ATMs, debit cards, Automated Clearing House funds
(electronic transfers) and checks. We also offer the following
additional services in connection with our deposit accounts:
61
Deposit Marketing.
We currently market to deposit customers through targeted,
online marketing in all 50 states by purchasing key
word advertising on Internet search engines, such as
Google, and placement on product comparison sites, such as
Bankrate.com. We target deposit customers based on demographics,
such as age, income, geographic location and other criteria. For
example, we recently opened our Senior Banking
Center website to target seniors who tend to maintain
relatively high balances but are also rate sensitive. This
account offers greater interest rates and higher amounts of free
bill paying, but lower amounts of ATM reimbursement. We also
offer a Boomers account targeting baby-boomers, and
are developing Banco de Internet, a redesigned
version of our website to focus on Spanish speaking
U.S. customers. We also plan to create in the future
strategic alliances with financial and similar websites to
target deposit-taking products to their customers.
As part of our deposit marketing strategies, we
actively manage deposit interest rates offered on our websites
and displayed in our advertisements. Senior management is
directly involved in executing overall growth and interest rate
guidance established by ALCO. Within these parameters,
management and staff survey our competitors interest rates
and evaluate consumer demand for various products and our
existing deposit mix. They then establish our marketing
campaigns accordingly and monitor and adjust our marketing
campaigns on an ongoing basis. Within minutes our management and
staff can react to changes in deposit inflows and external
events by altering interest rates reflected on our websites and
in our advertising.
During our fiscal year ended June 30, 2004,
we opened 6,408 new deposit accounts, resulting in approximately
$136.0 million in new deposits, and spent approximately
$29,000 in external advertising costs for deposits.
Deposit Composition.
The following table sets forth the dollar amount of deposits by
type and weighted average interest rates at September 30,
2004 and at each of June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002:
62
The following table shows the maturity dates of
our certificates of deposit at September 30, 2004 and at
each of June 30, 2004 and 2003:
The following table shows maturities of our time
deposits having principal amounts of $100,000 or more at
September 30, 2004:
Borrowings
In addition to deposits, we have historically
funded our asset growth through advances from the FHLB. Our bank
can borrow up to 35.0% of its total assets from the FHLB, and
borrowings are collateralized by mortgage loans and
mortgage-backed securities pledged to the FHLB. Based on loans
and securities pledged at September 30, 2004, we had a
total borrowing capacity of approximately $158.7 million,
of which $121.9 million was outstanding and
$36.8 million was available. At September 30, 2004, we
also had a $4.5 million unsecured Fed Funds purchase line
of credit with a major bank, under which no borrowings were
outstanding.
On October 24, 2003, we entered into a
$5.0 million loan facility with a commercial bank
consisting of a one-year revolving line of credit plus a fully
amortizing term loan of up to nine years. Interest is payable
quarterly under this credit line at prime plus 1% per
annum. Principal is payable in 36 equal quarterly installments
starting on January 24, 2005. We may prepay all or a
portion of the principal at anytime without a prepayment
penalty. At November 30, 2004, the note payable balance was
$5.0 million and the interest rate was 6.0% per annum. We
intend to use a portion of the net proceeds from the offering to
prepay in full the entire amount outstanding under the note
payable. See Use of Proceeds.
The loan facility is secured by our banks
common stock held by BofI Holding, Inc. Under the terms of the
loan facility, we are bound by a number of significant covenants
that restrict our ability, out of the ordinary course of
business, to dispose of assets, to incur additional debt or
guarantees, to invest in or acquire any interest in another
enterprise and to suffer a change in ownership of 51% or more of
our common stock. The loan facility also requires us to maintain
a debt coverage ratio of 1.50 as calculated by the lender. We
were in compliance with all such covenants and restrictions at
November 30, 2004, and do not anticipate that such
covenants and restrictions will limit our operations.
63
The table below sets forth the amount of our
borrowings, the maximum amount of borrowings in each category
during any month-end during each reported period, the
approximate average amounts outstanding during each reported
period and the approximate weighted average interest rate
thereon at or for the three months ended September 30,
2004 and 2003 and at or for the fiscal years ended June 30,
2004, 2003 and 2002:
Technology
We have implemented customized software and
hardware systems to provide products and services to our
customers. Most of our key customer interfaces were designed by
us specifically to address the needs of an Internet-only bank
and its customers. Our website and CRM technology drive our
customer self-service model, reducing the need for human
interaction while increasing our overall operating efficiencies.
Our CRM software enables us to collect customer data over our
websites, which is automatically uploaded into our customer
databases. The databases drive our workflow processes by
automatically linking to third-party processors and storing all
customer contract and correspondence data, including emails,
hard copy images and telephone notes. With customer information
readily accessible through our CRM software, our service
personnel can respond to customers rapidly. We intend to
continue to improve our systems and implement new systems, with
the goal of providing for increased transaction capacity without
materially increasing personnel costs.
The following summarizes our current technology
resources:
Core Banking
Systems.
We use a major banking
industry outsourcing company for substantially all our core
banking systems. This company is responsible for all our basic
core processing applications, including
64
Internet and CRM
Systems.
We use our own customized
software for our website interface with loan and deposit
customers, including collection and initial processing of new
customer information. We have also created customized software
to manage workflow and fraud control and provide automated
interfaces to our outsourced service providers. We directly host
our primary web servers, which are located in San Diego,
California, and fully control and manage the content of our
websites with a staff of technology personnel. Web servers used
by our customers to access real time account data are located in
California and Kansas, with a backup location in Texas.
Systems
Architecture.
Our Internet and CRM
platforms have been developed using Microsoft software and
Intel-based hardware. Our outsourced core processing system uses
IBM hardware and software. We use a variety of specialized
companies to provide hardware and software for firewalls,
network routers, intrusion detection, load balancing, data
storage and data backup. To aid in disaster recovery, customer
access to our websites is supported by a fully redundant network
and our servers are mirrored so that most hardware
failures or software bugs should cause no more than a few
minutes of service outage. Mirroring means that our
server is backed up continuously so that all data is stored in
two physical locations.
Security
Because we operate almost exclusively through
electronic means, we believe that we must be vigilant in
detecting and preventing fraudulent transactions. We have
implemented stringent computer security and internal control
procedures to reduce our susceptibility to identity
theft, hackers, theft and other types of
fraud. We have implemented an automated approach to detecting
identity theft that we believe is highly effective, and we have
integrated our fraud detection processes into our CRM
technology. For example, when opening new deposit accounts, our
CRM programs automatically collect a customers personal
and computer identification from our websites, send the data to
internal and third-party programs which analyze the data for
potential fraud, and quickly provide operating personnel with a
summary report for final assessment and decision making during
the account-opening process.
We continually evaluate the systems, services and
software used in our operations to ensure that they meet high
standards of security. The following are among the security
measures that are currently in place:
65
Competition
The market for banking and financial services is
intensely competitive, and we expect competition to continue to
intensify in the future. We believe that competition in our
market is based predominantly on price, customer service and
brand recognition. Our competitors include:
In real estate lending, we compete against
traditional real estate lenders, including large and small
savings banks, commercial banks, mortgage bankers and mortgage
brokers. Many of our current and potential competitors have
greater brand recognition, longer operating histories, larger
customer bases and significantly greater financial, marketing
and other resources and are capable of providing strong price
and customer service competition. In order to compete
profitably, we may need to reduce the rates we offer on loans
and investments and increase the rates we offer on deposits,
which actions may adversely affect our overall financial
condition and earnings. We may not be able to compete
successfully against current and future competitors.
Intellectual Property and Proprietary
Rights
We register our various Internet URL addresses
with service companies, and work actively with bank regulators
to identify potential naming conflicts with competing financial
institutions. We also work with various regulators to shut down
websites with names which may be misleading to our customers.
Policing unauthorized use of proprietary information is
difficult and litigation may be necessary to enforce our
intellectual property rights.
We own the Internet domain names
BankofInternet.com, BofI.com,
ApartmentBank.com, InsuranceSales.com,
InvestmentSales.com, BancodeInternet.com
and many other similar names. Domain names in the United States
and in foreign countries are regulated, and the laws and
regulations governing the Internet are continually evolving.
Additionally, the relationship between regulations governing
domain names and laws protecting intellectual property rights is
not entirely clear. As a result, we may in the future be unable
to prevent third parties from acquiring domain names that
infringe or otherwise decrease the value of our trademark and
other intellectual property rights.
Employees
At September 30, 2004, we had one part-time
and 24 full time employees. None of our employees is represented
by a labor union or subject to a collective bargaining
agreement. We have not experienced any work stoppage and
consider our relations with our employees to be good.
66
Facilities
Our principal executive offices, which also serve
as our banks main office and branch, are located at
12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego,
California 92130, and our telephone number is
(858) 350-6200. This facility occupies a total of
approximately 8,000 square feet under a lease that expires
in June 2005. We believe our facilities are adequate for our
current needs.
Legal Proceedings
We may from time to time become a party to legal
proceedings arising in the ordinary course of our business. We
are not currently a party to any material legal proceedings.
67
MANAGEMENT
Directors and Executive Officers
The following table lists our directors and
executive officers at September 30, 2004:
Gary Lewis Evans.
Mr. Evans has served as President and Chief Executive
Officer of Bank of Internet USA since its formation and as a
member of the board of directors of BofI Holding since April
2004. Mr. Evans has also served as President and Chief
Executive Officer of BofI Holding since October 2004.
Mr. Evans has over 30 years of experience in the
operation and management of commercial and savings banks. He
served as President of La Jolla Bank from June 1988 to June
1996. In June 1996, he formed an Internet marketing and
development consulting company. Mr. Evans also co-authored
the 1997 McGraw-Hill publication,
The Financial Institutions
Internet Sourcebook
, and was a key participant in the
educational video,
The ABCs of Internet Banking
,
American Bankers Association. Mr. Evans has published the
Investment Management and Tactics chapter for the
1989 book,
Savings and Loan Investment Management
published by Sheshunoff and Company. Mr. Evans
currently is a member of the CFA Institute and The Financial
Analysts Society of San Diego. Mr. Evans holds a
Bachelor of Science degree in Business Administration, as well
as a Masters of Science degree in Finance, from California State
University at Northridge.
Patrick A. Dunn.
Mr. Dunn has served as Vice President and Chief Credit
Officer of Bank of Internet USA since its formation and is
responsible for the banks credit administration, including
portfolio management, compliance and origination management.
Mr. Dunn joined Bank of Internet USA to organize and direct
the banks lending operations, as part of the banks
original management team. Prior to Bank of Internet,
Mr. Dunn was an officer of La Jolla Bank, serving as
Vice President and Chief Loan Officer from March 1994 to March
2000, and as Regional Loan Officer and Branch Manager from
September 1989 to March 1994. Mr. Dunn holds a Bachelor of
Science degree in Finance from Colorado State University.
Andrew J.
Micheletti.
Mr. Micheletti has
served as Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of BofI
Holding and Bank of Internet USA since April 2001. Prior to
joining our company, from June 1997 to March 2001,
Mr. Micheletti was Vice President Finance for
TeleSpectrum Worldwide Inc., an international provider of
outsourced telephone and Internet services. In July 1999,
TeleSpectrum acquired International
68
Michael J.
Berengolts.
Mr. Berengolts has
served as Vice President and Chief Technology Officer of Bank of
Internet USA since April 1999. Mr. Berengolts joined Bank
of Internet USA as part of the original management team to
organize and direct its technology development.
Mr. Berengolts is responsible for all hardware and software
systems for the bank, including the development of our CRM
system. Prior to joining the bank, from June 1997 to June 1999,
Mr. Berengolts was the information systems manager for
Benefit Management Systems, a software provider to the managed
health care industry. In addition to Mr. Berengolts
information systems experience, he founded a manufacturing
company producing hockey equipment, operated it from November
1994 to June 1997 and then sold it to an industry competitor.
Mr. Berengolts holds a Bachelor of Science degree in
Business Administration from the University of San Diego.
Jerry F. Englert.
Mr. Englert has served as Chairman of the board of
directors of BofI Holding since July 1999 and as President and
Chief Executive Officer of BofI Holding from July 1999 to
October 2004. Since May 2003, Mr. Englert has been Director
of Strategic Planning and Financial Relations for Hollis-Eden
Pharmaceuticals, Inc. In addition, Mr. Englert is the owner
of Harvard Fair, a specialty supply company, and has been its
Chairman and CEO since 1982. He was a founder of Bank Del Mar
and its Vice Chairman from 1989 to 1994. Mr. Englert served
as the President, Chief Executive Officer and a Director of
Winfield Industries from 1972 until it was sold to Maxxim
Medical in 1991. From 1968 to 1972, he was Vice President of
Marketing for IVAC Corporation, and, from 1963 to 1968, he was a
Regional Sales Manager for Baxter Health Care, Inc.
Mr. Englert holds a Bachelor of Arts degree from Morris
Harvey College. In addition, Mr. Englert received an
honorary Ph.D. from the University of Charleston.
Theodore C. Allrich.
Mr. Allrich has served as Vice Chairman of the board of
directors of BofI Holding since 1999. Mr. Allrich is the
founder of the financial educational website, The Online
Investor (www.theonlineinvestor.com), based on his book of the
same name, and served as an investment advisor with his own
firm, Allrich Investment Management, from June 1991 to June
2003. Prior to starting his own firm, Mr. Allrich spent
20 years with various Wall Street brokerage firms, where he
was involved with investment banking, fixed income sales and
management, specializing in mortgage-backed securities,
institutional equity sales and trading. His last position with a
brokerage firm was in 1990 as the regional manager for high
grade fixed income investments with Drexel Burnham Lambert in
San Francisco. Mr. Allrich holds a Bachelor of Arts
degree from the University of California at Davis and a Master
of Business Administration degree in Finance from Stanford
University.
Robert Eprile.
Mr. Eprile has served as a member of the board of directors
of BofI Holding since July 1999. Mr. Eprile is a founder of
US Encode Corporation and has served as President since June
2002. US Encode develops and markets a proprietary
authentication technology to secure credit card and other
financial transactions over the Internet. Mr. Eprile also
serves as an outside director on the board of Compliance Coach,
an
e
-learning company that provides online compliance
training to financial services companies. From October 1996 to
May 1999, Mr. Eprile served as Chairman of the Ashton
Technology Group, a developer of electronic commerce and
electronic transactional systems for the financial services
industry. Mr. Eprile was a founder of Universal Trading
Technologies Corporation (UTTC), which develops and markets
electronic trading systems, and served as its President and CEO
from March 1995 to May 1999. Mr. Eprile holds a Bachelor of
Arts degree from Oberlin College in Ohio and a Master of
Business Administration degree from Stanford University.
Paul Grinberg.
Mr. Grinberg has served as a member of the board of
directors of BofI Holding since April 2004. Since October 2004,
Mr. Grinberg has served as the Senior Vice
President-Finance of Encore
69
Thomas J. Pancheri.
Mr. Pancheri has served as a member of the board of
directors of BofI Holding since July 1999. Since July 1981,
Mr. Pancheri has served as the President of San Diego
Pension Consultants, Inc., a company specializing in the design
and administration of retirement plans. San Diego Pension
Consultants is the main division of Pen/Flex, Inc., which
services qualified plans, primarily in the San Diego area.
Mr. Pancheri is active in the National Institute of Pension
Administrators and was the Charter President of the
San Diego chapter. In addition, he has been a member of the
Western Pension & Benefits Conference since 1980.
Connie M. Paulus.
Ms. Paulus has served as Secretary and a member of the
board of directors of BofI Holding since July 1999 and as
Secretary of Bank of Internet USA since July 2000.
Ms. Paulus is a scientist specializing in transgenic
technology and has more than 20 years of laboratory
experience, including appointments at Washington State
University, UC Irvine Medical Center, The Salk Institute for
Biological Sciences and the University of California at
San Diego. From January 1992 to December 1999,
Ms. Paulus served as a research associate at the University
of California at San Diego, managing the transgenic animal
facility. She also participates in a family owned business
specializing in residential and commercial land development and
real estate lending. Ms. Paulus holds a Bachelor of Science
degree from Western Washington University and a Masters of
Science degree from Washington State University.
Gordon L. Witter.
Mr. Witter has served as a member of the board of directors
of BofI Holding since July 1999. Following his retirement as a
Chief Pilot for American Airlines, Captain Witter formed Witter
Associates, a flight operations consulting firm, where he has
been serving as President since April 1995. He is a co-founder
of Air Carrier Associates, Inc., a firm specializing in risk
management issues for airline and general aviation clients and
has been its Managing Partner from July 1997 to the present.
Mr. Witter serves as Treasurer of the Sharp Healthcare
Foundation and as Chairman of the San Diego Aerospace
Museum and is on the Greater San Diego Chamber of Commerce
Military Affairs Council.
Board Composition
Our board of directors is authorized to have up
to nine members and is currently comprised of eight members. In
accordance with the terms of our amended and restated
certificate of incorporation and bylaws, following the offering,
our board of directors will be divided into three classes,
class I, class II and class III, with each class
serving staggered three-year terms. The members of the classes
are divided as follows:
70
The authorized number of directors may be changed
only by resolution of the board of directors. Any additional
directorships resulting from an increase in the number of
directors will be distributed between the three classes so that,
as nearly as possible, each class will consist of one third of
the directors. This classification of our board of directors may
have the effect of delaying or preventing changes in our control
or management. Our directors will hold office until their
successors have been elected and qualified or until their
earlier death, resignation, disqualification or removal for
cause by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of
our outstanding stock entitled to vote on election of directors.
Board Committees
Our board of directors has an audit committee, a
compensation committee and a nominating committee.
Audit Committee.
The
audit committee consists of Messrs. Witter, Grinberg and
Pancheri. Our board of directors has determined that
Mr. Grinberg, who serves as chairperson of our audit
committee, is an audit committee financial expert as defined
under the applicable rules of the SEC and has the requisite
financial sophistication as defined under the applicable Nasdaq
stock market rules. We believe the composition of our audit
committee meets the criteria for independence under, and the
functioning of our audit committee complies with applicable
requirements of, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the current
rules of the Nasdaq Stock Market and SEC rules and regulations.
We intend to comply with future audit committee requirements as
they become applicable to us.
Our audit committee oversees our accounting and
financial reporting processes, internal systems of control,
independent auditor relationships and the audits of our
financial statements. This committees responsibilities
include, among other things:
Our independent auditors and internal financial
personnel regularly meet privately with our audit committee and
have unrestricted access to this committee.
Compensation
Committee.
The compensation committee
consists of Messrs. Pancheri, Witter and Eprile. We believe
the composition of our compensation committee meets the criteria
for independence under, and the functioning of our compensation
committee complies with applicable requirements of, the
Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the current rules of the Nasdaq
Stock Market and SEC rules and regulations. We intend to comply
with future compensation committee requirements as they become
applicable to us.
Our compensation committee assists our board of
directors in determining the development plans and compensation
of our senior management, directors and employees and recommends
these plans to our board of directors. This committees
responsibilities include, among other things:
71
Nominating
Committee.
The nominating committee
consists of Messrs. Eprile and Witter and Ms. Paulus.
We believe the composition of our nominating committee meets the
criteria for independence under, and the functioning of our
nominating committee complies with applicable requirements of,
the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the current rules of the Nasdaq
Stock Market and SEC rules and regulations. We intend to comply
with future nominating committee requirements as they become
applicable to us.
Our nominating committees purpose is to
assist our board of directors by identifying individuals
qualified to become directors. This committees
responsibilities include, among other things:
Bank of Internet USA
Committees.
In addition, Bank of
Internet USA has an asset/liability committee, loan committee,
investment committee, internal asset review committee and
compliance committee.
Our asset/liability committee, or ALCO, manages
the sensitivity of net income to changing interest rates,
consistent with the policies reviewed and approved annually by
our board of directors. ALCO meets regularly to consider
investment and financing alternatives with particular emphasis
on duration and interest rate risk. Once a quarter, ALCO members
report to our board of directors the status of our banks
interest rate risk profile. The members of ALCO are board
members Messrs. Allrich and Eprile, our President and Chief
Executive Officer Gary Lewis Evans and our Chief Financial
Officer Andrew J. Micheletti.
Our loan committee oversees our underwriting
policies and loan portfolio, and is primarily responsible for
preparing and updating our loan underwriting policies and
procedures. Members of our loan committee also review and
approve specific credit requests in excess of specified dollar
amounts. The members of our loan committee are
Messrs. Evans, Eprile and Pancheri, who serves as the
chairman.
Our investment committee manages our investment
portfolio consistent with the investment policy established by
our board of directors. Our investment policy is designed
primarily to provide and maintain liquidity and to generate a
favorable return on investment without incurring undue interest
rate risk, credit risk and investment portfolio asset
concentrations. The members of our investment committee are
Messrs. Evans, Allrich and Eprile,
Our internal asset review committee monitors the
credit quality of our loan portfolio on an ongoing basis and
also monitors nonperforming assets and reviews our calculation
of the allowance for loan and lease losses quarterly. The
members of our internal asset review committee are
Ms. Paulus, Mr. Witter and Chief Financial Officer
Andrew J. Micheletti.
Our compliance committee oversees all aspects of
our banks compliance with applicable regulations,
including the Community Reinvestment Act. The members of our
compliance committee are Robert Eprile, who serves as chairman,
and co-compliance officers Patrick Dunn and Barabara Fronek.
Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider
Participation
No member of our compensation committee serves as
a member of the board of directors or compensation committee of
any entity that has one or more executive officers serving as a
member of our board of directors or compensation committee.
There are no family relationships among any of our directors or
executive officers.
72
Director Compensation
Our directors who are also employees of our
company receive no additional compensation for their services as
directors. Our nonemployee directors receive $2,000 per
month for serving on our board and are reimbursed for travel
expenses and other out-of-pocket costs of attending board and
committee meetings. Our nonemployee and employee directors are
eligible to receive options and shares of common stock directly
under our 2004 stock incentive plan.
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
Summary Compensation Table
The following table sets forth information
concerning the compensation we paid during the fiscal year ended
June 30, 2004 to our Chief Executive Officer and each of
our other most highly compensated executive officers who earned
more than $100,000 during that fiscal year. We refer to these
individuals in this prospectus as the named executive
officers. In accordance with the rules of the SEC, the
compensation described in this table does not include
perquisites and other personal benefits received by the
executive officers named in the table below that do not exceed
the lesser of $50,000 or 10% of the total salary and bonus
reported for these executed officers.
73
Option Grants in Fiscal Year Ended
June 30, 2004
The following table sets forth information with
respect to stock options granted to each of our named executive
officers during the fiscal year ended June 30, 2004. The
percentage of total options set forth below is based on options
to purchase an aggregate of 93,001 shares of common stock
granted to employees during the fiscal year ended June 30,
2004. All of these options were granted under our amended and
restated 1999 stock option plan at an exercise price per share
equal to the fair market value of our common stock at the time
of grant, as determined by our board of directors. Potential
realizable values are net of exercise price but before taxes
associated with exercise. Amounts represent hypothetical gains
that could be achieved for the options if exercised at the end
of the option term. The assumed 5% and 10% rates of stock price
appreciation are provided in accordance with the rules of the
SEC and do not represent our estimate or projection of the
future common stock price. Actual gains, if any, on stock option
exercises will be dependent on the future performance of our
common stock.
Aggregate Option Exercises in Last Fiscal Year
and Fiscal Year-End Option Values
The following table sets forth information
concerning exercisable and unexercisable stock options held by
each of the named executive officers at June 30, 2004. The
value realized upon exercise is based on the estimated fair
market value of our common stock at the time of exercise less
the per share exercise price, multiplied by number of shares
acquired upon exercise. The value of unexercised in-the-money
options is based on the assumed initial public offering price of
$ per
share less the per share exercise price, multiplied by the
number of number of shares underlying the options. All options
were granted under our amended and restated 1999 stock option
plan.
Employment Agreements
In July 2003, Bank of Internet USA entered into
employment agreements with each of our named executive officers,
Messrs. Evans, Dunn, Micheletti and Berengolts. Under these
agreements, if we terminate a protected officers
employment for any reason other than for cause, then we must
(a) pay that officer normal compensation in effect through
the date of termination; (b) pay that officer a severance
payment equal to twelve times his then-current base monthly
salary, payable at the option of our board of directors either
in one lump sum or in twelve equal installments; and
(c) continue group insurance benefits for that officer for
one
74
Employee Benefit Plans
Our amended and restated 1999 stock option plan
was approved by our board of directors and our stockholders in
2003. At September 30, 2004, a total of 749,406 shares
of common stock were reserved for issuance under our 1999 stock
option plan. For a period of eight years commencing with the
annual stockholders meeting in 2001, the aggregate number of
shares available for issuance under our 1999 stock option plan
on any date will be automatically increased to that number of
shares equal to the lesser of (a) 15% of the number of
issued and outstanding shares of our common stock and (b) a
lesser number of shares as determined by our board of directors.
However, in no event shall the number of shares issuable under
our 1999 stock option plan exceed 3,000,000 shares. At
September 30, 2004, options to purchase 722,517 shares
of common stock remain outstanding and 3,281 shares of
common stock are available for grant under this plan.
After the closing of the offering, all shares of
common stock subject to options granted under our 1999 stock
option plan that expire without having been exercised or are
cancelled will become available for grant under the 2004 stock
incentive plan. Awards under our 1999 stock option plan consist
of incentive stock options, which are stock options that are
intended to qualify under Section 422 of the Internal
Revenue Code, and nonqualified stock options, which are stock
options that do not qualify under Section 422 of the
Internal Revenue Code.
Our 1999 stock option plan provides for the grant
of:
The compensation committee of our board of
directors administers our 1999 stock option plan, including
selecting the persons eligible to receive options under our 1999
stock option plan, determining the number of shares to be
subject to each option grant, determining the exercise price of
each option grant and determining the vesting and exercise
periods of each option grant. The exercise price of all
incentive stock options and nonqualified stock options granted
under our 1999 stock option plan must be at least equal to the
fair value of our common stock on the date of grant. With
respect to any participant who owns stock possessing more than
10% of the total combined voting power of all our classes of
stock or the stock of any parent or subsidiary of ours, the
exercise price of any incentive stock option or nonqualified
stock option granted must equal at least 110% of the fair value
on the grant date. The maximum term of an incentive stock option
or nonqualified stock option granted to any participant must not
exceed ten years. The maximum term of an incentive stock option
granted to any participant who owns stock possessing more than
10% of the voting power of all our classes of stock or the stock
of any parent or subsidiary of ours must not exceed five years.
The aggregate fair market value of stock for which incentive
stock options are exercisable for the first time by an optionee
in any calendar year may not exceed $100,000. If the value of
the stock exceeds $100,000, the options for the amount in excess
of $100,000 will be treated as nonqualified stock options.
During an optionees lifetime, only the
optionee can exercise his or her options. The optionee cannot
transfer its option other than by will or the laws of descent
and distribution. If an optionees status as an employee,
director or consultant terminates for any reason other than
death or disability or for cause, the optionee may exercise his
or her vested options within the three-month period following
the termination, or for such other period of time (not less than
30 days) specified in the option agreement. In the event an
optionee dies while an employee, director or consultant of our
company, the options vested as of the date of death may be
exercised within the twelve-month period following the date of
the optionees death, or for such other period (not less
than six months) specified in the option agreement. In the event
an optionee becomes
75
The type and maximum number of shares available
under our 1999 stock option plan, as well as the number and type
of shares subject to, and per share exercise price of,
outstanding option grants under our 1999 stock option plan
will be appropriately adjusted in the event of a stock split,
reverse stock split, stock dividend, recapitalization,
combination or reclassification involving our company.
In the event of a change in control of our
company, all options granted under our 1999 stock option plan
will accelerate and become fully vested and exercisable. Under
our 1999 stock option plan, a change in control occurs upon:
Pursuant to requirements of the OTS, our 1999
stock option plan provides that, if our banks capital
falls below minimum regulatory requirements, as determined by
the OTS, we may require all optionees to exercise or forfeit
their options. In such event, any options that are not exercised
as so required by the OTS will terminate and be forfeited.
Our 1999 stock option plan will terminate
automatically in 2009 unless terminated earlier by our board of
directors. Our board of directors has the authority to amend or
terminate our 1999 stock option plan, subject to stockholder
approval of some amendments. However, no action may be taken
that will adversely affect any option previously granted under
our 1999 stock option plan, without the optionees consent.
We do not intend to make further grants under our
1999 stock option plan after the closing of the offering.
Our board of directors approved our 2004 stock
incentive plan in August 2004, and our stockholders approved our
2004 stock incentive plan in October 2004. The maximum number of
shares of common stock available for issuance under our 2004
stock incentive plan, plus the number of shares available for
issuance under outstanding stock options awarded under our 1999
stock option plan, will be equal to 14.8% of our outstanding
common stock at any time. However, the number of shares
available for issuance as restricted stock grants may not exceed
5.0% of our outstanding common stock at any time (subject to the
overall maximum of 14.8% of our outstanding shares of common
stock). Each share of restricted stock that is issued under our
2004 stock incentive plan and vests will be deemed to be the
issuance of three shares for purposes of calculating the overall
maximum number of shares of common stock available for issuance
under our 2004 stock incentive plan but not for purposes of
calculating the above 5.0% limit applicable to the issuance of
restricted stock. No awards have yet been granted under our 2004
stock incentive plan. We anticipate that all future option
grants will be made solely under our 2004 stock incentive plan.
Our 2004 stock incentive plan provides for the
grant of stock options, restricted stock, restricted stock
units, stock appreciation rights and dividend equivalent rights,
collectively referred to as awards. Awards may be
granted to employees, directors and consultants.
The compensation committee of our board of
directors, referred to as the plan administrator,
will administer our 2004 stock incentive plan, including
selecting the grantees, determining the number of shares to be
subject to each award, determining the exercise or purchase
price of each award, determining the term of each award, and
determining the vesting and exercise periods of each award.
76
Awards shall be transferable by will or by the
laws of descent or distribution and to the extent provided in
the award agreement. Our 2004 stock incentive plan permits the
designation of beneficiaries by holders of awards.
In the event a participant in our 2004 stock
incentive plan terminates employment or is terminated by us
without cause, any options which have become exercisable prior
to the time of termination will remain exercisable for three
months from the date of termination (unless a shorter or longer
period of time is determined by the plan administrator). In the
event a participant in our 2004 stock incentive plan is
terminated by us for cause, any options which have become
exercisable prior to the time of termination will immediately
terminate. If termination was caused by death or disability, any
options which have become exercisable prior to the time of
termination, will remain exercisable for twelve months from the
date of termination (unless a shorter or longer period of time
is determined by the plan administrator). In no event may a
participant exercise the option after the expiration date of the
option.
The plan administrator, which currently is our
compensation committee, shall have discretion to provide for
acceleration of vesting in connection with a corporate
transaction. Under our 2004 stock incentive plan, a corporate
transaction is generally defined as:
Unless terminated sooner, our 2004 stock
incentive plan will automatically terminate ten years after
stockholder approval of our 2004 stock incentive plan. Our board
of directors will have authority to amend or terminate our 2004
stock incentive plan. No suspension or termination of our 2004
stock incentive plan shall adversely affect any rights under
awards already granted to a participant unless agreed to by the
affected participant. To the extent necessary to comply with
applicable provisions of federal securities laws, state
corporate and securities laws, the Internal Revenue Code, the
rules of any applicable stock exchange or national market
system, and the rules of any non-U.S. jurisdiction
applicable to awards granted to residents therein, we shall
obtain stockholder approval of any such amendment to our 2004
stock incentive plan in such a manner and to such a degree as
required.
Our board of directors approved our 2004 employee
stock purchase plan in August 2004, and our stockholders
approved our 2004 stock incentive plan in October 2004. Our 2004
employee stock purchase plan is intended to qualify as an
Employee Stock Purchase Plan under Section 423
of the Internal Revenue Code in order to provide our employees
with an opportunity to purchase common stock through payroll
deductions. An aggregate of 500,000 shares of common stock
has been reserved for issuance and will be available for
purchase under our 2004 employee stock purchase plan, subject to
adjustment for a stock split, or any future stock dividend or
other similar change in our common stock or our capital
structure.
The compensation committee of our board of
directors, referred to as the plan administrator,
will administer our 2004 employee stock purchase plan. All of
our employees who are regularly employed for more than five
months in any calendar year and work more than 20 hours per
week will be eligible to participate in our 2004 employee stock
purchase plan, subject to a five day waiting period after
hiring. Nonemployee directors, consultants and employees subject
to the rules or laws of a non-U.S. jurisdiction that
prohibit or
77
Our 2004 employee stock purchase plan will
designate offer periods, purchase periods and exercise dates.
Offer periods will generally be overlapping periods of
24 months. The first offer period under our 2004 employee
stock purchase plan will begin on the date determined by our
board of directors. Purchase periods will generally be six month
periods. Exercise dates are the last day of each purchase
period. In the event of a corporate transaction, the plan
administrator may elect to either (a) shorten the offer
periods then in progress and set a new exercise date for the
purchase of shares or (b) pay each participant a cash
amount in settlement of the participants purchase rights
under the applicable offering periods.
Under our 2004 employee stock purchase plan, a
corporate transaction is generally defined as:
On the first day of each offer period, a
participating employee will be granted a purchase right. A
purchase right is a form of option to be automatically exercised
on the forthcoming exercise dates within the offer period during
which authorized deductions are to be made from the pay of
participants and credited to their accounts under our 2004
employee stock purchase plan. When the purchase right is
exercised, the participants withheld salary is used to
purchase shares of common stock. The price per share at which
shares of common stock are to be purchased under our 2004
employee stock purchase plan during any purchase period will be
expressed as a percentage not less than the lower of
(a) 85% of the fair market value of the common stock on the
date of grant of the option (which is the commencement of the
offer period or (b) 85% of the fair market value of the
common stock on the date the purchase right is exercised, with
such percentage (and any discount) to be determined by our board
of directors.
The participants purchase right is
exercised in this manner on each exercise date arising in the
offer period unless, on the first day of any purchase period,
the fair market value of the common stock is lower than the fair
market value of the common stock on the first day of the offer
period. If so, the participants participation in the
original offer period is terminated, and the participant is
automatically enrolled in the new offer period effective the
same date.
Payroll deductions may range from 1% to 15% in
whole percentage increments of a participants regular base
pay. The plan administrator will determine the maximum number of
shares of common stock that any employee may purchase under our
2004 employee stock purchase plan during a purchase period. The
Internal Revenue Code imposes additional limitations on the
amount of common stock that may be purchased during any calendar
year.
Unless terminated sooner, our 2004 employee stock
purchase plan will terminate automatically ten years after
stockholder approval of our 2004 employee stock purchase plan.
The plan administrator will have authority to amend or terminate
our 2004 employee stock purchase plan. The plan administrator
may terminate any offer period on any exercise date or establish
a new exercise date with respect to any offer period then in
progress if the plan administrator determines that the
termination of the offer period is in the best interests of our
company and its stockholders. To the extent necessary to comply
with applicable provisions of federal securities laws, state
corporate and securities laws, the Internal Revenue Code, the
rules of any
78
During the quarter ended December 31, 2003,
we purchased life insurance policies on the lives of our key
employees. These policies, which are assets of our company, have
been paid for in their entirety and are intended to offset
obligations entered into by us in connection with the
retirement, involuntary termination or disability of these
executives.
Effective January 1, 2003, we adopted the
Bank of Internet USA Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan to
provide designated key executive and management employees with
an opportunity to defer additional compensation beyond the
limitations imposed on our 401(k) plan by the Internal Revenue
Code. Our deferred compensation plan allows eligible employees
to elect to defer up to 100% of their compensation, including
commissions and bonuses. Although the plan provides that we may
make discretionary contributions to a participants
account, no such discretionary contributions have been made to
date. Participant deferrals are fully vested at all times, and
discretionary contributions, if any, will be subject to a
vesting schedule specified by us. The liabilities associated
with the plan are unfunded and unsecured. All five of our
currently eligible employees currently participate in the plan.
We maintain a defined contribution plan intended
to qualify as an eligible cash or deferred
arrangement under Section 401(k) of the Internal
Revenue Code. Under our 401(k) plan, each participant
(a) may contribute up to 15% of his or her pretax
compensation, up to a statutory limit, and (b) is fully
vested in his or her deferred salary contributions. Our 401(k)
plan also permits us to make discretionary and matching
contributions, subject to limitations specified by our board of
directors. Participants are entitled to direct the trustee to
invest their accounts in authorized investment alternatives
selected by us. To date, we have not made any discretionary or
matching contributions to our 401(k) plan on behalf of
participants.
Limitations on Liability and Indemnification
Matters
Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws
provide that we will indemnify all of our directors and officers
to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law. Our certificate
of incorporation and bylaws also authorize us to indemnify our
employees and other agents, at our option, to the fullest extent
permitted by Delaware law. We have entered into agreements to
indemnify our directors and officers, in addition to
indemnification provided for in our charter documents. These
agreements, among other things, provide for the indemnification
of our directors and officers for expenses, including
attorneys fees, judgments, fines and settlement amounts
incurred by any person in any action or proceeding, including
any action by or in the right of our company, arising out of
that persons services as a director or officer of our
company or any other company or enterprise to which that person
provides services at our request to the fullest extent permitted
by applicable law. We believe that these provisions and
agreements will assist us in attracting and retaining qualified
persons to serve as directors and officers.
Delaware law permits a corporation to provide in
its certificate of incorporation that a director of the
corporation shall not be personally liable to the corporation or
its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary
duty as a director, except for liability for any breach of the
directors duty of loyalty to the corporation or its
stockholders, for acts or omissions not in good faith or which
involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law,
for unlawful payments of dividends or unlawful stock repurchases
or redemptions as provided in Section 174 of the Delaware
General Corporation Law or for any transaction from which the
director derived an improper personal benefit. Our certificate
of incorporation provides for the elimination of personal
liability of a director for breach of fiduciary duty to the
extent permitted by Delaware law.
79
The limitation of liability and indemnification
provisions in our certificate of incorporation and bylaws may
discourage stockholders from bringing a lawsuit against our
directors for breach of their fiduciary duty. They may also
reduce the likelihood of derivative litigation against our
directors and officers, even though an action, if successful,
might benefit us and our stockholders. Furthermore, a
stockholders investment may be adversely affected to the
extent that we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards
against directors and officers as required by these
indemnification provisions. At present, there is no pending
litigation or proceeding involving any of our directors,
officers or employees regarding which indemnification is sought,
and we are not aware of any threatened litigation that may
result in claims for indemnification.
Insofar as indemnification for liabilities
arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to directors,
officers and controlling persons of our company in accordance
with the provisions contained in our charter documents, Delaware
law or otherwise, we have been advised that in the opinion of
the Securities and Exchange Commission this indemnification is
against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is,
therefore, unenforceable. If a claim for indemnification against
these liabilities, other than the payment by us of expenses
incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of
our company in the successful defense of any action, suit or
proceeding, is asserted by a director, officer or controlling
person, we will, unless in the opinion of our counsel the matter
has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of
appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such
indemnification by us is against public policy as expressed in
the Securities Act, and we will follow the courts
determination.
We maintain insurance on behalf of our officers
and directors, insuring them against liabilities that they may
incur in such capacities or arising out of this status.
80
CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED
TRANSACTIONS
Common Stock and Warrant Issuances
In September and October 2001, we issued and sold
an aggregate of 587,200 shares of our common stock at
$10.00 per share, including 27,500 shares to Jerry and
Connie Englert, 100,000 shares to The Chipman First Family
Limited Partnership, 6,500 shares to Robert Eprile,
25,000 shares to J. Gary Burke and 15,000 shares
to Theodore Allrich. Messrs. Englert, Allrich and Eprile
are members of our board of directors. Each of The Chipman First
Family Limited Partnership and J. Gary Burke owns more than
five percent of our outstanding common stock.
In June and July 2002, we issued and sold an
aggregate of 179,850 shares of our common stock, together
with warrants to purchase up to an additional 59,950 shares
of our common stock. Three shares of our common stock and a
warrant to purchase one share of our common stock were sold as a
single unit to investors at $36.00 per unit. Each warrant
sold in the offering has an exercise price of $14.00 per
share, is currently exercisable and terminates on July 31,
2005, subject to the right of our board of directors, in its
sole discretion, to extend the purchase period of these warrants
for up to two additional years. In the offering, The Chipman
First Family Limited Partnership purchased 27,700 units, or
83,100 shares of our common stock and a warrant to purchase
up to 27,700 shares of our common stock.
Preferred Stock Issuance
Between October 2003 and June 2004, we issued and
sold an aggregate of 675 shares of our preferred stock
designated Series A 6% Cumulative
Nonparticipating Perpetual Preferred Stock, Convertible through
January 1, 2009 at $10,000 per share to 22
investors, including 100 shares to Jerry and Connie Englert
and 200 shares to The Chipman First Family Limited
Partnership.
Indebtedness of Management
We in the past have made, and from time to time
in the future may make, loans to our executive officers and
directors in compliance with applicable laws. At
September 30, 2004, we had outstanding to one of our
directors one residential loan with a balance of approximately
$950,000. The loan was, and any loan we may make to our
directors or executives officers in the future will be, made in
the ordinary course of business and on substantially the same
terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those
prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with other
persons. In addition, this loan did not, and any loan we may
make to our directors or executives officers in the future will
not, involve more than the normal risk of collectability or
present other unfavorable features.
Loans to Us
Since inception, we borrowed a total of
$2.8 million from directors, officers and other organizers
on an unsecured basis to provide capital to our bank, including
$1.0 million from Chipman First Family Limited Partnership,
$250,000 from J. Gary Burke and $275,000 from Jerry F. Englert.
We believe these borrowings were made on terms prevailing at the
time for comparable transactions with unaffiliated third
parties. All of the loans were repaid in full during the fiscal
year ended June 30, 2002.
Consulting Arrangements
Jerry F. Englert, our Chairman, and Theodore C.
Allrich, our Vice Chairman, each served as a consultant to our
company from February 2003 to January 2004 in connection with
our capital raising efforts during that period. We paid each of
them $12,500 per month, or an aggregate of $150,000 to
each, for their consulting services to us.
81
Indemnification Agreements
We have entered into indemnification agreements
with our each of our executive officers and directors. These
indemnification agreements require us to indemnify these
individuals to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law.
We believe that all transactions set forth above
were on terms no less favorable to us than could have been
obtained from unaffiliated third parties. We intend that all
future transactions between us and our officers, directors,
principal stockholders and their affiliates will be approved by
a majority the directors on our board, including a majority of
the independent directors on our board of directors, and will be
on terms no less favorable to us than could be obtained from
unaffiliated third parties.
82
PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS
The table below provides information regarding
the beneficial ownership of our common stock at
November 30, 2004 by:
The information regarding beneficial ownership of
our common stock has been presented according to the rules of
the SEC and is not necessarily indicative of beneficial
ownership for any other purpose. Under the rules of the SEC,
beneficial ownership includes shares over which the indicated
beneficial owner exercises voting or investment power. Shares of
common stock subject to options or warrants that are currently
exercisable or will become exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004 are deemed outstanding for the purpose of
computing the percentage ownership of that person or group
holding the options or warrants but are not treated as
outstanding for the purpose of computing the percentage
ownership of any other person or group. The percentages for
beneficial ownership after the offering assume that the
underwriters do not exercise their over-allotment option. Unless
otherwise indicated in the footnotes below, we believe that the
persons and entities named in the table have sole voting and
investment power with respect to all shares beneficially owned,
subject to applicable community property laws. Unless otherwise
indicated, the following beneficial owners can be reached at our
principal offices. Percentage ownership in the table is based on
4,559,024 shares of common stock outstanding at
November 30, 2004, together with applicable options,
warrants and shares of Series A preferred stock for each
stockholder.
83
84
DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK
General
Our authorized capital stock consists of
25,000,000 shares of common stock, $0.01 par value per
share, and 1,000,000 shares of preferred stock,
$0.01 par value per share. The following description of our
capital stock is subject to, and qualified in its entirety by,
the provisions of our certificate of incorporation, including
any certificates of designation thereto, and bylaws, which are
included as exhibits to the registration statement of which this
prospectus is a part, and by the provisions of applicable law.
Our capital stock does not represent
nonwithdrawable capital, is not an account of an insurable type,
and is not insured by the FDIC or any other government
agency.
Common Stock
Outstanding Shares.
At September 30, 2004, there were 4,519,649 shares of
our common stock outstanding that were held of record by 233
stockholders. After the offering, and based on the number of
shares outstanding at September 30, 2004, there will
be shares
of our common stock outstanding, or shares if the
underwriters over-allotment option is exercised in full.
Dividends.
Subject
to preferences that may be applicable to any then outstanding
shares of our preferred stock, and subject to compliance with
limitations imposed by law, the holders of our common stock are
entitled to receive ratably those dividends, if any, as may be
declared from time to time by our board of directors out of
legally available funds.
Voting Rights.
Each
holder of our common stock is entitled to one vote for each
share held of record on all matters submitted to a vote of the
stockholders, including the election of directors. Under our
certificate of incorporation and bylaws, our stockholders will
not have cumulative voting rights. Because of this, the holders
of a majority of the shares of our common stock entitled to vote
in any election of directors can elect all of the directors
standing for election, if they should so choose.
Liquidation.
In the
event of our liquidation, dissolution or winding up, holders of
our common stock will be entitled to share ratably in the net
assets legally available for distribution to stockholders after
the payment of all of our debts and other liabilities and the
satisfaction of any liquidation preferences granted to the
holders of any outstanding shares of our preferred stock.
Rights and
Preferences.
Holders of our common
stock have no preemptive, conversion or subscription rights, and
there are no redemption or sinking fund provisions applicable to
our common stock. The rights, preferences and privileges of the
holders of our common stock are subject to, and may be adversely
affected by, the rights of the holders of shares of any series
of our preferred stock, including any which we may designate in
the future.
Fully Paid and
Nonassessable.
All outstanding shares
of our common stock are, and the shares of our common stock to
be issued in the offering will be, fully paid and nonassessable.
Preferred Stock
Outstanding Shares.
At September 30, 2004, 1,200 shares of our preferred
stock were designated Series A 6%
Cumulative Nonparticipating Perpetual Preferred Stock,
Convertible through January 1, 2009, which we refer
to in this prospectus as Series A preferred stock, of which
675 shares of Series A preferred stock were issued and
outstanding. The remaining 998,800 shares of our preferred
stock has not be designated as a particular class.
Cumulative
Dividends.
Subject to preferences that
may be applicable to any then outstanding shares of our
preferred stock, and subject to compliance with limitations
imposed by law, the holders of our Series A preferred stock
are entitled to receive, out of legally available funds,
cumulative dividends at the annual rate of $600 per share,
payable in quarterly installments of $150 on each of
March 31, June 30, September 30 and
December 31, when and as declared by our board of
directors. No dividends or other distributions may be
85
Voting Rights.
Except for amendments to our certificate of incorporation that
create or authorize the issuance of a series of preferred stock
with liquidation preferences senior to our Series A
preferred stock, which requires the approval of the holders of a
majority of our Series A preferred stock, and except as
otherwise provided by law, holders of our Series A
preferred stock will not have any voting rights.
Liquidation.
In the
event of our liquidation, dissolution or winding up, holders of
our Series A preferred stock will be entitled to receive,
in preference to any payment on our common stock, an amount
equal to $10,000 per share plus all accumulated and unpaid
dividends thereon.
Redemption.
We have
the right (but are not obligated) to redeem, out of legally
available funds, in whole or from time to time in part, our
Series A preferred stock. The redemption price to be paid
by us for our shares of Series A preferred stock will vary
depending on when the shares are redeemed with the redemption
price decreasing by $100 every calendar year from
$10,500 per share (if redeemed on or before
December 31, 2004) to $10,000 per share (if redeemed
on or after January 1, 2009).
Conversion.
Holders
of Series A preferred stock have the right (but are not
obligated) to convert their Series A preferred stock into
shares of our common stock. The number of shares of our common
stock to be issued upon conversion of our Series A
preferred stock will vary depending on when a holder elects to
convert, with the number of shares of our common stock to issued
upon conversion of a share of Series A preferred stock
ranging from 952 shares (if converted between
January 1, 2004 and January 1, 2006) and
555 shares (if converted between April 1, 2008 and
January 1, 2009). Shares of our Series A preferred
stock only may be converted on the first day of a calendar
quarter and only through January 1, 2009. The following
table sets forth the conversion price and the number of shares
of common stock issuable upon conversion of one share of
Series A preferred stock.
Preemptive Rights.
Holders of our common stock have no preemptive or subscription
rights.
Fully Paid and
Nonassessable.
All of our outstanding
shares of Series A preferred stock are fully paid and
nonassessable.
Undesignated Preferred
Stock.
We are authorized to issue up
to an additional 998,800 shares of preferred stock that has
not been designated as a particular class. Our board of
directors has the authority to issue the undesignated preferred
stock in one or more series and to determine the powers,
preferences and rights and the qualifications, limitations or
restrictions granted to or imposed upon any wholly unissued
series of undesignated preferred stock and to fix the number of
shares constituting any series and the designation of the series
without any further vote or action by our stockholders. The
issuance of preferred stock, while providing desirable
flexibility in connection with possible acquisitions and other
corporate purposes, could have the effect of making it more
difficult for a third party to acquire, or of discouraging a
third party from attempting to acquire, a majority of our
outstanding voting stock. We have no present plans to issue any
additional shares of preferred stock.
86
Warrants
At September 30, 2004, warrants to purchase
an aggregate of 787,950 shares of our common stock were
issued and outstanding. All of the warrants are currently
exercisable. Warrants to purchase 59,950 shares of our
common stock have an exercise price of $14.00 per share and
terminate on July 31, 2005, subject to the right of our
board of directors, in its sole discretion, to extend the
exercise period of these warrants for up to an additional
two years. The remaining warrants to
purchase 728,000 shares of our common stock have an
exercise price of $4.19 per share and will terminate
immediately prior to the closing of the offering if not
exercised prior to that time. We expect that the warrants to
purchase 728,000 shares of our common stock with an
exercise price of $4.19 per share will be exercised on a
cash basis prior to the closing of the offering. Each warrant
contains provisions for the adjustment of the exercise price and
the aggregate number of shares issuable upon exercise of such
warrant in the event of stock dividends, stock splits,
reorganization, reclassifications and similar events.
Anti-Takeover Provisions
Provisions of Delaware law and our certificate of
incorporation and bylaws could make our acquisition by means of
a tender offer, a proxy contest or otherwise, and the removal of
incumbent officers and directors more difficult. These
provisions are expected to discourage types of coercive takeover
practices and inadequate takeover bids and to encourage persons
seeking to acquire control to first negotiate with us. We
believe that the benefits of increased protection of our
potential ability to negotiate with the proponent of an
unfriendly or unsolicited proposal to acquire or restructure us
outweighs the disadvantages of discouraging proposals, including
proposals that are priced above the then current market value of
our common stock, because, among other things, negotiation of
these proposals could result in an improvement of their terms.
These provisions may also have the effect of preventing changes
in our management. It is possible that these provisions could
make it more difficult to accomplish transactions that
stockholders may otherwise deem to be in their best interests.
We are subject to Section 203 of the
Delaware General Corporation Law. Under this provision, we may
not engage in any business combination with any interested
stockholder for a period of three years following the date
the stockholder became an interested stockholder, unless:
Section 203 defines business
combination to include:
87
In general, Section 203 defines an
interested stockholder as any entity or person
beneficially owning 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock
of the corporation and any entity or person affiliated with or
controlling or controlled by the entity or person.
Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws
contain provisions that could have the effect of discouraging
potential acquisition proposals or tender offers or delaying or
preventing a change in control of our company. In particular,
our certificate of incorporation and bylaws, as applicable,
among other things:
The amendment of any of these provisions would
require the approval of the holders of at least 75% of our then
outstanding capital stock.
These provisions are intended to enhance the
likelihood of continuity and stability in the composition of our
board and its policies and to discourage certain types of
transactions that may involve an actual or threatened change in
control of our company. These provisions are designed to reduce
our vulnerability to an unsolicited acquisition proposal and to
discourage certain tactics that may be used in proxy fights.
However, these provisions could have the effect of discouraging
others from making tender offers for our shares that could
result from actual or rumored takeover attempts. These
provisions also may have the effect of preventing changes in our
management.
The Change in Bank Control Act provides that no
person, acting directly or indirectly or through or in concert
with one or more other persons, may acquire control of a savings
association unless the OTS has been given 60 days
prior written notice. The HOLA provides that no company may
acquire control of a savings association without the
prior approval of the OTS. Any company that acquires such
control becomes a savings and loan holding company subject to
registration, examination and regulation by the OTS.
Under federal law, acquisition of more than 10%
of our common stock would result in a rebuttable presumption of
control of our bank and the ownership of 25% of the voting stock
would result in conclusive control of our bank. Depending on the
circumstances, the foregoing banking regulations may prevent or
frustrate a change in control of us, discourage bids at a
premium over the market price of our common stock and adversely
affect the market price of our common stock and the voting or
other rights of our common stock.
88
Nasdaq National Market Listing
We have applied to have our common stock listed
for quotation on the Nasdaq National Market under the symbol
BOFI.
Transfer Agent and Registrar
The transfer agent and registrar for our common
stock is U.S. Stock Transfer Corporation. Its address is
1745 Gardena Avenue, Glendale, California 91204, and its
telephone number is (818) 502-1404.
89
REGULATION
General
Savings and loan holding companies and savings
associations are extensively regulated under both federal and
state law. This regulation is intended primarily for the
protection of depositors and the Savings Association Insurance
Fund, or SAIF, and not for the benefit of our stockholders. The
following information describes aspects of the material laws and
regulations applicable to us and our subsidiary, and does not
purport to be complete. The discussion is qualified in its
entirety by reference to all particular applicable laws and
regulations.
Legislation is introduced from time to time in
the U.S. Congress that may affect the operations of our
company and Bank of Internet USA. In addition, the regulations
governing us and Bank of Internet USA may be amended from time
to time by the OTS. Any such legislation or regulatory changes
in our future could adversely affect Bank of Internet USA. No
assurance can be given as to whether or in what form any such
changes may occur.
Regulation of BofI Holding, Inc.
General.
We are a
savings and loan holding company subject to regulatory oversight
by the OTS. As such, we are required to register and file
reports with the OTS and are subject to regulation and
examination by the OTS. In addition, the OTS has enforcement
authority over us and our subsidiary, which also permits the OTS
to restrict or prohibit activities that are determined to be a
serious risk to Bank of Internet USA.
Activities
Restrictions.
Our activities, other
than through Bank of Internet USA or any other SAIF-insured
savings association we may hold in the future, are subject to
restrictions applicable to bank holding companies. Bank holding
companies are prohibited, subject to exceptions, from engaging
in any business or activity other than a business or activity
that the Federal Reserve Board has determined to be closely
related to banking. The Federal Reserve Board has by regulation
determined that specified activities satisfy this
closely-related-to-banking standard. Although we currently do
not engage in these activities, the following include examples
of FRB-approved activities:
The Federal Reserve Board also has determined
that other specified activities, including real estate brokerage
and syndication, land development, property management and
underwriting of life insurance not related to credit
transactions, are not closely related to banking nor a proper
incident thereto. Legislation enacted in 1999 has expanded the
types of activities that may be conducted by qualifying holding
companies that register as financial holding
companies.
Regulation of Bank of Internet USA
General.
As a
federally chartered, SAIF-insured savings association, Bank of
Internet USA is subject to extensive regulation by the OTS and
the FDIC. Lending activities and other investments of Bank of
Internet USA must comply with various statutory and regulatory
requirements. Bank of Internet USA is also subject to
90
Bank of Internet USA must file reports with the
OTS and the FDIC concerning its activities and financial
condition, in addition to obtaining regulatory approvals prior
to entering into specified transactions such as mergers with or
acquisitions of other financial institutions or raising capital
or issuing trust preferred securities. This regulation and
supervision establishes a comprehensive framework of activities
in which an institution can engage and is intended primarily for
the protection of the SAIF and depositors. The regulatory
structure also gives the regulatory authorities extensive
discretion in connection with their supervisory and enforcement
activities and examination policies, including policies with
respect to the classification of assets and the establishment of
adequate loan loss reserves for regulatory purposes. Any change
in such regulations, whether by the OTS, the FDIC or the
Congress, could have a material adverse effect on us, Bank of
Internet USA and our operations.
Insurance of Deposit
Accounts.
The SAIF, as administered by
the FDIC, insures Bank of Internet USAs deposit accounts
up to the maximum amount permitted by law. The FDIC may
terminate insurance of deposits upon a finding that Bank of
Internet USA:
The FDIC charges an annual assessment for the
insurance of deposits based on the risk a particular institution
poses to its deposit insurance fund. Under this system, as of
December 31, 2001, SAIF members pay zero to $0.27 per
$100 of domestic deposits, depending upon the institutions
risk classification. This risk classification is based on an
institutions capital group and supervisory subgroup
assignment. In addition, all FDIC-insured institutions are
required to pay assessments to the FDIC at an annual rate for
the third quarter of 2002 of approximately $0.0172 per $100
of assessable deposits to fund interest payments on bonds issued
by the Financing Corporation, or FICO, an agency of the Federal
government established to recapitalize the predecessor to the
SAIF. These assessments will continue until the FICO bonds
mature in 2017.
Regulatory Capital Requirements and Prompt
Corrective Action.
The prompt
corrective action regulation of the OTS requires mandatory
actions and authorizes other discretionary actions to be taken
by the OTS against a savings association that falls within
undercapitalized capital categories specified in the regulation.
Under the regulation, an institution is well
capitalized if it has a total risk-based capital ratio of at
least 10.0%, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of at least
6.0% and a leverage ratio of at least 5.0%, with no written
agreement, order, capital directive, prompt corrective action
directive or other individual requirement by the OTS to maintain
a specific capital measure. An institution is adequately
capitalized if it has a total risk-based capital ratio of at
least 8.0%, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of at least
4.0% and a leverage ratio of at least 4.0% (or 3.0% if it has a
composite rating of 1 and is not experiencing or
anticipating significant growth). The regulation also
establishes three categories for institutions with lower ratios:
undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized and critically
undercapitalized. At September 30, 2004, Bank of Internet
USA met the capital requirements of a well
capitalized institution under applicable OTS regulations.
In general, the prompt corrective action
regulation prohibits an insured depository institution from
declaring any dividends, making any other capital distribution,
or paying a management fee to a controlling person if, following
the distribution or payment, the institution would be within any
of the three undercapitalized categories. In addition,
adequately capitalized institutions may accept brokered deposits
only with a waiver from the FDIC and are subject to restrictions
on the interest rates that can be paid on such deposits.
Undercapitalized institutions may not accept, renew or roll-over
brokered deposits.
91
If the OTS determines that an institution is in
an unsafe or unsound condition, or if the institution is deemed
to be engaging in an unsafe and unsound practice, the OTS may,
if the institution is well capitalized, reclassify it as
adequately capitalized; if the institution is adequately
capitalized but not well capitalized, require it to comply with
restrictions applicable to undercapitalized institutions; and,
if the institution is undercapitalized, require it to comply
with restrictions applicable to significantly undercapitalized
institutions. Finally, pursuant to an interagency agreement, the
FDIC can examine any institution that has a substandard
regulatory examination score or is considered undercapitalized
without the express permission of the institutions primary
regulator.
OTS capital regulations also require savings
associations to meet three additional capital standards:
These capital requirements are viewed as minimum
standards by the OTS, and most institutions are expected to
maintain capital levels well above the minimum. In addition, the
OTS regulations provide that minimum capital levels greater than
those provided in the regulations may be established by the OTS
for individual savings associations upon a determination that
the savings associations capital is or may become
inadequate in view of its circumstances. Bank of Internet USA is
not subject to any such individual minimum regulatory capital
requirement and our regulatory capital exceeded all minimum
regulatory capital requirements as of September 30, 2004.
See Managements Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations Liquidity and
Capital Resources.
Loans-to-One-Borrower
Limitations.
Savings associations
generally are subject to the lending limits applicable to
national banks. With limited exceptions, the maximum amount that
a savings association or a national bank may lend to any
borrower, including related entities of the borrower, at one
time may not exceed 15% of the unimpaired capital and surplus of
the institution, plus an additional 10% of unimpaired capital
and surplus for loans fully secured by readily marketable
collateral. Savings associations are additionally authorized to
make loans to one borrower by order of the Director of the OTS,
in an amount not to exceed the lesser of $30.0 million or
30% of unimpaired capital and surplus for the purpose of
developing residential housing, if specified conditions are met:
At September 30, 2004, Bank of Internet
USAs loans-to-one-borrower limit was $5.2 million
based upon the 15% of unimpaired capital and surplus
measurement. At September 30, 2004, no single loan was
larger than $2.9 million and Bank of Internet USAs
largest single lending relationship had an outstanding balance
of $4.3 million. We expect that our lending limit will
increase to approximately
$ million
immediately following the offering, assuming
$ million
are raised in the offering and that
$ million
of the net proceeds are contributed to our subsidiary bank,
based on the assumptions set forth below the table in
Capitalization.
Qualified Thrift Lender
Test.
Savings associations must meet a
qualified thrift lender, or QTL, test. This test may be met
either by maintaining a specified level of portfolio assets in
qualified thrift investments as specified by the Home Owners
Loan Act, or HOLA, or by meeting the definition of a
domestic building and loan association under the
Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or the Code.
Qualified thrift investments are primarily residential mortgage
loans and related investments, including mortgage related
securities. Portfolio assets generally mean total assets less
specified liquid assets, goodwill and other intangible assets
and the value of property used in the conduct of Bank of
Internet USAs business. The required
92
Liquidity Standard.
Savings associations are required to maintain sufficient
liquidity to ensure safe and sound operations.
Affiliate
Transactions.
Transactions between a
savings association and its affiliates are quantitatively and
qualitatively restricted pursuant to OTS regulations. Affiliates
of a savings association include, among other entities, the
savings associations holding company and companies that
are under common control with the savings association. In
general, a savings association or its subsidiaries are limited
in their ability to engage in covered transactions
with affiliates:
In addition, a savings association and its
subsidiaries may engage in covered transactions and other
specified transactions only on terms and under circumstances
that are substantially the same, or at least as favorable to the
savings association or its subsidiary, as those prevailing at
the time for comparable transactions with nonaffiliated
companies. A covered transaction includes:
In addition, under the OTS regulations:
The OTS regulations generally exclude all
non-bank and non-savings association subsidiaries of savings
associations from treatment as affiliates, except to the extent
that the OTS or the Federal Reserve Board decides to treat these
subsidiaries as affiliates. The regulations also require savings
associations to make and retain records that reflect affiliate
transactions in reasonable detail and provide that specified
classes of savings associations may be required to give the OTS
prior notice of affiliate transactions.
93
Capital Distribution
Limitations.
OTS regulations impose
limitations upon all capital distributions by savings
associations, like cash dividends, payments to repurchase or
otherwise acquire its shares, payments to stockholders of
another institution in a cash-out merger and other distributions
charged against capital. Under these regulations, a savings
association may, in circumstances described in those regulations:
The OTS regulations require a savings association
to file an application if:
In addition, a savings association must give the
OTS notice of a capital distribution if the savings association
is not required to file an application, but:
If neither the savings association nor the
proposed capital distribution meet any of the above listed
criteria, the OTS does not require the savings association to
submit an application or give notice when making the proposed
capital distribution. The OTS may prohibit a proposed capital
distribution that would otherwise be permitted if the OTS
determines that the distribution would constitute an unsafe or
unsound practice.
Community Reinvestment Act and the Fair
Lending Laws.
Savings associations
have a responsibility under the Community Reinvestment Act and
related regulations of the OTS to help meet the credit needs of
their communities, including low- and moderate-income
neighborhoods. In addition, the Equal Credit Opportunity Act and
the Fair Housing Act prohibit lenders from discriminating in
their lending practices on the basis of characteristics
specified in those statutes. An institutions failure to
comply with the provisions of the Community Reinvestment Act
could, at a minimum, result in regulatory restrictions on its
activities and the denial of applications. In addition, an
institutions failure to comply with the Equal Credit
Opportunity Act and the Fair Housing Act could result in the
OTS, other federal regulatory agencies or the Department of
Justice taking enforcement actions against the institution.
Based on an examination commenced in June, 2001, Bank of
Internet USA received a satisfactory rating with respect to its
performance pursuant to the Community Reinvestment Act.
Federal Home Loan Bank
System.
Bank of Internet USA is a
member of the FHLB system. Among other benefits, each FHLB
serves as a reserve or central bank for its members within its
assigned region. Each FHLB is financed primarily from the sale
of consolidated obligations of the FHLB system. Each FHLB makes
94
Federal Reserve
System.
The Federal Reserve Board
requires all depository institutions to maintain
noninterest-bearing reserves at specified levels against their
transaction accounts (primarily checking, NOW, and Super NOW
checking accounts) and nonpersonal time deposits. At
September 30, 2004, Bank of Internet USA was in compliance
with these requirements.
Activities of
Subsidiaries.
A savings association
seeking to establish a new subsidiary, acquire control of an
existing company or conduct a new activity through a subsidiary
must provide 30 days prior notice to the FDIC and the OTS
and conduct any activities of the subsidiary in compliance with
regulations and orders of the OTS. The OTS has the power to
require a savings association to divest any subsidiary or
terminate any activity conducted by a subsidiary that the OTS
determines to pose a serious threat to the financial safety,
soundness or stability of the savings association or to be
otherwise inconsistent with sound banking practices.
Recent Legislation
Sarbanes-Oxley Act of
2002.
In July 2002, the Sarbanes-Oxley
Act of 2002, or the SOX, was enacted. The stated goals of the
SOX are to increase corporate responsibility, to provide for
enhanced penalties for accounting and auditing improprieties at
publicly traded companies and to protect investors by improving
the accuracy and reliability of corporate disclosures pursuant
to the securities laws.
The SOX is the most far-reaching
U.S. securities legislation enacted in some time. The SOX
generally applies to all companies, both U.S. and non-U.S., that
file or are required to file periodic reports with the
Securities and Exchange Commission, or the SEC, under the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934, or the Exchange Act.
The SOX includes very specific additional
disclosure requirements and new corporate governance rules,
requires the SEC and securities exchanges to adopt extensive
additional disclosure, corporate governance and other related
rules and mandates further studies of specified issues by the
SEC and the Comptroller General. The SOX represents significant
federal involvement in matters traditionally left to state
regulatory systems, such as the regulation of the accounting
profession, and to state corporate law, such as the relationship
between a board of directors and management and between a board
of directors and its committees.
The SOX and subsequently enacted SEC and other
regulations address, among other matters:
95
96
SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE
Prior to the offering, there has been no public
market for our common stock. No prediction can be made as to the
effect, if any, that sales of common stock or the availability
of common stock for sale will have on the market price of our
common stock. The market price of our common stock could decline
because of the sale of a large number of shares of our common
stock or the perception that such sales could occur. These
factors could also make it more difficult to raise funds through
future offerings of common stock.
After the offering, and based on the number of
shares of our common stock outstanding at September 30,
2004 and on the assumptions set forth under the table in
Capitalization, shares
of our common stock will be outstanding,
or shares
if the underwriters over-allotment option is exercised in full.
Of these shares, the shares sold in the offering,
or shares
if the underwriters over-allotment is exercised in full,
will be freely tradable without restriction under the Securities
Act, except that any shares held by our affiliates
as defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act may be sold
only in compliance with the limitations described below. The
remaining shares
of common stock are restricted securities, within
the meaning of Rule 144 under the Securities Act. The
restricted securities generally may not be sold unless they are
registered under the Securities Act or are sold pursuant to an
exemption from registration, such as the exemption provided by
Rule 144 under the Securities Act.
In connection with the offering, our existing
officers, directors and certain holders of our common stock, who
will beneficially own a total
of shares
of common stock after the offering, have entered into lock-up
agreements pursuant to which they have agreed not to offer or
sell any shares of common stock for a period of 180 days
after the date of this prospectus without the prior written
consent of WR Hambrecht + Co, LLC, who may, in
its sole discretion, at any time and without notice, waive any
of the terms of these lock-up agreements. In addition, certain
other holders of our common stock, who will beneficially own a
total of shares of common stock after the offering, have
entered into lock-up agreements pursuant to which they have
agreed not to offer or sell any shares of common stock for a
period of 90 days. The underwriters presently have no
intention to allow any shares of common stock to be sold or
otherwise offered by us prior to the expiration of these lock-up
periods. Following these lock-up periods, these shares will not
be eligible for sale in the public market without registration
under the Securities Act unless such sale meets the conditions
and restrictions of Rule 144 as described below.
In general, under Rule 144, as currently in
effect, any person or persons whose shares are required to be
aggregated, including an affiliate of ours, who has beneficially
owned shares for a period of at least one year is entitled to
sell, within any three month period, commencing 90 days
after the date of this prospectus, a number of shares that does
not exceed the greater of:
Sales under Rule 144 are also subject to
provisions relating to notice and manner of sale and the
availability of current public information about us during the
90 days immediately preceding a sale. In addition, a person
who is not an affiliate of ours during the 90 days
preceding a sale and who has beneficially owned the shares
proposed to be sold for at least two years would be entitled to
sell such shares under Rule 144(k) without regard to the
volume limitation and other conditions described above.
Our directors or officers who purchased our
shares in connection with a written compensatory plan or
contract may be entitled to rely on the resale provisions of
Rule 701. Rule 701 permits non-affiliates to sell
their Rule 701 shares without having to comply with
the public information, holding period, volume limitation or
notice provisions of Rule 144. Affiliates may sell their
Rule 701 shares without having to comply with
Rule 144s holding period restrictions. In each of
these cases, Rule 701 allows the stockholders to sell
90 days after the date of this prospectus.
97
We intend to register on a registration statement
on Form S-8 a total
of shares
of common stock issuable upon the exercise of options issued or
reserved for future issuance under our amended and restated 1999
stock option plan, our 2004 stock incentive plan and our 2004
employee stock purchase plan. The Form S-8 will permit the
resale in the public market of shares so registered by
non-affiliates without restriction under the Securities Act.
98
PLAN OF DISTRIBUTION
In accordance with the terms of the underwriting
agreement between WR Hambrecht + Co, LLC and The
Seidler Companies Incorporated, as representatives of the
underwriters, and us, each underwriter has agreed to purchase
from us that number of shares of common stock set forth opposite
the underwriters name below at the public offering price
less the underwriting discounts and commissions described on the
cover page of this prospectus.
The underwriting agreement provides that the
obligations of the underwriters are subject to conditions,
including the absence of any material adverse change in our
business, and the receipt of certificates, opinions and letters
from us and counsel. Subject to those conditions, the
underwriters are committed to purchase all of the shares of our
common stock offered by this prospectus if any of the shares are
purchased.
The underwriters propose to offer the shares of
our common stock directly to the public at the offering price
set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, as this price is
determined by the OpenIPO process described below, and to
certain dealers at this price less a concession not in excess of
$ per
share. The underwriters may allow, and dealers may reallow, a
concession not to exceed
$ per
share on sales to other dealers. Any dealers that participate in
the distribution of our common stock may be deemed to be
underwriters within the meaning of the Securities Act, and any
discount, commission or concession received by them and any
provided by the sale of the shares by them may be deemed to be
underwriting discounts and commissions under the Securities Act.
After completion of the initial public offering of the shares,
the underwriters may change the public offering price and other
selling terms.
The following table shows the per share and total
underwriting discount to be paid to the underwriters by us in
connection with this offering. The underwriting discount has
been determined through negotiations between us and the
underwriters, and has been calculated as a percentage of the
offering price. These amounts are shown assuming both no
exercise and full exercise of the over-allotment option.
The expenses of the offering, exclusive of the
underwriting discounts, will be approximately
$ .
We have also agreed to reimburse the underwriters for certain
fees and expenses. These fees and expenses are payable entirely
by us. These fees include, among other things, our legal and
accounting fees, printing expenses, expenses incurred in
connection with meetings with potential investors, filing fees
of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the National
Association of Securities Dealers, Inc., fees of our transfer
agent and registrar and the listing fees of the Nasdaq National
Market.
An electronic prospectus is available on the
website maintained by WR Hambrecht + Co and The
Seidler Companies Incorporated, two of the underwriters in this
offering, and may also be made available on websites maintained
by selected dealers and selling group members participating in
this offering.
The OpenIPO Auction Process
The distribution method being used in this
offering is known as the OpenIPO auction, which differs from
methods traditionally used in underwritten public offerings. In
particular, the public offering price and the allocation of
shares are determined primarily by an auction conducted by the
underwriters. All qualified individual and institutional
investors may place bids in an OpenIPO auction and investors
submitting valid bids have an equal opportunity to receive an
allocation of shares.
99
The following describes how the underwriters and
some selected dealers conduct the auction process and confirm
bids from prospective investors:
Before the registration statement relating to
this offering becomes effective, the underwriters and
participating dealers solicit bids from prospective investors
through the Internet and by telephone and facsimile. The bids
specify the number of shares of our common stock the potential
investor proposes to purchase and the price the potential
investor is willing to pay for the shares. These bids may be
above or below the range set forth on the cover page of the
prospectus. The minimum size of any bid is 100 shares.
The shares offered by this prospectus may not be
sold, nor may offers to buy be accepted, prior to the time that
the registration statement filed with the Securities and
Exchange Commission becomes effective. A bid received by
the underwriters or a dealer involves no obligation or
commitment of any kind prior to the closing of the auction. Bids
can be modified or revoked at any time prior to the closing of
the auction.
Approximately two business days prior to the
registration statement being declared effective, prospective
investors receive, by e-mail, telephone or facsimile, a notice
indicating the proposed effective date Potential investors may
at any time expressly request that all, or any specific,
communications between them and the underwriters and
participating dealers be made by specific means of
communication, including e-mail, telephone and facsimile. The
underwriters and participating dealers will contact the
potential investors in the manner they request.
After the registration statement relating to this
offering has become effective, potential investors who have
submitted bids to the underwriters or a dealer are contacted by
e-mail, telephone or facsimile. Potential investors are advised
that the registration statement has been declared effective and
that the auction may close in as little as one hour following
effectiveness. Bids will continue to be accepted in the time
period after the registration statement is declared effective
but before the auction closes. Bidders may also withdraw their
bids in the time period following effectiveness but before the
close of the auction.
We will require that bidders reconfirm the bids
that they have submitted in the offering if any of the following
events shall occur:
If a reconfirmation of bids is required, we will
send an electronic notice to everyone who has submitted a bid
notifying them that they must reconfirm their bids by contacting
the underwriters or participating dealers with which they have
their brokerage accounts. Bidders will have the ability to
cancel, modify or reconfirm their bid at any time until the
auction closes. If bidders do not reconfirm their bids before
the auction is closed, we and the underwriters will disregard
their bids in the auction, and they will be deemed to have been
withdrawn.
100
If, prior to the date on which the SEC declares
our registration statement effective, there is a change in the
price range or the number of shares to be sold in our offering,
in each case in a manner that is not otherwise material to our
offering, we and the underwriters will:
In these situations, the underwriters could
accept your bid after the SEC declares the registration
statement effective without requiring you to reconfirm. However,
the underwriters may decide at any time to require you to
reconfirm your bid, and if you fail to do so, your bid will be
invalid.
The auction will close and a public offering
price will be determined after the registration statement
becomes effective at a time agreed to by us and WR
Hambrecht + Co, which we anticipate will be after the
close of trading on the Nasdaq National Market on the same day
on which the registration statement is declared effective. The
auction may close in as little as one hour following
effectiveness of the registration statement. However, the date
and time at which the auction will close and a public offering
price will be determined cannot currently be predicted and will
be determined by us and WR Hambrecht + Co based on
general market conditions during the period after the
registration statement is declared effective. If we are unable
to close the auction, determine a public offering price and file
a final prospectus with the Securities and Exchange Commission
within 15 days after the registration statement is
initially declared effective, we will be required to file with
the Securities and Exchange Commission and have declared
effective a post-effective amendment to the registration
statement before the auction may be closed and before any bids
may be accepted.
Once a potential investor submits its bid, the
bid remains valid unless subsequently withdrawn by the potential
investor. Potential investors are able to withdraw their bids at
any time before the close of the auction by notifying the
underwriters or a participating dealer.
Following the closing of the auction, the
underwriters determine the highest price at which all of the
shares offered, including shares that may be purchased by the
underwriters to cover any over-allotments, may be sold to
potential investors. This price, which is called the
clearing price, is determined based on the results
of all valid bids at the time the auction is closed. The
clearing price is not necessarily the public offering price,
which is set as described in Determination of Public
Offering Price below. The public offering price determines
the allocation of shares to potential investors, with all valid
bids submitted at or above the public offering price receiving a
pro rata portion of the shares bid for.
You will have the ability to withdraw your bid at
any time until the closing of the auction. The underwriters will
accept successful bids by sending notice of acceptance after the
auction closes and a public offering price has been determined,
and bidders who submitted successful bids will be obligated to
purchase the shares allocated to them regardless of
(1) whether such bidders are aware that the registration
statement has been declared effective and that the auction has
closed or (2) whether they are aware that the notice of
acceptance of that bid has been sent. Once the auction has
closed, a public offering price has been determined and notices
of acceptance have been sent, the underwriters will not cancel
or reject a valid bid.
Once the auction closes and a clearing price is
set as described below, the underwriters or a participating
dealer accept the bids from those bidders whose bid is at or
above the public offering price but may allocate to a
prospective investor fewer shares than the number included in
the investors bid, as described in Allocation of
Shares below.
101
Determination of Public Offering
Price
The public offering price for this offering is
ultimately determined by negotiation between the underwriters
and us after the auction closes and does not necessarily bear
any direct relationship to our assets, current earnings or book
value or to any other established criteria of value, although
these factors are considered in establishing the initial public
offering price. Prior to the offering, there has been no public
market for our common stock. The principal factor in
establishing the public offering price is the clearing price
resulting from the auction. The clearing price is used by the
underwriters and us as the principal benchmark in determining
the public offering price for the stock that will be sold in
this offering.
The clearing price is the highest price at which
all of the shares offered, including the shares that may be
purchased by the underwriters to cover any over-allotments, may
be sold to potential investors, based on the valid bids at the
time the auction is run. The shares subject to the
underwriters over-allotment option are used to calculate
the clearing price whether or not the option is actually
exercised.
Depending on the outcome of negotiations between
the underwriters and us, the public offering price may be lower,
but will not be higher, than the clearing price. The bids
received in the auction and the resulting clearing price are the
principal factors used to determine the public offering price of
the stock that will be sold in this offering. The public
offering price may be lower than the clearing price depending on
a number of additional factors, including general market trends
or conditions, the underwriters assessment of our
management, operating results, capital structure and business
potential and the demand and price of similar securities of
comparable companies. The underwriters and us may also agree to
a public offering price that is lower than the clearing price in
order to facilitate a wider distribution of the stock to be sold
in the offering.
The public offering price always determines the
allocation of shares to potential investors. Therefore, if the
public offering price is below the clearing price, all valid
bids that are at or above the public offering price receive a
pro rata portion of the shares bid for. If sufficient bids are
not received, or if we do not consider the clearing price to be
adequate, or if the underwriters and we are not able to reach
agreement on the public offering price, then the underwriters
and we will either postpone or cancel this offering.
Alternatively, we may file with the SEC a post-effective
amendment to the registration statement in order to conduct a
new auction.
The following simplified example illustrates how
the public offering price is determined through the auction
process:
Company X offers to sell 1,000 shares in its
public offering through the auction process. The underwriters,
on behalf of Company X, receive five bids to purchase, all of
which are kept confidential until the auction closes.
The first bid is to pay $10.00 per share for
200 shares. The second bid is to pay $9.00 per share
for 300 shares. The third bid is to pay $8.00 per
share for 600 shares. The fourth bid is to pay
$7.00 per share for 400 shares. The fifth bid is to
pay $6.00 per share for 800 shares.
Assuming that none of these bids are withdrawn or
modified before the auction closes, and assuming that no
additional bids are received, the clearing price used to
determine the public offering price would be $8.00 per
share, which is the highest price at which all 1,000 shares
offered may be sold to potential investors who have submitted
valid bids. However, the shares may be sold at a price below
$8.00 per share based on negotiations between Company X and
the underwriters.
If the public offering price is the same as the
$8.00 per share clearing price, the underwriters would
accept bids at or above $8.00 per share. Because
1,100 shares were bid for at or above the clearing price,
each of the three potential investors who bid $8.00 per
share or more would receive approximately 90% of the shares for
which bids were made. The two potential investors whose bids
were below $8.00 per share would not receive any shares in
this example.
If the public offering price is $7.00 per
share, the underwriters would accept bids that were made at or
above $7.00 per share. No bids made at a price of less than
$7.00 per share would be accepted. The four potential
investors with the highest bids would receive a pro rata portion
of the 1,000 shares offered, based on
102
As described in Allocation of Shares
below, because bids that are reduced on a pro rata basis may be
rounded down to round lots, a potential investor may be
allocated less than two-thirds of the shares bid for. Thus, the
potential investor who bid for 200 shares may receive a pro
rata allocation of 100 shares (one-half of the shares bid
for), rather than receiving a pro rata allocation of
133 shares (two-thirds of the shares bid for).
The following table illustrates the example
described above, before rounding down any bids to the nearest
round lot, assuming that the initial public offering price is
set at $8.00 per share. The table also assumes that these
bids are the final bids, and that they reflect any modifications
that have been made to reflect any prior changes to the offering
range, and to avoid the issuance of fractional shares.
Initial Public Offering of Company X
Allocation of Shares
Bidders receiving a pro rata portion of the
shares they bid for generally receive an allocation of shares on
a round-lot basis, rounded to multiples of 100 or
1,000 shares, depending on the size of the bid. No bids are
rounded to a round lot higher than the original bid size.
Because bids may be rounded down to round lots in multiples of
100 or 1,000 shares, some bidders may receive allocations
of shares that reflect a greater percentage decrease in their
original bid than the average pro rata decrease. Thus, for
example, if a bidder has confirmed a bid for 200 shares,
and there is an average pro rata decrease of all bids of 30%,
the bidder may receive an allocation of 100 shares (a 50%
decrease from 200 shares) rather than receiving an
allocation of 140 shares (a 30% decrease from
200 shares). In addition, some bidders may receive
allocations of shares that reflect a lesser percentage decrease
in their original bid than the average pro rata decrease. For
example, if a bidder has submitted a bid for 100 shares,
and there is an average pro rata decrease of all bids of 30%,
the bidder may receive an allocation of all 100 shares to
avoid having the bid rounded down to zero.
Generally the allocation of shares in the
offering will be determined in the following manner:
103
The remaining 37 stub shares are not enough
shares to enable Bid 1 to be rounded up to a round lot of
100 shares. Therefore the remaining 37 unallocated stub
shares would be allocated to smaller orders that are below their
bid amounts. The table below illustrates the allocations in the
example above.
Initial Public Offering of Company X
Requirements for Valid Bids
Valid bids are those that meet the requirements,
including eligibility, account status and size, established by
the underwriters or participating dealers. In order to open a
brokerage account with WR Hambrecht + Co, a potential
investor must deposit $2,000 in its account. This brokerage
account will be a general account subject to WR
Hambrecht + Cos customary rules, and will not be
limited to this offering. In addition, within one hour of the
auction closing, a prospective investor submitting a bid through
a WR Hambrecht + Co brokerage account must have an
account balance equal to or in excess of the amount of its bid
or WR Hambrecht + Co may not accept its bid. The
auction may close in as little as one hour after the
registration statement is declared effective. However, other
than the $2,000 described above, prospective investors are not
required to deposit any money into their accounts until after
the registration statement becomes effective. No funds will be
transferred to WR Hambrecht + Co, and any amounts in
excess of $2,000 may be withdrawn at any time until the auction
closes and the bid is accepted. Conditions for valid bids,
including eligibility standards and account funding requirements
of The Seidler Companies Incorporated and participating dealers
other than WR Hambrecht + Co, may vary.
The Closing of the Auction and Allocation of
Shares
The auction will close on a date and at a time
estimated and publicly disclosed in advance by the underwriters
on the websites of WR Hambrecht + Co at
www.wrhambrecht.com and
www.openipo.com
. The auction may
close in as little as one hour following effectiveness of the
registration statement.
The shares
offered by this prospectus,
or shares
if the underwriters over-allotment option is exercised in
full, will be purchased from us by the underwriters and sold
through the underwriters and participating dealers to investors
who have submitted valid bids at or higher than the public
offering price.
The underwriters or a participating dealer notify
successful bidders by sending a notice of acceptance by e-mail,
telephone or facsimile or mail informing bidders that the
auction has closed and that their bids have been accepted. The
notice will indicate the price and number of shares that have
been allocated to the successful bidder. Other bidders are
notified that their bids have not been accepted.
Each participating dealer has agreed with the
underwriters to sell the shares it purchases from the
underwriters in accordance with the auction process described
above, unless the underwriters otherwise
104
Some dealers participating in the selling group
may submit firm bids that reflect indications of interest from
their customers that they have received at prices within the
initial public offering price range. In these cases, the dealer
submitting the bid is treated as the bidder for the purposes of
determining the clearing price and allocation of shares.
Price and volume volatility in the market for our
common stock may result from the somewhat unique nature of the
proposed plan of distribution. Price and volume volatility in
the market for our common stock after the completion of this
offering may adversely affect the market price of our common
stock.
We have granted to the underwriters an option,
exercisable no later than 30 days after the date of this
prospectus, to purchase up to an aggregate
of additional
shares of our common stock from us at the offering price, less
the underwriting discounts and commissions set forth on the
cover page of this prospectus. To the extent that the
underwriters exercise this option, they will have a firm
commitment to purchase the additional shares and we will be
obligated to sell the additional shares to the underwriters. The
underwriters may exercise the option only to cover
over-allotments made in connection with the sale of shares
offered. The underwriting agreement provides that we will
indemnify the underwriters against specified liabilities,
including liabilities under the Securities Act, or contribute to
payments that the underwriters may be required to make.
We have agreed not to offer, sell, contract to
sell, pledge, grant any option to purchase, make any short sale
or otherwise dispose of any shares of common stock, or any
options or warrants to purchase common stock other than the
shares of common stock or options to acquire common stock issued
under our stock plans, for a period of 180 days after the
date of this prospectus, except with the prior written consent
of WR Hambrecht + Co. Each of our directors and
executive officers and additional holders of
approximately % of our
outstanding capital stock have agreed to restrictions on their
ability to sell, offer, contract or grant any option to sell,
pledge, transfer or otherwise dispose of shares of our common
stock for a period of 180 days in the case of our directors
and officers and certain holders of our common stock, and
90 days in the case of certain other holders of our common
stock, after the date of this prospectus, without the prior
written consent of WR Hambrecht + Co. The persons
signing the lock-up agreements will be able to transfer their
shares of common stock as a bona fide gift to immediate family
members or to a trust or partnership or other business entity,
or as a distribution without compensation to partners, members
or shareholders of a business entity, subject to the transferees
agreeing to enter into a lock-up agreement. In considering any
request to release shares subject to a lock-up agreement,
WR Hambrecht + Co will consider the possible
impact of the release of the shares on the trading price of the
stock sold in the offering.
In connection with the offering, the underwriters
may purchase and sell shares of common stock in the open market.
These transactions may include short sales, stabilizing
transactions and purchases to cover positions created by short
sales. Any short sales made by the underwriters would be made at
the public offering price. Short sales involve the sale by the
underwriters of a greater number of shares than they are
required to purchase in the offering. Covered short
sales are sales made in an amount not greater than the
underwriters option to purchase additional shares from us
in the offering. The underwriters may close out any covered
short position by either exercising its option to purchase
additional shares or purchasing shares in the open market. As
described above, the number of shares that may be sold pursuant
to the underwriters overallotment option is included in
the calculation of the clearing price. In determining the source
of shares to close out the covered short position, the
underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of
shares available for purchase in the open market as compared to
the price at which they may purchase shares through
105
The underwriters may also impose a penalty bid.
This occurs when a particular underwriter repays to the
underwriters a portion of the underwriting discount received by
it because one underwriter has repurchased shares sold by or for
the account of the other underwriter in stabilizing or short
covering transactions.
These activities by the underwriters may
stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect the market price of the
common stock. As a result, the price of the common stock may be
higher than the price that otherwise might exist in the open
market. If these activities are commenced, the underwriters may
discontinue them at any time. These transactions may be effected
on the Nasdaq National Market, in the over-the-counter market or
otherwise.
WR Hambrecht + Co, LLC, The Seidler
Companies Incorporated and at least one other selling group
member currently intend to act as a market maker for the common
stock following this offering. However, they are not obligated
to do so and may discontinue any market making at any time.
Indemnity
The underwriting agreement contains covenants of
indemnity between the underwriter and us against certain civil
liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act, and
liabilities arising from breaches of representations and
warranties contained in the underwriting agreement.
VALIDITY OF THE SECURITIES
The validity of our common stock offered by this
prospectus will be passed upon for us by Morrison &
Foerster LLP, Los Angeles, California. The validity of the
common stock offered by this prospectus will be passed upon for
the underwriters by Manatt, Phelps & Phillips, LLP, Costa
Mesa, California.
EXPERTS
The consolidated financial statements of BofI
Holding, Inc. included in this prospectus have been audited by
Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public
accounting firm, as stated in their report appearing herein, and
has been so included in reliance upon the report of such firm
given upon their authority as experts in accounting and auditing.
106
WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION
We have filed a registration statement on
Form S-1 with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or
the SEC. This prospectus, which is part of the registration
statement, does not contain all the information included in the
registration statement. Because some information is omitted, you
should refer to the registration statement and its exhibits. For
copies of actual contracts of documents referred to in this
prospectus, you should refer to the exhibits attached to the
registration statement. You may review a copy of the
registration statement, including the attached exhibits, at the
SECs Public Reference Room:
Public Reference Room
You may obtain information on the operation of
the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330.
The SEC also maintains an Internet site that contains reports,
proxy statements, and other information regarding issuers that
file electronically with the SEC. The address of the SECs
website is http://www.sec.gov.
107
BOFI HOLDING, INC.
F-1
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC
ACCOUNTING FIRM
Board of Directors and Stockholders
We have audited the accompanying consolidated
balance sheets of Bofl Holding, Inc. and subsidiary (the
Company) as of June 30, 2004 and 2003, and the
related consolidated statements of income, stockholders
equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the
period ended June 30, 2004. These consolidated financial
statements are the responsibility of the Companys
management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these
financial statements based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with
standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board
(United States). Those standards require that we plan and
perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether
the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An
audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An
audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and
significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating
the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that
our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, such consolidated financial
statements present fairly, in all material respects, the
financial position of Bofl Holding, Inc. and subsidiary as of
June 30, 2004 and 2003, and the results of their operations
and their cash flows for each of the three years in the
period ended June 30, 2004, in conformity with accounting
principles generally accepted in the United States of America.
Los Angeles, California
F-2
BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-3
BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-4
BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDERS
EQUITY
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-5
BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH
FLOWS
F-6
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH
FLOWS (Continued)
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-7
BofI HOLDING, INC. AND SUBSIDIARY
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
Basis of Presentation and
Consolidation
The
consolidated financial statements include the accounts of BofI
Holding, Inc. and its wholly owned subsidiary, Bank of Internet
USA (collectively, the Company). All significant
intercompany balances have been eliminated in consolidation.
BofI Holding, Inc. was incorporated in the State
of Delaware on July 6, 1999 for the purpose of organizing
and launching an Internet-based savings bank. The Bank of
Internet USA (the Bank), which opened for business
over the Internet on July 4, 2000, is subject to regulation
and examination by the Office of Thrift Supervision
(OTS), its primary regulator. The Federal Deposit
Insurance Corporation (FDIC) insures the Banks
deposit accounts up to the maximum allowable amount.
During the year ended June 30, 2003, the
Company changed its name from BofI.com Holding, Inc.
to BofI Holding, Inc.
Unaudited Interim Financial
Information
The
accompanying unaudited interim consolidated balance sheet as of
September 30, 2004, the consolidated statements of income
for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003, the
consolidated statements of cash flows for the three months ended
September 30, 2004 and 2003 and the consolidated statement
of stockholders equity for the three months ended
September 30, 2004 are unaudited. These unaudited interim
consolidated financial statements have been prepared in
accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.
In the opinion of the Companys management, the unaudited
interim consolidated financial statements have been prepared on
the same basis as the audited consolidated financial statements
and include all adjustments necessary for the fair presentation
of the Companys statement of financial position at
September 30, 2004, its results of operations and its cash
flows for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and
2003. The results for the three months ended September 30,
2004 are not necessarily indicative of the results to be
expected for the year ending June 30, 2005.
Use of
Estimates
In preparing
consolidated financial statements in conformity with accounting
principles generally accepted in the United States of America,
management is required to make estimates and assumptions that
affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the
date of the balance sheet and reported amounts of revenues and
expenses during the reporting period. Actual results may differ
from those estimates. Material estimates that are particularly
susceptible to significant change in the near term relate to the
determination of the allowance for loan losses and the valuation
of deferred tax assets.
Business
The Bank provides financial services to consumers through the
Internet. The Banks deposit products are demand accounts,
savings accounts and time deposits marketed to consumers located
in all fifty states. The Banks primary lending products
are residential single family and multifamily mortgage loans.
Cash
Equivalents
Cash and cash
equivalents include cash and due from banks, money market mutual
funds and federal funds sold, all of which have original
maturities within ninety days.
Federal Reserve Board regulations require
depository institutions to maintain certain minimum reserve
balances. Included in cash were balances maintained at the
Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco of $684 at
September 30, 2004 and $770 and $1,037 at June 30,
2004 and 2003, respectively.
Interest Rate
Risk
The Banks
assets and liabilities are generally monetary in nature and
interest rate changes have an effect on the Banks
performance. The Bank decreases the effect of interest rate
changes on its performance by striving to match maturities and
interest sensitivity between loans and deposits. A significant
change in interest rates could have a material effect on the
Banks results of operations.
F-8
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
Deferred Loan Fees and
Costs
Loan origination
fees and certain direct origination costs for loans held for
investment are capitalized and recognized as an adjustment to
the interest yield of the related loans over their estimated
lives.
Loans Held for
Sale
Loans originated and
intended for sale in the secondary market are carried at the
lower of cost or estimated fair value in the aggregate. Net
unrealized losses, if any, are recognized through a valuation
allowance by charges to income.
Allowance for Loan
Losses
The allowance for
loan losses is maintained at a level estimated to provide for
probable losses in the loan portfolio. Management determines the
adequacy of the allowance based upon reviews of individual loans
and pools of loans, recent loss experience, current economic
conditions, the risk characteristics of the various categories
of loans and other pertinent factors. This evaluation is
inherently subjective and requires estimates that are
susceptible to significant revision as more information becomes
available. The allowance is increased by the provision for loan
losses, net of recoveries of loans previously charged-off, which
is charged against current period operating results. The
allowance is decreased by the amount of charge-offs of loans
deemed uncollectible.
A loan is considered impaired when, based on
current information and events, it is probable that the Bank
will be unable to collect the scheduled payments of principal or
interest when due according to the contractual terms of the loan
agreement. Factors considered by management in determining
impairment include payment status, collateral value and the
probability of collecting scheduled principal and interest
payments when due. Loans that experience insignificant payment
delays and payment shortfalls generally are not classified as
impaired. Impairment is measured on a loan by loan basis by
either the present value of expected future cash flows
discounted at the loans effective interest rate or the
fair value of the collateral if repayment of the loan is
expected primarily from the sale of the collateral.
Investment Securities Available for
Sale
Securities
available-for-sale are reported at estimated fair value, with
unrealized gains and losses, net of the related tax effects,
excluded from operations and reported as a separate component of
accumulated other comprehensive income or loss. Amortization of
premiums and accretion of discounts on securities are recorded
as yield adjustments on such securities using the effective
interest method. The specific identification method is used for
purposes of determining cost in computing realized gains and
losses on investment securities sold. At each reporting date,
available-for-sale securities are assessed to determine whether
there is an other-than-temporary impairment. Such impairment is
required to be recognized in current earnings rather than other
comprehensive income or loss.
Investment Securities Held to
Maturity
Securities that
management has the positive intent and ability to hold to
maturity are classified as held to maturity and
recorded at amortized cost. Purchase premiums and discounts are
recognized in interest income using the interest method over the
terms of the securities. Declines in the fair value of
held-to-maturity securities below their cost that are deemed to
be other-than-temporary are reflected in earnings as realized
losses.
Furniture, Equipment and
Software
Fixed asset
purchases in excess of five hundred dollars are capitalized and
recorded at cost. Depreciation is computed using the
straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the
assets, which is three to seven years. Leasehold improvements
are amortized over the lesser of the assets useful lives
or the lease term.
Interest Income on
Loans
Interest on loans is
generally recorded over the terms of the loans based on the
unpaid principal balances. Accrual of interest is discontinued
when either principal or interest becomes 90 days past due
or when, in managements opinion, collectibility of such
interest is doubtful. In addition, accrued but uncollected
interest is reversed when a loan becomes 90 days past due.
F-9
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
Premiums and Discounts on Loans
Purchased
Premiums and
discounts on loans purchased from third parties are capitalized
and amortized or accreted over the expected lives of the loans
as an adjustment to yield. Such premiums and discounts are
classified with the loan balance to which they relate for
financial reporting purposes.
Income
Taxes
Deferred income tax
assets and liabilities are determined using the liability (or
balance sheet) method. Under this method, the net deferred tax
asset or liability is determined based on the tax effects of the
temporary differences between the book and tax bases of the
various balance sheet assets and liabilities and gives current
recognition to changes in tax rates and laws. The Company
records a valuation allowance when management believes it is
more likely than not that deferred tax assets will not be
realized.
Earnings Per
Share
Earnings per share
are presented under two formats: basic EPS and diluted EPS.
Basic EPS is computed by dividing the net income (after
deducting dividends on preferred stock) by the weighted average
number of common shares outstanding during the year. Diluted EPS
is computed by dividing the net income (after deducting
dividends on preferred stock) by the weighted-average number of
common shares outstanding during the year, plus the impact of
dilutive potential common shares, such as stock options and
stock warrants. The impact on earnings per share from the
convertible preferred stock is anti-dilutive.
Stock
Options
The Company
accounts for its stock-based employee compensation under the
recognition and measurement principles of APB Opinion
No. 25,
Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,
and related interpretations. No stock-based employee
compensation cost is reflected in the income statements, as all
options granted under those plans are granted with exercise
prices not less than the fair market value of the Companys
common stock on the date of grant. The following table
illustrates the effect on net income and net income per share
had the Company applied the fair value recognition provisions of
Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS)
No. 123,
Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,
to
stock-based employee compensation.
F-10
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
The weighted-average grant-date fair values of
options granted were calculated using the following assumptions:
The weighted-average fair value at grant date for
the options granted during the three months ended
September 30, 2004 was $2.37 and during the year ended
June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $2.52, $1.83 and
$2.97 per share, respectively.
New Accounting
Pronouncements
In March
2004, Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) Staff
Accounting Bulletin No. 105 (SAB 105) was
issued, which provides guidance regarding loan commitments that
are accounted for as derivative instruments under FASB
No. 133 (as amended),
Accounting for Derivative
Instruments and Hedging Activities.
In this Bulletin, the
SEC ruled that the amount of the expected servicing rights
should not be included when determining the fair value of
derivative interest rate lock commitments. This guidance must be
applied to rate locks initiated after March 31, 2004. The
adoption of SAB 105 did not have a material impact on the
Companys consolidated financial statements.
In December 2003, the FASB issued Interpretation
No. 46R (FIN 46R), which revised the
January 2003, Interpretation No. 46
(FIN 46),
Consolidation of Variable Interest
Entities,
an interpretation of Accounting Research Bulletin
No. 51. The revision clarifies how variable interest
entities should be identified and evaluated for consolidation
purposes. The Company adopted FIN 46R as of June 30,
2004. The adoption of FIN 46R did not have a material
impact on the Companys consolidated financial statements.
In December 2003, the Accounting Standards
Executive Committee of the AICPA issued Statement of Position
No. 03-3 (SOP 03-3),
Accounting for Certain
Loans or Debt Securities Acquired in a Transfer.
SOP 03-3
addresses the accounting for differences between contractual
cash flows and the cash flows expected to be collected from
purchased loans or debt securities if those differences are
attributable, in part, to credit quality. SOP 03-3 requires
purchased loans and debt securities to be recorded initially at
fair value based on the present value of the cash flows expected
to be collected with no carryover of any valuation allowance
previously recognized by the seller. Interest income should be
recognized based on the effective yield from the cash flows
expected to be collected. To the extent that the purchased loans
or debt securities experience subsequent deterioration in credit
quality, a valuation allowance would be established for any
additional cash flows that are not expected to be received.
However, if more cash flows subsequently are expected to be
received than originally estimated, the effective yield would be
adjusted on a prospective basis. SOP 03-3 will be effective for
loans and debt securities acquired after December 31, 2004.
Management does not expect the adoption of this statement to
have a material impact on the Companys consolidated
financial statements.
In March 2004, the Emerging Issues Task Force
(EITF) reached consensus on the guidance provided in
EITF Issue No. 03-1,
The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary
Impairment and its Application to Certain Investments
(EITF 03-1), as applicable to debt and
equity securities that are within the scope of
SFAS No. 115,
Accounting for Certain Investments in
Debt and Equity Securities
and equity securities that are
accounted for using the cost method specified in Accounting
Policy Board Opinion No. 18
The Equity Method of
Accounting for Investments in Common Stock.
An investment is
impaired if the fair value of the
F-11
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
investment is less than its cost. EITF 03-1
outlines an impairment would be considered other-than-temporary
unless: a) the investor has the ability and intent to hold
an investment for a reasonable period of time sufficient for the
recovery of the fair value up to (or beyond) the cost of the
investment, and b) evidence indicating that the cost of the
investment is recoverable within a reasonable period of time
outweighs evidence to the contrary. Although not presumptive, a
pattern of selling investments prior to the forecasted recovery
of fair value may call into question the investors intent.
In addition, the severity and duration of the impairment should
also be considered in determining whether the impairment is
other-than-temporary. In September 2004, the FASB staff issued a
proposed Board-directed FASB Staff Position, FSP EITF Issue
03-1-a,
Implementation Guidance for the Application of
Paragraph 16 of EITF Issue No. 03-1.
The proposed FSP would
provide implementation guidance with respect to debt securities
that are impaired solely due to interest rates and/or sector
spreads and analyzed for other-than-temporary impairment under
paragraph 16 of Issue 03-1. The Board also issued FSP EITF
Issue 03-1-b, which delays the effective date for the
measurement and recognition guidance contained in
paragraphs 10-20 of EITF 03-1. The delay does not
suspend the requirement to recognize other-than-temporary
impairments as required by existing authoritative literature.
Adoption of this standard may cause the Company to recognize
impairment losses in the Consolidated Statements of Income which
would not have been recognized under the current guidance or to
recognize such losses in earlier periods, especially those due
to increases in interest rates. Since fluctuations in the fair
value for available-for-sale securities are already recorded in
Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss, adoption of this standard
is not expected to have a significant impact on
stockholders equity.
Reclassifications
Certain amounts in the prior-period financial statements have
been reclassified to conform to the current-period presentation.
The Company had insured time deposits at various
financial institutions totaling $8,909 at September 30,
2004 and $9,503 and $11,872 at June 30, 2004 and 2003,
respectively. The carrying amounts of such investments as shown
in the balance sheets are at cost. Time deposits of $6,034 will
mature within one year and $2,875 will mature within one to five
years.
3. Investment
Securities
Available-for-sale
Amortized costs and fair value of investment securities
available-for-sale are summarized as follows:
F-12
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
Fair values of available-for-sale securities by
contractual maturity are as follows:
Held to
maturity
Amortized
costs and fair values of investment securities held to maturity
are summarized as follows:
F-13
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
Fair values of held to maturity securities by
contractual maturity are as follows:
F-14
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
The composition of the portfolio of loans held
for investment is as follows:
An analysis of the allowance for loan losses is
as follows:
At September 30, 2004 and June 30, 2004
and 2003, approximately 63.5%, 64.5% and 70.0%, respectively, of
the Companys loans are collaterialized with real-property
collateral located in California and therefore exposed to
economic conditions within this market region.
In the ordinary course of business, the Company
has granted loans collaterialized by real property to principal
officers, directors and their affiliates and employees with
interest rates ranging from 4.5% to 7.875%. New loans granted to
principal officers, directors and their affiliates and employees
were none, none and $1,230 during the years ended June 30,
2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively. Total principal payments were
$413, $2,007 and $26 during the years ended June 30, 2004,
2003 and 2002, respectively. At September 30, 2004 and
June 30, 2004 and 2003, these loans amounted to $950, $953
and $1,366, respectively, and are included in loans held for
investment. Interest earned on these loans was $9, $13, $52,
$123 and $176 during the three months ended
September 30, 2004 and 2003 and the years ended
June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.
The Company had no loans on nonaccrual and no
impaired loans as of September 30, 2004 and 2003 and
June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002.
F-15
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
The Companys loan portfolio consists of
approximately 8% fixed interest rate loans and 92% adjustable
interest rate loans as of September 30, 2004. The
Companys adjustable rate loans are generally based upon
indices using U.S. Treasuries, LIBOR, and 11
th
District cost of funds.
As of September 30, 2004, June 30, 2004
and 2003, purchased loans serviced by others were $160,726 or
45%, $168,035 or 47%, and $119,887 or 49%, respectively, of the
loan portfolio.
A summary of the cost and accumulated
depreciation for furniture, equipment and software is as follows:
Depreciation and amortization expense for the
years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002 amounted to $97,
$144 and $118, respectively. Depreciation expense for the three
months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 was $27 and $24,
respectively.
F-16
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
Deposits accounts are summarized as follows:
The scheduled maturities of time deposits are as
follows as of June 30, 2004:
At September 30, 2004, the Companys
fixed-rate advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank
(FHLB) had interest rates that ranged from 1.94% to
5.03% with a weighted-average of 3.20%. At June 30, 2004
and 2003, the Companys fixed-rate FHLB advances had
interest rates that ranged from 1.42% to 5.03% with a weighted
average of 3.19% and ranged from 2.56% to 5.21% with a weighted
average of 4.40%, respectively.
F-17
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
Fixed rate advances from FHLB are scheduled to
mature as follows:
FHLB advances have been reduced by debt issuance
costs of $425 at September 30, 2004. Debt issuance costs
are amortized using the interest method over the life of the
FHLB advance. Amortization of $29 for the three months ended
September 30, 2004 and $110 for the year ended
June 30, 2004 is included in interest expense.
The Companys advances from FHLB were
collateralized by certain real estate loans with an aggregate
unpaid balance of $149,525, $154,700 and $89,792 at
September 30, 2004, June 30, 2004 and 2003,
respectively, by the Companys investment in capital stock
of FHLB of San Francisco and by its investment in
mortgage-backed securities.
The maximum amounts advanced from the FHLB were
$121,900 during the three months ended September 30, 2004.
The maximum amounts advanced from the FHLB were $101,446,
$55,900 and $29,900 during the years ended June 30, 2004,
2003 and 2002, respectively. As of September 30, 2004, the
Company had $36,813 available for advances from the FHLB for
terms up to seven years and $4,500 available under a federal
funds line of credit with a major bank.
On October 24, 2003, the Company entered
into a $5,000 loan facility with a commercial bank consisting of
a one-year revolving line of credit plus a fully amortizing term
loan of up to nine years. Under the terms of the loan facility,
a one-time loan fee of 1% ($50) was paid at commencement and
interest is payable quarterly at prime plus 1% per annum.
Principal is payable in 36 equal quarterly installments starting
on January 24, 2005. The Company may prepay all or a
portion of the principal at any time without a prepayment
penalty. At September 30, 2004, the note payable balance
was $3,300 and the interest rate was 5.75%.
The loan facility is collateralized by the
Banks common stock. Under the terms of the loan facility,
the Company is bound by a number of significant covenants that
restrict the Companys ability, out of the ordinary course
of business, to dispose of assets, to incur additional debt or
guarantees, to invest in or acquire any interest in another
enterprise and a change in the Company ownership by 51% or more.
The credit agreement also requires the Company to maintain a
debt coverage ratio of 1.50 times. At September 30, 2004 and
F-18
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
June 30, 2004, management believes the
Company was in compliance with all such covenants and
restrictions and does not anticipate that such covenants and
restrictions will limit its operations.
On December 13, 2004, the Company entered
into an agreement to form a trust and to establish $5,000 of
trust preferred securities in a transaction expected to close on
December 16, 2004. When consummated, the net proceeds from
the offering will be used to purchase a like amount of junior
subordinated debentures (Debentures) of the Company.
The Debentures will be the sole assets of the trust. The trust
preferred securities are expected to be mandatorily redeemable
upon maturity, or upon earlier redemption as provided in the
indenture. The Company will have the right to redeem the
Debentures in whole (but not in part) on or after specific
dates, at a redemption price specified in the indenture plus any
accrued but unpaid interest through the redemption date. When
consummated, the Company expects the principal balance of the
Debentures to be $5,155, with a stated maturity of
30 years. Interest will accrue at the rate of three-month
LIBOR plus 2.4%, with interest to be distributed quarterly
starting in February 2005.
The provision (benefit) for income taxes is as
follows:
The differences between the statutory federal
income tax rate and the effective tax rates are summarized as
follows:
F-19
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
The components of the net deferred tax asset are
as follows:
As of September 30, 2004, the Company has a
state net operating loss carryforward available to offset future
state tax liabilities of $312. Such state net operating loss
carryforward expires at various dates beginning in 2008.
The Company establishes a valuation allowance if,
based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely
than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets
will not be realized. As of September 30, 2004 and
June 30, 2004 and 2003, the Company believes that it will
have sufficient earnings to realize its deferred tax asset and
has not provided an allowance.
Stock
Dividend
The Company
declared a 2.5 to 1 common stock split, effected in the form of
a 150% stock dividend, to shareholders of record as of
July 4, 2001 and paid on August 15, 2001. The capital
accounts, all share data and earnings per share data in these
financial statements give effect to the stock split, applied
retroactively, to all periods presented.
1999 Stock Option
Plan
In July 1999,
the Companys Board of Directors approved the 1999 Stock
Option Plan (the Plan) as amended in May 2000. Under
the Plan, 553,875 shares are reserved for issuance as
incentive stock options and nonqualified stock options to
employees and directors of the Company. In August 2001, the
Companys shareholders approved an amendment to the Plan
such that 15% of the outstanding shares of the Company would
always be available for grants under the Plan (749,406 and
746,125 shares at September 30, 2004 and June 30,
2004, respectively). The Plan is designed to encourage selected
employees and directors to improve operations and increase
profits, to accept or continue employment or association with
the Company through participation in the growth in the value of
the common stock. Plan provisions require that option exercise
prices be not less than fair market value per share of common
stock on the option grant date for incentive and nonqualified
options. Option expiration dates are established by the plan
administrator but may not be later than ten years after the date
of the grant. As of June 30, 2004 there
F-20
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
were 2,000 options available for grant. The plan
administrator determines vesting, which may not be less than
three years nor exceed five years. Stock option activity during
the period July 1, 2001 to June 30, 2004 is presented
below.
The following table summarizes information
concerning currently outstanding and exercisable options:
F-21
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
2004 Stock Incentive
Plan
In October 2004, the
Companys Board of Directors and the stockholders approved
the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan, which provides for the grant of
stock options, restricted stock, restricted stock units, stock
appreciation rights and dividend equivalent rights to employees,
directors and consultants. The maximum number of shares of
common stock available for issuance under the 2004 Stock
Incentive Plan, plus the number of shares of common stock
available for issuance under the 1999 Stock Option Plan will be
equal to 14.8% of the Companys outstanding common stock at
any time. However, the number of shares available for issuance
as restricted stock grants may not exceed 5% of the
Companys outstanding common stock (subject to the overall
maximum of 14.8% of the outstanding shares of common stock).
Each share of restricted stock that is issued under the 2004
Stock Incentive Plan and vests will be deemed to be issuance of
three shares for purposes of calculating the overall maximum
number of shares of common stock available for issuance under
the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan but not for purposes of
calculating the above 5% limit applicable to the issuance of
restricted stock.
2004 Employee Stock Purchase
Plan
In October 2004, the
Companys Board of Directors and stockholders approved the
2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, which is intended to qualify
as an Employee Stock Purchase Plan under Section 423
of the Internal Revenue Code. An aggregate of
500,000 shares of the Companys common stock has been
reserved for issuance and will be available for purchase under
the 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan.
Common Stock and Common Stock
Warrants
During the
year ended June 30, 2000, the Company closed a private
placement of 3,694,031 shares of common stock, which were
issued for net proceeds of $13,923. In conjunction with the
private placement offering, the Company issued organizer
warrants to the founders of the Company to purchase an
additional 657,998 shares of common stock at a purchase
price of $4.19 per share.
In connection with the private placement, on
August 1, 2000 the Company issued an additional
13,125 shares of common stock for proceeds of $50,000, with
organizer warrants to purchase an additional 4,375 shares
at a purchase price of $4.19 per share. During the year
ended June 30, 2002, the Company closed its second private
placement and opened a third private placement of common stock
and equity units. The second private placement commenced on
September 3, 2001 and closed on November 16, 2001
after issuing 587,200 shares of common stock at
$10.00 per share for total proceeds of $5,769, net of issue
costs. On March 25, 2002, in order to plan for the
Companys future capital funding needs, the Company
extended the expiration date of the organizer warrants which
permit the holders to acquire 749,875 shares of our common
stock at a strike price of $4.19 by two years with all other
terms remaining the same. One of the holders of the organizer
warrants to purchase 13,125 shares of common stock was
an employee of the Company and as a result of the two year
extension of the expiration date the Company recorded salary and
employee benefits expense of $76. The remaining organizer
warrants to acquire 736,750 shares of common stock were
held by non employees and the Company recorded other general and
administrative expense of $318 as a result of the
F-22
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
two year extension of the expiration date. The
Company recorded a corresponding $394 increase to additional
paid-in capital to recognize the accounting consequences of
extending the expiration of all of the organizer warrants. All
organizer warrants now expire in July 2005 or upon the
Companys initial public offering. On June 3, 2002,
the Company commenced its third private placement by offering
units of three shares of common and one warrant for
$36.00 per unit. Each warrant entitles the holder to
purchase one share of the Companys common stock at
$14.00 per share any time during the next three years.
These warrants expire three years from the date of the
termination of the third private placement. As of June 30,
2002 the Company had issued 13,300 units representing
39,900 shares of common stock and 13,300 warrants to
purchase common stock for total proceeds of $414, net of issue
costs. Also during the year ended June 30, 2002, the
Company issued 185 shares of common stock for $1 from the
exercise of stock options.
During the year ended June 30, 2003, the
Company closed its third private placement on July 15,
2003. During July 2003, the Company issued 46,650 units
representing 139,950 shares of common stock and 46,650
warrants to purchase common stock for total proceeds of $1,654,
net of issue costs.
During the year ended June 30, 2004, the
Company issued 23,423 shares of common stock for $165
(including $55 income tax benefit) from the exercise of
nonqualified stock options and issued 8,750 shares of
common stock for $37 from the exercise of warrants.
At September 30, 2004, the Company had
deferred $418 of costs associated with its planned initial
public offering. In December 2004, the Company recorded a charge
of $59 for unrecoverable costs associated with the termination
of an agreement with one of its financial advisors during the
three months ended December 31, 2004 relating to its
planned initial public offering.
Convertible Preferred
Stock
On
October 28, 2003, the Company commenced a private placement
of Series A6% Cumulative Nonparticipating Perpetual
Preferred Stock, Convertible through January 1, 2009 (the
Convertible Preferred Stock). The rights,
preferences and privileges of the Convertible Preferred Stock
were established in a certificate filed by the Company with the
State of Delaware on October 27, 2003, and generally
include the holders right to a six percent (6%) per annum
cumulative dividend payable quarterly, the Companys right
to redeem some or all of the outstanding shares at par after
five years and the holders right to convert all or part of
the face value of his Convertible Preferred Stock into the
Companys common stock at $10.50 per share, increasing
in three increments to $18.00 per share after
January 1, 2008. The Companys right to redeem the
Convertible Preferred Stock is perpetual and starts immediately
after issuance (with a premium payable to the holder starting at
5% in the first year and declining to 1% in the fifth year). The
holders right to convert to the Companys common
stock starts immediately after purchase and expires on
January 1, 2009.
During the year ended June 30, 2004, the
Company issued $6,750 of Convertible Preferred Stock
representing 675 shares at $10,000 face value, less
issuance costs of $113. For the three quarters ended
June 30, 2004, the Company has declared and paid dividends
to holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock totaling $140. For
the three month period ended September 30, 2004, the
Company declared and paid dividends totaling $101 to the holders
of the convertible preferred stock.
F-23
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
Warrant activity during the period June 30,
2001 to September 30, 2004 is presented below:
Information used to calculate earnings per share
for the three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 and
the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002, was as
follows:
Operating
Leases
The Company
leases office space under an operating lease agreement scheduled
to expire in June 2005. The Company pays property taxes,
insurance and maintenance expenses related to this lease. Rent
expense under this lease agreement for the years ended
June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $213,
F-24
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
$169 and $131, respectively. Rent expense for the
three months ended September 30, 2004 and 2003 was $55 and
$53, respectively.
Future minimum lease payments under this
noncancelable lease as of September 30, 2004 are $166
payable during the year ended June 30, 2005.
Legal
Contingencies
Various
legal claims also arise from time to time in the normal course
of business, which in the opinion of management after discussion
with legal counsel will have no material effect on the
Companys consolidated financial statements.
Credit-Related Financial
Instruments
The
Company is a party to credit-related financial instruments with
off-balance-sheet risk in the normal course of business to meet
the financing needs of its customers. These financial
instruments are commitments to extend credit. Such commitments
involve, to varying degrees, elements of credit and interest
rate risk in excess of the amount recognized in the consolidated
balance sheets.
The Companys exposure to credit loss is
represented by the contractual amount of these commitments. The
Company follows the same credit policies in making commitments
as it does for on-balance-sheet instruments.
At September 30, 2004, the Company had
commitments to fund or purchase loans of $10,771.
Commitments to extend credit are agreements to
lend to a customer so long as there is no violation of any
condition established in the contract. Commitments generally
have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may
require payment of a fee. The commitments for equity lines of
credit may expire without being drawn upon. Therefore, the total
commitment amounts do not necessarily represent future cash
requirements. The amount of collateral obtained, if it is deemed
necessary by the Company, is based on managements credit
evaluation of the customer.
The Bank is subject to various regulatory capital
requirements administered by the federal banking agencies.
Failure to meet minimum capital requirements can initiate
certain mandatory and possibly additional discretionary actions
by regulators that, if undertaken, could have a direct material
effect on the Banks financial statements. Under capital
adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for prompt
corrective action, the Bank must meet specific capital
guidelines that involve quantitative measures of its assets,
liabilities and certain off-balance-sheet items as calculated
under regulatory accounting practices. The capital amounts and
classification are also subject to qualitative judgments by the
regulators about components, risk weightings and other factors.
Quantitative measures established by regulation
to ensure capital adequacy require the Bank to maintain minimum
amounts and ratios (set forth in the following table) of total
and Tier 1 capital (as defined in the regulations) to
risk-weighted assets (as defined) and of Tier 1 capital (as
defined) to tangible assets (as defined). As of June 30,
2004, that the Bank met all capital adequacy requirements to
which it is subject.
F-25
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
As of September 30, 2004, the most recent
notification from the OTS categorized the Bank as well
capitalized under the regulatory framework for prompt
corrective action. To be categorized as well
capitalized, an institution must maintain minimum total
risk-based, Tier 1 risk-based and Tier 1 leverage
ratios as set forth in the following table. There are no
conditions or events since the notification that management
believes have changed the Banks categorization. The
Banks actual capital amounts and ratios as of
September 30, 2004 and June 30, 2004 and 2003 are
presented in the table.
Employment
Agreements
In July 2003,
the Company entered into employment agreements with four
executive officers. Under these agreements, if the Company
terminates one or more of the executive officers for any reason
other than cause, then the Company must (a) pay that
officer normal compensation in effect through the date of
termination; (b) pay that officer a severance payment equal
to twelve times his then-current base monthly salary, payable at
the option of the Board of Directors either in one lump sum or
in twelve equal installments; and (c) continue group
insurance benefits for that officer for one year from
termination or until that officer commences work with a new
employer providing group medical insurance benefits to that
officer. In addition, if the executive officers employment
is terminated for any reason other than for cause, or that
officers employment is terminated due to death or
disability, then all stock options currently held by such
officer will fully vest as of the termination date. Each
agreement automatically renews in one-year terms unless
terminated by either Bank of Internet USA or the officer. In
addition, each
F-26
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
agreement specifies bonuses for each executive
officer, which are contingent upon the Companys financial
performance and the executive officers continued
employment with the Company. The Company accrued bonus expense
of $33 for the year ended June 30, 2004 in connection with
these executive officer bonuses.
401(k)
Plan
The Company has a
401(k) Plan whereby substantially all of its employees
participate in the Plan. Employees may contribute up to 15% of
their compensation subject to certain limits based on federal
tax laws. For the years ended June 30, 2004, 2003 and 2002
expense attributable to the Plan amounted to $2, $2 and $2,
respectively.
Deferred Compensation
Plans
Effective
August 1, 2003, the Company adopted the Bank of Internet
USA Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plans (Deferred
Compensation Plans) which cover designated key management
employees and directors who elect to participate. The Deferred
Compensation Plans allow eligible employees and directors to
elect to defer up to 100% of their compensation, including
commissions, bonuses and director fees. Although the Deferred
Compensation Plans provide that the Company may make
discretionary contributions to a participants account, no
such discretionary contributions have been made through the
period ending June 30, 2004. Participant deferrals are
fully vested at all times, and discretionary contributions, if
any, will be subject to a vesting schedule specified by the
Company. Participants in the Deferred Compensation Plans may
elect to invest their accounts in either of two accounts:
(1) which earns interest based upon the prime rate; or
(2) which mirrors the performance of the book value of the
Companys common stock. The Deferred Compensation Plans are
administrated by the Compensation Committee of the Board of
Directors. At September 30, 2004, there were
$67 deferred in connection with the Deferred Compensation
Plans.
From February 2003 to January 2004, the Company
paid two members of the Board of Directors $175 and $125 during
the years ended June 30, 2004 and 2003, respectively, to
assist in raising capital for the Company. The amounts are
included in salary and employee benefits expense.
In the ordinary course of business, the Company
has granted loans to principal officers and directors and their
affiliates more fully described in Note 3.
The fair value of a financial instrument is the
current amount that would be exchanged between willing parties,
other than in a forced liquidation. Fair value is best
determined based upon quoted market prices. However, in many
instances, there are no quoted market prices for the
Companys various financial instruments. In cases where
quoted market prices are not available, fair values are based on
estimates using present value or other valuation techniques.
Those techniques are significantly affected by the assumptions
used, including the discount rate and estimates of future cash
flows. Accordingly, the fair value estimates may not be realized
in an immediate settlement of the instrument.
SFAS No. 107 excludes certain financial instruments
and all nonfinancial instruments from its disclosure
requirements. Accordingly, the aggregate fair value amounts
presented may not necessarily represent the underlying fair
value of the Company.
The Company in estimating fair value disclosures
for financial instruments used the following methods and
assumptions:
F-27
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
F-28
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
The estimated fair values, and related carrying
or notional amounts, of the Companys financial instruments
are as follows:
The fair value estimates as of September 30,
2004 and June 30, 2004 and 2003 are based on pertinent
information available to management as of the respective dates.
Although management is not aware of any factors that would
significantly affect the estimated fair value amounts, such
amounts have not been comprehensively revalued for purposes of
these financial statements since those dates and, therefore,
current estimates of fair value may differ significantly from
the amounts presented herein.
F-29
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
The following BofI Holding, Inc. (Parent company
only) financial information should be read in conjunction with
the other notes to the consolidated financial statements:
Balance Sheets
F-30
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
Statements of Income
Statement of Cash Flows
F-31
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS
* * * * * *
F-32
BofI Holding, Inc.
Dealer Prospectus Delivery
Obligation
Until ,
2005 (25 days after the date of the offering), all dealers
that effect transactions in these securities, whether or not
participating in the offering, may be required to deliver a
prospectus. This is in addition to the dealers obligation
to deliver a prospectus when acting as underwriters and with
respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions.
PART II
Information Not Required in
Prospectus
Item 13.
Other
Expenses of Issuance and Distribution.
The expenses to be paid by the Registrant in
connection with the distribution of the securities being
registered, other than underwriting discounts and commissions,
are as follows:
Section 145 of the Delaware General
Corporation Law authorizes a court to award, or a
corporations board of directors to grant, indemnity to
officers, directors and other corporate agents under certain
circumstances and subject to certain limitations. The
Registrants certificate of incorporation and bylaws
provide that the Registrant shall indemnify its directors,
officers, employees and agents to the full extent permitted by
Delaware General Corporation Law, including in circumstances in
which indemnification is otherwise discretionary under Delaware
law. In addition, the Registrant intends to enter into separate
indemnification agreements with its directors, officers and
certain employees that would require the Registrant, among other
things, to indemnify them against certain liabilities which may
arise by reason of their status as directors, officers or
certain other employees. The Registrant also intends to maintain
director and officer liability insurance, if available on
reasonable terms.
These indemnification provisions and the
indemnification agreement to be entered into between the
Registrant and its officers and directors may be sufficiently
broad to permit indemnification of the Registrants
officers and directors for liabilities (including reimbursement
of expenses incurred) arising under the Securities Act.
The underwriting agreement, which is
Exhibit 1.1 to this registration statement, provides for
indemnification by our underwriters and their officers and
directors for certain liabilities arising under the Securities
Act or otherwise.
Since July, 1, 2001, the Registrant has
issued and sold the following unregistered securities:
II-1
The issuances of the securities in the
transactions above were deemed to be exempt from registration
under the Securities Act in reliance on Section 4(2) of the
Securities Act promulgated thereunder as transactions by an
issuer not involving a public offering, where the purchasers
represented their intention to acquire the securities for
investment only and not with a view to distribution and received
or had access to adequate information about the Registrant, or
Rule 701 promulgated under the Securities Act as
transactions pursuant to a compensatory benefit plan or a
written contract relating to compensation.
Appropriate legends were affixed to the stock
certificates issued in the above transactions. Similar legends
were imposed in connection with any subsequent sales of any such
securities. No underwriters were employed in any of the above
transactions.
(a) Exhibits
The exhibits are as set forth in the
Exhibit Index.
(b) Financial Statement Schedules.
All schedules have been omitted because they are
not required or are not applicable or the required information
is shown in the financial statements or related notes.
The Registrant hereby undertakes to provide to
the underwriters at the closing specified in the Underwriting
Agreement certificates in such denominations and registered in
such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt
delivery to each purchaser.
Insofar as indemnification for liabilities
arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to directors,
officers and controlling persons of the Registrant pursuant to
the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the Registrant has been
advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange
Commission such indemnification is against public policy as
expressed in the Securities Act and is, therefore,
unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification
against such liabilities (other than the payment by the
Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer
or controlling person of the Registrant in the successful
defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such
director, officer or controlling person in connection with the
securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless in the
opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by
controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate
jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is
against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and
will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
The Registrant hereby undertakes that:
(1) For purposes of any liability under the
Securities Act, the information omitted from the form of
prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in
reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of
II-2
(2) For the purpose of determining any
liability under the Securities Act, each post-effective
amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to
be a new registration statement relating to the securities
offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that
time shall be deemed to be the initial
bona fide
offering thereof.
II-3
Signatures
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities
Act of 1933, the Registrant has duly caused this Registration
Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned,
thereunto duly authorized, in the City of San Diego, State
of California on the 16th day of December 2004.
Power of Attorney
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that each
person whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints
Gary Lewis Evans and Andrew J. Micheletti, and each of them, as
his true and lawful attorneys-in-fact and agents, with full
power of substitution and resubstitution, for him and in his
name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any
and all amendments (including post-effective amendments) to this
Registration Statement, and to sign any registration statement
for the same offering covered by the Registration Statement that
is to be effective upon filing pursuant to Rule 462(b)
promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933 and to file the
same, with all exhibits thereto, and other documents in
connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange
Commission, granting unto said attorneys-in-fact and agents, and
each of them, full power and authority to do and perform each
and every act and thing requisite and necessary to be done in
connection therewith and about the premises, as fully to all
intents and purposes as he might or could do in person, hereby
ratifying and confirming all that said attorneys-in-fact and
agents, or any of them, or their or his substitute or
substitutes, may lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue
hereof.
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities
Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the
following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated:
II-4
II-5
Exhibit Index
Common Stock offered
shares(1)
Common Stock outstanding after the offering
shares(2)
Net proceeds
The net proceeds from the offering will be
approximately
$ million,
assuming an offering price of
$ per
share (the midpoint of the range) and that the
underwriters over-allotment option is not exercised.
Use of proceeds
We intend to contribute approximately
$ million
of the net proceeds from this offering to Bank of Internet USA
to provide additional capital to support its growth. We also
intend to use a portion of the net proceeds to prepay in full a
note payable that had an outstanding principal balance of
$5.0 million at November 30, 2004. The note payable
bears interest at prime plus one percent per annum. Pending
these uses, we will invest the net proceeds initially in short
term, investment grade securities and other qualified
investments. See Use of Proceeds for more
information.
Dividends on Common Stock
We have never paid cash dividends on our common
stock, electing to retain earnings for funding our growth and
business. We currently anticipate continuing our policy of
retaining earnings to fund growth. See Dividend
Policy for more information.
Proposed Nasdaq National Market symbol
We have applied to have our common stock listed
for quotation on the Nasdaq National Market under the symbol
BOFI.
(1)
The number of shares of our common stock offered
assumes that the underwriters over-allotment option is not
exercised. If the over-allotment option is exercised in full, we
will issue and sell an
additional shares.
(2)
The number of shares of our common stock
outstanding after the offering is based on the number of shares
outstanding at September 30, 2004, and assumes that the
underwriters over-allotment option is not exercised. The
number includes 728,000 shares of common stock issuable
upon exercise of warrants with an exercise price of
$4.19 per share, which warrants we expect to be exercised
on a cash basis prior to the offering because they terminate if
not exercised prior to that time.
722,517 shares of common stock issuable upon
exercise of outstanding stock options with a weighted average
exercise price of $6.11 per share;
59,950 shares of common stock issuable upon
the exercise of warrants with an exercise price of
$14.00 per share;
642,600 shares of common stock currently
issuable upon conversion of our Series A 6%
Cumulative Nonparticipating Perpetual Preferred Stock, or our
Series A preferred stock. Our Series A preferred stock
is convertible at prices which increase periodically through
January 2009, after which time our Series A preferred stock
is no longer convertible into our common stock. The current
conversion price of $10.50 per share is in effect through
January 1, 2006;
shares of common stock reserved for future
issuance under our 2004 stock incentive plan, which provides
that aggregate equity awards under our 2004 stock incentive plan
and options outstanding under our 1999 stock option plan may not
exceed 14.8% of our outstanding common stock at any
time; and
Table of Contents
up to 500,000 shares of common stock
reserved for future issuance under our 2004 employee stock
purchase plan.
Table of Contents
At or for
At or for
the Period
the Three Months
July 6, 1999
Ended September 30,
At or for the Fiscal Years Ended June 30,
(inception) to
June 30,
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
(Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
$
453,939
$
284,617
$
405,039
$
273,464
$
217,614
$
156,628
$
13,295
355,105
246,760
355,261
245,933
167,251
139,679
216
969
435
3,602
128
22
1,060
805
1,045
790
505
310
55,702
377
3,665
441
726
1,522
295,677
202,190
269,841
193,992
167,618
127,204
121,475
58,360
101,446
55,900
29,900
15,900
3,300
1,300
870
32,296
23,349
31,759
22,885
19,501
11,903
12,936
$
4,826
$
3,581
$
15,772
$
13,514
$
11,641
$
4,697
$
24
2,738
2,176
9,242
8,426
8,144
3,535
2,088
1,405
6,530
5,088
3,497
1,162
24
15
15
255
285
195
310
2,073
1,390
6,275
4,803
3,302
852
24
169
288
1,190
1,349
297
52
1,139
1,077
3,819
3,158
3,008
1,985
1,012
1,103
601
3,646
2,994
591
(1,081
)
(988
)
442
247
1,471
1,264
(429
)
1
$
661
$
354
$
2,175
$
1,730
$
1,020
$
(1,082
)
$
(988
)
$
560
$
354
$
2,035
$
1,730
$
1,020
$
(1,082
)
$
(988
)
Table of Contents
At or for
At or for
the Period
the Three Months
July 6, 1999
Ended September 30,
At or for the Fiscal Years Ended June 30,
(inception) to
June 30,
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
(Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
$
0.12
$
0.08
$
0.45
$
0.39
$
0.25
$
(0.29
)
$
(0.33
)
$
0.11
$
0.07
$
0.39
$
0.34
$
0.21
$
(0.29
)
$
(0.33
)
$
5.68
$
5.22
$
5.57
$
5.11
$
4.50
$
3.21
$
3.50
$
5.68
$
5.22
$
5.57
$
5.11
$
4.50
$
3.21
$
3.50
4,508,664
4,490,136
4,502,284
4,468,296
4,128,051
3,706,050
2,950,999
5,164,963
5,150,298
5,160,482
5,134,940
4,795,401
3,706,050
2,950,999
4,519,649
4,474,351
4,506,524
4,474,351
4,334,401
3,707,156
3,694,031
$
11,329
$
18,059
$
64,478
$
58,609
$
34,659
$
16,003
NM
2,514
35,010
76,550
124,739
6,994
3,317
NM
5,336
11,888
129,193
81,778
132,298
139,565
NM
0.64%
0.50%
0.67%
0.71%
0.53%
(1.56
)%
NM
8.77%
6.09%
8.42%
7.87%
6.32%
(8.68
)%
NM
1.87%
1.73%
1.81%
1.76%
1.45%
0.67
%
NM
2.06%
2.02%
2.04%
2.11%
1.83%
1.73
%
NM
50.47%
63.61%
49.47%
49.06%
79.28%
163.51
%
NM
0.30%
0.32%
0.29%
0.32%
0.30%
0.22
%
NM
7.11%
8.20%
7.84%
8.37%
8.96%
7.60
%
NM
7.60%
8.00%
7.84%
8.09%
8.65%
8.16
%
NM
12.03%
11.56%
11.11%
11.40%
13.76%
15.00
%
NM
12.40%
11.97%
11.48%
11.81%
14.13%
15.37
%
NM
7.60%
8.00%
7.84%
8.09%
8.65%
8.16
%
NM
(1)
Interest rate spread represents the difference
between the weighted average yield on interest-earning assets
and the weighted average rate paid on interest-bearing
liabilities.
(2)
Net interest margin represents net interest
income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.
(3)
Efficiency ratio represents noninterest expense
as a percentage of the aggregate of net interest income and
noninterest income.
(4)
Reflects regulatory capital ratios of Bank of
Internet USA only.
Table of Contents
Our limited operating history makes our
future prospects and financial performance unpredictable, which
may impair our ability to manage our business and your ability
to assess our prospects.
We may not be able to implement our plans
for growth successfully, which could adversely affect our future
operations.
Our inability to manage our growth could
harm our business.
improve existing and implement new transaction
processing, operational and financial systems, procedures and
controls;
maintain effective credit scoring and
underwriting guidelines; and
expand our employee base and train and manage
this growing employee base.
Table of Contents
We could be adversely affected by changes
in interest rates.
We may need to raise additional capital
that may not be available, which could harm our
business.
As a bank whose principal means of
delivering banking services is the Internet, we are subject to
risks particular to that method of delivery.
Table of Contents
We face strong competition for customers
and may not succeed in implementing our business
strategy.
large, publicly-traded, Internet-based banks, as
well as smaller Internet-based banks;
brick and mortar banks, including
those that have implemented websites to facilitate online
banking; and
traditional banking institutions such as thrifts,
finance companies, credit unions and mortgage banks.
having a large and increasing number of customers
who use our bank for their banking needs;
our ability to attract, hire and retain key
personnel as our business grows;
our ability to secure additional capital as
needed;
Table of Contents
the relevance of our products and services to
customer needs and demands and the rate at which we and our
competitors introduce them;
our ability to offer products and services with
fewer employees than competitors;
the satisfaction of our customers with our
customer service;
ease of use of our websites; and
our ability to provide a secure and stable
technology platform for financial services that provides us with
reliable and effective operational, financial and information
systems.
A natural disaster or recurring energy
shortage, especially in California, could harm our
business.
Our multifamily residential and commercial
real estate loans held for investment are generally unseasoned,
and defaults on such loans would harm our
business.
Our emphasis on multifamily loans increases
the possibility of loan losses.
Table of Contents
If our allowance for loan losses is not
sufficient to cover actual loan losses, our earnings, capital
adequacy and overall financial condition may suffer
materially.
Declining real estate values, particularly
in California, could reduce the value of our loan portfolio and
impair our profitability and financial condition.
We frequently purchase loans in bulk or
pools. We may experience lower yields or losses on
loan pools because the assumptions we use when
purchasing loans in bulk may not always prove
correct.
Table of Contents
We face limits on our ability to
lend.
Our success depends in large part on the
continuing efforts of a few individuals. If we are unable to
retain these personnel or attract, hire and retain others to
oversee and manage our company, our business could
suffer.
We depend on third-party service providers
for our core banking technology, and interruptions in or
terminations of their services could materially impair the
quality of our services.
Table of Contents
A national or regional economic downturn
could reduce our customer base, our level of deposits and demand
for our financial products such as loans.
loan delinquencies may increase;
problem assets and foreclosures may increase;
demand for our products and services may
decline; and
the value of collateral supporting our loans,
especially real estate, may decline, in turn reducing
customers borrowing power and reducing potential proceeds
from foreclosures and from sales of loans.
We rely substantially on third parties to
service our loans and to provide us with appraisals, credit
reports, title searches, environmental inspections and reports
and other underwriting services without errors or fraud and in a
timely manner.
Our operations are subject to numerous laws
and government regulation, which may change.
Table of Contents
We will incur increased costs as a result
of being a public company.
Ownership of our common stock is highly
concentrated, which may prevent you or other stockholders from
influencing significant corporate decisions and may result in
conflicts of interest that could cause our stock price to
decline.
Anti-takeover provisions of our certificate
of incorporation and bylaws and federal and Delaware law may
prevent or frustrate a change in control, even if an acquisition
would be beneficial to our stockholders, which could affect our
stock price adversely and prevent attempts by our stockholders
to replace or remove our current management.
authorize our board of directors to issue
preferred stock with voting and other rights to be determined by
them;
Table of Contents
limit the persons who can call special meetings
of stockholders;
prohibit stockholder action by written consent;
create a classified board of directors pursuant
to which our directors are elected for staggered three-year
terms; and
provide that a supermajority vote of our
stockholders is required to amend certain provisions of our
certificate of incorporation and bylaws.
We are exposed to risk of environmental
liability with respect to properties to which we take
title.
The U.S. governments monetary
policies or changes in those policies could have a major effect
on our operating results, and we cannot predict what those
policies will be or any changes in such policies or the effect
of such policies on us.
We have risks of systems failure and
security risks, including hacking and identity
theft.
Table of Contents
There has been no prior market for our
common stock, and our stock price may be volatile.
You will experience substantial dilution in
the value of your shares immediately following the
offering.
A public trading market for our common
stock may not develop or be maintained.
Table of Contents
We have never paid cash dividends on our
common stock, and we do not expect to pay cash dividends on our
common stock following the offering.
We will have broad discretion in the use of
proceeds from the offering and may not obtain a significant
return on the use of these proceeds.
After an initial period of restriction,
there will be a significant number of shares of our common stock
available for future sale, which may depress our stock
price.
Table of Contents
shares
will be eligible for sale upon completion of the offering;
shares
will be eligible for sale 180 days from the date of this
prospectus upon the expiration of the lock-up agreements
described above;
shares
will be eligible for sale 90 days from the date of this
prospectus upon expiration of the lock-up agreements described
above; and
shares
will be eligible for sale upon the exercise of vested options
180 days after the date of this prospectus.
Potential investors should not expect to
sell our shares for a profit shortly after our common stock
begins trading.
Some bids made at or above the initial
public offering price may not receive an allocation of
shares.
Potential investors may receive a full
allocation of the shares they bid for if their bids are
successful and should not bid for more shares than they are
prepared to purchase.
Table of Contents
inflation and interest rate, market and monetary
fluctuations;
higher defaults on our loan portfolio than we
expect;
the strength of the United States economy in
general and the strength of the regional and local economies
within California and other regions in which we have loan
collateral and concentration of loans;
the continued acceptance of Internet-based
banking by consumers and businesses;
the willingness of users to substitute
competitors products and services for our products and
services;
our timely development of new products and
services in a changing environment, including the features,
pricing and quality of our products and services compared to the
products and services of our competitors;
technological changes;
changes in consumer spending and savings habits;
the effects of, and changes in, trade, monetary
and fiscal policies and laws, including interest rate policies
of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System;
the effect of changes in financial services
policies, laws and regulations, including laws, regulations and
policies concerning taxes, banking, securities and insurance,
and their application by regulatory bodies; and
the other risks discussed under Risk
Factors.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
on an actual basis; and
on an as adjusted basis to reflect our receipt of
the net proceeds from the sale
of shares
of common stock in the offering, after deducting estimated
underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering
expenses payable by us in the offering (and assuming no exercise
of the underwriters over-allotment option), as if the sale
of our common stock had been consummated on September 30,
2004.
At September 30, 2004
Actual
As Adjusted
(Dollars in thousands)
$
121,475
$
3,300
$
124,775
$
$
6,637
$
45
22,418
(78
)
3,274
$
32,296
$
$
157,071
$
7.11
%
7.60
%
12.03
%
12.40
%
7.60
%
(1)
We intend to prepay in full without penalty the
note payable with a portion of the net proceeds from the
offering. At November 30, 2004, the note payable had an
outstanding principal balance of $5.0 million.
(2)
In addition to the indebtedness reflected above,
we had total deposits of $295.7 million at
September 30, 2004.
(3)
Common stock actual, but not common stock as
adjusted, excludes 728,000 shares of common stock issuable
upon exercise of warrants with an exercise price of
$4.19 per share, which warrants we expect to
Table of Contents
be exercised on a cash basis prior to the
offering because they terminate if not exercised prior to that
time. Common stock actual and common stock as adjusted exclude:
722,517 shares of common stock issuable upon
exercise of outstanding stock options, with a weighted average
exercise price of $6.11 per share;
59,950 shares of common stock issuable upon
the exercise of warrants with an exercise price of
$14.00 per share;
642,600 shares of common stock currently
issuable upon conversion of our Series A preferred stock.
Our Series A preferred stock is convertible at prices which
increase periodically through January 2009, after which time our
Series A preferred stock is no longer convertible into our
common stock. The current conversion price of $10.50 per
share is in effect through January 1, 2006;
shares of common stock reserved for future
issuance under our 2004 stock incentive plan, which provides
that aggregate equity awards under our 2004 stock incentive plan
and options outstanding under our 1999 stock option plan may not
exceed 14.8% of our outstanding common stock at any
time; and
up to 500,000 shares of common stock
reserved for future issuance under our 2004 employee stock
purchase plan.
(4)
Reflects regulatory capital ratios of Bank of
Internet USA only. The as adjusted ratio assumes the deployment
of the net proceeds of the offering in assets with
a % risk weighting under
applicable regulations.
Table of Contents
$
$
5.68
$
Total
Shares Purchased
Consideration
Average
Price
Number
Percent
Amount
Percent
Per Share
%
$
%
$
%
(1
)
%
100
%
$
100
%
$
(1)
Before deducting estimated underwriting discounts
and commissions of approximately
$ million
and estimated offering expenses of approximately
$ payable
by us, and assuming exercise of warrants for 728,000 shares
of common stock with an exercise price of $4.19 per share,
which warrants we expect to be exercised on a cash basis prior
to the offering because they terminate if not exercised prior to
that time. We have assumed no exercise of outstanding stock
options and other warrants or conversion of our Series A
preferred stock. In addition to the warrants for
728,000 shares of common stock, at September 30, 2004,
there were outstanding:
722,517 shares of common stock issuable upon
exercise of outstanding stock options with a weighted average
exercise price of $6.11 per share;
Table of Contents
59,950 shares of common stock issuable upon
the exercise of warrants with an exercise price of
$14.00 per share; and
642,600 shares of common stock currently
issuable upon conversion of our Series A preferred stock
(based on the current conversion price of $10.50 per share).
Table of Contents
At or for
At or for
the Period
the Three Months
July 6, 1999
Ended September 30,
At or for the Fiscal Years Ended June 30,
(inception) to
June 30,
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
(Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
$
453,939
$
284,617
$
405,039
$
273,464
$
217,614
$
156,628
$
13,295
355,105
246,760
355,261
245,933
167,251
139,679
216
969
435
3,602
128
22
1,060
805
1,045
790
505
310
55,702
377
3,665
441
726
1,522
295,677
202,190
269,841
193,992
167,618
127,204
121,475
58,360
101,446
55,900
29,900
15,900
3,300
1,300
870
32,296
23,349
31,759
22,885
19,501
11,903
12,936
$
4,826
$
3,581
$
15,772
$
13,514
$
11,641
$
4,697
$
24
2,738
2,176
9,242
8,426
8,144
3,535
2,088
1,405
6,530
5,088
3,497
1,162
24
15
15
255
285
195
310
2,073
1,390
6,275
4,803
3,302
852
24
169
288
1,190
1,349
297
52
1,139
1,077
3,819
3,158
3,008
1,985
1,012
1,103
601
3,646
2,994
591
(1,081
)
(988
)
442
247
1,471
1,264
(429
)
1
$
661
$
354
$
2,175
$
1,730
$
1,020
$
(1,082
)
$
(988
)
$
560
$
354
$
2,035
$
1,730
$
1,020
$
(1,082
)
$
(988
)
Table of Contents
At or for
At or for
the Period
the Three Months
July 6, 1999
Ended September 30,
At or for the Fiscal Years Ended June 30,
(inception) to
June 30,
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
(Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
$
0.12
$
0.08
$
0.45
$
0.39
$
0.25
$
(0.29
)
$
(0.33
)
$
0.11
$
0.07
$
0.39
$
0.34
$
0.21
$
(0.29
)
$
(0.33
)
$
5.68
$
5.22
$
5.57
$
5.11
$
4.50
$
3.21
$
3.50
$
5.68
$
5.22
$
5.57
$
5.11
$
4.50
$
3.21
$
3.50
4,508,664
4,490,136
4,502,284
4,468,296
4,128,051
3,706,050
2,950,999
5,164,963
5,150,298
5,160,482
5,134,940
4,795,401
3,706,050
2,950,999
4,519,649
4,474,351
4,506,524
4,474,351
4,334,401
3,707,156
3,694,031
$
11,329
$
18,059
$
64,478
$
58,609
$
34,659
$
16,003
NM
2,514
35,010
76,550
124,739
6,994
3,317
NM
5,336
11,888
129,193
81,778
132,298
139,565
NM
0.64%
0.50%
0.67%
0.71%
0.53%
(1.56)%
NM
8.77%
6.09%
8.42%
7.87%
6.32%
(8.68)%
NM
1.87%
1.73%
1.81%
1.76%
1.45%
0.67%
NM
2.06%
2.02%
2.04%
2.11%
1.83%
1.73%
NM
50.47%
63.61%
49.47%
49.06%
79.28%
163.51%
NM
0.30%
0.32%
0.29%
0.32%
0.30%
0.22%
NM
7.11%
8.20%
7.84%
8.37%
8.96%
7.60%
NM
7.60%
8.00%
7.84%
8.09%
8.65%
8.16%
NM
12.03%
11.56%
11.11%
11.40%
13.76%
15.00%
NM
12.40%
11.97%
11.48%
11.81%
14.13%
15.37%
NM
7.60%
8.00%
7.84%
8.09%
8.65%
8.16%
NM
(1)
Interest rate spread represents the difference
between the weighted average yield on interest-earning assets
and the weighted average rate paid on interest-bearing
liabilities.
Table of Contents
(2)
Net interest margin represents net interest
income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.
(3)
Efficiency ratio represents noninterest expense
as a percentage of the aggregate of net interest income and
noninterest income.
(4)
Reflects regulatory capital ratios of Bank of
Internet USA only.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
For the Three Months Ended September 30,
2004
2003
Interest
Rates
Interest
Rates
Average
Income/
Earned/
Average
Income/
Earned/
Balance
Expense
Paid
Balance
Expense
Paid
(Dollars in thousands)
Assets:
$
355,965
$
4,472
5.03
%
$
243,484
$
3,431
5.64
%
13,259
43
1.30
%
19,974
46
0.92
%
10,206
95
3.72
%
11,684
72
2.46
%
21,507
160
2.98
%
423
3
2.84
%
4,890
56
4.58
%
2,956
29
3.92
%
405,827
4,826
4.76
%
278,521
3,581
5.14
%
8,821
4,001
$
414,648
$
282,522
Liabilities and Stockholders
Equity:
$
121,527
$
559
1.84
%
$
62,150
$
264
1.70
%
155,662
1,291
3.32
%
134,824
1,312
3.89
%
99,961
868
3.47
%
58,446
600
4.11
%
1,343
20
5.96
%
378,493
2,738
2.89
%
255,420
2,176
3.41
%
2,883
3,065
33,272
24,037
$
414,648
$
282,522
$
2,088
$
1,405
1.87
%
1.73
%
2.06
%
2.02
%
Table of Contents
For the Fiscal Years Ended June 30,
2004
2003
2002
Average
Average
Average
Yields
Yields
Yields
Interest
Earned/
Interest
Earned/
Interest
Earned/
Average
Income/
Rates
Average
Income/
Rates
Average
Income/
Rates
Balance
Expense
Paid
Balance
Expense
Paid
Balance
Expense
Paid
(Dollars in thousands)
Assets:
$
284,617
$
15,177
5.33
%
$
202,955
$
12,723
6.27
%
$
158,105
$
10,765
6.81
%
20,944
192
0.92
%
16,446
235
1.43
%
21,953
459
2.09
%
10,919
261
2.39
%
19,327
445
2.30
%
8,793
305
3.47
%
336
7
2.08
%
586
17
2.92
%
1,082
46
4.25
%
3,467
135
3.89
%
1,866
94
5.05
%
1,182
66
5.58
%
320,283
15,772
4.92
%
241,180
13,514
5.60
%
191,115
11,641
6.09
%
5,790
3,040
1,927
$
326,073
$
244,220
$
193,042
Liabilities and Stockholders
Equity:
$
93,797
$
1,668
1.78
%
$
41,373
$
854
2.07
%
$
28,391
$
759
2.67
%
132,166
4,866
3.68
%
142,903
5,854
4.10
%
123,812
6,196
5.00
%
69,932
2,648
3.79
%
35,343
1,718
4.86
%
22,764
1,143
5.02
%
1,119
60
5.36
%
487
46
9.45
%
297,014
9,242
3.11
%
219,619
8,426
3.84
%
175,454
8,144
4.64
%
2,003
1,756
825
27,056
22,845
16,763
$
326,073
$
244,220
$
193,042
$
6,530
$
5,088
$
3,497
1.81
%
1.76
%
1.45
%
2.04
%
2.11
%
1.83
%
Table of Contents
Comparison of the Three Months Ended
September 30, 2004 and 2003
Table of Contents
2004 vs. 2003
Increase (Decrease) Due to
Total
Increase
Volume
Rate
Rate/Volume
(Decrease)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
1,585
$
(371
)
$
(173
)
$
1,041
(15
)
19
(7
)
(3
)
(9
)
37
(5
)
23
150
7
157
19
5
3
27
$
1,730
$
(310
)
$
(175
)
$
1,245
$
252
$
22
$
21
$
295
203
(195
)
(29
)
(21
)
426
(92
)
(66
)
268
20
20
$
881
$
(265
)
$
(54
)
$
562
Table of Contents
For the Three Months
Ended
September 30,
2004
2003
(Dollars in thousands)
$
86
$
97
11
164
72
27
$
169
$
288
Table of Contents
For the Three Months
Ended
September 30,
2004
2003
(Dollars in thousands)
$
608
$
465
85
32
65
60
90
78
47
44
27
24
197
217
177
$
1,139
$
1,077
Table of Contents
Comparison of Fiscal Years Ended
June 30, 2004 and 2003
2004 vs. 2003
Increase (Decrease) Due to
Total
Increase
Volume
Rate
Rate/Volume
(Decrease)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
5,119
$
(1,908
)
$
(757
)
$
2,454
64
(84
)
(23
)
(43
)
(193
)
17
(8
)
(184
)
(7
)
(5
)
2
(10
)
81
(21
)
(19
)
41
$
5,064
$
(2,001
)
$
(805
)
$
2,258
$
1,083
$
(120
)
$
(149
)
$
814
(440
)
(586
)
38
(988
)
1,681
(378
)
(373
)
930
60
60
$
2,324
$
(1,084
)
$
(424
)
$
816
Table of Contents
For the Fiscal Years
Ended June 30,
2004
2003
(Dollars in thousands)
$
624
$
446
364
778
202
125
$
1,190
$
1,349
Table of Contents
For the Fiscal
Years Ended
June 30,
2004
2003
(Dollars in
thousands)
$
1,880
$
1,538
166
152
245
205
328
278
220
189
97
144
197
686
652
$
3,819
$
3,158
Table of Contents
Comparison of Fiscal Years Ended
June 30, 2003 and 2002
2003 vs. 2002
Increase (Decrease) Due to
Total
Increase
Volume
Rate
Rate/Volume
(Decrease)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
3,054
$
(854
)
$
(242
)
$
1,958
(115
)
(145
)
36
(224
)
365
(103
)
(122
)
140
(21
)
(14
)
6
(29
)
38
(6
)
(4
)
28
$
3,321
$
(1,122
)
$
(326
)
$
1,873
$
347
$
(173
)
$
(79
)
$
95
955
(1,127
)
(170
)
(342
)
632
(36
)
(21
)
575
(46
)
(46
)
$
1,888
$
(1,336
)
$
(270
)
$
282
Table of Contents
For the Fiscal
Years Ended
June 30,
2003
2002
(Dollars in
thousands)
$
446
$
114
778
67
125
116
$
1,349
$
297
Table of Contents
For Fiscal Years
Ended June 30,
2003
2002
(Dollars in
thousands)
$
1,538
$
1,300
152
172
205
161
278
210
189
141
144
118
652
906
$
3,158
$
3,008
Table of Contents
Payments Due by Period
Less than
One to
Three to
More Than
Total
One Year
Three Years
Five Years
Five Years
(In thousands)
$
114,243
$
6,451
$
62,883
$
35,866
$
9,043
220
220
$
114,463
$
6,671
$
62,883
$
35,866
$
9,043
(1)
Payments are for lease of real property.
Table of Contents
To Be Well
Capitalized Under
For Capital
Prompt Corrective
Actual
Adequacy Purposes
Action Regulations
Amount
Ratio
Amount
Ratio
Amount
Ratio
(Dollars in thousands)
$
34,447
7.60
%
$
18,142
4.00
%
$
22,677
5.00
%
$
34,447
12.03
%
N/A
N/A
$
17,180
6.00
%
$
35,507
12.40
%
$
22,907
8.00
%
$
28,634
10.00
%
$
34,447
7.60
%
$
6,803
1.50
%
N/A
N/A
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Term to Repricing, Repayment, or Maturity at
September 30, 2004
Over
Over
One Year
One Year
Five Years
or
through
and
Less
Five Years
Insensitive
Total
(Dollars in thousands)
$
21,131
$
$
$
21,131
6,034
2,875
8,909
232
55,470
55,702
5,729
5,729
94,651
209,980
50,474
355,105
216
216
127,993
268,325
50,474
446,792
7,147
7,147
$
127,993
$
268,325
$
57,621
$
453,939
$
219,280
$
69,750
$
$
289,030
23,000
90,564
7,911
121,475
3,300
3,300
245,580
160,314
7,911
413,805
40,134
40,134
$
245,580
$
160,314
$
48,045
$
453,939
$
(117,587
)
$
108,011
$
42,563
$
32,987
$
(117,587
)
$
(9,576
)
$
32,987
$
32,987
(91.9
)%
40.3
%
84.3
%
7.4
%
(91.9
)%
(2.4
)%
7.4
%
7.4
%
(1)
Comprised of U.S. government securities and
mortgage-backed securities which are classified as held to
maturity and available for sale. The table reflects contractual
repricing dates.
(2)
The table reflects either contractual repricing
dates or maturities.
(3)
The table assumes that the principal balances for
demand deposit and savings accounts will reprice in the first
year.
Table of Contents
Net Present
Percentage
Value as
Board
Change from
Percentage
Established
Sensitivity
Base
of Assets
Minimum
(Dollars in thousands)
$
(4,426
)
(11.00
)%
9.16
%
8.00
%
$
(2,236
)
(5.00
)%
9.54
%
8.00
%
9.92
%
8.00
%
$
2,070
5.00
%
10.24
%
8.00
%
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
increased our net income from $1.0 million
to $2.2 million and diluted earnings per share from $0.21
to $0.39;
increased our total assets at year end from
$217.6 million to $405.0 million, while only
increasing our employment base from 20 to 24 full time employees;
increased net loans held for investment at year
end from $167.3 million to $355.3 million, increased
originations of multifamily loans from $30.0 million to
$57.3 million and increased originations of single family
loans held for sale from $7.0 million to $76.6 million;
increased total deposits at year end from
$167.6 million to $269.8 million and the number of
online deposit accounts from 6,400 to 13,700; and
improved our efficiency ratio, which decreased
from 79.3% to 49.5%.
Leverage Technology.
We believe that efficient management and processing of
information is critical in online banking. We have designed and
implemented an automated Internet-based banking platform and
workflow process to handle traditional banking functions with
reduced paperwork and human intervention. Our websites and CRM
software support our customer self-service model by automating
interactions with customers. Our banking platform also increases
the efficiency of routine analysis work by our personnel and
assists our account representatives in handling customer
requests and applications. Our banking platform transfers much
of the data entry tasks to the customer and allows for batch
handling of applications by our employees. We intend to continue
to improve our systems and implement new systems with the goal
of providing for increased transaction capacity and scalability
in our systems without materially increasing personnel costs.
Table of Contents
Exploit Advantages of Nationwide
Presence.
Our nationwide, online
presence allows us increased flexibility to target a large
number of loan and deposit customers based on demographics,
geographic location and price and provides us with a low cost of
customer acquisition and the ability to be selective in
approving prospective loan customers. Our advertising is carried
mostly over the Internet so we can rapidly shift and target our
marketing based on the demographics and location of the target
audience nationwide. We can also establish a presence in new
geographic and demographic markets with relatively low entry
costs, such as our recent efforts to target multifamily lending
in the State of Texas. Our thrift charter allows us to operate
in all 50 states without the need to seek regulatory
approval to enter new markets.
Continue to Grow Online Deposits and Expand
Services.
We offer a broad selection
of retail deposit instruments, including interest-bearing demand
accounts, savings accounts (including money market savings) and
time deposits. We provide our customers with many options for
accessing funds, including ATM machines, debit cards, automated
clearing house funds and checking accounts. We plan to continue
to develop new products and services to serve specific
demographics. For example, we recently opened our Senior
Banking Center website to market to seniors, who we
believe tend to maintain relatively high balances but are also
more interest rate sensitive. We are also developing Banco
de Internet, a redesigned version of our existing website
to focus on Spanish speaking U.S. customers. During our
fiscal year ended June 30, 2004, we opened 6,408 new
deposit accounts, resulting in approximately $136.0 million
in new deposits, and spent approximately $29,000 in external
advertising targeted for deposit gathering. We intend to expand
the volume and breadth of our deposit marketing over the
Internet through websites and search engines such as Google.
Increase Loan Originations and
Purchases.
As we increase our
deposits, we intend to utilize the funds to originate
multifamily and single family mortgage loans over the Internet.
We offer single family mortgage loans in 50 states for
sale, servicing released, to generate fee income. We also
originate multifamily loans primarily in California, Arizona,
Texas and Washington. We intend to increase single family and
multifamily loan originations through our websites, including
our Broker Advantage website, which we have
developed to manage our relationships with loan brokers and our
wholesale loan pipeline. We also plan to continue to purchase
multifamily and, to a lesser extent, single family loans.
Single Family Loans.
We offer fixed and adjustable rate, single family mortgage loans
in all 50 states, and provide both conforming and jumbo
loans. We currently sell substantially all of the single family
loans that we originate on a nonrecourse basis to wholesale
lending institutions, typically with servicing rights released
to the purchaser. Before we fund each loan, we obtain prior
approval by a purchaser, who delivers a specific delivery and
pricing commitment, which reduces our risk in funding the loan.
In addition, while each loan is underwritten to our standard
guidelines, we may also follow specific underwriting guidelines
put in place by the purchaser of the loan.
Table of Contents
Multifamily Loans.
We currently originate adjustable rate multifamily mortgage
loans primarily in California, Arizona, Texas and Washington,
and we plan to expand in the future the states and geographic
markets in which we originate new multifamily loans. In
addition, we currently hold multifamily loans secured by
property in 13 states. We typically hold all of the
multifamily loans that we originate and perform the loan
servicing directly on these loans. Our multifamily loans as of
September 30, 2004 ranged in amount from approximately
$64,000 to $2.9 million, and were secured by first liens on
properties typically ranging from five to 70 units. We
offer multifamily loans with interest rates that adjust based on
a variety of industry standard indices, including
U.S. Treasury security yields, LIBOR and Eleventh District
Cost of Funds. Borrowers may obtain a fixed initial interest
rate for a period of up to five years, which then floats
based on a spread to the applicable index. Our loans typically
have prepayment protection clauses, interest rate floors,
ceilings and rate change caps.
Commercial Loans.
We
originate a small volume of adjustable rate commercial real
estate loans, primarily in California. We currently hold all of
the commercial loans that we originate and perform the loan
servicing on these loans. Our commercial loans as of
September 30, 2004 ranged in amount from approximately
$114,000 to $2.2 million, and were secured by first liens
on mixed-use, shopping and retail centers, office buildings and
multi-tenant industrial properties. We offer commercial loans on
similar terms and interest rates as our multifamily loans.
At June 30,
At September 30,
2004
2004
2003
2002
2001
(Dollars in thousands)
$
23,753
6.70
%
$
21,753
6.14
%
$
42,124
17.16
%
$
32,763
19.67
%
$
118,377
84.89
%
318,888
89.98
%
320,971
90.55
%
191,426
77.99
%
125,303
75.22
%
12,878
9.23
%
11,715
3.31
%
11,659
3.29
%
11,839
4.82
%
8,396
5.04
%
8,122
5.82
%
48
0.01
%
63
0.02
%
62
0.03
%
109
0.07
%
78
0.06
%
$
354,404
100.00
%
$
354,446
100.00
%
$
245,451
100.00
%
$
166,571
100.00
%
$
139,455
100.00
%
(1,060
)
(1,045
)
(790
)
(505
)
(310
)
1,761
1,860
1,272
1,185
534
$
355,105
$
355,261
$
245,933
$
167,251
$
139,679
Term to Contractual Repayment or Maturity
Over Three
Less
Months
Over One
Than Three
through One
Year through
Over Five
Months
Year
Five Years
Years
Total
(Dollars in thousands)
$
42
$
406
$
4,072
$
349,884
$
354,404
Table of Contents
Total Real
Estate
Single
State
Loans
Family
Multifamily
Commercial and Land
54.82
%
40.46
%
54.57
%
90.92
%
8.72
%
30.73
%
7.40
%
7.65
%
8.50
%
7.40
%
8.22
%
5.22
%
1.66
%
5.68
%
3.47
%
3.77
%
12.72
%
27.15
%
11.86
%
9.08
%
100.00
%
100.00
%
100.00
%
100.00
%
(1)
Consists of loans secured by real property in
California with zip code ranges from 90000 to 92999.
(2)
Consists of loans secured by real property in
California with zip code ranges from 93000 to 96999.
Total Real
Estate
Single
Commercial
Loans
Family
Multifamily
and Land
53.43%
59.87%
53.15%
48.11%
52.50%
59.55%
51.05%
39.68%
Table of Contents
For the
Three
Months
Ended
For the Fiscal Years Ended June 30,
Sept. 30,
2004
2004
2003
2002
2001
(In thousands)
$
2,514
$
76,550
$
124,739
$
6,994
$
3,317
(2,744
)
(80,081
)
(122,043
)
(6,932
)
(3,316
)
11
364
778
67
21
(23
)
$
(219
)
$
(3,167
)
$
3,474
$
106
$
22
$
104
$
1,641
$
1,838
$
3,595
$
6,797
11,125
57,337
49,949
29,970
4,945
100
5,467
6,784
1,073
4,261
33
38
21
$
11,329
$
64,478
$
58,609
$
34,659
$
16,003
$
5,301
$
7,855
$
32,919
$
7,792
$
127,340
120,264
48,267
123,349
7,965
4,273
35
1,074
592
1,157
(13
)
$
5,336
$
129,193
$
81,778
$
132,298
$
139,565
$
(16,673
)
$
(83,603
)
$
(60,939
)
$
(138,708
)
$
(15,523
)
(133
)
(485
)
(481
)
(505
)
(57
)
(15
)
(255
)
(285
)
(195
)
(310
)
23
1
$
(156
)
$
109,328
$
78,682
$
27,572
$
139,679
Table of Contents
For the Three
Months
Ended
For the Fiscal Years Ended June 30,
September 30,
2004
2004
2003
2002
2001
(Dollars in thousands)
$
2,618
$
78,191
$
126,577
$
10,589
$
10,114
12
317
560
46
38
$
218
$
247
$
226
$
230
$
266
$
5,301
$
7,855
$
32,919
$
7,792
$
127,340
14
11
68
130
296
$
379
$
714
$
484
$
60
$
430
$
11,125
$
57,337
$
49,949
$
29,970
$
4,945
17
84
80
50
9
$
654
$
683
$
624
$
599
$
549
$
120,264
$
48,267
$
123,349
$
7,965
116
79
315
16
$
1,037
$
611
$
392
$
498
$
100
$
5,467
$
6,784
$
1,073
$
4,261
1
5
6
3
5
$
100
$
1,093
$
1,131
$
358
$
852
$
4,273
16
$
267
Online Retail Loan
Origination.
We originate single
family and multifamily mortgage loans directly online through
our websites, where our customers can review interest rates and
loan terms, enter their loan applications and lock in interest
rates directly over the Internet.
Table of Contents
Single Family Loan
Website.
Our primary website for
single family loans is located at
www.homeloansbankofinternet.com. We maintain and update the rate
and other information on this website. Once a single family loan
application is received, we outsource processing of the loan
application to a third-party processor, which handles all of the
tasks of underwriting and processing the loan. Customers seeking
direct contact with a loan officer during the application
process are directed to a loan officer at the third-party loan
processor.
Multifamily Loan
Website.
Our primary website for
multifamily loans is located at www.ApartmentBank.com, where
customers can obtain loan rates and terms, prequalify loan
requests, submit loan applications, communicate with loan
officers and monitor loan processing in a secure, online
environment. Multifamily loan applications are underwritten and
processed internally by our personnel. We designed our
multifamily website and underlying software to expedite the
origination, processing and management of multifamily loans. For
example, customers can directly input or import loan application
data electronically, or submit data by facsimile. Once a
customer begins an online application, he or she can save the
application and resume the process at a later date through a
secure password. Our software determines which forms are needed,
populates the forms and allows multiple parties, such as
guarantors, to access the application.
Online Wholesale Loan
Origination.
We have developed
relationships with independent multifamily loan brokers in our
four primary multifamily markets, and we manage these
relationships and our wholesale loan pipeline through our
Broker Advantage website located at
www.broker.bofi.com. Through this password-protected website,
our approved independent loan brokers can compare programs,
terms and pricing on a real time basis and communicate with our
staff. Additionally, through a secure loan pipeline management
feature, brokers can submit prequalification requests, submit,
edit and manage full loan applications, manage loans in process,
track outstanding documents and obtain any necessary forms
required for documentation. We do not allow brokers to perform
any loan processing beyond acting as the originating broker of
record. We handle all further loan processing, including
verification of loan requests, underwriting, preparation of loan
documents and obtaining third party reports and appraisals. We
believe that the tools and services offered by Broker Advantage
free loan brokers from much of the administrative tasks of loan
processing and allow brokers to focus more of their time on
local marketing and business development efforts.
Direct Loan
Origination.
We employ a staff of
three loan originators who directly originate multifamily and
commercial loans and develop wholesale lending relationships
with loan brokers on a regional basis. Our internal software,
known as Origination Manager, allows each loan
originator to have direct online access to our multifamily loan
origination system and originate and manage their loan
portfolios in a secure online environment from anywhere in the
nation. Routine tasks are automated, such as researching loan
program and pricing updates, prequalifying loans, submitting
loan applications, viewing customer applications, credit
histories and other application documents and monitoring the
status of loans in process. We have three direct loan
originators, located in Dallas/ Fort Worth, Phoenix and
San Diego.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
For the Three
Months Ended
For the Fiscal Years Ended
September 30,
June 30,
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
(Dollars in thousands)
$
3,665
$
441
$
441
$
726
$
1,522
52,808
3,409
(641
)
(64
)
(185
)
(285
)
(796
)
(130
)
$
55,702
$
377
$
3,665
$
441
$
726
(1)
Through June 30, 2004, we did not have any
securities designated as available-for-sale.
Due within
After One but
After Five but
Total Amount
One Year
within Five Years
within Ten Years
After Ten Years
Amount
Yield(1)
Amount
Yield(1)
Amount
Yield(1)
Amount
Yield(1)
Amount
Yield(1)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
9,920
3.01
%
$
214
2.95
%
$
931
2.96
%
$
1,346
2.96
%
$
7,429
3.02
%
37,668
3.93
%
651
3.93
%
2,887
3.93
%
4,353
3.93
%
29,777
3.93
%
$
47,588
3.74
%
$
865
3.69
%
$
3,818
3.69
%
$
5,699
3.70
%
$
37,206
3.75
%
$
47,458
3.74
%
$
865
3.69
%
$
3,818
3.69
%
$
5,699
3.70
%
$
37,076
3.75
%
$
3,417
3.65
%
$
$
3,417
3.65
%
$
$
4,595
4.11
%
78
4.11
%
349
4.11
%
529
4.11
%
3,639
4.11
%
232
2.32
%
6
2.32
%
26
2.32
%
38
2.32
%
162
2.32
%
$
8,244
3.87
%
$
84
3.98
%
$
3,792
3.68
%
$
567
3.99
%
$
3,801
4.03
%
$
8,227
3.87
%
$
84
3.98
%
$
3,815
3.68
%
$
567
3.99
%
$
3,761
4.03
%
(1)
Weighted average yield is based on amortized cost
of the securities.
(2)
Mortgage-backed securities are allocated based on
contractual principal maturities, assuming no prepayments.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Total
Allowance
as a
Commercial
Percentage
Real Estate
of Total
Single Family
Multifamily
and Land
Consumer
Total
Loans
(Dollars in thousands)
$
$
$
$
$
198
76
33
3
310
198
76
33
3
310
0.22
%
(107
)
300
2
195
91
376
35
3
505
0.30
%
(14
)
302
(3
)
285
77
678
35
790
0.32
%
(35
)
284
6
255
42
962
41
1,045
0.29
%
(2
)
17
15
$
40
$
979
$
41
$
$
1,060
0.30
%
Online Bill Payment
Service.
Customers can pay their bills
online through electronic funds transfer or a written check
prepared and sent to the payee.
Online Check
Imaging.
Online images of cancelled
checks and deposit slips are available to customers
24 hours a day. Images of cancelled checks are available
real time (at the time the check clears our bank) and may be
printed or stored electronically.
ATM Cards or VISA® Check
Cards.
Each customer may choose to
receive a free ATM card or VISA® check card upon opening an
account. Customers can access their accounts at ATMs and any
other location worldwide that accept VISA® check cards. We
do not charge a fee for ATM/ VISA® usage, and we reimburse
our customers up to $10 per month for fees imposed by
third-party operators of ATM/ VISA® locations.
Overdraft
Protection.
Overdraft protection, in
the form of an overdraft line of credit, is available to all
checking account customers who request the protection and
qualify.
Table of Contents
Electronic
Statements.
Statements are produced
and imaged automatically each month and may be printed or stored
electronically by the customer.
At June 30,
At September 30,
2004
2004
2003
2002
Amount
Rate(1)
Amount
Rate(1)
Amount
Rate(1)
Amount
Rate(1)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
6,647
$
2,279
$
3,299
$
1,405
27,221
1.38
%
26,725
1.35
%
29,902
1.38
%
34,283
3.07
%
91,014
1.96
%
94,120
1.96
%
18,823
1.91
%
7,977
1.87
%
106,021
3.28
%
88,082
3.44
%
95,489
3.93
%
82,889
4.23
%
64,774
3.16
%
58,635
3.20
%
46,479
3.96
%
41,064
4.18
%
170,795
3.23
%
146,717
3.35
%
141,968
3.94
%
123,953
4.21
%
289,030
2.66
%
267,562
2.66
%
190,693
3.34
%
166,213
3.86
%
$
295,677
2.60
%
$
269,841
2.64
%
$
193,992
3.28
%
$
167,618
3.83
%
(1)
Annualized.
Table of Contents
At
September 30,
At June 30,
2004
2004
2003
(Dollars in thousands)
$
101,045
$
80,365
$
71,147
27,176
23,018
35,465
22,563
14,760
11,116
5,090
14,309
10,803
14,921
14,265
13,437
$
170,795
$
146,717
$
141,968
Term to Maturity
Over Three
Over Six
Within
Months
Months
Three
through Six
through One
Over One
Months
Months
Year
Year
Total
(Dollars in thousands)
$
14,149
$
15,053
$
9,920
$
25,652
$
64,774
Table of Contents
At or For the
Three Months Ended
At or For the Fiscal Years Ended
September 30,
June 30,
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
(Dollars in thousands)
$
99,961
$
58,446
$
69,932
$
35,343
$
22,764
121,475
58,900
101,446
55,900
29,900
121,475
58,900
101,446
55,900
29,900
3.20
%
3.92
%
3.19
%
4.40
%
5.05
%
3.47
%
4.11
%
3.79
%
4.86
%
5.02
%
$
1,343
$
1,119
3,300
3,060
3,300
1,300
5.75
%
5.25
%
5.96
%
5.36
%
$
487
1,570
9.45
%
Table of Contents
Encrypted
Transactions.
All banking transactions
and other appropriate Internet communications are encrypted so
that sensitive information is not transmitted over the Internet
in a form that can be read or easily deciphered.
Secure Log-on.
To
protect against the possibility of unauthorized downloading of a
customers password protected files, user identification
and passwords are not stored on the Internet or our web server.
Authenticated Session
Integrity.
An authenticated user is
any user who signs onto our website with a valid user ID and
password. To protect against fraudulent bank customers, our
server is programmed to alert our core processing vendor of any
attempted illegitimate entry so that its staff can quickly
investigate and respond to such attempts.
Physical Security.
Our servers and network computers reside in secure facilities.
Currently, computer operations supporting our outsourced core
banking systems are based in Lenexa, Kansas with backup
facilities in Houston, Texas. Only employees with proper
photographic identification may enter the primary building. The
computer operations are located in a secure area that can be
accessed only by using a key card and further password
identification. In addition, our marketing and account opening
servers reside in a secure third-party location in
San Diego with a mirror site at our corporate offices.
These servers are physically separate from our outsourced core
back-office processing system and
Table of Contents
maintain the same level of security services as
our outsourced core processing servers in Lenexa, Kansas.
Service Continuity.
The core processing vendor and our bank provide a fully
redundant network. Our server is also mirrored. This
network and server redundancy is designed to provide reliable
access to our bank. However, if existing customers are not able
to access their accounts over the Internet, customers retain
access to their funds through paper checks, ATM cards, customer
service by telephone and an automated telephone response system.
Monitoring.
All
customer transactions on our server produce one or more entries
into transaction logs, which we monitor for unusual or
fraudulent activity. We are notified and log any attempt by an
authenticated user to modify a command or request from our
websites. Additionally, all financial transactions are logged,
and these logs are constantly reviewed for abnormal or unusual
activity.
large, publicly-traded, Internet-based banks, as
well as smaller Internet-based banks;
brick and mortar banks, including
those that have implemented websites to facilitate online
banking; and
traditional banking institutions such as thrifts,
finance companies, credit unions and mortgage banks.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Name
Age
Position
55
Director; President and Chief Executive Officer
of BofI Holding and Bank of Internet USA
39
Vice President and Chief Credit Officer of Bank
of Internet USA
47
Chief Financial Officer of BofI Holding; Vice
President and Chief Financial Officer of Bank of Internet USA
34
Vice President and Chief Technology Officer of
Bank of Internet USA
63
Chairman
58
Vice Chairman
51
Director
43
Director
44
Director
44
Secretary and Director
69
Director
(1)
Member of the compensation committee.
(2)
Member of the audit committee.
(3)
Member of the nominating committee.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
the class I directors will be
Messrs. Eprile and Allrich, and their terms will expire at
the 2005 annual meeting of stockholders;
the class II directors will be
Messrs. Englert, Grinberg and Evans, and their terms will
expire at the 2006 annual meeting of stockholders; and
Table of Contents
the class III directors will be
Messrs. Witter and Pancheri and Ms. Paulus, and their
terms will expire at the 2007 annual meeting of stockholders.
selecting and hiring our independent auditors;
evaluating the qualifications, independence and
performance of our independent auditors;
approving the audit and nonaudit services to be
performed by our independent auditors;
reviewing the design, implementation, adequacy
and effectiveness of our internal controls and our critical
accounting policies;
overseeing and monitoring the integrity of our
financial statements and our compliance with legal and
regulatory requirements as they relate to financial statements
or accounting matters; and
reviewing with management and our auditors any
earnings announcements and other public announcements regarding
our results of operations.
reviewing the employee-wide compensation
standards;
reviewing and recommending compensation and
benefit plans for our executive officers and directors;
setting performance goals for our officers and
reviewing their performance against these goals;
Table of Contents
management succession planning; and
administering our equity incentive plans.
evaluating the composition, size and governance
of our board of directors and make recommendations regarding
future planning and the appointment of directors;
establishing a policy for considering stockholder
nominees for election to our board of directors; and
evaluating and recommending candidates for
election to our board of directors.
Table of Contents
Long Term Compensation
Annual Compensation
Shares
All Other
Name and Principal Position
Salary
Bonus
Underlying Options
Compensation
$
170,700
$
2,700
22,000
President and Chief Executive Officer of BofI
Holding and Bank of Internet USA(1)
$
87,500
5,810
$
9,750
(3)
Former President and Chief Executive Officer of
BofI Holding(2)
$
151,885
$
2,700
15,000
Vice President and Chief Credit Officer of Bank
of Internet USA
$
132,908
$
17,700
20,000
Chief Financial Officer of BofI Holding; Vice
President and Chief Financial Officer of Bank of Internet USA
$
114,908
$
2,700
6,000
Vice President and Chief Technology Officer of
Bank of Internet USA
(1)
Mr. Evans was appointed as President and
Chief Executive Officer of BofI Holding in October 2004.
(2)
Mr. Englert resigned as President and Chief
Executive Officer of BofI Holding in October 2004.
(3)
Represents fees earned for serving as a director
of BofI Holding.
Table of Contents
Individual Grants
Potential Realizable
Value at Assumed Annual
% of
Rates of Stock
Number of
Total Options
Appreciation for
Shares
Granted to
Exercise
Option Term
Underlying
Employees in
Price Per
Expiration
Name
Options Granted
Fiscal Year
Share
Date
5%
10%
22,000
23.7
%
$
10.00
6/30/14
$
138,357
$
350,623
5,810
6.2
%
$
10.00
6/30/14
$
36,539
$
92,596
15,000
16.1
%
$
10.00
6/30/14
$
94,334
$
239,061
20,000
21.5
%
$
10.00
6/30/14
$
125,779
$
318,748
6,000
6.5
%
$
10.00
6/30/14
$
37,734
$
95,625
Number of Shares
Value of Unexercised
Underlying Unexercised
In-the-Money
Options at June 30, 2004
Options at June 30, 2004
Shares Acquired
Name
on Exercise
Value Realized
Exercisable
Unexercisable
Exercisable
Unexercisable
85,116
48,893
$
$
93,361
7,645
$
$
48,742
31,258
$
$
22,667
36,083
$
$
28,342
15,658
$
$
Table of Contents
1999 Stock Option Plan
incentive stock options to our employees,
including officers and employee directors; and
nonqualified stock options to our employees,
employee and nonemployee directors and consultants.
Table of Contents
any person becoming the beneficial owner of
securities representing a majority of the voting power of our
then outstanding securities; or
a sale of all or substantially all of our assets,
or a merger or consolidation involving our company in which the
holders of our securities immediately prior to such event hold
in the aggregate less than a majority of the securities of the
surviving or resulting entity immediately after such event.
2004 Stock Incentive Plan
Table of Contents
acquisition of more than 40% of our stock through
a reverse merger or series of related transactions culminating
in a reverse merger including, but not limited to, a tender
offer followed by a reverse merger (but excluding any such
transaction that the plan administrator determines shall not be
a corporate transaction);
acquisition of more than 50% of our stock in a
single or series of related transactions by any person or
related group of persons (but excluding any such transaction
that the plan administrator determines shall not be a corporate
transaction);
a sale, transfer or other disposition of all or
substantially all of the assets of our company;
a merger or consolidation in which our company is
not the surviving entity; or
a complete liquidation or dissolution.
2004 Employee Stock Purchase
Plan
Table of Contents
acquisition of more than 40% of our stock through
a reverse merger or series of related transactions culminating
in a reverse merger including, but not limited to, a tender
offer followed by a reverse merger (but excluding any such
transaction that the plan administrator determines shall not be
a corporate transaction);
acquisition of more than 50% of our stock in a
single or series of related transactions by any person or
related group of persons (but excluding any such transaction
that the plan administrator determines shall not be a corporate
transaction);
a sale, transfer or other disposition of all or
substantially all of the assets of our company;
a merger or consolidation in which our company is
not the surviving entity; or
a complete liquidation or dissolution.
Table of Contents
Retirement and Death Benefits
Deferred Compensation Plan
401(k) Plan
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
each person known by us to own beneficially more
than 5% of our common stock;
each of our directors and named executive
officers; and
all of our directors and executive officers as a
group.
Percentage of Shares
Beneficially Owned
Number of Shares
Name and Address of Beneficial Owner
Beneficially Owned
Before Offering
After Offering
751,200
15.44
%
620,396
12.79
%
426,510
9.07
%
392,500
8.44
%
151,684
3.26
%
56,325
1.22
%
29,688
*
37,512
*
63,583
1.38
%
*
141,078
3.05
%
183,778
3.94
%
96,349
2.09
%
1,806,903
33.00
%
*
Less than one percent.
(1)
The address for The Chipman First Family Limited
Partnership is P.O. Box 7216, Incline Village, Nevada
89452. Includes warrants to purchase 115,200 shares of
our common stock exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004. Also includes 190,400 shares of
common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our
Series A preferred stock, based on the current effective
conversion price of $10.50 per share.
Table of Contents
(2)
Includes options and warrants to
purchase 95,196 and 100,625 shares, respectively, of
our common stock exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004. Also includes 95,200 shares of
common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our
Series A preferred stock, based on the current effective
conversion price of $10.50 per share.
(3)
Includes options and warrants to
purchase 52,510 and 91,875 shares, respectively, of
our common stock exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004.
(4)
The address for J. Gary Burke is
P.O. Box 248, Hubbard, Ohio 44425. Includes warrants
to purchase 91,875 shares of our common stock
exercisable within 60 days of November 30, 2004.
(5)
Includes options to purchase 98,184 shares
of our common stock exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004.
(6)
Includes options to
purchase 56,325 shares of our common stock exercisable
within 60 days of November 30, 2004.
(7)
Includes options to
purchase 27,188 shares of our common stock exercisable
within 60 days of November 30, 2004.
(8)
Includes options and warrants to
purchase 32,775 and 450 shares, respectively, of our
common stock exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004.
(9)
Includes options and warrants to
purchase 32,658 and 3,981 shares, respectively, of our
common stock exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004.
(10)
Includes options and warrants to
purchase 38,078 and 24,500 shares, respectively, of
our common stock exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004.
(11)
Includes options and warrants to
purchase 38,078 and 23,275 shares, respectively, of
our common stock exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004. Also includes 47,600 shares of
common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our
Series A preferred stock, based on the current effective
conversion price of $10.50 per share.
(12)
Includes options and warrants to
purchase 38,078 and 10,938 shares, respectively, of
our common stock exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004. Also includes 9,520 shares of
common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our
Series A preferred stock, based on the current effective
conversion price of $10.50 per share.
(13)
Includes options and warrants to
purchase 509,070 and 255,644 shares, respectively, of
our common stock exercisable within 60 days of
November 30, 2004. Also includes 152,320 shares of
common stock currently issuable upon conversion of our
Series A preferred stock, based on the current effective
conversion price of $10.50 per share.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Shares of Common Stock
Issuable Upon Conversion
of One Share of Series A
Conversion Date
Conversion Price(1)
Preferred Stock(2)
$
10.50
952
$
13.00
769
$
15.50
645
$
18.00
555
(1)
The conversion price is subject to adjustment for
stock dividends, stock splits and similar events.
(2)
Does not include fractional shares.
Table of Contents
Delaware Law
prior to that date our board of directors
approved either the business combination or the transaction that
resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder;
upon completion of the transaction that resulted
in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, the
interested stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock
outstanding at the time the transaction began; or
on or following that date, the business
combination is approved by our board of directors and authorized
at an annual or special meeting of stockholders by the
affirmative vote of at least two-thirds of the outstanding
voting stock that is not owned by the interested stockholder.
any merger or consolidation involving the
corporation and the interested stockholder;
any sale, transfer, pledge or other disposition
of 10% or more of the assets of the corporation involving the
interested stockholder;
subject to some exceptions, any transaction that
results in the issuance or transfer by the corporation of any
stock of the corporation to the interested stockholder;
any transaction involving the corporation that
has the effect of increasing the proportionate share of the
stock of any class or series of the corporation beneficially
owned by the interested stockholder; or
Table of Contents
the receipt by the interested stockholder of the
benefit of any loans, advances, guarantees, pledges or other
financial benefits provided by or through the corporation.
Certificate of Incorporation and
Bylaws
provide that our board of directors will be
divided into three classes of directors;
provide that special meetings of our stockholders
may be called only by our president, our chairman or our
secretary;
provide that our stockholders will not be
permitted to act by written consent, which may lengthen the
amount of time required to take stockholder actions;
do not include a provision for cumulative voting
in the election of directors. Under cumulative voting, a
minority stockholder holding a sufficient number of shares may
be able to ensure the election of one or more directors. The
absence of cumulative voting may have the effect of limiting the
ability of minority stockholders to effect changes in our board
of directors;
provide that vacancies on our board of directors
may be filled by a majority of directors in office, although
less than a quorum, and not by our stockholders; and
allow us to issue up to 998,800 shares of
undesignated preferred stock with rights senior to those of our
common stock and that otherwise could adversely affect the
rights and powers, including voting rights, of the holders of
our common stock. In some circumstances, such an issuance could
also have the effect of decreasing the market price of our
common stock.
Banking Regulations
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
operating a mortgage company, finance company,
credit card company, factoring company, trust company or savings
association;
performing specified data processing operations;
providing limited securities brokerage services,
acting as an investment or financial advisor;
acting as an insurance agent for specified types
of credit-related insurance; leasing personal property on a
full-payout, non-operating basis;
providing tax planning and preparation services;
operating a collection agency; and
providing specified courier services.
Table of Contents
has engaged in unsafe or unsound practices;
is in an unsafe or unsound condition to continue
operations; or
has violated any applicable law, regulation,
rule, order or condition imposed by the FDIC or the OTS.
Table of Contents
tangible capital equal to at least 1.5% of total
adjusted assets;
leverage capital (core capital) equal to 4.0% of
total adjusted assets; and
risk-based capital equal to 8.0% of total
risk-weighted assets.
the purchase price of each single family dwelling
in the development does not exceed $500,000;
the savings association is in compliance with its
fully phased-in capital requirements;
the loans comply with applicable loan-to-value
requirements; and
the aggregate amount of loans made under this
authority does not exceed 150% of unimpaired capital and surplus.
Table of Contents
to an amount equal to 10% of the
associations capital and surplus, in the case of covered
transactions with any one affiliate; and
to an amount equal to 20% of the
associations capital and surplus, in the case of covered
transactions with all affiliates.
a loan or extension of credit to an affiliate;
a purchase of investment securities issued by an
affiliate;
a purchase of assets from an affiliate, with some
exceptions;
the acceptance of securities issued by an
affiliate as collateral for a loan or extension of credit to any
party; and
the issuance of a guarantee, acceptance or letter
of credit on behalf of an affiliate.
a savings association may not make a loan or
extension of credit to an affiliate unless the affiliate is
engaged only in activities permissible for bank holding
companies;
a savings association may not purchase or invest
in securities of an affiliate other than shares of a subsidiary;
a savings association and its subsidiaries may
not purchase low-quality assets from an affiliate;
covered transactions and other specified
transactions between a savings association or its subsidiaries
and an affiliate must be on terms and conditions that are
consistent with safe and sound banking practices; and
with some exceptions, each loan or extension of
credit by a savings association to an affiliate must be secured
by collateral with a market value ranging from 100% to 130% of
the amount of the loan or extension of credit, depending on the
type of collateral.
Table of Contents
be required to file an application and await
approval from the OTS before it makes a capital distribution;
be required to file a notice 30 days before
the capital distribution; or
be permitted to make the capital distribution
without notice or application to the OTS.
it is ineligible for expedited treatment of its
other applications under OTS regulations;
the total amount of all of capital distributions,
including the proposed capital distribution, for the applicable
calendar year exceeds its net income for that year to date plus
retained net income for the preceding two years;
it would not be at least adequately capitalized
under the prompt corrective action regulations of the OTS
following the distribution, as described above; or
the associations proposed capital
distribution would violate a prohibition contained in any
applicable statute, regulation or agreement between the savings
association and the OTS or the FDIC, or violate a condition
imposed on the savings association in an OTS-approved
application or notice.
would not be well capitalized under the prompt
corrective action regulations of the OTS following the
distribution, as described above;
the proposed capital distribution would reduce
the amount of or retire any part of the savings
associations common or preferred stock or retire any part
of its debt instruments like notes or debentures included in
capital, other than regular payments required under a debt
instrument approved by the OTS; or
the savings association is a subsidiary of a
savings and loan holding company.
Table of Contents
audit committees;
implementation of disclosure controls and
procedures and internal control and financial reporting;
certification of financial statements by the
chief executive officer and the chief financial officer;
the forfeiture of bonuses or other
incentive-based compensation and profits from the sale of an
issuers securities by directors and senior officers in the
twelve month period following initial publication of any
financial statements that later require restatement;
a prohibition on insider trading during pension
plan black-out periods;
disclosure of off-balance sheet transactions;
a prohibition on personal loans to directors and
officers subject to certain exceptions for loans made by insured
depository institutions;
expedited filing requirements for changes in
beneficial ownership of securities owned by officers, directors
and principal stockholders of publicly held companies;
Table of Contents
disclosure of a code of ethics and filing a
Form 8-K for a change or waiver of such code;
real time filing of periodic reports;
the formation of a public accounting oversight
board;
auditor independence; and
various increased criminal penalties for
violations of securities laws.
Table of Contents
1% of the then outstanding shares of our common
stock, or
the average weekly trading volume in our common
stock during the four calendar weeks immediately preceding the
date on which the notice of such sale on Form 144 is filed
with the Securities and Exchange Commission.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Number of
Underwriters
Shares
Per Share
No Exercise
Full Exercise
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Table of Contents
Prior to Effectiveness of the Registration
Statement
Effectiveness of the Registration
Statement
Reconfirmation of Bids
More than 15 business days have elapsed since the
bidder submitted his bid in the offering;
There is a material change in the prospectus that
requires recirculation of the prospectus by us and the
underwriters; or
The clearing price in the offering is more than
20% above the high end of the price range or more than 20% below
the low end of the price range.
Table of Contents
Changes in the Price Range Prior to
Effectiveness of the Registration Statement
Provide notice on our offering web site of the
revised price range or number of shares to be sold in our
offering, as the case may be.
Issue a press release announcing the revised
price range or number of shares to be sold in our offering, as
the case may be.
Send an electronic notice to everyone who has
submitted a bid notifying them of the revised price range or
number of shares to be sold in our offering, as the case may be.
Closing of the Auction and
Pricing
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Bid Information
Auction Results
Approximate
Cumulative
Allocated
Shares
Shares
Shares
Requested
Clearing
Amount
Requested
Requested
Bid Price
Allocated
Shares
Price
Raised
200
200
$
10.00
180
90
%
$
8.00
$
1,440
300
500
$
9.00
270
90
%
$
8.00
$
2,160
600
1,100
$
8.00
550
90
%
$
8.00
$
4,400
400
1,500
$
7.00
0
0
%
800
2,300
$
6.00
0
0
%
1,000
$
8,000
Any bid with a price below the public offering
price is allocated no shares.
The pro-rata percentage is determined by dividing
the number of shares offered (including the overallotment
option) by the total number of shares bid at or above the public
offering price. For example, if there are 200,000 shares
bid for at or above the public offering price, and
150,000 shares offered in the offering, then the pro-rata
percentage is 75%.
All of the successful bids are then multiplied by
the pro-rata percentage to determine the allocations before
rounding. For example, three winning bids for 1,700 shares
(Bid 1), 650 shares (Bid 2) and 100 shares
(Bid 3) would be allocated 1,275 shares,
487 shares and 75 shares respectively, based on the
pro rata percentage.
Table of Contents
The bids are then rounded down to the nearest
100 share round lot, so the bids would be rounded to 1200,
400 and 0 shares respectively. This creates a stub of 237
unallocated shares.
The 237 stub shares are then allocated to the
bids. Continuing the example above, because Bid 3 for
100 shares was rounded down to 0 shares, 100 of the
stub shares would be allocated to Bid 3. After allocation of
these shares, 137 unallocated stub shares would remain.
Because Bid 2 for 650 shares was reduced, as
a result of rounding, by more total shares then Bid 1 for
1700 shares, Bid 2 would then be allocated stub shares
up to the nearest 100 round lot (from 400 shares to
500 shares). This reduces the unallocated stub shares to 37
total shares.
Initial
Pro-Rata Allocation
Initial
Allocation of
Final
Bid
(75% of Initial Bid)
Rounding
Stub Shares
Allocation
1700
1275
1200
0
1200
650
487
400
100
500
100
75
0
100
100
2450
1837
1600
200
1800
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Page
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
F-8
Table of Contents
Bofl Holding, Inc.
/s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP
Table of Contents
June 30,
September 30,
2004
2004
2003
(unaudited)
ASSETS
$
2,600
$
1,838
$
2,673
521
519
514
18,010
22,502
3,275
21,131
24,859
6,462
8,909
9,503
11,872
47,458
8,244
3,665
441
5,729
4,789
2,795
355,105
355,261
245,933
216
435
3,602
1,657
1,486
1,107
157
181
214
453
407
461
3,934
3,893
946
560
577
$
453,939
$
405,039
$
273,464
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS
EQUITY
$
6,647
$
2,279
$
3,299
289,030
267,562
190,693
295,677
269,841
193,992
121,475
101,446
55,900
3,300
1,300
324
283
272
497
370
410
415
421,643
373,280
250,579
6,637
6,637
45
45
45
22,418
22,363
22,161
(78
)
3,274
2,714
679
32,296
31,759
22,885
$
453,939
$
405,039
$
273,464
Table of Contents
Three Months Ended
September 30,
Year Ended June 30,
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
(unaudited)
$
4,472
$
3,431
$
15,177
$
12,723
$
10,765
354
150
595
791
876
4,826
3,581
15,772
13,514
11,641
1,851
1,576
6,534
6,708
6,955
867
600
2,648
1,718
1,143
20
60
46
2,738
2,176
9,242
8,426
8,144
2,088
1,405
6,530
5,088
3,497
15
15
255
285
195
2,073
1,390
6,275
4,803
3,302
86
97
624
446
114
11
164
364
778
67
72
27
202
125
116
169
288
1,190
1,349
297
608
465
1,880
1,538
1,300
85
32
166
152
172
65
60
245
205
161
90
78
328
278
210
47
44
220
189
141
27
24
97
144
118
197
197
217
177
686
652
906
1,139
1,077
3,819
3,158
3,008
1,103
601
3,646
2,994
591
442
247
1,471
1,264
(429
)
$
661
$
354
$
2,175
$
1,730
$
1,020
$
560
$
354
$
2,035
$
1,730
$
1,020
$
0.12
$
0.08
$
0.45
$
0.39
$
0.25
0.11
0.07
0.39
0.34
0.21
Table of Contents
Accumulated
Convertible
Retained
Other
Preferred Stock
Common Stock
Additional
Earnings
Comprehensive
Paid-In
(Accumulated
Loss, Net of
Comprehensive
Shares
Amount
Shares
Amount
Capital
Deficit)
Tax
Income
Total
$
3,707,116
$
37
$
13,937
$
(2,071
)
$
$
11,903
627,100
6
6,177
6,183
185
1
1
394
394
1,020
$
1,020
1,020
4,334,401
43
20,509
(1,051
)
19,501
139,950
2
1,652
1,654
1,730
$
1,730
1,730
4,474,351
45
22,161
679
22,885
23,423
165
165
8,750
37
37
675
6,637
6,637
(140
)
(140
)
2,175
$
2,175
2,175
675
6,637
4,506,524
45
22,363
2,714
31,759
661
$
661
661
(78
)
(78
)
(78
)
$
583
(101
)
(101
)
13,125
55
55
675
$
6,637
4,519,649
$
45
$
22,418
$
3,274
$
(78
)
$
32,296
Table of Contents
Three Months Ended
September 30,
Year Ended June 30,
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
(unaudited)
$
661
$
354
$
2,175
$
1,730
$
1,020
1
1
3
10
133
146
485
481
505
15
15
255
285
195
6
41
54
(31
)
(430
)
(2,514
)
(35,010
)
(76,550
)
(124,739
)
(6,994
)
(11
)
(164
)
(364
)
(778
)
(67
)
2,744
37,806
80,081
122,042
6,932
27
24
97
144
118
29
23
110
(52
)
(23
)
(118
)
(89
)
(51
)
394
(171
)
14
(379
)
(139
)
(106
)
(427
)
120
(76
)
17
(534
)
41
(24
)
11
(111
)
(95
)
457
55
(5
)
203
(61
)
939
3,378
5,776
(982
)
836
(48,214
)
(5,287
)
(199
)
(9,142
)
(14,355
)
(10,575
)
1,927
2,027
8,287
13,055
4,150
(888
)
(150
)
(1,876
)
(1,005
)
(854
)
(11,329
)
(18,059
)
(64,478
)
(58,609
)
(34,659
)
(5,336
)
(11,888
)
(129,193
)
(81,778
)
(132,298
)
16,673
28,957
83,603
60,939
138,708
(3
)
(4
)
(64
)
(58
)
(29
)
(3,800
)
(52,457
)
684
(116,663
)
(81,811
)
(35,557
)
Table of Contents
Three Months Ended
September 30,
Year Ended June 30,
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
(unaudited)
$
25,836
$
8,198
$
75,849
$
26,374
$
40,414
20,000
2,436
48,436
26,000
18,000
(3,000
)
(4,000
)
6,000
(6,000
)
1,700
(2,570
)
1,654
6,184
2,000
1,300
6,637
55
112
202
(101
)
(140
)
47,790
10,746
129,284
54,028
59,728
(3,728
)
14,808
18,397
(28,765
)
25,007
24,859
6,462
6,462
35,227
10,220
$
21,131
$
21,270
$
24,859
$
6,462
$
35,227
$
2,671
$
2,183
$
9,686
$
8,537
$
8,238
$
55
$
$
1,364
$
1,301
$
2
Table of Contents
1.
Organizations and Summary of Significant
Accounting Policies
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Three Months
Ended September 30,
Year Ended June 30
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
(unaudited)
(Amounts in thousands, except per share)
$
560
$
354
$
2,035
$
1,730
$
1,020
(22
)
(22
)
(90
)
(112
)
(107
)
$
538
$
332
$
1,945
$
1,618
$
913
$
0.12
$
0.08
$
0.45
$
0.39
$
0.25
$
0.12
$
0.07
$
0.43
$
0.36
$
0.22
$
0.11
$
0.07
$
0.39
$
0.34
$
0.21
$
0.10
$
0.06
$
0.38
$
0.32
$
0.19
Table of Contents
Three Months
Ended
Year Ended June 30
September 30,
2004
2004
2003
2002
(unaudited)
3.9
%
4.2
%
4.3
%
5.1
%
0.0
%
0.0
%
0.0
%
0.0
%
7 years
7 years
7 years
7 years
Table of Contents
2.
Time Deposits in Financial
Institutions
September 30, 2004
Amortized
Unrealized
Unrealized
Available-for-sale
Cost
Gains
Losses
Fair Value
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
47,588
$
29
$
(159
)
$
47,458
$
47,588
$
29
$
(159
)
$
47,458
Table of Contents
September 30, 2004
Due
After One
After Five
After
Total
Yield
Within
Yield
But Within
Yield
But Within
Yield
Ten
Yield
Amount
(1)
One Year
(1)
Five Years
(1)
Ten Years
(1)
Years
(1)
(unaudited)
(Amounts in thousands, except percentages)
$
9,920
3.01
%
$
214
2.95
%
$
931
2.96
%
$
1,346
2.96
%
$
7,429
3.02
%
37,668
3.93
%
651
3.93
%
2,887
3.93
%
4,353
3.93
%
29,777
3.93
%
$
47,588
3.74
%
$
865
3.69
%
$
3,818
3.69
%
$
5,699
3.70
%
$
37,206
3.75
%
$
47,458
3.74
%
$
865
3.69
%
$
3,818
3.69
%
$
5,699
3.70
%
$
37,076
3.75
%
September 30, 2004
Amortized
Unrealized
Unrealized
Held to maturity
Cost
Gains
Losses
Fair Value
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
4,827
$
$
(40
)
$
4,787
3,417
23
3,440
$
8,244
$
23
$
(40
)
$
8,227
June 30, 2004
$
256
$
2
$
$
258
3,409
7
3,416
$
3,665
$
9
$
$
3,674
June 30, 2003
$
441
$
8
$
$
449
$
441
$
8
$
$
449
Table of Contents
September 30, 2004
Due
After One
After Five
After
Total
Yield
Within
Yield
But Within
Yield
But Within
Yield
Ten
Yield
Amount
(1)
One Year
(1)
Five Years
(1)
Ten Years
(1)
Years
(1)
(unaudited)
(Amounts in thousands, except percentages)
$
3,417
3.65
%
$
$
3,417
3.65
%
$
$
4,595
4.11
%
78
4.11
%
349
4.11
%
529
4.11
%
3,639
4.11
%
232
2.32
%
6
2.32
%
26
2.32
%
38
2.32
%
162
2.32
%
$
8,244
3.87
%
$
84
3.98
%
$
3,792
3.68
%
$
567
3.99
%
$
3,801
4.03
%
$
8,227
3.87
%
$
84
3.98
%
$
3,815
3.68
%
$
567
3.99
%
$
3,761
4.03
%
June 30, 2004
Due
After One
After Five
After
Total
Yield
Within
Yield
But Within
Yield
But Within
Yield
Ten
Yield
Amount
(1)
One Year
(1)
Five Years
(1)
Ten Years
(1)
Years
(1)
$
3,409
3.64%
$
$
3,409
3.64%
$
$
256
2.64%
6
2.64%
26
2.64%
38
2.64%
186
2.64%
$
3,665
3.57%
$
6
2.64%
$
3,435
3.63%
$
38
2.64%
$
186
2.64%
$
3,674
3.57%
$
6
2.64%
$
3,442
3.63%
$
38
2.64%
$
188
2.64%
(1)
Weighted average yield at end of year is based on
the amortized cost of the securities. The weighted average yield
excludes principal-only strips.
(2)
Mortgage-backed securities were allocated based
on contractual principal maturities assuming no prepayments.
Table of Contents
4.
Loans
June 30
September 30,
2004
2004
2003
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
23,753
$
21,753
$
42,124
318,888
320,971
191,426
11,715
11,659
11,839
48
63
62
354,404
354,446
245,451
(1,060
)
(1,045
)
(790
)
1,761
1,860
1,272
$
355,105
$
355,261
$
245,933
For the Three
Months Ended
September 30,
Year Ended June 30
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
1,045
$
790
$
790
$
505
$
310
15
15
255
285
195
$
1,060
$
805
$
1,045
$
790
$
505
Table of Contents
5.
Furniture, Equipment and Software
June 30
September 30,
2004
2004
2003
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
10
$
10
$
10
162
161
127
312
310
291
165
165
154
649
646
582
(492
)
(465
)
(368
)
$
157
$
181
$
214
Table of Contents
6.
Deposits
June 30
September 30,
2004
2004
2003
Amount
Rate*
Amount
Rate*
Amount
Rate*
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
6,647
0.00%
$
2,279
0.00%
$
3,299
0.00%
27,221
1.38%
26,725
1.35%
29,902
1.38%
91,014
1.96%
94,120
1.96%
18,823
1.91%
106,021
3.28%
88,082
3.44%
95,489
3.93%
64,774
3.16%
58,635
3.20%
46,479
3.96%
170,795
3.23%
146,717
3.35%
141,968
3.94%
289,030
2.66%
267,562
2.66%
190,693
3.34%
$
295,677
2.60%
$
269,841
2.64%
$
193,992
3.28%
*
Based on weighted average stated interest rates.
$
80,365
23,018
14,760
14,309
14,265
$
146,717
7.
Advances from the Federal Home Loan
Bank
Table of Contents
September 30, 2004
June 30, 2004
June 30, 2003
Weighted-
Weighted-
Weighted-
Amount
Average Rate
Amount
Average Rate
Amount
Average Rate
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
23,000
1.99
%
$
3,000
1.42
%
$
15,900
5.21
%
24,500
2.34
%
20,500
2.36
%
0.00
%
39,279
3.90
%
36,500
3.66
%
3,000
2.56
%
23,785
3.70
%
22,768
3.35
%
14,000
4.86
%
3,000
3.31
%
10,770
2.80
%
18,000
3.70
%
7,911
4.32
%
7,908
3.94
%
5,000
4.17
%
$
121,475
3.20
%
$
101,446
3.19
%
$
55,900
4.40
%
8.
Note Payable and Borrowings
Table of Contents
9.
Income Taxes
Three Months Ended
September 30,
Year Ended June 30
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
323
$
240
$
1,046
$
950
$
113
85
371
345
1
436
325
1,417
1,295
1
3
(57
)
40
(21
)
(317
)
3
(21
)
14
(10
)
(113
)
6
(78
)
54
(31
)
(430
)
$
442
$
247
$
1,471
$
1,264
$
(429
)
Three Months
Ended September 30,
Year Ended June 30
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
(unaudited)
34.00
%
34.00
%
34.00
%
34.00
%
34.00
%
6.92
%
7.20
%
7.00
%
7.19
%
11.73
%
(139.16
)%
22.64
%
(0.85
)%
(0.10
)%
(0.65
)%
1.03
%
(1.80
)%
40.07
%
41.10
%
40.35
%
42.22
%
(72.59
)%
Table of Contents
June 30,
September 30,
2004
2004
2003
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
279
$
273
$
160
65
86
172
140
123
109
34
34
34
117
111
114
52
687
627
589
(36
)
(37
)
(42
)
(161
)
(137
)
(76
)
(37
)
(46
)
(10
)
(234
)
(220
)
(128
)
$
453
$
407
$
461
10.
Stockholders Equity
Table of Contents
Weighted-Average
Number of
Exercise Price
Shares
Per Share
509,596
$
4.19
111,790
$
10.00
(185
)
$
4.19
(1,171
)
$
7.66
620,030
$
5.23
1,750
$
11.00
(3,322
)
$
6.98
618,458
$
5.24
132,036
$
10.00
(23,423
)
$
4.74
(6,554
)
$
8.22
720,517
$
6.10
2,000
$
10.00
722,517
$
6.11
335,276
$
4.19
444,642
$
4.71
499,705
$
4.94
517,702
$
4.99
September 30, 2004 (unaudited)
Options Outstanding
Options Exercisable
Weighted-Average
Remaining
Range of
Number
Contractual
Weighted-Average
Number
Weighted-Average
Exercise Prices
Outstanding
Life (Yrs)
Exercise Price
Exercisable
Exercise Price
$
4.19
483,945
5.4
$
4.19
446,881
$
4.19
$
10.00
237,072
8.7
$
10.00
70,146
$
10.00
$
11.00
1,500
7.8
$
11.00
675
$
11.00
722,517
517,702
Table of Contents
June 30, 2004
Options Outstanding
Options Exercisable
Weighted-Average
Remaining
Range of
Number
Contractual
Weighted-Average
Number
Weighted-Average
Exercise Prices
Outstanding
Life (Yrs)
Exercise Price
Exercisable
Exercise Price
$
4.19
483,945
5.6
$
4.19
435,432
$
4.19
$
10.00
235,072
8.9
$
10.00
63,673
$
10.00
$
11.00
1,500
8.0
$
11.00
600
$
11.00
720,517
499,705
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Weighted-Average
Number of
Exercise Price
Shares
Per Share
749,875
$
4.19
13,300
$
14.00
763,175
$
4.36
46,650
$
14.00
809,825
$
4.92
(8,750
)
$
4.19
801,075
$
4.93
(13,125
)
$
4.19
787,950
$
4.94
11.
Earnings Per Share
Three Months
Ended September 30,
Year Ended June 30
2004
2003
2004
2003
2002
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
$
661
$
354
$
2,175
$
1,730
$
1,020
101
140
$
560
$
354
$
2,035
$
1,730
$
1,020
4,508,664
4,490,136
4,502,284
4,468,296
4,128,051
221,901
224,521
222,556
231,002
231,708
434,398
435,641
435,642
435,642
435,642
5,164,963
5,150,298
5,160,482
5,134,940
4,795,401
$
0.12
$
0.08
$
0.45
$
0.39
$
0.25
$
0.11
$
0.07
$
0.39
$
0.34
$
0.21
12.
Commitments and Contingencies
Table of Contents
13.
Off-Balance Sheet Activities
14.
Minimum Regulatory Capital
Requirements
Table of Contents
To Be Well
For Capital
Capitalized Under
Adequacy
Prompt Corrective
Actual
Purposes
Action Provisions
September 30, 2004 (unaudited)
Amount
Ratio
Amount
Ratio
Amount
Ratio
adjusted tangible assets) (unaudited)
$
34,447
7.60
%
$
18,142
4.00
%
$
22,677
5.00
%
$
34,447
12.03
%
N/A
N/A
$
17,180
6.00
%
$
35,507
12.40
%
$
22,907
8.00
%
$
28,634
10.00
%
$
34,447
7.60
%
$
6,803
1.50
%
N/A
N/A
adjusted tangible assets)
$
31,748
7.84
%
$
16,193
4.00
%
$
20,241
5.00
%
$
31,748
11.11
%
N/A
N/A
$
17,146
6.00
%
$
32,793
11.48
%
$
22,861
8.00
%
$
28,577
10.00
%
$
31,748
7.84
%
$
6,072
1.50
%
N/A
N/A
adjusted tangible assets)
$
21,108
8.09
%
$
10,928
4.00
%
$
13,660
5.00
%
$
21,108
11.40
%
N/A
N/A
$
11,635
6.00
%
$
22,898
11.81
%
$
15,514
8.00
%
$
19,392
10.00
%
$
21,108
8.09
%
$
4,098
1.50
%
N/A
N/A
15.
Employment Agreements and Employee Benefit
Plans
Table of Contents
16.
Related Party Transactions
17.
Fair Value of Financial Instruments
Cash and Cash
Equivalents
The carrying
amounts of cash and short term instruments approximate fair
values.
Table of Contents
Time Deposits in Financial
Institutions
The carrying
amount of time deposits in financial institutions approximates
fair value.
Investment
Securities
Fair values for
securities, excluding Federal Home Loan Bank stock, are
based on quoted market prices. The carrying value of Federal
Home Loan Bank stock approximates fair value based on the
redemption provisions of the Federal Home Loan Bank.
Loans Held for Investment and Held for
Sale
For adjustable rate
loans held for investment that reprice frequently with no
significant change in credit risk, fair values are based on
carrying values.
Fair values for fixed rate loans held for sale
are estimated using discounted cash flow analyses, assuming
interest rates currently being offered for loans with similar
terms to borrowers of similar credit. Fair values of loans held
for sale are based on commitments from investors or prevailing
market prices.
Deposits
The fair values disclosed for demand deposits (interest and
non-interest checking, savings, and certain types of money
market accounts) are equal to the amount payable on demand at
the reporting date (i.e., their carrying amounts). Fair values
for fixed rate certificates of deposit are estimated using a
discounted cash flow calculation that applies interest rates
currently being offered on certificates to a schedule of
aggregated expected monthly maturities on time deposits.
Advances from
FHLB
The fair values of
the FHLB advance are estimated using discounted cash flow
analyses based on the Companys current incremental
borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements.
Accrued
Interest
The carrying
amounts of accrued interest approximate fair value.
Note
Payable
The carrying
amount of the note payable approximates fair value, as the rate
is based on current market rates.
Off-Balance-Sheet
Instruments
Fair values
for off-balance-sheet, credit-related financial instruments are
based on fees currently charged to enter into similar
agreements, taking into account the remaining terms of the
agreements and the counterparties credit standing and are
not material.
Table of Contents
June 30,
September 30,
2004
2004
2003
Carrying
Fair
Carrying
Fair
Carrying
Fair
Amount
Value
Amount
Value
Amount
Value
(unaudited)
(Dollars in thousands)
$
21,131
$
21,131
$
24,859
$
24,859
$
6,462
$
6,462
47,458
47,458
4,827
4,787
256
258
441
449
3,417
3,440
3,409
3,416
8,909
8,909
9,503
9,503
11,872
11,872
5,729
5,729
4,789
4,789
2,795
2,795
355,105
358,851
355,261
355,932
245,933
252,300
216
216
435
435
3,602
3,602
1,657
1,657
1,486
1,486
1,107
1,107
124,882
124,882
123,124
123,124
52,024
52,024
170,795
171,771
146,717
147,469
141,968
145,079
121,475
121,119
101,446
99,251
55,900
58,839
3,300
3,300
1,300
1,300
324
324
283
283
272
272
Table of Contents
18.
Parent-Only Financial Information
June 30,
2004
2003
(Dollars in thousands)
ASSETS
$
1,118
$
516
218
256
85
156
31,749
22,108
$
33,170
$
23,036
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS
EQUITY
$
1,300
$
12
99
151
1,411
151
6,637
45
45
22,363
22,161
2,714
679
31,759
22,885
$
33,170
$
23,036
Table of Contents
Year Ended June 30,
2004
2003
2002
(Dollars in thousands)
$
2
$
3
$
2
60
46
(58
)
3
(44
)
478
323
565
478
323
565
(536
)
(320
)
(609
)
215
(213
)
71
2,640
2,265
1,416
$
2,175
$
1,730
$
1,020
Year Ended June 30,
2004
2003
2002
(Dollars in thousands)
$
2,175
$
1,730
$
1,020
(2,640
)
(2,265
)
(1,416
)
214
(214
)
394
109
(393
)
(4
)
(40
)
121
(15
)
(396
)
(593
)
(235
)
(7,072
)
(1,051
)
(4,600
)
71
(7,001
)
(1,051
)
(4,600
)
Table of Contents
Year Ended June 30,
2004
2003
2002
(Dollars in thousands)
1,654
6,184
6,637
1,700
(2,570
)
1,300
202
(140
)
7,999
1,654
5,314
602
10
479
516
506
27
$
1,118
$
516
$
506
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Amount*
$
2,707.10
$
*
All amounts are estimates except the SEC filing
fee, the NASD filing fee and the Nasdaq National Market listing
fee.
Item 14.
Indemnification of Directors and
Officers.
Item 15.
Recent Sales of Unregistered
Securities.
1. Between July 1, 2001 and
September 30, 2004, the Registrant granted options to
purchase a total of 839,172 shares of its common stock at
prices ranging from $4.19 to $11.00 per share to employees,
directors and consultants pursuant to its amended and restated
1999 stock option plan. These issuances were made in reliance on
Rule 701 of the Securities Act.
Table of Contents
2. In September 2001 and October 2001, the
Registrant issued and sold an aggregate of 587,200 shares
of its common stock for an aggregate purchase price of
$5,872,000. These sales were made in reliance on
Section 4(2) of the Securities Act.
3. In June 2002 and July 2002, the
Registrant issued and sold an aggregate of 179,850 shares
of its common stock, together with warrants to purchase up to an
additional 59,950 shares of its common stock, for an
aggregate purchase price of $2,158,200. These sales were made in
reliance on Section 4(2) of the Securities Act.
4. Between October 2003 and June 2004, the
Registrant issued and sold an aggregate of 675 shares of
its Series A 6% Cumulative Nonparticipating
Perpetual Preferred Stock, Convertible through January 1,
2009 for an aggregate purchase price of $6,750,000. These sales
were made in reliance on Section 4(2) of the Securities Act.
Item 16.
Exhibits and Financial Statement
Schedules.
Item 17.
Undertakings.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
BOFI HOLDING, INC.
By:
/s/ GARY LEWIS EVANS
Gary Lewis Evans
President and Chief Executive
Officer
Signature
Title
Date
/s/ GARY LEWIS EVANS
Gary Lewis Evans
President, Chief Executive Officer and Director
(Principal
Executive Officer)
December 16, 2004
/s/ ANDREW J. MICHELETTI
Andrew J. Micheletti
Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial and
Accounting Officer)
December 16, 2004
/s/ JERRY F. ENGLERT
Jerry F. Englert
Chairman
December 16, 2004
/s/ THEODORE C. ALLRICH
Theodore C. Allrich
Vice Chairman
December 16, 2004
/s/ PAUL GRINBERG
Paul Grinberg
Director
December 16, 2004
/s/ ROBERT EPRILE
Robert Eprile
Director
December 16, 2004
Table of Contents
Signature
Title
Date
/s/ THOMAS J. PANCHERI
Thomas J. Pancheri
Director
December 16, 2004
/s/ CONNIE M. PAULUS
Connie M. Paulus
Director
December 16, 2004
/s/ GORDON L. WITTER
Gordon L. Witter
Director
December 16, 2004
Table of Contents
Exhibit
Number
Document
1
.1*
Form of Underwriting Agreement
3
.1*
Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant
3
.2*
Certificate of Amendment of Certificate of
Incorporation of the Registrant
3
.3*
Certificate of Designation of the Registrant
3
.4
Bylaws of the Registrant
4
.1*
Reference is made to Exhibits 3.1, 3.2, 3.3
and 3.4
4
.2*
Specimen Stock Certificate of the Registrant
5
.1*
Opinion of Morrison & Foerster LLP as to
the legality of the common stock
10
.1*
Form of Indemnification Agreement between the
Registrant and each of its executive officers and directors
10
.2
Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan, as
amended
10
.3
2004 Stock Incentive Plan
10
.4
2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, including
forms of agreements thereunder
10
.5
Assignment and Assumption Agreement and Consent
to Assignment, dated as of September 22, 1999, by and among
the Registrant, as assignee, Conti Receivables Management LLC
(Tenant), Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners,
L.P. (Landlord) and Contifincial Corporation,
together with Lease, dated March 16, 1998, between Landlord
and Tenant, as amended by the First Amendment to Lease, dated
November 15, 2002, between Landlord and Tenants
10
.6
Employment Agreement, dated as of July 1,
2003, between Bank of Internet USA and Gary Lewis Evans
10
.7
Employment Agreement, dated as of July 1,
2003, between Bank of Internet USA and Patrick A. Dunn
10
.8
Employment Agreement, dated as of July 1,
2003, between Bank of Internet USA and Andrew J. Micheletti
10
.9
Employment Agreement, dated as of July 1,
2003, between Bank of Internet USA and Michael J. Berengolts
23
.1*
Consent of Morrison & Foerster LLP.
Reference is made to Exhibit 5.1
23
.2
Consent of Deloitte & Touche LLP,
Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
24
.1
Powers of Attorney. Reference is made to
Page II-4
*
To be filed by amendment.
EXHIBIT 3.4
BYLAWS
OF
BOI.COM HOLDING, INC.
AS IN EFFECT ON JULY 7, 1999
ARTICLE I
OFFICES
Section 1. Registered Office. The initial registered office of the corporation shall be at such place as is designated in the Certificate of Incorporation (herein, as amended from time to time, so called), or thereafter the registered office may be at such other place as the Board of Directors may from time to time designate by resolution.
Section 2. Other Offices. The corporation may also have offices at such other places, both within and without the State of Delaware, as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine or the business of the corporation may require.
ARTICLE II
STOCKHOLDERS
Section 1. Meetings. All meetings of the stockholders for the election of directors shall be held at the principal office of the corporation, or at such other place, within or without the State of Delaware, as may be fixed from time to time by the Board of Directors. Meetings of stockholders for any other purpose may be held at such time and place, within or without the State of Delaware, as shall be stated in the notice of the meeting or in a duly executed waiver of notice thereof.
Section 2. Annual Meeting. An annual meeting of the stockholders shall be held on such date in each fiscal year of the corporation as the Board of Directors shall select, at which meeting the stockholders shall elect members of the Board of Directors and transact such other business as may properly be brought before the meeting. To be properly brought before an annual meeting, business must be (a) specified in the notice of meeting (or any supplement thereto) given by or at the direction of the Board of Directors, (b) otherwise properly brought before the meeting by or at the direction of the Board of Directors, or (c) otherwise properly brought before the meeting by a stockholder. For business to be properly brought before an annual meeting by a stockholder, the stockholder must have given timely notice thereof in writing to the Secretary of the corporation. To be timely, a stockholder's notice must be delivered or mailed to and received at the principal executive offices of the corporation not less than sixty calendar days prior to the meeting; provided, however, that in the event that less than sixty-five calendar days' notice or prior public disclosure of the date of the meeting is given or made to stockholders, notice by the stockholder to be timely must be so received not later than the close of business on the tenth calendar day following the date on which such notice of the date of the annual meeting was mailed or such public disclosure was made. A stockholder's notice to the Secretary shall set forth as to each matter the stockholder proposes to bring before the annual meeting (i) a brief description of the business desired to be brought before the annual meeting, (ii) the name and address, as they appear on the corporation's books, of the stockholder proposing such business, (iii) the class and number of shares of the corporation which are beneficially owned by the stockholder and (iv) any material interest of the stockholder in such
business. In addition, a stockholder intending to nominate one or more persons for election as a director at an annual meeting must comply with Section 2, Article III of these Bylaws for such nomination or nominations to be properly brought before such meeting. No business shall be conducted at an annual meeting except in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Section 2. The presiding officer of an annual meeting shall, if the facts warrant, determine that business was not properly brought before the meeting and in accordance with the provisions of this Section 2 and, if such presiding officer should so determine, such presiding officer shall so declare to the meeting and any such business not properly brought before the meeting shall not be transacted.
Section 3. List of Stockholders. At least ten days before each meeting of stockholders, a complete list of the stockholders entitled to vote at said meeting, arranged in alphabetical order, with the address of and the number of voting shares registered in the name of each stockholder, shall be prepared by the officer or agent having charge of the stock transfer books. Such list shall be kept on file either at a place within the city where the meeting is to be held, which place shall be specified in the notice of the meeting, or, if not so specified at the place where the meeting is to be held for a period of ten days prior to such meeting and shall be subject to inspection by any stockholder at any time during usual business hours. Such list shall be produced and kept open at the time and place of the meeting during the whole time thereof, and shall be subject to the inspection of any stockholder who may be present. The Board of Directors may fix in advance a record date for the purpose of determining stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders, such record date to be not less than ten nor more than sixty days prior to such meeting, or the Board of Directors may close the stock transfer books for such purpose for a period of not less than ten nor more than sixty days prior to such meeting. In the absence of any action by the Board of Directors, the close of business on the date next preceding the day on which the notice is given shall be the record date.
Section 4. Special Meetings. Special meetings of the stockholders, for any purpose or purposes, unless otherwise prescribed by the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware (herein called the "Act"), or by the Certificate of Incorporation, may be called only (i) by the Chairman of the Board, (ii) the President, or (iii) by the Secretary, within ten calendar days after receipt of a written request of a majority of the total number of directors then in office. Business transacted at any special meeting shall be confined to the purposes stated in the notice of the meeting and no stockholder shall have the right to bring any additional business (whether similar or dissimilar in nature) before, or to propose or nominate any person for appointment or election to any position or office at, any special meeting unless all stockholders entitled to vote are present and affirmatively consent thereto.
Section 5. Notice. Written or printed notice stating the place, day and hour of any meeting of the stockholders and, in case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called, shall be delivered not less than ten nor more than sixty days before the date of the meeting, either personally or by mail, by or at the direction of the Chairman of the Board, the President, or the Secretary, to each stockholder of record entitled to vote at the meeting.
Section 6. Quorum. At all meetings of the stockholders, the presence in person or by proxy of the holders of a majority of the shares issued and outstanding and entitled to vote shall be necessary and sufficient to constitute a quorum for the transaction of business except as otherwise provided by the Act, by the Certificate of Incorporation or by these Bylaws. If such quorum shall not be present or represented at any meeting of the stockholders, the stockholders entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy, shall have power to adjourn the meeting from time to time, without notice other than announcement at the meeting, until a quorum shall be present or represented. At such adjourned meeting at which a quorum shall be present or represented, any business may be transacted at the meeting as originally notified.
Section 7. Voting. When a quorum is present at any meeting, the vote of the holders of a majority of the shares having voting power present in person or represented by proxy at such meeting shall decide any question brought before such meeting, unless the question is one upon which, by express provision of the Act or of the Certificate of Incorporation or of these Bylaws, a different vote is required, in which case such express provision shall govern and control the decision of such question. The stockholders present in person or by proxy at a duly convened meeting at which a quorum initially is present may continue to transact business until the adjournment of such meeting, notwithstanding any withdrawal of stockholders that results in a quorum ceasing to be present.
Section 8. Proxy. Each outstanding share, regardless of class, shall be entitled to one vote on each matter submitted to a vote at a meeting of stockholders, except to the extent that the voting rights of the shares of any class or classes are limited or denied by the Certificate of Incorporation. At any meeting of the stockholders, every stockholder having the right to vote shall be entitled to vote in person or by proxy, but no such proxy shall be voted after three years from its date unless it provides for a longer period. Another person may be authorized to act as proxy for a stockholder by an instrument in writing subscribed by such stockholder or his or her duly authorized attorney in fact or by any other means authorized under the Act as from time to time in effect. Any such proxy shall be filed with the Secretary prior to or at the time of the meeting.
A duly executed proxy shall be irrevocable if, and only as long as, it is coupled with an interest sufficient in law to support an irrevocable power. A proxy may be made irrevocable regardless of whether the interest with which it is coupled is an interest in the stock itself or an interest in the corporation generally.
ARTICLE III
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
Section 1. Board of Directors. The business and affairs of the corporation shall be managed by its Board of Directors, which may exercise all such powers of the corporation and do all such lawful acts and things as are not by the Act or by the
Certificate of Incorporation or by these Bylaws directed or required to be exercised or done by the stockholders.
Section 2. Number of Directors. Except as otherwise fixed pursuant to the provisions of Article IV of the Certificate of Incorporation relating to the rights of the holders of any class or series of stock having a preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or upon liquidation to elect additional directors under specified circumstances, the number of directors (none of whom need be stockholders or residents of the State of Delaware) shall be fixed by resolution of the Board of Directors from time to time. Except as otherwise set forth in the Certificate of Incorporation, the directors, other than those who may be elected by the holders of any class or series of stock having a preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or upon liquidation, shall be classified, with respect to the time for which they severally hold office, into three classes, as nearly equal in number as possible, as determined by the Board of Directors, one class to hold office initially for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2000, another class to hold office initially for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2001, and another class to hold office initially for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2002, with members of each class to hold office until their successors are elected and qualified. At each annual meeting of the stockholders of the corporation, the successors to the class of directors whose term expires at that meeting shall be elected to hold office for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders held in the third year following the year of their election.
Subject to the rights of holders of any class or series of stock having a
preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or upon liquidation,
nominations for the election of directors may be made by the Board of Directors
or a committee appointed by the Board of Directors or, solely in the case of any
election that is to be held at an annual meeting of stockholders, by any
stockholder entitled to vote in the election of directors generally. Any
stockholder entitled to vote in the election of directors generally may nominate
one or more persons for election as directors at an annual meeting of
stockholders only if written notice of such stockholder's intent to make such
nomination or nominations has been given, either by personal delivery or by
United States mail, postage prepaid, to the Secretary not later than ninety days
prior to the anniversary date of the immediately preceding annual meeting. Each
such notice shall set forth: (i) the name and address of the stockholder who
intends to make the nomination and of the person or persons to be nominated;
(ii) a representation that the stockholder is a holder of record of stock in the
corporation entitled to vote at such meeting and intends to appear in person or
by proxy at the meeting to nominate the person or persons specified in the
notice; (iii) a description of all arrangements or understandings between the
stockholder and each nominee and any other person or persons (naming such person
or persons) pursuant to which the nomination or nominations are to be made by
the stockholder; (iv) such other information regarding each nominee proposed by
such stockholder as would be required to be included in a proxy statement filed
pursuant to the proxy rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission; and (v)
the consent of each nominee to serve as a director of the corporation if so
elected. The presiding officer of the meeting may refuse
to acknowledge the nomination of any person not made in compliance with the foregoing procedure.
Section 3. Newly Created Directorships and Vacancies. Subject to the rights, if any, of the holders of any class or series of stock having a preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or upon liquidation to elect additional directors under specified circumstances, newly created directorships resulting from any increase in the number of directors and any vacancies on the Board of Directors resulting from death, resignation, disqualification, removal or other cause shall be filled solely by the affirmative vote of a majority of the remaining directors then in office, even though less than a quorum of the Board of Directors, by a sole remaining director, or, if there is no remaining director, by the stockholders. Any director elected in accordance with the preceding sentence shall hold office for the remainder of the full term of the class of directors in which the new directorship was created or the vacancy occurred and until such director's successor has been elected and qualified. No decrease in the number of directors constituting the Board of directors may shorten the term of any incumbent director.
Section 4. Removal. Except as otherwise set forth in the Certificate of Incorporation and subject to the rights, if any, of the holders of any class or series of stock having a preference over the Common Stock as to dividends or upon liquidation in respect of the election of additional directors under specified circumstances, any director may be removed from office by the stockholders only for cause and only in the manner provided in the Certificate of Incorporation.
ARTICLE IV
MEETINGS OF THE BOARD
Section 1. Meetings. The directors of the corporation may hold their meetings, both regular and special, at such times and places as are fixed from time to time by resolution of the Board of Directors.
Section 2. Annual Meeting. A meeting of the Board of Directors shall be held without further notice immediately following the annual meeting of stockholders, and at the same place, unless by unanimous consent of the directors then elected and serving, such time or place shall be changed.
Section 3. Regular Meetings. Regular meetings of the Board of Directors may be held without notice at such time and place as shall from time to time be determined by resolution of the Board of Directors.
Section 4. Special Meetings. Special meetings of the Board of Directors may be called by the Chairman of the Board, the President or by a majority of the total number of directors then in office. The purpose of any special meeting shall be specified in the notice or any waiver of notice. Each notice of a meeting of the Board of Directors may be delivered personally or by telephone to a director not later than the day before the day on which the meeting is to be held; sent to a director at his or her residence or usual place
of business, or at any other place of which he or she shall have notified the corporation, by telegram, telex, cable, wireless, facsimile or similar means at least twenty-four hours before the time at which the meeting is to be held; or posted to him or her at such place by prepaid first-class or air mail, as appropriate, at least three days before the day on which the meeting is to be held. Notice of a meeting of the Board of Directors need not be given to any director who submits a signed waiver of notice, whether before or after the meeting, or who attends the meeting without protesting, prior to or at its commencement, the lack of notice to him or her.
Section 5. Quorum. At all meetings of the Board of Directors the presence of a majority of the total number of directors then in office shall be necessary and sufficient to constitute a quorum for the transaction of business, and the affirmative vote of at least a majority of the directors present at any meeting at which there is a quorum shall be the act of the Board of Directors except as may be otherwise specifically provided by the Act or by the Certificate of Incorporation or by these Bylaws. If a quorum shall not be present at any meeting of directors, the directors present thereat may adjourn the meeting from time to time without notice other than announcement at the meeting, until a quorum shall be present.
Section 6. Executive Committee. The Board of Directors may, by resolution passed by a majority of the total number of directors then in office, designate an Executive Committee, to consist of two or more directors of the corporation, one of whom shall be designated as chairman, who shall preside at all meetings of such committee. To the extent provided in the resolution of the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee shall have and may exercise all of the authority of the Board of Directors in the management of the business and affairs of the corporation, except where action of the Board of Directors as a whole is expressly required by the Act or by the Certificate of Incorporation, and shall have power to authorize the seal of the corporation to be affixed to all papers which may require it. The Executive Committee shall keep regular minutes of its proceedings and report the same to the Board of Directors when required. Any member of the Executive Committee may be removed, with or without cause, by the affirmative vote of a majority of the total number of directors then in office. If any vacancy or vacancies occur in the Executive Committee caused by death, resignation, retirement, disqualification, removal or other cause, the vacancy shall be filled by the affirmative vote of a majority of the total number of directors then in office.
Section 7. Other Committees. The Board of Directors may, by resolution passed by a majority of the total number of directors then in office, designate other committees, each committee to consist of two or more directors of the corporation, which committees shall have such power and authority and shall perform such functions as may be provided in such resolution. Such committee or committees shall have such name or names as may be designated by the Board of Directors and shall keep regular minutes of their proceedings and report the same to the Board of Directors when required.
Section 8. Action by Consent. Any action required or permitted to be taken at any meeting of the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee or any other committee of the Board of Directors may be taken without such a meeting if a consent in
writing, setting forth the action so taken, is signed by all the members of the Board of Directors or the Executive Committee or such other committee, as the case may be, and the writing or writings are filed with the minutes of the proceedings of the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee or such other committee.
Section 9. Compensation of Directors. Directors, as such, shall not receive any stated salary for their services, but may receive such compensation and reimbursements as may be determined from time to time by resolution of the Board of Directors; provided that nothing herein contained shall be construed to preclude any director from serving the corporation in any other capacity and receiving compensation therefor.
ARTICLE V
NOTICE OF MEETINGS
Section 1. Form of Notice. Whenever notice is required to be given to any director or stockholder under the provisions of the Act or of the Certificate of Incorporation or of these Bylaws, and no provision is made as to how such notice shall be given, it shall not be construed to mean personal notice, but any such notice may be given in writing, by mail, postage prepaid, addressed to such director or stockholder at such address as appears on the books of the corporation. Any notice required or permitted to be given by mail shall be deemed to be given at the time when the same is deposited in the United States mail.
Section 2. Waiver. Whenever any written notice is required to be given to any director or stockholder under the provisions of the Act or of the Certificate of Incorporation or of these Bylaws, a waiver thereof in writing signed by the person or persons entitled to such notice, whether before or after the time stated in such notice, shall be deemed equivalent to the giving of such notice.
Section 3. Telephone Meetings. Stockholders, members of the Board of Directors or members of any committee designated by the Board of Directors may participate in and hold meetings of such stockholders, Board of Directors or committee by means of conference telephone or similar communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other.
ARTICLE VI
OFFICERS
Section 1. In General. The officers of the corporation shall be elected by the Board of Directors and shall consist of a Chairman of the Board, a President, a Vice President, a Secretary and a Treasurer. The Board of Directors may also elect a Vice Chairman of the Board, additional Vice Presidents, Assistant Vice Presidents, a Controller, and one or more Assistant Secretaries and Assistant Treasurers and such other
officers as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine. Any two or more offices may be held by the same person.
Section 2. Election. The Board of Directors, at the meeting thereof held after each annual meeting of stockholders, shall elect from its members a Chairman of the Board. At such meeting the Board of Directors shall also elect a President, one or more Vice Presidents, a Secretary and a Treasurer, none of whom need be a member of the Board of Directors.
Section 3. Salaries. The salaries of all officers and agents of the corporation shall be fixed by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee or another committee, if so authorized by the Board of Directors; provided that the Board of Directors may delegate to an officer of the Company the power to fix the compensation of other officers and agents.
Section 4. Term of Office and Removal. Each officer of the corporation shall hold office until his or her death, or his or her resignation or removal from office, or the election or appointment and qualification of his or her successor, whichever shall first occur. Any officer or agent elected or appointed by the Board of Directors may be removed by the Board of Directors, whenever in its judgment the best interests of the corporation will be served thereby. If the office of any officer becomes vacant for any reason, the vacancy may be filled by the Board of Directors.
Section 5. Chairman of the Board. The Chairman of the Board, if any, shall preside at all meetings of the Board of Directors at which he or she may be present and shall perform such other duties as may be assigned to him or her by the Board of Directors.
Section 6. Vice Chairman of the Board. The Vice Chairman of the Board, if any, shall have such powers and perform such duties as the Board of Directors or the Executive Committee may from time to time prescribe or as the Chairman of the Board may from time to time delegate to him. In the absence or disability of the Chairman of the Board, the Vice Chairman of the Board shall perform the duties and exercise the powers of the Chairman of the Board.
Section 7. President. The President shall be the chief executive officer of the corporation and shall preside at all meetings of the stockholders. In the absence of the Chairman of the Board and the Vice Chairman of the Board, if any, he or she shall preside at all meetings of the Board of Directors. The President shall perform such other duties as from time to time may be assigned to him by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee of the corporation. Without limiting the generality or effect of the foregoing, the President shall have full power and authority, except as otherwise required by law or directed by the Board of Directors, (a) to execute, on behalf of the corporation, all duly authorized contracts, agreements, promissory notes, deeds, assignments, conveyances, applications, consents, proxies, powers of attorney and other documents and instruments to which the corporation may be a party, and (b) to vote and otherwise act on behalf of the corporation, in person or by proxy, at any meeting of stockholders (or
with respect to any action of such stockholders) of any other corporation in which the corporation may hold securities and otherwise to exercise any and all rights and powers which the corporation may possess by reason of its ownership of securities of any such other corporation.
Section 8. Vice Presidents. Each Vice President shall have such powers and
perform such duties as the Board of Directors or the Executive Committee may
from time to time prescribe, or as the President may from time to time delegate
to him or her. In the absence or disability of the President, a Vice President
designated by the Board of Directors shall perform the duties and exercise the
powers of the President. Without limiting the generality or effect of the
foregoing, each Vice President, if any, designated as an "Executive Vice
President" shall have full power and authority, except as otherwise required by
law or directed by the Board of Directors, (a) to execute, on behalf of the
corporation, all duly authorized contracts, agreements, promissory notes, deeds,
assignments, conveyances, applications, consents, proxies, powers of attorney
and other documents and instruments to which the corporation may be a party, and
(b) to vote and otherwise act on behalf of the corporation, in person or by
proxy, at any meeting of stockholders (or with respect to any action of such
stockholders) of any other corporation in which the corporation may hold
securities and otherwise to exercise any and all rights and powers which the
corporation may possess by reason of its ownership of securities of any such
other corporation.
Section 9. Secretary. The Secretary shall attend all meetings of the stockholders and record all votes and the minutes of all proceedings in a book to be kept for that purpose. The Secretary shall perform like duties for the Board of Directors and the Executive Committee when required. He or she shall give, or cause to be given, notice of all meetings of the stockholders and special meetings of the Board of Directors and shall perform duties as may be prescribed by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee. He or she shall keep in safe custody the seal of the corporation.
Section 10. Assistant Secretaries. Each Assistant Secretary shall have such powers and perform such duties as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe. Unless otherwise provided by the Board of Directors, in the absence or disability of the Secretary, any Assistant Secretary may perform the duties and exercise the powers of the Secretary.
Section 11. Treasurer. The Treasurer shall have the custody of all corporate funds and securities, shall keep full and accurate accounts of receipts and disbursements of the corporation, and shall deposit all moneys and other valuable effects in the name and to the credit of the corporation in such depositories as may be designated by the Board of Directors. He or she shall disburse the funds of the corporation as may be ordered by the Board of Directors, taking proper vouchers for such disbursements, shall render to the President and directors, at the regular meetings of the Board, or whenever they may require it, an account of all his or her transactions as Treasurer and of the financial condition of the corporation, and shall perform such other duties as the Board of Directors or the Executive Committee may prescribe.
Section 12. Assistant Treasurers. Each Assistant Treasurer shall have such powers and perform such duties as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe. Unless otherwise provided by the Board of Directors, in the absence or disability of the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer may perform and exercise the powers of the Treasurer.
Section 13. Controller. The Controller shall share with the Treasurer responsibility for the financial and accounting books and records of the corporation, shall report to the Treasurer, and shall perform such other duties as the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee or the President may from time to time prescribe.
Section 14. Bonding. If required by the Board of Directors, all or certain of the officers shall give the corporation a bond, in such form, in such sum, and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the Board of Directors, for the faithful performance of the duties of their office and for the restoration to the corporation, in case of their death, resignation, retirement or removal from office, of all books, papers, vouchers, money and other property of whatever kind in their possession or under their control belonging to the corporation.
ARTICLE VII
CERTIFICATES OF SHARES
Section 1. Form of Certificates. Certificates representing shares of stock of the corporation will be in such form as may be determined by the Board of Directors, subject to applicable legal requirements. Such certificates shall be consecutively numbered and shall be entered in the stock book of the corporation as they are issued. Each certificate shall state on the face thereof the holder's name, the number, class of shares, and the par value of such shares or a statement that such shares are without par value. Each certificate shall be signed by the President or a Vice President and the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, and may be sealed with the seal of the corporation or a facsimile thereof. All signatures upon such certificates may be facsimiles. In case any officer or officers who have signed, or whose facsimile signature or signatures have been used on such certificates, shall cease to be such officer or officers of the corporation, whether because of death, resignation or otherwise, before such certificates have been delivered by the corporation or its agents, such certificates may nevertheless be issued and delivered as though the person or persons who signed such certificates or whose facsimile signature or signatures have been used thereon had not ceased to be such officer or officers of the corporation.
Section 2. Lost Certificates. The Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may direct that a new certificate be issued in place of any certificate theretofore issued by the corporation alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed, upon the making of an affidavit of that fact, satisfactory to the Secretary or such Assistant Secretary, by the person claiming the certificate to have been lost, stolen or destroyed, and the Secretary or such Assistant Secretary may require the owner of such lost, stolen or destroyed certificate, or his or her legal representative, to give the corporation a bond, in such form, in such sum,
and with such surety or sureties as the Secretary or such Assistant Secretary may approve as indemnity against any claim that may be made against the corporation with respect to the certificate alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed.
Section 3. Transfer of Shares. Shares of stock shall be transferable only on the books of the corporation by the holder thereof in person or by his or her duly authorized attorney, lawfully constituted in writing.
Section 4. Registered Stockholders. The corporation shall be entitled to treat the holder of record of any share or shares of stock as the holder in fact thereof and, accordingly, shall not be bound to recognize any equitable or other claim to or interest in such share or shares on the part of any other person, whether or not it shall have express or other notice thereof, except as otherwise provided by law.
ARTICLE VIII
GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 1. Dividends. Dividends upon the outstanding shares of the corporation, subject to the provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation, if any, may be declared by the Board of Directors at any regular or special meeting. Dividends may be declared and paid in cash, in property, or in shares of the corporation, subject to the provisions of the Act and the Certificate of Incorporation. The Board of Directors may fix in advance a record date for the purpose of determining stockholders entitled to receive payment of any dividend, such record date to be not more than sixty days prior to the payment date of such dividend, or the Board of Directors may close the stock transfer books for such purpose for a period of not more than sixty days prior to the payment date of such dividend. In the absence of any action by the Board of Directors, the date upon which the Board of Directors adopts the resolution declaring such dividend shall be the record date.
Section 2. Reserves. There may be created by resolution of the Board of Directors out of the net profits of the corporation such reserve or reserves as the directors from time to time, in their discretion, think proper to provide for contingencies, or to equalize dividends, or to repair or maintain any property of the corporation, or for such other purpose as the directors shall think beneficial to the corporation, and the directors may modify or abolish any such reserve in the manner in which it was created.
Section 3. Fiscal Year. The fiscal year of the corporation shall be fixed by resolution of the Board of Directors.
Section 4. Seal. The corporation shall have a seal, and said seal may be used by causing it or a facsimile thereof to be impressed or affixed or reproduced or otherwise. Any officer of the corporation shall have authority to affix the seal to any document requiring it.
ARTICLE IX
INDEMNITY
Section 1. Damages and Expenses. Without limiting the generality or effect of Article IX of the Certificate of Incorporation, the corporation shall to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law as then in effect indemnify any director or officer of the corporation (each, an "Indemnitee") who is or was or is threatened to be made to become involved in any manner (including without limitation as a party or a witness) in any threatened, pending or completed investigation, claim, action, suit or proceeding, whether of a civil, criminal, administrative or investigative nature (including without limitation any action, suit or proceeding by or in the right of the corporation to procure a judgment in its favor) (each, a "Proceeding") by reason of the fact that such person is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the Board of Directors or an officer of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise (whether or not for profit), or by reason of anything actually or allegedly done or not done by such person in any such capacity, against any and all expenses (including attorneys' fees) actually and reasonably incurred by, and any and all judgments, fines and penalties entered or assessed against, and any and all amounts reasonably paid or payable in settlement by, such person in connection with such Proceeding. Such indemnification shall be a contract right and shall include the right to receive payment in advance of any expenses incurred by an Indemnitee in connection with such Proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking (which may be accepted by the corporation without any security for the performance thereof and without regard to the financial capacity of such person to perform its obligations thereunder) by or on behalf of such person to repay such amount if it shall ultimately be determined that he or she is not entitled to be indemnified by the corporation as authorized by this Article IX or otherwise.
The indemnification and advancement of expenses provided by, or granted pursuant to, this Article IX shall not be exclusive of any other rights to which any person seeking indemnification may otherwise be entitled.
The rights to indemnification and advancement of expenses provided by, or granted pursuant to, this Article IX shall continue as to a person who has ceased to be a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation or any other enterprise and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs, executors, administrators and estate of such person.
In addition to the mandatory indemnification of directors and officers of the corporation provided by this Article IX, the corporation may, if and to the extent authorized by the Board of Directors and permitted by the Act, indemnify any person or entity against any liability whatsoever.
Section 2. Insurance, Contracts and Funding. The corporation may purchase and maintain insurance to protect itself or any Indemnitee or other person against any expenses, judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement or incurred by any Indemnitee or other person in connection with any Proceeding referred to in Article IX or otherwise,
to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law as then in effect. The corporation may enter into contracts with any person entitled to indemnification under Article IX or otherwise, and may create a trust fund, grant a security interest, or use other means (including without limitation procuring one or more letters of credit) to ensure the payment of such amounts as may be necessary to effect indemnification as provided in this Article IX.
ARTICLE X
AMENDMENTS
Section 1. By Stockholders. Except as otherwise provided by law or by the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, these Bylaws may be amended or repealed by the affirmative vote of the holders of at least a majority of the voting power of all shares of the corporation entitled to vote thereon, at any regular or special meeting of the stockholders, duly convened after notice to the stockholders of that purpose.
Section 2. By the Board of Directors. Except as otherwise provided by law or by the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, these Bylaws may also be amended or repealed by the Board of Directors by the vote of a majority of directors.
EXHIBIT 10.2
AMENDED AND RESTATED
1999 STOCK OPTION PLAN
OF
BOFI.COM HOLDING, INC.
1. PURPOSES OF PLAN
The purposes of the 1999 Stock Option Plan ("PLAN") of BofI.com Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the "COMPANY"), are to:
(a) Encourage selected employees and directors to improve operations and increase profits of the Company;
(b) Encourage selected employees and directors to accept or continue employment or association with the Company or its Affiliates; and
(c) Increase the interest of selected employees and directors in the Company's welfare through participation in the growth in value of the common stock, par value $0.01 per share, of the Company (the "COMMON STOCK").
Options granted under this Plan ("OPTIONS") may be "incentive stock options" ("ISOS") intended to satisfy the requirements of Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "CODE"), or "nonqualified options" ("NQOS").
2. ELIGIBLE PERSONS
Every person who at the date of grant of an Option is an employee of the Company or of any Affiliate (as defined below) of the Company is eligible to receive NQOs or ISOs under this Plan. Every person who at the date of grant is a nonemployee director of the Company or any Affiliate (as defined below) of the Company is eligible to receive NQOs under this Plan. The term "AFFILIATE" as used in this Plan means a parent or subsidiary corporation as defined in the applicable provisions (currently Sections 424(e) and (f), respectively) of the Code. The term "EMPLOYEE" includes an officer or director who is an employee of the Company.
3. STOCK SUBJECT TO THIS PLAN
(a) SHARE RESERVE. Subject to the provisions of Section 6.1.1 relating to adjustments upon changes in Common Stock and subsection (b), below, the Common Stock that may be issued pursuant to Options shall not exceed in aggregate 553,875 shares of Common Stock, which amount reflects the amount of shares of Common Stock originally reserved for issuance under this Plan (211,000), adjusted in accordance with Section 6.1.1 for two stock splits effected by the Company in 2001.
(b) EVERGREEN SHARE RESERVE INCREASE. Notwithstanding Section 3(a) hereof and subject to the provisions of Section 6.1.1 relating to adjustments upon changes
in Common Stock, for a period of eight (8) years, commencing with
the annual meeting of stockholders in 2001, the aggregate number of shares of
Common Stock that is available for issuance under the Plan on any date shall
automatically be increased to that number of shares equal to the lesser of: (1)
fifteen percent (15%) of the Shares Outstanding; or (2) such lesser number of
shares as determined by the Board; provided, however, that in no event shall the
number of shares of Common Stock which may be issued under this Plan exceed
3,000,000 shares. As used herein, "Shares Outstanding" shall mean the sum of:
(i) the number of issued and outstanding shares of Common Stock of the Company
on the date Options are issued, plus (ii) the number of shares of Common Stock
of the Company into which any convertible securities of the Company (whether
debt or equity) ("Convertible Securities") may be converted ("Conversion
Shares"), computed in accordance with the procedures described below. When
computing the number of Conversion Shares (a) Conversion Shares shall be counted
as Shares Outstanding as of the date of issuance of the underlying Convertible
Securities; (b) assume that the Convertible Securities are converted into
Conversion Shares at the price per share equal to the weighted average
conversion price in accordance with the terms of the Convertible Securities,
regardless of the actual conversion experience (for example, if the Convertible
Securities may be converted at $10 per share for three years, $15 per share for
two years and $20 per share for one year, assume that all Conversion Shares are
converted at $13.33 per share conversion rate [[(3 years "times" $15] + (2 years
"times" $15) + (1 year "times" $20)]/"divided by" 6 years]); and (c) assume that
Conversion Shares are issued in perpetuity, regardless of any expiration of the
Convertible Securities, any redemption or repurchase of such securities and
regardless of whether any such Convertible Securities are converted.
(c) REVERSION OF SHARES TO THE SHARE RESERVE. If any Option shall for any reason expire or otherwise terminate, in whole or in part, without having been exercised in full, the shares of Common Stock not acquired under such Option shall revert to and again become available for issuance under the Plan.
(d) SOURCE OF SHARES. The shares of Common Stock subject to the Plan may be unissued shares or reacquired shares bought on the market or otherwise.
4. ADMINISTRATION
4.1 GENERAL. This Plan shall be administered by the Board of Directors of the Company (the "BOARD") or, either in its entirety or only insofar as required pursuant to Section 4.2 hereof, by a committee (the "COMMITTEE") of at least two Board members to which administration of this Plan, or of part of this Plan, is delegated (in either case, the "ADMINISTRATOR"). If the Committee is comprised of two Board members, both members comprising the Committee shall be "non-employee directors" as that term is defined in Rule 16b-3 promulgated by the Securities and Exchange Commission ("RULE 16B-3"), or any successor rule thereto.
4.2 PUBLIC COMPANY. From and after such time as the Company registers a class of equity securities under Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of
1934 (the "EXCHANGE ACT"), it is intended that this Plan shall be administered in accordance with the disinterested administration requirements of Rule 16b-3.
4.3 AUTHORITY OF ADMINISTRATOR. Subject to the other provisions of this Plan, the Administrator shall have the authority, in its discretion, to grant Options under the Plan and to determine the persons (each an "OPTIONEE") to whom Options are to be granted. The Administrator shall have the authority (subject to the provisions of this Plan) to establish such rules and regulations as it deems appropriate for the proper administration of this Plan and to make such determinations and interpretations concerning this Plan and Options granted under this Plan as it deems necessary or advisable. The Administrator shall have the authority to authorize any person to execute on behalf of the Company any instrument evidencing the grant of an Option. The Administrator may delegate nondiscretionary administrative duties to such employees of the Company as it deems proper.
4.4 INTERPRETATION BY ADMINISTRATOR. All questions of interpretation, implementation, and application of this Plan shall be determined by the Administrator. Such determinations shall be final and binding on all persons.
4.5 RULE 16B-3. With respect to persons subject to Section 16 of the
Exchange Act, if any, transactions under this Plan are intended to comply with
the applicable conditions of Rule 16b-3, or any successor rule thereto. To the
extent any provision of this Plan or action by the Administrator fails to so
comply, it shall be deemed null and void, to the extent permitted by law and
deemed advisable by the Administrator. Notwithstanding the above, it shall be
the responsibility of such persons, not of the Company or the Administrator, to
comply with the requirements of Section 16 of the Exchange Act; and neither the
Company nor the Administrator shall be liable if this Plan or any transaction
under this Plan fails to comply with the applicable conditions of Rule 16b-3 or
any successor rule thereto, or if any such person incurs any liability under
Section 16 of the Exchange Act.
5. GRANTING OF OPTIONS; OPTION AGREEMENT
5.1 TERMINATION OF PLAN. No options shall be granted under this Plan after ten years from the date of adoption of this Plan by the Board.
5.2 STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT. Each Option shall be evidenced by a written stock option agreement (the "OPTION AGREEMENT"), in form satisfactory to the Company, executed by the Company and the person to whom such Option is granted; provided, however, that the failure by the Company, the Optionee, or both, to execute the Option Agreement shall not invalidate the granting of an Option, although the exercise of each option shall be subject to Section 6.1.3.
5.3 TYPE OF OPTION. The Option Agreement shall specify whether each Option it evidences is an NQO or an ISO.
6. TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF OPTIONS
Each Option granted under this Plan shall be subject to the terms and conditions set forth in Section 6.1. NQOs shall be also subject to the terms and conditions set forth in Section 6.2, but not those set forth in Section 6.3. ISOs shall also be subject to the terms and conditions set forth in Section 6.3, but not those set forth in Section 6.2.
6.1 TERMS AND CONDITIONS TO WHICH ALL OPTIONS ARE SUBJECT. Options granted under this Plan shall be subject to the following terms and conditions:
6.1.1 CHANGES IN CAPITAL STRUCTURE. Subject to Section 6.1.2, if the stock of the Company is changed by reason of a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, or recapitalization, combination or reclassification, appropriate adjustments shall be made by the Board in (a) the number and class of shares of stock subject to this Plan and each Option outstanding under this Plan, and (b) the exercise price of each outstanding Option; provided, however, that the Company shall not be required to issue fractional shares as a result of any such adjustments. Each such adjustment shall be subject to approval by the Board in its absolute discretion.
6.1.2 CORPORATE TRANSACTIONS.
(a) DISSOLUTION OR LIQUIDATION. In the event of the proposed dissolution or liquidation of the Company, the Administrator shall notify each Optionee at least 30 days prior to such proposed action. To the extent not previously exercised, all Options will terminate immediately prior to the consummation of such proposed action.
(b) In the event of a "change in control" of the Company, options granted pursuant to the Plan shall automatically be accelerated in full so as to become fully exercisable. In such event, the Administrator shall notify each Optionee at least 30 days prior to such proposed action that the options shall be fully exercisable for a period of 30 days from the date of such notice, and all such options shall terminate upon the expiration of such 30-day period.
For purposes of the foregoing, a change in control means the occurrence of either of the following:
(i) any "person" (as used in Section 13(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and the rules promulgated thereunder) becomes the "beneficial owner" (as defined in Rule 13d-3) of securities representing a majority of the voting power of the then outstanding securities of the Company; or
(ii) a sale of assets involving all or substantially all of the assets of the Company, or a merger or consolidation of the Company in which the holders of securities of the Company immediately prior to such event hold in the aggregate less than a majority of the securities of the Company or any other surviving or resulting entity immediately after such event.
6.1.3 TIME OF OPTION EXERCISE. Subject to Section 5 and
Section 6.3.3, Options granted under this Plan shall be exercisable commencing
in accordance with a schedule related to the date of the grant of the Option,
the date of first employment, or such other date as may be set by the
Administrator (in any case, the "VESTING BASE DATE") and specified in the Option
Agreement relating to such Option; provided that the right to exercise an Option
must vest at the rate of (a) at least 20% per year over five years from the date
the Option was granted and (b) not more than 33.33% per year over three years
from the date the Option was granted. In any case, no Option shall be
exercisable until a written Option Agreement in form satisfactory to the Company
is executed by the Company and the Optionee.
6.1.4 OPTION GRANT DATE. The date of grant of an Option under this Plan shall be the date as of which the Administrator approves the grant.
6.1.5 NONTRANSFERABILITY OF OPTION RIGHTS.
(a) INCENTIVE STOCK OPTIONS. No ISOs granted under this Plan may be sold, transferred, pledged, assigned, encumbered or otherwise alienated or hypothecated, other than by will or by the laws of descent and distribution; provided that the deceased Optionee's beneficiary or the representative of the Optionee's estate acknowledges and agrees in writing, in a form reasonably acceptable to the Company, to be bound by the provisions of this Plan (including the exercise procedures described in Section 7) and the Option Agreement covering such Options as if such beneficiary or estate were the Optionee. All rights with respect to ISOs granted to an Optionee under this Plan shall be exercisable during the Optionee's life-time by such Optionee only. Following an Optionee's death, all rights with respect to ISOs that were exercisable at the time of such Optionee's death and have not terminated shall be exercised by the Optionee's designated beneficiary or by the Optionee's estate.
(b) NON-QUALIFIED STOCK OPTIONS. No NQO is assignable or transferable by Optionee except by will or by the laws of descent and distribution. During the life of Optionee, the NQO is exercisable only by the Optionee. Any attempt to assign, pledge, transfer, hypothecate or otherwise dispose of this NQO in a manner not herein permitted, and any levy of execution, attachment, or similar process on this NQO, shall be null and void. All rights with respect to such NQO that were exercisable at the time of the Optionee's death and have not terminated shall be exercised by the Optionee's designated beneficiary or by the Optionee's estate.
6.1.6 PAYMENT. Except as provided below, payment in full, in cash, shall be made for all stock purchased at the time written notice of exercise of an Option is given to the Company, and proceeds of any payment shall constitute general funds of the Company. At the time an Option is granted or exercised, the Administrator, in the exercise of its absolute discretion after considering any tax or accounting consequences, may authorize as an additional method of payment the delivery by the Optionee of Common Stock already owned by the Optionee for all or part of the Option price, provided the value (determined as set forth in Section 6.1.10) of such Common Stock is equal on the date of exercise to the Option exercise price, or such portion thereof
as the Optionee is authorized to pay by delivery of such stock; provided, however, that if an Optionee has exercised any portion of any Option granted by the Company by delivery of Common Stock, the Optionee may not, within six months following such exercise, exercise any Option granted under this Plan by delivery of Common Stock without the consent of the Administrator.
6.1.7 TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT.
(a) If, for any reason other than death, disability or "cause" (as defined below), an Optionee ceases to be employed by the Company or any of its Affiliates (such event being called a "TERMINATION"), Options held at the date of Termination (to the extent then exercisable) may be exercised in whole or in part at any time within three months of the date of such Termination, or such other period of not less than 30 days after the date of such Termination as is specified in the Option Agreement (but in no event after the Expiration Date); provided, that if such exercise of the Option would result in liability for the Optionee under Section 16(b) of the Exchange Act, then such 90-day period automatically shall be extended until the tenth day following the last date upon which Optionee has any liability under Section 16(b) (but in no event after the Expiration Date).
(b) If an Optionee dies while employed by the Company or an Affiliate or within the period that the Option remains exercisable after Termination, Options then held (to the extent then exercisable) may be exercised, in whole or in part, by the Optionee, by the Optionee's personal representative, or by the person to whom the Option is transferred by devise or the laws of descent and distribution, at any time within 12 months after the death of the Optionee, or such other period of not less than six months from the date of Termination as is specified in the Option Agreement (but in no event after the Expiration Date).
(c) If an Optionee ceases to be employed by the Company as a result of his or her disability, the Optionee may, but only within six months after the date of Termination (and in no event after the Expiration Date), exercise the Option to the extent otherwise entitled to exercise it at the date of Termination; provided, however, that if such disability is not a "disability" as such term is defined in Section 22(e)(3) of the Code, in the case of an ISO such ISO shall automatically convert to a NQO on the day three months and one day following such Termination. To the extent that the Optionee was not entitled to exercise the Option at the date of Termination or if the Optionee does not exercise such Option to the extent so entitled within the time specified herein, the Option shall terminate, and the shares covered by such Option shall revert to this Plan.
(d) If an Optionee is terminated for "cause" all Options then held by such Optionee shall terminate and no longer be exercisable as of the date of Termination.
(e) For purposes of this Section 6.1.7, "EMPLOYMENT" includes service as an employee or a director.
(f) For purposes of this Section 6.1.7, an Optionee's employment shall not be deemed to terminate by reason of sick leave, military leave or other leave of absence approved by the Administrator, if the period of any such leave does not exceed three months or, if longer, if the Optionee's right to reemployment by the Company or any Affiliate is guaranteed either contractually or by statute.
(g) For purposes of this Section 6.1.7, "CAUSE" shall mean
Termination (i) by reason of Optionee's commission of a felony, misdemeanor or
other illegal conduct involving dishonesty, fraud or personal injury to others,
(ii) by reason of Optionee's dishonesty towards, fraud upon, or deliberate
injury or attempted injury to the Company or any of its Affiliates, or (iii) by
reason of Optionee's willfully engaging in misconduct which is materially and
demonstrably injurious to the Company or any of its Affiliates.
6.1.8 WITHHOLDING AND EMPLOYMENT TAXES. At the time of
exercise of an Option or at such other time as the amount of such obligations
becomes determinable (the "TAX DATE"), the Optionee shall remit to the Company
in cash all applicable federal and state withholding and employment taxes. If
authorized by the Administrator in its absolute discretion, after considering
any tax or accounting consequences, an Optionee may elect to (i) tender to the
Company previously owned shares of Stock or other securities of the Company, or
(ii) have shares of Common Stock which are acquired upon exercise of the Option
withheld by the Company to pay some or all of the amount of tax that is required
by law to be withheld by the Company as a result of the exercise of such Option,
subject to the following limitations:
(a) Any election pursuant to clause (i) above by an Optionee subject to Section 16 of the Exchange Act shall either (x) be made at least six months before the Tax Date and shall be irrevocable; or (y) shall be made in (or made earlier to take effect in) any ten-day period beginning on the third business day following the date of release for publication of the Company's quarterly or annual summary statements of earnings and shall be subject to approval by the Administrator, which approval may be given at any time after such election has been made. In addition, in the case of (y), the Option shall be held at least six months prior to the Tax Date.
(b) Any election pursuant to clause (ii) above, where the Optionee is tendering Common Stock issued pursuant to the exercise of an Option, shall require that such shares be held at least six months prior to the Tax Date.
Any of the foregoing limitations may be waived (or additional limitations may be imposed) by the Administrator, in its absolute discretion, if the Administrator determines that such foregoing limitations are not required (or that such additional limitations are required) in order that the transaction shall be exempt from Section 16(b) of the Exchange Act pursuant to Rule 16b-3, or any successor rule thereto. In addition, any of the foregoing limitations may be waived by the Administrator, in its sole discretion, if the Administrator determines that Rule 16b-3, or any successor rule thereto, is not applicable to the exercise of the Option by the Optionee or for any other reason.
Any securities tendered or withheld in accordance with this Section 6.1.8 shall be valued by the Company as of the Tax Date.
6.1.9 OTHER PROVISIONS. Each Option granted under this Plan
may contain such other terms, provisions, and conditions not inconsistent with
this Plan as may be determined by the Administrator, and each ISO granted under
this Plan shall include such provisions and conditions as are necessary to
qualify the Option as an "incentive stock option" within the meaning of Section
422 of the Code. If Options provide for a right of first refusal in favor of the
Company with respect to stock acquired by employees or directors, such Options
shall provide that the right of first refusal shall terminate upon the earlier
of (i) the closing of the Company's initial public offering of Common Stock, or
(ii) the date ten years after the grant date as set forth in Section 6.1.4.
6.1.10 DETERMINATION OF VALUE. For purposes of this Plan, the fair market value of Common Stock or other securities of the Company shall be determined as follows:
(a) If the stock of the Company is listed on any established stock exchange or a national market system, including without limitation the National Market System of the National Association of Securities Dealers, Inc. Automated Quotation System, its fair market value shall be the closing sales price for such stock or the closing bid if no sales were reported, as quoted on such system or exchange (or the largest such exchange) for the date the value is to be determined (or if there are no sales for such date, then for the last preceding business day on which there were sales), as reported in the Wall Street Journal or similar publication.
(b) If the stock of the Company is regularly quoted by a recognized securities dealer but selling prices are not reported, its fair market value shall be the mean between the high bid and low asked prices for the stock on the date the value is to be determined (or if there are no quoted prices for such date, then for the last preceding business day on which there were quoted prices).
(c) In the absence of an established market for the stock, the fair market value thereof shall be determined in good faith by the Administrator, by consideration of such factors as the Administrator in its discretion deems appropriate among the recent issue price of other securities of the Company, the Company's net worth, prospective earning power, dividend-paying capacity, and other relevant factors, including the goodwill of the Company, the economic outlook in the Company's industry, the Company's position in the industry and its management, and the values of stock of other corporations in the same or a similar line of business.
6.1.11 OPTION TERM. Subject to Section 6.3.4, no Option shall be exercisable more than ten years after the date of grant, or such lesser period of time as is set forth in the Option Agreement (the end of the maximum exercise period stated in the stock option agreement is referred to in this Plan as the "EXPIRATION DATE").
6.1.12 EXERCISE PRICE. The exercise price of any Option granted to any person who owns, directly or by attribution under the Code (currently Section 424(d)), stock possessing more than ten percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or of any Affiliate (a "TEN PERCENT STOCKHOLDER") shall in no event be less than 110% of the fair market value (determined in accordance with Section 6.1.10) of the stock covered by the Option at the time the Option is granted.
6.1.13 CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS OF BANKING SUBSIDIARY. The Office of Thrift Supervision (the "OTS"), the primary regulator of the Bank of Internet, USA, a federal banking subsidiary of the Company, may direct the Company to require all Optionees who are employed by, or are directors of, such bank to exercise or forfeit their Options if such bank's capital falls below the minimum regulatory requirements as determined by the OTS. In such event, any Options which are so directed by the OTS to be exercised, but which are not exercised, shall terminate and be forfeited by the Optionees.
6.2 EXERCISE PRICE OF NQOS. The exercise price of any NQO granted under this Plan shall in no event be less than the fair market value (determined in accordance with Section 6.1.10) of the stock subject to the Option at the time the Option is granted.
6.3 TERMS AND CONDITIONS TO WHICH ONLY ISOS ARE SUBJECT. Options granted under this Plan which are designated as ISOs shall be subject to the following terms and conditions:
6.3.1 EXERCISE PRICE. Except as set forth in Section 6.1.12, the exercise price of an ISO shall be determined in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Code and shall in no event be less than the fair market value (determined in accordance with Section 6.1.10) of the stock subject to the Option at the time the Option is granted.
6.3.2 DISQUALIFYING DISPOSITIONS. If stock acquired by exercise of an ISO granted pursuant to this Plan is disposed of in a "disqualifying disposition" within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code, the holder of the stock immediately before the disposition shall promptly notify the Company in writing of the date and terms of the disposition and shall provide such other information regarding the Option as the Company may reasonably require.
6.3.3 VESTING. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, ISOs granted to any single Optionee under all incentive stock option plans of the Company and its subsidiaries may not "vest" for more than $100,000 in fair market value of stock (measured on the grant date(s)) in any calendar year. For purposes of the preceding sentence, an option "vests" when it first becomes exercisable. If, by their terms, such ISOs held by an Optionee taken together would vest to a greater extent in a calendar year, and unless otherwise provided by the Administrator, the vesting limitation described above shall be applied by deferring the exercisability of those ISOs or portions of ISOs which have the highest per share exercise prices; but in no event shall more than
$100,000 in fair market value of stock (measured on the grant date(s)) vest in any calendar year. The ISOs or portions of ISOs whose exercisability is so deferred shall become exercisable on the first day of the first subsequent calendar year during which they may be exercised, as determined by applying these same principles and all other provisions of this Plan including those relating to the expiration and termination of ISOs. In no event, however, will the operation of this Section 6.3.3 cause an ISO to vest before its terms or, having vested, cease to be vested.
6.3.4 TERM. Notwithstanding Section 6.1.11, no ISO granted to any Ten Percent Stockholder shall be exercisable more than five years after the date of grant.
7. MANNER OF EXERCISE
7.1 WRITTEN NOTICE; PAYMENT. An Optionee wishing to exercise an
Option shall give written notice to the Company at its principal executive
office, to the attention of the officer of the Company designated by the
Administrator, accompanied by payment of the exercise price as provided in
Section 6.1.6. The date the Company receives written notice of an exercise
hereunder accompanied by payment of the exercise price will be considered as the
date such Option was exercised.
7.2 DELIVERY OF STOCK. Promptly after receipt of written notice of exercise of an Option, the Company shall, without stock issue or transfer taxes to the Optionee or other person entitled to exercise the Option, deliver to the Optionee or such other person a certificate or certificates for the requisite number of shares of stock. An Optionee or permitted transferee of an Optionee shall not have any privileges as a stockholder with respect to any shares of stock covered by the Option until the date of issuance (as evidenced by the appropriate entry on the books of the Company or a duly authorized transfer agent) of such shares.
8. EMPLOYMENT RELATIONSHIP
Nothing in this Plan or any Option granted thereunder shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company or of any of its Affiliates to terminate any Optionee's employment or director relationship at any time, nor confer upon any Optionee any right to continue in the employ of, or consult with, the Company or any of its Affiliates, nor interfere in any way with provisions in the Company's charter documents or applicable law relating to the election, appointment, terms of office, and removal of members of the Board.
9. FINANCIAL INFORMATION
The Company shall provide to each Optionee during the period such Optionee holds an outstanding Option, and to each holder of Common Stock acquired upon exercise of Options granted under this Plan for so long as such person is a holder of such Common Stock, annual financial statements of the Company as prepared either by the Company or independent certified public accountants of the Company. Such financial statements shall include, at a minimum, a balance sheet and an income
statement, and shall be delivered as soon as practicable following the end of the Company's fiscal year. The provisions of this Section 9 shall not apply with respect to Optionees who are key employees of the Company whose duties in connection with the Company assures them access to information equivalent to the information provided in the financial statements.
10. CONDITIONS UPON ISSUANCE OF SHARES
Shares of Common Stock shall not be issued pursuant to the exercise of an Option unless the exercise of such Option and the issuance and delivery of such shares pursuant thereto shall comply with all relevant provisions of law, including, without limitation, the Securities Act of 1933 (the "SECURITIES ACT").
11. NONEXCLUSIVITY OF PLAN
The adoption of this Plan shall not be construed. as creating any limitations on the power of the Company to adopt such other incentive arrangements as it may deem desirable, including, without limitation, the granting of stock options other than under this Plan.
12. MARKET STANDOFF
Each Optionee, if so requested by the Company or any representative of the underwriters in connection with any registration of the offering of any securities of the Company under the Securities Act shall not sell or otherwise transfer any shares of Common Stock acquired upon exercise of Options during a period not to exceed 180 days following the effective date of a registration statement of the Company filed under the Securities Act; provided, however, that such restriction shall apply only to the first two registration statements of the Company to become effective under the Securities Act which include securities to be sold on behalf of the Company to the public in an underwritten public offering under the Securities Act. The Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to securities subject to the foregoing restriction until the end of the above period.
13. AMENDMENTS TO PLAN
The Board may at any time amend, alter, suspend or discontinue this Plan. Without the consent of an Optionee, no amendment, alteration, suspension or discontinuance may adversely affect outstanding Options except to conform this Plan and ISOs granted under this Plan to the requirements of federal or other tax laws relating to incentive stock options. No amendment, alteration, suspension or discontinuance shall require stockholder approval unless (a) such amendment materially alters the terms of the Plan, (b) stockholder approval is required to preserve incentive stock option treatment for federal income tax purposes, or (c) the Board otherwise concludes that stockholder approval is advisable.
14. EFFECTIVE DATE OF PLAN
This Plan shall become effective upon adoption by the Board, provided, however, that no Option shall be exercisable unless and until written consent of the stockholders of the Company, or approval of stockholders of the Company voting at a validly called stockholders' meeting, is obtained within 12 months after adoption by the Board. If such stockholder approval is not obtained within such time, Options granted hereunder shall terminate and be of no force and effect from and after expiration of such 12-month period. Options may be granted and exercised under this Plan only after there has been compliance with all applicable federal and state securities laws.
EXHIBIT 10.3
BOFI HOLDING, INC.
2004 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN
1. Purposes of the Plan. The purposes of this Plan are to attract and retain the best available personnel, to provide additional incentives to Employees, Directors and Consultants and to promote the success of the Company's business.
2. Definitions. The following definitions shall apply as used herein and in the individual Award Agreements except as defined otherwise in an individual Award Agreement. In the event a term is separately defined in an individual Award Agreement, such definition shall supercede the definition contained in this Section 2.
(a) "Administrator" means the Board or any of the Committees appointed to administer the Plan.
(b) "Affiliate" and "Associate" shall have the respective meanings ascribed to such terms in Rule 12b-2 promulgated under the Exchange Act.
(c) "Applicable Laws" means the legal requirements relating to the Plan and the Awards under applicable provisions of federal securities laws, state corporate and securities laws, the Code, the rules of any applicable stock exchange or national market system, and the rules of any non-U.S. jurisdiction applicable to Awards granted to residents therein.
(d) "Assumed" means that pursuant to a Corporate Transaction either (i) the Award is expressly affirmed by the Company or (ii) the contractual obligations represented by the Award are expressly assumed (and not simply by operation of law) by the successor entity or its Parent in connection with the Corporate Transaction with appropriate adjustments to the number and type of securities of the successor entity or its Parent subject to the Award and the exercise or purchase price thereof which at least preserves the compensation element of the Award existing at the time of the Corporate Transaction as determined in accordance with the instruments evidencing the agreement to assume the Award.
(e) "Award" means the grant of an Option, SAR, Dividend Equivalent Right, Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Unit or other right or benefit under the Plan.
(f) "Award Agreement" means the written agreement evidencing the grant of an Award executed by the Company and the Grantee, including any amendments thereto.
(g) "Board" means the Board of Directors of the Company.
(h) "Cause" means, with respect to the termination by the Company or a Related Entity of the Grantee's Continuous Service, that such termination is for "Cause" as such term is expressly defined in a then-effective written agreement between the Grantee and the Company or such Related Entity, or in the absence of such then-effective written agreement and definition, is based on, in the determination of the Administrator, the Grantee's: (i) performance of any act or failure to perform any act in bad faith and to the detriment of the Company or a Related Entity; (ii) dishonesty, intentional misconduct or material breach of any agreement with
the Company or a Related Entity; or (iii) commission of a crime involving dishonesty, breach of trust, or physical or emotional harm to any person.
(i) "Change in Control" means a change in ownership or control of the Company after the Registration Date effected through either of the following transactions:
(i) the direct or indirect acquisition by any person or related group of persons (other than an acquisition from or by the Company or by a Company-sponsored employee benefit plan or by a person that directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with, the Company) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 of the Exchange Act) of securities possessing more than fifty percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities pursuant to a tender or exchange offer made directly to the Company's stockholders which a majority of the Continuing Directors who are not Affiliates or Associates of the offeror do not recommend such stockholders accept, or
(ii) a change in the composition of the Board over a period of thirty-six (36) months or less such that a majority of the Board members (rounded up to the next whole number) ceases, by reason of one or more contested elections for Board membership, to be comprised of individuals who are Continuing Directors.
(j) "Code" means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.
(k) "Committee" means any committee composed of members of the Board appointed by the Board to administer the Plan.
(l) "Common Stock" means the common stock of the Company.
(m) "Company" means BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation, or any successor entity that adopts the Plan in connection with a Corporate Transaction.
(n) "Consultant" means any person (other than an Employee or a Director, solely with respect to rendering services in such person's capacity as a Director) who is engaged by the Company or any Related Entity to render consulting or advisory services to the Company or such Related Entity.
(o) "Continuing Directors" means members of the Board who either
(i) have been Board members continuously for a period of at least thirty-six
(36) months or (ii) have been Board members for less than thirty-six (36) months
and were elected or nominated for election as Board members by at least a
majority of the Board members described in clause (i) who were still in office
at the time such election or nomination was approved by the Board.
(p) "Continuous Service" means that the provision of services to the Company or a Related Entity in any capacity of Employee, Director or Consultant is not interrupted or terminated. In jurisdictions requiring notice in advance of an effective termination as an Employee, Director or Consultant, Continuous Service shall be deemed terminated upon the actual cessation of providing services to the Company or a Related Entity notwithstanding any required notice period that must be fulfilled before a termination as an Employee, Director or
Consultant can be effective under Applicable Laws. A Grantee's Continuous Service shall be deemed to have terminated either upon an actual termination of Continuous Service or upon the entity for which the Grantee provides services ceasing to be a Related Entity. Continuous Service shall not be considered interrupted in the case of (i) any approved leave of absence, (ii) transfers among the Company, any Related Entity, or any successor, in any capacity of Employee, Director or Consultant, or (iii) any change in status as long as the individual remains in the service of the Company or a Related Entity in any capacity of Employee, Director or Consultant (except as otherwise provided in the Award Agreement). An approved leave of absence shall include sick leave, military leave, or any other authorized personal leave.
(q) "Corporate Transaction" means any of the following transactions, provided, however, that the Administrator shall determine under parts (iv) and (v) whether multiple transactions are related, and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive:
(i) a merger or consolidation in which the Company is not the surviving entity, except for a transaction the principal purpose of which is to change the state in which the Company is incorporated;
(ii) the sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company;
(iii) the complete liquidation or dissolution of the Company;
(iv) any reverse merger or series of related transactions culminating in a reverse merger (including, but not limited to, a tender offer followed by a reverse merger) in which the Company is the surviving entity but (A) the shares of Common Stock outstanding immediately prior to such merger are converted or exchanged by virtue of the merger into other property, whether in the form of securities, cash or otherwise, or (B) in which securities possessing more than forty percent (40%) of the total combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities are transferred to a person or persons different from those who held such securities immediately prior to such merger or the initial transaction culminating in such merger, but excluding any such transaction or series of related transactions that the Administrator determines shall not be a Corporate Transaction; or
(v) acquisition in a single or series of related transactions by any person or related group of persons (other than the Company or by a Company-sponsored employee benefit plan) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 of the Exchange Act) of securities possessing more than fifty percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities but excluding any such transaction or series of related transactions that the Administrator determines shall not be a Corporate Transaction.
(r) "Covered Employee" means an Employee who is a "covered employee" under Section 162(m)(3) of the Code.
(s) "Director" means a member of the Board or the board of directors of any Related Entity.
(t) "Disability" means as defined under the long-term disability policy of the Company or the Related Entity to which the Grantee provides services regardless of whether the Grantee is covered by such policy. If the Company or the Related Entity to which the Grantee provides service does not have a long-term disability plan in place, "Disability" means that a Grantee is unable to carry out the responsibilities and functions of the position held by the Grantee by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment for a period of not less than ninety (90) consecutive days. A Grantee will not be considered to have incurred a Disability unless he or she furnishes proof of such impairment sufficient to satisfy the Administrator in its discretion.
(u) "Dividend Equivalent Right" means a right entitling the Grantee to compensation measured by dividends paid with respect to Common Stock.
(v) "Employee" means any person, including an Officer or Director, who is in the employ of the Company or any Related Entity, subject to the control and direction of the Company or any Related Entity as to both the work to be performed and the manner and method of performance. The payment of a director's fee by the Company or a Related Entity shall not be sufficient to constitute "employment" by the Company.
(w) "Exchange Act" means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.
(x) "Fair Market Value" means, as of any date, the value of Common Stock determined as follows:
(i) If the Common Stock is listed on one or more established stock exchanges or national market systems, including without limitation The Nasdaq National Market or The Nasdaq SmallCap Market of The Nasdaq Stock Market, its Fair Market Value shall be the closing sales price for such stock (or the closing bid, if no sales were reported) as quoted on the principal exchange or system on which the Common Stock is listed (as determined by the Administrator) on the date of determination (or, if no closing sales price or closing bid was reported on that date, as applicable, on the last trading date such closing sales price or closing bid was reported), as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable;
(ii) If the Common Stock is regularly quoted on an automated quotation system (including the OTC Bulletin Board) or by a recognized securities dealer, its Fair Market Value shall be the closing sales price for such stock as quoted on such system on the date of determination, but if selling prices are not reported, the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock shall be the mean between the high bid and low asked prices for the Common Stock on the date of determination (or, if no such prices were reported on that date, on the last date such prices were reported), as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable; or
(iii) In the absence of an established market for the Common Stock of the type described in (i) and (ii), above, the Fair Market Value thereof shall be determined by the Administrator in good faith.
(y) "Grantee" means an Employee, Director or Consultant who receives an Award under the Plan.
(z) "Non-Qualified Stock Option" means an Option not intended to qualify as an incentive stock option within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code.
(aa) "Officer" means a person who is an officer of the Company or a Related Entity within the meaning of Section 16 of the Exchange Act and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.
(bb) "Option" means a Non-Qualified Stock Option to purchase Shares pursuant to an Award Agreement granted under the Plan.
(cc) "Parent" means a "parent corporation", whether now or hereafter existing, as defined in Section 424(e) of the Code.
(dd) "Performance-Based Compensation" means compensation qualifying as "performance-based compensation" under Section 162(m) of the Code.
(ee) "Plan" means this 2004 Stock Incentive Plan.
(ff) "Registration Date" means the first to occur of (i) the closing of the first sale to the general public pursuant to a registration statement filed with and declared effective by the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, of (A) the Common Stock or (B) the same class of securities of a successor corporation (or its Parent) issued pursuant to a Corporate Transaction in exchange for or in substitution of the Common Stock; and (ii) in the event of a Corporate Transaction, the date of the consummation of the Corporate Transaction if the same class of securities of the successor corporation (or its Parent) issuable in such Corporate Transaction shall have been sold to the general public pursuant to a registration statement filed with and declared effective by the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, on or prior to the date of consummation of such Corporate Transaction.
(gg) "Related Entity" means any Parent or Subsidiary of the Company and any business, corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other entity in which the Company or a Parent or a Subsidiary of the Company holds a substantial ownership interest, directly or indirectly.
(hh) "Replaced" means that pursuant to a Corporate Transaction the Award is replaced with a comparable stock award or a cash incentive program of the Company, the successor entity (if applicable) or Parent of either of them which preserves the compensation element of such Award existing at the time of the Corporate Transaction and provides for subsequent payout in accordance with the same (or a more favorable) vesting schedule applicable to such Award. The determination of Award comparability shall be made by the Administrator and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive.
(ii) "Restricted Stock" means Shares issued under the Plan to the Grantee for such consideration, if any, and subject to such restrictions on transfer, rights of first refusal,
repurchase provisions, forfeiture provisions, and other terms and conditions as established by the Administrator.
(jj) "Restricted Stock Units" means an Award which may be earned in whole or in part upon the passage of time or the attainment of performance criteria established by the Administrator and which may be settled for cash, Shares or other securities or a combination of cash, Shares or other securities as established by the Administrator.
(kk) "Rule 16b-3" means Rule 16b-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act or any successor thereto.
(ll) "SAR" means a stock appreciation right entitling the Grantee to Shares or cash compensation, as established by the Administrator, measured by appreciation in the value of Common Stock.
(mm) "Share" means a share of the Common Stock.
(nn) "Subsidiary" means a "subsidiary corporation", whether now or hereafter existing, as defined in Section 424(f) of the Code.
3. Stock Subject to the Plan.
(a) Subject to the provisions of Section 10, below, the maximum
aggregate number of Shares which may be issued pursuant to (i) all Awards plus
(ii) awards under the Company's 1999 Stock Option Plan may not exceed 14.8% of
the number of Shares outstanding from time to time; provided, however, that the
maximum aggregate number of Shares which may be issued pursuant to Awards of
Restricted Stock under the Plan may not exceed 5.0% of the number of Shares
outstanding from time to time (subject to the overall maximum of 14.8% of
outstanding Shares); provided, further, that each Share of Restricted Stock that
is issued under the Plan and vests will be deemed to be the issuance of three
(3) Shares for purposes of calculating the overall maximum aggregate number of
Shares that may be issued under the Plan but not for purposes of calculating the
above 5.0% limit applicable to Awards of Restricted Stock.
(b) Any Shares covered by an Award (or portion of an Award) which is forfeited, canceled or expires (whether voluntarily or involuntarily) shall be deemed not to have been issued for purposes of determining the maximum aggregate number of Shares which may be issued under the Plan. Shares that actually have been issued under the Plan pursuant to an Award shall not be returned to the Plan and shall not become available for future issuance under the Plan, except that if unvested Shares are forfeited, or repurchased by the Company at the lower of their original purchase price or their Fair Market Value at the time of repurchase, such Shares shall become available for future grant under the Plan. To the extent not prohibited by the listing requirements of The Nasdaq National Market (or other established stock exchange or national market system on which the Common Stock is traded) and Applicable Law, any Shares covered by an Award which are surrendered (i) in payment of the Award exercise or purchase price or (ii) in satisfaction of tax withholding obligations incident to the exercise of an Award shall be deemed not to have been issued for purposes of determining the maximum number of
Shares which may be issued pursuant to all Awards under the Plan, unless otherwise determined by the Administrator.
4. Administration of the Plan.
(a) Plan Administrator.
(i) Administration with Respect to Directors and Officers. With respect to grants of Awards to Directors or Employees who are also Officers or Directors of the Company, the Plan shall be administered by (A) the Board or (B) a Committee designated by the Board, which Committee shall be constituted in such a manner as to satisfy the Applicable Laws and to permit such grants and related transactions under the Plan to be exempt from Section 16(b) of the Exchange Act in accordance with Rule 16b-3. Once appointed, such Committee shall continue to serve in its designated capacity until otherwise directed by the Board.
(ii) Administration With Respect to Consultants and Other Employees. With respect to grants of Awards to Employees or Consultants who are neither Directors nor Officers of the Company, the Plan shall be administered by (A) the Board or (B) a Committee designated by the Board, which Committee shall be constituted in such a manner as to satisfy the Applicable Laws. Once appointed, such Committee shall continue to serve in its designated capacity until otherwise directed by the Board. The Board may authorize one or more Officers to grant such Awards and may limit such authority as the Board determines from time to time.
(iii) Administration With Respect to Covered Employees. Notwithstanding the foregoing, as of and after the date that the exemption for the Plan under Section 162(m) of the Code expires, as set forth in Section 18 below, grants of Awards to any Covered Employee intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation shall be made only by a Committee (or subcommittee of a Committee) which is comprised solely of two or more Directors eligible to serve on a committee making Awards qualifying as Performance-Based Compensation. In the case of such Awards granted to Covered Employees, references to the "Administrator" or to a "Committee" shall be deemed to be references to such Committee or subcommittee.
(iv) Administration Errors. In the event an Award is granted in a manner inconsistent with the provisions of this subsection (a), such Award shall be presumptively valid as of its grant date to the extent permitted by the Applicable Laws.
(b) Powers of the Administrator. Subject to Applicable Laws and the provisions of the Plan (including any other powers given to the Administrator hereunder), and except as otherwise provided by the Board, the Administrator shall have the authority, in its discretion:
(i) to select the Employees, Directors and Consultants to whom Awards may be granted from time to time hereunder;
(ii) to determine whether and to what extent Awards are granted hereunder;
(iii) to determine the number of Shares or the amount of other consideration to be covered by each Award granted hereunder;
(iv) to approve forms of Award Agreements for use under the Plan;
(v) to determine the terms and conditions of any Award granted hereunder;
(vi) to amend the terms of any outstanding Award granted under the Plan, provided that (A) any amendment that would adversely affect the Grantee's rights under an outstanding Award shall not be made without the Grantee's written consent, (B) the reduction of the exercise price of any Option awarded under the Plan shall be subject to stockholder approval and (C) canceling an Option at a time when its exercise price exceeds the Fair Market Value of the underlying Shares, in exchange for another Option, Restricted Stock, or other Award shall be subject to stockholder approval, unless the cancellation and exchange occurs in connection with a Corporate Transaction;
(vii) to construe and interpret the terms of the Plan and Awards, including without limitation, any notice of award or Award Agreement, granted pursuant to the Plan;
(viii) to grant Awards to Employees, Directors and Consultants employed outside the United States on such terms and conditions different from those specified in the Plan as may, in the judgment of the Administrator, be necessary or desirable to further the purpose of the Plan;
(ix) to take such other action, not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan, as the Administrator deems appropriate.
(c) Indemnification. In addition to such other rights of indemnification as they may have as members of the Board or as Officers or Employees of the Company or a Related Entity, members of the Board and any Officers or Employees of the Company or a Related Entity to whom authority to act for the Board, the Administrator or the Company is delegated shall be defended and indemnified by the Company to the extent permitted by law on an after-tax basis against all reasonable expenses, including attorneys' fees, actually and necessarily incurred in connection with the defense of any claim, investigation, action, suit or proceeding, or in connection with any appeal therein, to which they or any of them may be a party by reason of any action taken or failure to act under or in connection with the Plan, or any Award granted hereunder, and against all amounts paid by them in settlement thereof (provided such settlement is approved by the Company) or paid by them in satisfaction of a judgment in any such claim, investigation, action, suit or proceeding, except in relation to matters as to which it shall be adjudged in such claim, investigation, action, suit or proceeding that such person is liable for gross negligence, bad faith or intentional misconduct; provided, however, that within thirty (30) days after the institution of such claim, investigation, action, suit or proceeding, such person shall offer to the Company, in writing, the opportunity at the Company's expense to defend the same.
5. Eligibility. Awards may be granted to Employees, Directors and Consultants. An Employee, Director or Consultant who has been granted an Award may, if otherwise eligible, be granted additional Awards. Awards may be granted to such Employees, Directors or Consultants who are residing in non-U.S. jurisdictions as the Administrator may determine from time to time.
6. Terms and Conditions of Awards.
(a) Types of Awards. The Administrator is authorized under the Plan to award any type of arrangement to an Employee, Director or Consultant that is not inconsistent with the provisions of the Plan and that by its terms involves or might involve the issuance of (i) Shares, (ii) cash or (iii) an Option, a SAR, or similar right with a fixed or variable price related to the Fair Market Value of the Shares and with an exercise or conversion privilege related to the passage of time, the occurrence of one or more events, or the satisfaction of performance criteria or other conditions. Such awards include, without limitation, Options, SARs, sales or bonuses of Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Units or Dividend Equivalent Rights, and an Award may consist of one such security or benefit, or two (2) or more of them in any combination or alternative.
(b) Designation of Award. Each Award shall be designated in the Award Agreement.
(c) Conditions of Award. Subject to the terms of the Plan, the
Administrator shall determine the provisions, terms, and conditions of each
Award including, but not limited to, the Award vesting schedule, repurchase
provisions, rights of first refusal, forfeiture provisions, form of payment
(cash, Shares, or other consideration) upon settlement of the Award, payment
contingencies, and satisfaction of any performance criteria. The performance
criteria established by the Administrator may be based on any one of, or
combination of, the following: (i) increase in share price, (ii) earnings per
share, (iii) total stockholder return, (iv) operating margin, (v) gross margin,
(vi) return on equity, (vii) return on assets, (viii) return on investment, (ix)
operating income, (x) net operating income, (xi) pre-tax profit, (xii) cash
flow, (xiii) revenue, (xiv) expenses, (xv) earnings before interest, taxes and
depreciation, (xvi) economic value added, (xvii) market share and (xviii)
personal management objectives. The performance criteria may be applicable to
the Company, Related Entities and/or any individual business units of the
Company or any Related Entity. Partial achievement of the specified criteria may
result in a payment or vesting corresponding to the degree of achievement as
specified in the Award Agreement.
(d) Acquisitions and Other Transactions. The Administrator may issue Awards under the Plan in settlement, assumption or substitution for, outstanding awards or obligations to grant future awards in connection with the Company or a Related Entity acquiring another entity, an interest in another entity or an additional interest in a Related Entity whether by merger, stock purchase, asset purchase or other form of transaction.
(e) Deferral of Award Payment. The Administrator may establish one or more programs under the Plan to permit selected Grantees the opportunity to elect to defer receipt of consideration upon exercise of an Award, satisfaction of performance criteria, or other event that absent the election would entitle the Grantee to payment or receipt of Shares or other
consideration under an Award. The Administrator may establish the election procedures, the timing of such elections, the mechanisms for payments of, and accrual of interest or other earnings, if any, on amounts, Shares or other consideration so deferred, and such other terms, conditions, rules and procedures that the Administrator deems advisable for the administration of any such deferral program.
(f) Separate Programs. The Administrator may establish one or more separate programs under the Plan for the purpose of issuing particular forms of Awards to one or more classes of Grantees on such terms and conditions as determined by the Administrator from time to time.
(g) Individual Limitations on Awards. Following the date that the exemption from application of Section 162(m) of the Code described in Section 18 (or any exemption having similar effect) ceases to apply to Awards, the following limitations shall apply.
(i) Individual Limit for Options and SARs. The maximum number of Shares with respect to which Options and SARs may be granted to any Grantee in any fiscal year of the Company shall be 100,000 Shares. In connection with a Grantee's commencement of Continuous Service, a Grantee may be granted Options or SARs for up to an additional 100,000 Shares which shall not count against the limit set forth in the previous sentence. The foregoing limitations shall be adjusted proportionately in connection with any change in the Company's capitalization pursuant to Section 10, below. To the extent required by Section 162(m) of the Code or the regulations thereunder, in applying the foregoing limitations with respect to a Grantee, if any Option or SAR is canceled, the canceled Option or SAR shall continue to count against the maximum number of Shares with respect to which Options and SARs may be granted to the Grantee. For this purpose, the repricing of an Option (or in the case of a SAR, the base amount on which the stock appreciation is calculated is reduced to reflect a reduction in the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock) shall be treated as the cancellation of the existing Option or SAR and the grant of a new Option or SAR.
(ii) Individual Limit for Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units. For awards of Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units that are intended to be Performance-Based Compensation, the maximum number of Shares with respect to which such Awards may be granted to any Grantee in any fiscal year of the Company shall be 100,000 Shares. The foregoing limitation shall be adjusted proportionately in connection with any change in the Company's capitalization pursuant to Section 10, below. In connection with a Grantee's commencement of Continuous Service, a Grantee may be granted Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units for up to an additional 100,000 Shares which shall not count against the limit set forth in the previous sentence.
(iii) Deferral. If the vesting or receipt of Shares under an Award is deferred to a later date, any amount (whether denominated in Shares or cash) paid in addition to the original number of Shares subject to such Award will not be treated as an increase in the number of Shares subject to the Award if the additional amount is based either on a reasonable rate of interest or on one or more predetermined actual investments such that the amount payable by the Company at the later date will be based on the actual rate of return of a specific investment (including any decrease as well as any increase in the value of an investment).
(h) Early Exercise. The Award Agreement may, but need not, include a provision whereby the Grantee may elect at any time while an Employee, Director or Consultant to exercise any part or all of the Award prior to full vesting of the Award. Any unvested Shares received pursuant to such exercise may be subject to a repurchase right in favor of the Company or a Related Entity or to any other restriction the Administrator determines to be appropriate.
(i) Term of Award. The term of each Award shall be the term stated in the Award Agreement. The specified term of any Award shall not include any period for which the Grantee has elected to defer the receipt of the Shares or cash issuable pursuant to the Award.
(j) Transferability of Awards. Awards shall be transferable (i) by will and by the laws of descent and distribution and (ii) during the lifetime of the Grantee, to the extent and in the manner authorized by the Administrator. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Grantee may designate one or more beneficiaries of the Grantee's Award in the event of the Grantee's death on a beneficiary designation form provided by the Administrator.
(k) Time of Granting Awards. The date of grant of an Award shall for all purposes be the date on which the Administrator makes the determination to grant such Award, or such other date as is determined by the Administrator.
7. Award Exercise or Purchase Price, Consideration and Taxes.
(a) Exercise or Purchase Price. The exercise or purchase price, if any, for an Award shall be as follows:
(i) In the case of an Option, the per Share exercise price shall be not less than eighty-five percent (85%) of the Fair Market Value per Share on the date of grant unless otherwise determined by the Administrator.
(ii) In the case of Options or SARs intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation, the exercise or base appreciation amount shall be not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the Fair Market Value per Share on the date of grant.
(iii) In the case of other Awards, such price as is determined by the Administrator.
(iv) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section
7(a), in the case of an Award issued pursuant to Section 6(d), above, the
exercise or purchase price for the Award shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of the relevant instrument evidencing the agreement to issue such
Award.
(b) Consideration. Subject to Applicable Laws, the consideration to be paid for the Shares to be issued upon exercise or purchase of an Award including the method of payment, shall be determined by the Administrator. In addition to any other types of consideration the Administrator may determine, the Administrator is authorized to accept as consideration for Shares issued under the Plan the following, provided that the portion of the consideration equal to the par value of the Shares must be paid in cash or other legal consideration permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law:
(i) cash;
(ii) check;
(iii) if the exercise or purchase occurs on or after the Registration Date, surrender of Shares or delivery of a properly executed form of attestation of ownership of Shares as the Administrator may require which have a Fair Market Value on the date of surrender or attestation equal to the aggregate exercise price of the Shares as to which said Award shall be exercised, provided, however, that Shares acquired under the Plan or any other equity compensation plan or agreement of the Company must have been held by the Grantee for a period of more than six (6) months (and not used for another Award exercise by attestation during such period);
(iv) with respect to Options, if the exercise occurs on or after the Registration Date, payment through a broker-dealer sale and remittance procedure pursuant to which the Grantee (A) shall provide written instructions to a Company designated brokerage firm to effect the immediate sale of some or all of the purchased Shares and remit to the Company sufficient funds to cover the aggregate exercise price payable for the purchased Shares and (B) shall provide written directives to the Company to deliver the certificates for the purchased Shares directly to such brokerage firm in order to complete the sale transaction; or
(v) any combination of the foregoing methods of payment.
The Administrator may at any time or from time to time, by adoption of or by
amendment to the standard forms of Award Agreement described in Section
4(b)(iv), or by other means, grant Awards which do not permit all of the
foregoing forms of consideration to be used in payment for the Shares or which
otherwise restrict one or more forms of consideration.
(c) Taxes. No Shares shall be delivered under the Plan to any Grantee or other person until such Grantee or other person has made arrangements acceptable to the Administrator for the satisfaction of any non-U.S., federal, state, or local income and employment tax withholding obligations, including, without limitation, obligations incident to the receipt of Shares. Upon exercise or vesting of an Award the Company shall withhold or collect from Grantee an amount sufficient to satisfy such tax obligations, including, but not limited too, by surrender of the whole number of Shares covered by the Award sufficient to satisfy the minimum applicable tax withholding obligations incident to the exercise or vesting of an Award.
8. Exercise of Award.
(a) Procedure for Exercise; Rights as a Stockholder.
(i) Any Award granted hereunder shall be exercisable at such times and under such conditions as determined by the Administrator under the terms of the Plan and specified in the Award Agreement.
(ii) An Award shall be deemed to be exercised when written notice of such exercise has been given to the Company in accordance with the terms of the Award by the
person entitled to exercise the Award and full payment for the Shares with respect to which the Award is exercised, including, to the extent selected, use of the broker-dealer sale and remittance procedure to pay the purchase price as provided in Section 7(b)(iv).
(b) Exercise of Award Following Termination of Continuous Service.
(i) An Award may not be exercised after the termination date of such Award set forth in the Award Agreement and may be exercised following the termination of a Grantee's Continuous Service only to the extent provided in the Award Agreement.
(ii) Where the Award Agreement permits a Grantee to exercise an Award following the termination of the Grantee's Continuous Service for a specified period, the Award shall terminate to the extent not exercised on the last day of the specified period or the last day of the original term of the Award, whichever occurs first.
9. Conditions Upon Issuance of Shares.
(a) Shares shall not be issued pursuant to the exercise of an Award unless the exercise of such Award and the issuance and delivery of such Shares pursuant thereto shall comply with all Applicable Laws, and shall be further subject to the approval of counsel for the Company with respect to such compliance.
(b) As a condition to the exercise of an Award, the Company may require the person exercising such Award to represent and warrant at the time of any such exercise that the Shares are being purchased only for investment and without any present intention to sell or distribute such Shares if, in the opinion of counsel for the Company, such a representation is required by any Applicable Laws.
10. Adjustments Upon Changes in Capitalization. Subject to any required action by the stockholders of the Company, the number of Shares covered by each outstanding Award, and the number of Shares which have been authorized for issuance under the Plan but as to which no Awards have yet been granted or which have been returned to the Plan, the exercise or purchase price of each such outstanding Award, the maximum number of Shares with respect to which Awards may be granted to any Grantee in any fiscal year of the Company, as well as any other terms that the Administrator determines require adjustment shall be proportionately adjusted for (i) any increase or decrease in the number of issued Shares resulting from a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, combination or reclassification of the Shares, or similar transaction affecting the Shares, (ii) any other increase or decrease in the number of issued Shares effected without receipt of consideration by the Company, or (iii) as the Administrator may determine in its discretion, any other transaction with respect to Common Stock including a corporate merger, consolidation, acquisition of property or stock, separation (including a spin-off or other distribution of stock or property), reorganization, liquidation (whether partial or complete) or any similar transaction; provided, however that conversion of any convertible securities of the Company shall not be deemed to have been "effected without receipt of consideration." Such adjustment shall be made by the Administrator and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive. Except as the Administrator determines, no issuance by the Company of shares of stock of any class, or securities convertible into shares of stock of any class, shall affect, and no
adjustment by reason hereof shall be made with respect to, the number or price of Shares subject to an Award.
11. Corporate Transactions and Changes in Control.
(a) Termination of Award to Extent Not Assumed in Corporate Transaction. Effective upon the consummation of a Corporate Transaction, all outstanding Awards under the Plan shall terminate. However, all such Awards shall not terminate to the extent they are Assumed in connection with the Corporate Transaction.
(b) Acceleration of Award Upon Corporate Transaction or Change in Control. The Administrator shall have the authority, exercisable either in advance of any actual or anticipated Corporate Transaction or Change in Control or at the time of an actual Corporate Transaction or Change in Control and exercisable at the time of the grant of an Award under the Plan or any time while an Award remains outstanding, to provide for the full or partial automatic vesting and exercisability of one or more outstanding unvested Awards under the Plan and the release from restrictions on transfer and repurchase or forfeiture rights of such Awards in connection with a Corporate Transaction or Change in Control, on such terms and conditions as the Administrator may specify. The Administrator also shall have the authority to condition any such Award vesting and exercisability or release from such limitations upon the subsequent termination of the Continuous Service of the Grantee within a specified period following the effective date of the Corporate Transaction or Change in Control. The Administrator may provide that any Awards so vested or released from such limitations in connection with a Change in Control, shall remain fully exercisable until the expiration or sooner termination of the Award.
12. Effective Date and Term of Plan. The Plan shall become effective upon its approval by the stockholders of the Company. It shall continue in effect for a term of ten (10) years unless sooner terminated. Subject to Section 17, below, and Applicable Laws, Awards may be granted under the Plan upon its becoming effective.
13. Amendment, Suspension or Termination of the Plan.
(a) The Board may at any time amend, suspend or terminate the
Plan; provided, however, that no such amendment shall be made without the
approval of the Company's stockholders to the extent such approval is required
by Applicable Laws, or if such amendment would change any of the provisions of
Section 4(b)(vi) or this Section 13(a).
(b) No Award may be granted during any suspension of the Plan or after termination of the Plan.
(c) No suspension or termination of the Plan (including termination of the Plan under Section (a), above) shall adversely affect any rights under Awards already granted to a Grantee.
14. Reservation of Shares.
(a) The Company, during the term of the Plan, will at all times reserve and keep available such number of Shares as shall be sufficient to satisfy the requirements of the Plan.
(b) The inability of the Company to obtain authority from any regulatory body having jurisdiction, which authority is deemed by the Company's counsel to be necessary to the lawful issuance and sale of any Shares hereunder, shall relieve the Company of any liability in respect of the failure to issue or sell such Shares as to which such requisite authority shall not have been obtained.
15. No Effect on Terms of Employment/Consulting Relationship. The Plan shall not confer upon any Grantee any right with respect to the Grantee's Continuous Service, nor shall it interfere in any way with his or her right or the right of the Company or any Related Entity to terminate the Grantee's Continuous Service at any time, with or without Cause, and with or without notice. The ability of the Company or any Related Entity to terminate the employment of a Grantee who is employed at will is in no way affected by its determination that the Grantee's Continuous Service has been terminated for Cause for the purposes of this Plan.
16. No Effect on Retirement and Other Benefit Plans. Except as specifically provided in a retirement or other benefit plan of the Company or a Related Entity, Awards shall not be deemed compensation for purposes of computing benefits or contributions under any retirement plan of the Company or a Related Entity, and shall not affect any benefits under any other benefit plan of any kind or any benefit plan subsequently instituted under which the availability or amount of benefits is related to level of compensation. The Plan is not a "Retirement Plan" or "Welfare Plan" under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.
17. Stockholder Approval. The Plan shall be subject to approval by the stockholders of the Company. Such stockholder approval shall be obtained in the degree and manner required under Applicable Laws.
18. Effect of Section 162(m) of the Code. Section 162(m) of the Code does not apply to the Plan prior to the Registration Date. Following the Registration Date, the Plan, and all Awards issued thereunder, are intended to be exempt from the application of Section 162(m) of the Code, which restricts under certain circumstances the Federal income tax deduction for compensation paid by a public company to named executives in excess of $1 million per year. The exemption is based on Treasury Regulation Section 1.162-27(f), in the form existing on the effective date of the Plan, with the understanding that such regulation generally exempts from the application of Section 162(m) of the Code compensation paid pursuant to a plan that existed before a company becomes publicly held. Under such Treasury Regulation, this exemption is available to the Plan for the duration of the period that lasts until the earlier of (i) the expiration of the Plan, (ii) the material modification of the Plan, (iii) the exhaustion of the maximum number of shares of Common Stock available for Awards under the Plan, as set forth in Section 3(a), (iv) the first meeting of shareholders at which directors are to be elected that occurs after the close of the third calendar year following the calendar year in which the Company first becomes subject to the reporting obligations of Section 12 of the Exchange Act, or (v) such other
date required by Section 162(m) of the Code and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder. To the extent that the Administrator determines as of the date of grant of an Award that (i) the Award is intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation and (ii) the exemption described above is no longer available with respect to such Award, such Award shall not be effective until any stockholder approval required under Section 162(m) of the Code has been obtained.
19. Unfunded Obligation. Grantees shall have the status of general unsecured creditors of the Company. Any amounts payable to Grantees pursuant to the Plan shall be unfunded and unsecured obligations for all purposes, including, without limitation, Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended. Neither the Company nor any Related Entity shall be required to segregate any monies from its general funds, or to create any trusts, or establish any special accounts with respect to such obligations. The Company shall retain at all times beneficial ownership of any investments, including trust investments, which the Company may make to fulfill its payment obligations hereunder. Any investments or the creation or maintenance of any trust or any Grantee account shall not create or constitute a trust or fiduciary relationship between the Administrator, the Company or any Related Entity and a Grantee, or otherwise create any vested or beneficial interest in any Grantee or the Grantee's creditors in any assets of the Company or a Related Entity. The Grantees shall have no claim against the Company or any Related Entity for any changes in the value of any assets that may be invested or reinvested by the Company with respect to the Plan.
20. Construction. Captions and titles contained herein are for convenience only and shall not affect the meaning or interpretation of any provision of the Plan. Except when otherwise indicated by the context, the singular shall include the plural and the plural shall include the singular. Use of the term "or" is not intended to be exclusive, unless the context clearly requires otherwise.
EXHIBIT 10.4
BOFI HOLDING, INC.
2004 EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN
The following constitute the provisions of the 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan of BofI Holding, Inc.
1. Purpose. The purpose of the Plan is to provide Employees of the Company and its Designated Parents or Subsidiaries with an opportunity to purchase Common Stock of the Company through accumulated payroll deductions. It is the intention of the Company to have the Plan qualify as an "Employee Stock Purchase Plan" under Section 423 of the Code and the applicable regulations thereunder. The provisions of the Plan, accordingly, shall be construed so as to extend and limit participation in a manner consistent with the requirements of that Section 423 of the Code.
2. Definitions. As used herein, the following definitions shall apply:
(a) "Administrator" means either the Board or a committee of the Board that is responsible for the administration of the Plan as is designated from time to time by resolution of the Board.
(b) "Applicable Laws" means the legal requirements relating to the administration of employee stock purchase plans, if any, under applicable provisions of federal securities laws, state corporate and securities laws, the Code and the applicable regulations thereunder, the rules of any applicable stock exchange or national market system, and the rules of any foreign jurisdiction applicable to participation in the Plan by residents therein.
(c) "Board" means the Board of Directors of the Company.
(d) "Code" means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.
(e) "Common Stock" means the common stock of the Company.
(f) "Company" means BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation.
(g) "Compensation" means an Employee's base salary from the Company or one or more Designated Parents or Subsidiaries, including such amounts of base salary as are deferred by the Employee (i) under a qualified cash or deferred arrangement described in Section 401(k) of the Code, or (ii) to a plan qualified under Section 125 of the Code. Compensation does not include overtime, bonuses, annual awards, other incentive payments, reimbursements or other expense allowances, fringe benefits (cash or noncash), moving expenses, deferred compensation, contributions (other than contributions described in the first sentence) made on the Employee's behalf by the Company or one or more Designated Parents or Subsidiaries under any employee benefit or welfare plan now or hereafter established, and any other payments not specifically referenced in the first sentence.
(h) "Corporate Transaction" means any of the following transactions:
(1) a merger or consolidation in which the Company is not the surviving entity, except for a transaction the principal purpose of which is to change the state in which the Company is incorporated;
(2) the sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company (including the capital stock of the Company's subsidiary corporations);
(3) the complete liquidation or dissolution of the Company;
(4) any reverse merger or series of related transactions culminating in a reverse merger (including, but not limited to, a tender offer followed by a reverse merger) in which the Company is the surviving entity but (A) the shares of Common Stock outstanding immediately prior to such merger are converted or exchanged by virtue of the merger into other property, whether in the form of securities, cash or otherwise, or (B) in which securities possessing more than forty percent (40%) of the total combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities are transferred to a person or persons different from those who held such securities immediately prior to such merger or the initial transaction culminating in such merger, but excluding any such transaction or series of related transactions that the Administrator determines shall not be a Corporate Transaction; or
(5) acquisition in a single or series of related transactions by any person or related group of persons (other than the Company or by a Company-sponsored employee benefit plan) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 of the Exchange Act) of securities possessing more than fifty percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities but excluding any such transaction or series of related transactions that the Administrator determines shall not be a Corporate Transaction.
(i) "Designated Parents or Subsidiaries" means the Parents or Subsidiaries that have been designated by the Administrator from time to time as eligible to participate in the Plan.
(j) "Effective Date" means the date determined by the Board. However, should any Parent or Subsidiary become a Designated Parent or Subsidiary after such date, then the Administrator, in its discretion, shall designate a separate Effective Date with respect to the employee-participants of such Designated Parent or Subsidiary.
(k) "Employee" means any individual, including an officer or director, who is an employee of the Company or a Designated Parent or Subsidiary for purposes of Section 423 of the Code. For purposes of the Plan, the employment relationship shall be treated as continuing intact while the individual is on sick leave or other leave of absence approved by the individual's employer. Where the period of leave exceeds three (3) months and the individual's right to reemployment is not guaranteed either by statute or by contract, the employment relationship will be deemed to have terminated on the day three (3) months and one (1) day after the commencement of such leave, for purposes of determining eligibility to participate in the Plan.
(l) "Enrollment Date" means the first day of each Offer Period.
(m) "Exchange Act" means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.
(n) "Exercise Date" means the last day of each Purchase Period.
(o) "Fair Market Value" means, as of any date, the value of Common Stock determined as follows:
(1) If the Common Stock is listed on one or more established stock exchanges or national market systems, including without limitation The Nasdaq National Market or The Nasdaq SmallCap Market of The Nasdaq Stock Market, its Fair Market Value shall be the closing sales price for such stock (or the closing bid, if no sales were reported) as quoted on the principal exchange or system on which the Common Stock is listed (as determined by the Administrator) on the date of determination (or, if no closing sales price or closing bid was reported on that date, as applicable, on the last trading date such closing sales price or closing bid was reported), as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable;
(2) If the Common Stock is regularly quoted on an automated quotation system (including the OTC Bulletin Board) or by a recognized securities dealer, its Fair Market Value shall be the closing sales price for such stock as quoted on such system or by such securities dealer on the date of determination, but if selling prices are not reported, the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock shall be the mean between the high bid and low asked prices for the Common Stock on the date of determination (or, if no such prices were reported on that date, on the last date such prices were reported), as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable; or
(3) In the absence of an established market for the Common Stock of the type described in (1) and (2), above, the Fair Market Value thereof shall be determined by the Administrator in good faith.
(p) "Offer Period" means an Offer Period established pursuant to
Section 4 hereof.
(q) "Parent" means a "parent corporation" of the Company, whether now or hereafter existing, as defined in Section 424(e) of the Code.
(r) "Participant" means an Employee of the Company or Designated
Parent or Subsidiary who has completed a subscription agreement as set forth in
Section 5(a) and is thereby enrolled in the Plan.
(s) "Plan" means this Employee Stock Purchase Plan.
(t) "Purchase Period" means a period of approximately six months, commencing on May 15 and November 15 of each year and terminating on the next following November 14 or May 14, respectively; provided, however, that the first Purchase Period shall commence on the Effective Date and shall end on May 14, 2005.
(u) "Purchase Price" shall mean an amount, as determined by the Board prior to the Enrollment Date of a particular Offer Period, equal to no less than 85% of the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock on the Enrollment Date or on the Exercise Date, whichever is lower.
(v) "Reserves" means, as of any date, the sum of (1) the number of shares of Common Stock covered by each then outstanding option under the Plan which has not yet been exercised and (2) the number of shares of Common Stock which have been authorized for issuance under the Plan but not then subject to an outstanding option.
(w) "Subsidiary" means a "subsidiary corporation" of the Company, whether now or hereafter existing, as defined in Section 424(f) of the Code.
3. Eligibility.
(a) General. Any individual who is an Employee on a given Enrollment Date shall be eligible to participate in the Plan for the Offer Period commencing with such Enrollment Date. No individual who is not an Employee shall be eligible to participate in the Plan.
(b) Limitations on Grant and Accrual. Any provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, no Employee shall be granted an option under the Plan (i) if, immediately after the grant, such Employee (taking into account stock owned by any other person whose stock would be attributed to such Employee pursuant to Section 424(d) of the Code) would own stock and/or hold outstanding options to purchase stock possessing five percent (5%) or more of the total combined voting power or value of all classes of stock of the Company or of any Parent or Subsidiary, or (ii) which permits the Employee's rights to purchase stock under all employee stock purchase plans of the Company and its Parents or Subsidiaries to accrue at a rate which exceeds Twenty-Five Thousand Dollars (US$25,000) worth of stock (determined at the Fair Market Value of the shares at the time such option is granted) for each calendar year in which such option is outstanding at any time. The determination of the accrual of the right to purchase stock shall be made in accordance with Section 423(b)(8) of the Code and the regulations thereunder.
(c) Other Limits on Eligibility. Notwithstanding SubSection (a), above, the following Employees shall not be eligible to participate in the Plan for any relevant Offer Period: (i) Employees whose customary employment is 20 hours or less per week; (ii) Employees whose customary employment is for not more than 5 months in any calendar year; (iii) Employees who have been employed for fewer than 5 days; and (iv) Employees who are subject to rules or laws of a foreign jurisdiction that prohibit or make impractical the participation of such Employees in the Plan.
4. Offer Periods.
(a) The Plan shall be implemented through overlapping or
consecutive Offer Periods until such time as (i) the maximum number of shares of
Common Stock available for issuance under the Plan shall have been purchased or
(ii) the Plan shall have been sooner terminated in accordance with Section 19
hereof. The maximum duration of an Offer Period shall be twenty-seven (27)
months. Initially, the Plan shall be implemented through overlapping
Offer Periods of twenty-four (24) months' duration commencing each May 15 and November 15 following the Effective Date (except that the initial Offer Period shall commence on the Effective Date and shall end on May 14, 2006).
(b) A Participant shall be granted a separate option for each Offer Period in which he or she participates. The option shall be granted on the Enrollment Date and shall be automatically exercised in successive installments on the Exercise Dates ending within the Offer Period.
(c) If on the first day of any Purchase Period in an Offer Period in which an Employee is a Participant, the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock is less than the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the Enrollment Date of the Offer Period (after taking into account any adjustment during the Offer Period pursuant to Section 18(a)), the Offer Period shall be terminated automatically and the Participant shall be enrolled automatically in the new Offer Period which has its first Purchase Period commencing on that date, provided the Employee is eligible to participate in the Plan on that date and has not elected to terminate participation in the Plan.
(d) Except as specifically provided herein, the acquisition of Common Stock through participation in the Plan for any Offer Period shall neither limit nor require the acquisition of Common Stock by a Participant in any subsequent Offer Period.
5. Participation.
(a) An eligible Employee may become a Participant in the Plan by completing a subscription agreement authorizing payroll deductions in the form of Exhibit A to this Plan (or such other form or method (including electronic forms) as the Administrator may designate from time to time) and filing it with the designated payroll office of the Company at least five (5) business days prior to the Enrollment Date for the Offer Period in which such participation will commence, unless a later time for filing the subscription agreement is set by the Administrator for all eligible Employees with respect to a given Offer Period.
(b) Payroll deductions for a Participant shall commence with the first partial or full payroll period beginning on the Enrollment Date and shall end on the last complete payroll period during the Offer Period, unless sooner terminated by the Participant as provided in Section 10.
6. Payroll Deductions.
(a) At the time a Participant files a subscription agreement, the Participant shall elect to have payroll deductions made during the Offer Period in amounts between one percent (1%) and not exceeding fifteen percent (15%) of the Compensation which the Participant receives during the Offer Period.
(b) All payroll deductions made for a Participant shall be credited to the Participant's account under the Plan and will be withheld in whole percentages only. A Participant may not make any additional payments into such account.
(c) A Participant may discontinue participation in the Plan as provided in Section 10, or may increase or decrease the rate of payroll deductions during the Offer Period by completing and filing with the Company a change of status notice in the form of Exhibit B to this Plan (or such other form or method (including electronic forms) as the Administrator may designate from time to time) authorizing an increase or decrease in the payroll deduction rate. Any increase or decrease in the rate of a Participant's payroll deductions shall be effective with the first full payroll period commencing five (5) business days after the Company's receipt of the change of status notice unless the Company elects to process a given change in participation more quickly. A Participant's subscription agreement (as modified by any change of status notice) shall remain in effect for successive Offer Periods unless terminated as provided in Section 10. The Administrator shall be authorized to limit the number of payroll deduction rate changes during any Offer Period.
(d) Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent necessary to comply with Section 423(b)(8) of the Code and Section 3(b) herein, a Participant's payroll deductions shall be decreased to 0%. Payroll deductions shall recommence at the rate provided in such Participant's subscription agreement, as amended, at the time when permitted under Section 423(b)(8) of the Code and Section 3(b) herein, unless such participation is sooner terminated by the Participant as provided in Section 10.
7. Grant of Option. On the Enrollment Date, each Participant shall be granted an option to purchase (at the applicable Purchase Price) a number of shares of the Common Stock as determined by the Administrator, subject to adjustment as provided in Section 18 hereof; provided that such option shall be subject to the limitations set forth in Sections 3(b), 6 and 12 hereof. The Administrator shall also determine the maximum number of shares of Common Stock that a Participant may purchase on each Exercise Date within the particular Offer Period. Exercise of the option shall occur as provided in Section 8, unless the Participant has withdrawn pursuant to Section 10, and the option, to the extent not exercised, shall expire on the last day of the Offer Period with respect to which such option was granted. Notwithstanding the foregoing, shares subject to the option may only be purchased with accumulated payroll deductions credited to a Participant's account in accordance with Section 6 of the Plan. In addition, to the extent an option is not exercised on each Exercise Date, the option shall lapse and thereafter cease to be exercisable.
8. Exercise of Option. Unless a Participant withdraws from the Plan as provided in Section 10, below, the Participant's option for the purchase of shares of Common Stock will be exercised automatically on each Exercise Date, by applying the accumulated payroll deductions in the Participant's account to purchase the number of full shares subject to the option by dividing such Participant's payroll deductions accumulated prior to such Exercise Date and retained in the Participant's account as of the Exercise Date by the applicable Purchase Price. No fractional shares will be purchased; any payroll deductions accumulated in a Participant's account which are not sufficient to purchase a full share shall be carried over to the next Purchase Period or Offer Period, whichever applies, or returned to the Participant, if the Participant withdraws from the Plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any amount remaining in a Participant's account on the Exercise Date due to the application of Section 423(b)(8) of the Code or Section 7, above, shall be returned to the Participant and shall not be carried over to the
next Offer Period or Purchase Period. During a Participant's lifetime, a Participant's option to purchase shares hereunder is exercisable only by the Participant.
9. Delivery. Upon receipt of a request from a Participant after each Exercise Date on which a purchase of shares occurs, the Company shall arrange the delivery to such Participant, as promptly as practicable, of a certificate representing the shares purchased upon exercise of the Participant's option.
10. Withdrawal; Termination of Employment.
(a) A Participant may either (i) withdraw all but not less than
all the payroll deductions credited to the Participant's account and not yet
used to exercise the Participant's option under the Plan or (ii) terminate
future payroll deductions, but allow accumulated payroll deductions to be used
to exercise the Participant's option under the Plan at any time by giving
written notice to the Company in the form of Exhibit B to this Plan (or such
other form or method (including electronic forms) as the Administrator may
designate from time to time). If the Participant elects withdrawal alternative
(i) described above, all of the Participant's payroll deductions credited to the
Participant's account will be paid to such Participant as promptly as
practicable after receipt of notice of withdrawal, such Participant's option for
the Offer Period will be automatically terminated, and no further payroll
deductions for the purchase of shares will be made during the Offer Period. If
the Participant elects withdrawal alternative (ii) described above, no further
payroll deductions for the purchase of shares will be made during the Offer
Period, all of the Participant's payroll deductions credited to the
Participant's account will be applied to the exercise of the Participant's
option on the next Exercise Date (subject to Sections 3(b), 6, 7 and 12), and
after such Exercise Date, such Participant's option for the Offer Period will be
automatically terminated and all remaining accumulated payroll deduction amounts
shall be returned to the Participant. If a Participant withdraws from an Offer
Period, payroll deductions will not resume at the beginning of the succeeding
Offer Period unless the Participant delivers to the Company a new subscription
agreement.
(b) Upon termination of a Participant's employment relationship
(as described in Section 2(k)) at a time more than three (3) months from the
next scheduled Exercise Date, the payroll deductions credited to such
Participant's account during the Offer Period but not yet used to exercise the
option will be returned to such Participant or, in the case of his/her death, to
the person or persons entitled thereto under Section 14, and such Participant's
option will be automatically terminated without exercise of any portion of such
option. Upon termination of a Participant's employment relationship (as
described in Section 2(k)) within three (3) months of the next scheduled
Exercise Date, the payroll deductions credited to such Participant's account
during the Offer Period but not yet used to exercise the option will be applied
to the purchase of Common Stock on the next Exercise Date, unless the
Participant (or in the case of the Participant's death, the person or persons
entitled to the Participant's account balance under Section 14) withdraws from
the Plan by submitting a change of status notice in accordance with subSection
(a) of this Section 10. In such a case, no further payroll deductions will be
credited to the Participant's account following the Participant's termination of
employment and the Participant's option under the Plan will be automatically
terminated after the purchase of Common Stock on the next scheduled Exercise
Date.
11. Interest. No interest shall accrue on the payroll deductions credited to a Participant's account under the Plan.
12. Stock.
(a) Subject to adjustment upon changes in capitalization of the Company as provided in Section 18, the maximum number of shares of Common Stock which shall be made available for sale under the Plan shall be Five Hundred Thousand (500,000) shares. With respect to any amendment to increase the total number of shares of Common Stock under the Plan, the Administrator shall have discretion to disallow the purchase of any increased shares of Common Stock for Offer Periods in existence prior to such increase. If the Administrator determines that on a given Exercise Date the number of shares with respect to which options are to be exercised may exceed (x) the number of shares then available for sale under the Plan or (y) the number of shares available for sale under the Plan on the Enrollment Date(s) of one or more of the Offer Periods in which such Exercise Date is to occur, the Administrator may make a pro rata allocation of the shares remaining available for purchase on such Enrollment Dates or Exercise Date, as applicable, in as uniform a manner as shall be practicable and as it shall determine to be equitable, and shall either continue all Offer Periods then in effect or terminate any one or more Offer Periods then in effect pursuant to Section 19, below. Any amount remaining in a Participant's payroll account following such pro rata allocation shall be returned to the Participant and shall not be carried over to any future Purchase Period or Offer Period, as determined by the Administrator.
(b) A Participant will have no interest or voting right in shares covered by the Participant's option until such shares are actually purchased on the Participant's behalf in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Plan. No adjustment shall be made for dividends, distributions or other rights for which the record date is prior to the date of such purchase.
(c) Shares to be delivered to a Participant under the Plan will be registered in the name of the Participant or in the name of the Participant and his or her spouse, as designated in the Participant's subscription agreement.
13. Administration. The Plan shall be administered by the Administrator which shall have full and exclusive discretionary authority to construe, interpret and apply the terms of the Plan, to determine eligibility and to adjudicate all disputed claims filed under the Plan. Every finding, decision and determination made by the Administrator shall, to the full extent permitted by Applicable Law, be final and binding upon all persons.
14. Designation of Beneficiary.
(a) Each Participant will file a written designation of a beneficiary who is to receive any shares and cash, if any, from the Participant's account under the Plan in the event of such Participant's death. If a Participant is married and the designated beneficiary is not the spouse, spousal consent shall be required for such designation to be effective.
(b) Such designation of beneficiary may be changed by the Participant (and the Participant's spouse, if any) at any time by written notice. In the event of the death of a
Participant and in the absence of a beneficiary validly designated under the Plan who is living (or in existence) at the time of such Participant's death, the Company shall deliver such shares and/or cash to the executor or administrator of the estate of the Participant, or if no such executor or administrator has been appointed (to the knowledge of the Administrator), the Administrator shall deliver such shares and/or cash to the spouse (or domestic partner, as determined by the Administrator) of the Participant, or if no spouse (or domestic partner) is known to the Administrator, then to the issue of the Participant, such distribution to be made per stirpes (by right of representation), or if no issue are known to the Administrator, then to the heirs at law of the Participant determined in accordance with Section 27.
15. Transferability. No payroll deductions credited to a Participant's account, options granted hereunder, or any rights with regard to the exercise of an option or to receive shares under the Plan may be assigned, transferred, pledged or otherwise disposed of in any way (other than by will, the laws of descent and distribution, or as provided in Section 14 hereof) by the Participant. Any such attempt at assignment, transfer, pledge or other disposition shall be without effect, except that the Administrator may, in its sole discretion, treat such act as an election to withdraw funds from an Offer Period in accordance with Section 10.
16. Use of Funds. All payroll deductions received or held by the Company under the Plan may be used by the Company for any corporate purpose, and the Company shall not be obligated to segregate such payroll deductions or hold them exclusively for the benefit of Participants. All payroll deductions received or held by the Company may be subject to the claims of the Company's general creditors. Participants shall have the status of general unsecured creditors of the Company. Any amounts payable to Participants pursuant to the Plan shall be unfunded and unsecured obligations for all purposes, including, without limitation, Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended. The Company shall retain at all times beneficial ownership of any investments, including trust investments, which the Company may make to fulfill its payment obligations hereunder. Any investments or the creation or maintenance of any trust or any Participant account shall not create or constitute a trust or fiduciary relationship between the Administrator, the Company or any Designated Parent or Subsidiary and a Participant, or otherwise create any vested or beneficial interest in any Participant or the Participant's creditors in any assets of the Company or a Designated Parent or Subsidiary. The Participants shall have no claim against the Company or any Designated Parent or Subsidiary for any changes in the value of any assets that may be invested or reinvested by the Company with respect to the Plan.
17. Reports. Individual accounts will be maintained for each Participant in the Plan. Statements of account will be given to Participants at least annually, which statements will set forth the amounts of payroll deductions, the Purchase Price, the number of shares purchased and the remaining cash balance, if any.
18. Adjustments Upon Changes in Capitalization; Corporate Transactions.
(a) Adjustments Upon Changes in Capitalization. Subject to any required action by the stockholders of the Company, the Reserves, the Purchase Price, the maximum number of shares that may be purchased in any Offer Period or Purchase Period, as well as any other terms that the Administrator determines require adjustment shall be proportionately
adjusted for (i) any increase or decrease in the number of issued shares of Common Stock resulting from a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, combination or reclassification of the Common Stock, (ii) any other increase or decrease in the number of issued shares of Common Stock effected without receipt of consideration by the Company, or (iii) as the Administrator may determine in its discretion, any other transaction with respect to Common Stock including a corporate merger, consolidation, acquisition of property or stock, separation (including a spin-off or other distribution of stock or property), reorganization, liquidation (whether partial or complete) or any similar transaction; provided, however that conversion of any convertible securities of the Company shall not be deemed to have been "effected without receipt of consideration." Such adjustment shall be made by the Administrator and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive. Except as the Administrator determines, no issuance by the Company of shares of stock of any class, or securities convertible into shares of stock of any class, shall affect, and no adjustment by reason hereof shall be made with respect to, the Reserves and the Purchase Price.
(b) Corporate Transactions. In the event of a proposed Corporate Transaction, each option under the Plan shall be assumed by such successor corporation or a parent or subsidiary of such successor corporation, unless the Administrator, in the exercise of its sole discretion and in lieu of such assumption, determines to shorten the Offer Period then in progress by setting a new Exercise Date (the "New Exercise Date"). If the Administrator shortens the Offer Period then in progress in lieu of assumption in the event of a Corporate Transaction, the Administrator shall notify each Participant in writing at least ten (10) business days prior to the New Exercise Date, that the Exercise Date for the Participant's option has been changed to the New Exercise Date and that either:
(1) the Participant's option will be exercised automatically on the New Exercise Date, unless prior to such date the Participant has withdrawn from the Offer Period as provided in Section 10; or
(2) the Company shall pay to the Participant on the New Exercise Date an amount in cash, cash equivalents, or property as determined by the Administrator that is equal to the difference in the Fair Market Value of the shares subject to the option and the Purchase Price due had the Participant's option been exercised automatically under SubSection (b)(i) above.
For purposes of this Subsection, an option granted under the Plan shall be deemed to be assumed if, in connection with the Corporate Transaction, the option is replaced with a comparable option with respect to shares of capital stock of the successor corporation or Parent thereof. The determination of option comparability shall be made by the Administrator prior to the Corporate Transaction and its determination shall be final, binding and conclusive on all persons.
19. Amendment or Termination.
(a) The Administrator may at any time and for any reason terminate or amend the Plan. Except as provided in Section 18, no such termination can affect options previously granted, provided that the Plan or any one or more Offer Periods may be terminated by the
Administrator on any Exercise Date or by the Administrator establishing a new Exercise Date with respect to any Offer Period and/or any Purchase Period then in progress if the Administrator determines that the termination of the Plan or such one or more Offer Periods is in the best interests of the Company and its stockholders. Except as provided in Section 18 and this Section 19, no amendment may make any change in any option theretofore granted which adversely affects the rights of any Participant without the consent of affected Participants. To the extent necessary to comply with Section 423 of the Code (or any successor rule or provision or any other Applicable Law), the Company shall obtain stockholder approval in such a manner and to such a degree as required.
(b) Without stockholder consent and without regard to whether any Participant rights may be considered to have been "adversely affected," the Administrator shall be entitled to limit the frequency and/or number of changes in the amount withheld during Offer Periods, change the length of Purchase Periods within any Offer Period, determine the length of any future Offer Period, determine whether future Offer Periods shall be consecutive or overlapping, establish the exchange ratio applicable to amounts withheld in a currency other than U.S. dollars, establish additional terms, conditions, rules or procedures to accommodate the rules or laws of applicable foreign jurisdictions, permit payroll withholding in excess of the amount designated by a Participant in order to adjust for delays or mistakes in the Company's processing of properly completed withholding elections, establish reasonable waiting and adjustment periods and/or accounting and crediting procedures to ensure that amounts applied toward the purchase of Common Stock for each Participant properly correspond with amounts withheld from the Participant's Compensation, and establish such other limitations or procedures as the Administrator determines in its sole discretion advisable and which are consistent with the Plan.
20. Notices. All notices or other communications by a Participant to the Company under or in connection with the Plan shall be deemed to have been duly given when received in the form specified by the Administrator at the location, or by the person, designated by the Administrator for the receipt thereof.
21. Conditions Upon Issuance of Shares. Shares shall not be issued with respect to an option unless the exercise of such option and the issuance and delivery of such shares pursuant thereto shall comply with all Applicable Laws and shall be further subject to the approval of counsel for the Company with respect to such compliance. As a condition to the exercise of an option, the Company may require the Participant to represent and warrant at the time of any such exercise that the shares are being purchased only for investment and without any present intention to sell or distribute such shares if, in the opinion of counsel for the Company, such a representation is required by any of the aforementioned Applicable Laws. In addition, no options shall be exercised or shares issued hereunder before the Plan shall have been approved by stockholders of the Company as provided in Section 23.
22. Term of Plan. The Plan shall become effective upon its approval by
the stockholders of the Company. It shall continue in effect for a term of ten
(10) years unless sooner terminated under Section 19.
23. Stockholder Approval. The Plan shall be subject to approval by the stockholders of the Company. Such stockholder approval shall be obtained in the degree and manner required under Applicable Laws.
24. No Employment Rights. The Plan does not, directly or indirectly, create any right for the benefit of any employee or class of employees to purchase any shares under the Plan, or create in any employee or class of employees any right with respect to continuation of employment by the Company or a Designated Parent or Subsidiary, and it shall not be deemed to interfere in any way with such employer's right to terminate, or otherwise modify, an employee's employment at any time.
25. No Effect on Retirement and Other Benefit Plans. Except as specifically provided in a retirement or other benefit plan of the Company or a Designated Parent or Subsidiary, participation in the Plan shall not be deemed compensation for purposes of computing benefits or contributions under any retirement plan of the Company or a Designated Parent or Subsidiary, and shall not affect any benefits under any other benefit plan of any kind or any benefit plan subsequently instituted under which the availability or amount of benefits is related to level of compensation. The Plan is not a "Retirement Plan" or "Welfare Plan" under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.
26. Effect of Plan. The provisions of the Plan shall, in accordance with its terms, be binding upon, and inure to the benefit of, all successors of each Participant, including, without limitation, such Participant's estate and the executors, administrators or trustees thereof, heirs and legatees, and any receiver, trustee in bankruptcy or representative of creditors of such Participant.
27. Governing Law. The Plan is to be construed in accordance with and governed by the internal laws of the State of California without giving effect to any choice of law rule that would cause the application of the laws of any jurisdiction other than the internal laws of the State of California to the rights and duties of the parties, except to the extent the internal laws of the State of California are superseded by the laws of the United States. Should any provision of the Plan be determined by a court of law to be illegal or unenforceable, the other provisions shall nevertheless remain effective and shall remain enforceable.
28. Administration and Interpretation. Any question or dispute regarding the administration or interpretation of the Plan shall be submitted by the Participant or by the Company to the Administrator. The resolution of such question or dispute by the Administrator shall be final and binding on all persons.
29. Venue and Waiver of Jury Trial. The parties agree that any suit, action, or proceeding arising out of or relating to the Notice, the Plan or this Option Agreement shall be brought in the United States District Court for the Southern District of California (or should such court lack jurisdiction to hear such action, suit or proceeding, in a California state court in the County of San Diego) and that the parties shall submit to the jurisdiction of such court. The parties irrevocably waive, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any objection the party may have to the laying of venue for any such suit, action or proceeding brought in such court. THE PARTIES ALSO EXPRESSLY WAIVE ANY RIGHT THEY HAVE OR MAY HAVE TO A
JURY TRIAL OF ANY SUCH SUIT, ACTION OR PROCEEDING. If any one or more provisions of this Section 29 shall for any reason be held invalid or unenforceable, it is the specific intent of the parties that such provisions shall be modified to the minimum extent necessary to make it or its application valid and enforceable.
EXHIBIT A
BofI Holding, Inc. 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan
SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT
Effective with the Offer Period beginning on:
[ ] ESPP Effective Date [ ] May 15, 2005 or [ ] November 15, 2005
1. PERSONAL INFORMATION [MODIFY DATA REQUESTED AS APPROPRIATE]
Legal Name (Please Print) _________________________ __________ ___________ (Last) (First) (MI) Location Department Street Address_____________________________________ _______________________ Daytime Telephone City, State/Country, Zip____________________________ _______________________ E-Mail Address Social Employee Security No. __ __ __ - __ __ - __ __ __ __ I.D. No. ______________________ |
Manager Mgr.Location
2. ELIGIBILITY. Any Employee whose customary employment is more than 20 hours per week and more than 5 months per calendar year and who does not hold (directly or indirectly) five percent (5%) or more of the combined voting power of the Company, a parent or a subsidiary, whether in stock or options to acquire stock is eligible to participate in the BofI Holding, Inc. 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the "ESPP"); provided, however, that Employees who are subject to the rules or laws of a foreign jurisdiction that prohibit or make impractical the participation of such Employees in the ESPP are not eligible to participate.
3. DEFINITIONS. Each capitalized term in this Subscription Agreement shall have the meaning set forth in the ESPP.
4. SUBSCRIPTION. I hereby elect to participate in the ESPP and subscribe to purchase shares of the Company's Common Stock in accordance with this Subscription Agreement and the ESPP. I have received a complete copy of the ESPP and a prospectus describing the ESPP and understand that my participation in the ESPP is in all respects subject to the terms of the ESPP. The effectiveness of this Subscription Agreement is dependent on my eligibility to participate in the ESPP.
5. PAYROLL DEDUCTION AUTHORIZATION. I hereby authorize payroll deductions from my Compensation during the Offer Period in the percentage specified below (payroll reductions may not exceed 15% of Compensation nor the limitation under Section 423(b)(8) of the Code and the regulations thereunder):
Percentage to be Deducted (circle one) 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6% 7% 8% 9% 10% 11% 12% 13% 14% 15% |
6. ESPP ACCOUNTS AND PURCHASE PRICE. I understand that all payroll deductions will be credited to my account under the ESPP. No additional payments may be made to my account. No interest will be credited on funds held in the account at any time including any refund of the account caused by withdrawal from the ESPP. All payroll deductions shall be accumulated for the purchase of Company Common Stock at the applicable Purchase Price determined in accordance with the ESPP.
7. WITHDRAWAL AND CHANGES IN PAYROLL DEDUCTION. I understand that I may discontinue my participation in the ESPP at any time prior to an Exercise Date as provided in Section 10 of the
ESPP, but if I do not withdraw from the ESPP, any accumulated payroll deductions will be applied automatically to purchase Company Common Stock. I may increase or decrease the rate of my payroll deductions in whole percentage increments to not less than one percent (1%) on one occasion during any Purchase Period by completing and timely filing a Change of Status Notice. Any increase or decrease will be effective for the full payroll period occurring after five (5) business days from the Company's receipt of the Change of Status Notice.
8. PERPETUAL SUBSCRIPTION. I understand that this Subscription Agreement shall remain in effect for successive Offer Periods until I withdraw from participation in the ESPP, or termination of the ESPP.
9. TAXES. I have reviewed the ESPP prospectus discussion of the federal tax consequences of participation in the ESPP and consulted with tax consultants as I deemed advisable prior to my participation in the ESPP. I hereby agree to notify the Company in writing within thirty (30) days of any disposition (transfer or sale) of any shares purchased under the ESPP if such disposition occurs within two (2) years of the Enrollment Date (the first day of the Offer Period during which the shares were purchased) or within one (1) year of the Exercise Date (the date I purchased such shares), and I will make adequate provision to the Company for foreign, federal, state or other tax withholding obligations, if any, which arise upon the disposition of the shares. In addition, the Company may withhold from my Compensation any amount necessary to meet applicable tax withholding obligations incident to my participation in the ESPP, including any withholding necessary to make available to the Company any tax deductions or benefits contingent on such withholding.
10. ADMINISTRATION AND INTERPRETATION. Any question or dispute regarding the administration or interpretation of the Plan shall be submitted to the Administrator. The resolution of such question or dispute by the Administrator shall be final and binding on all persons.
11. DESIGNATION OF BENEFICIARY. In the event of my death, I hereby designate the following person or trust as my beneficiary to receive all payments and shares due to me under the ESPP:
[ ] I am single [ ] I am married
Beneficiary
(please print) _______________________ Relationship to Beneficiary (if any)
(Last) (First) (MI)
Street Address ________________________________ ____________________________
City, State/Country, Zip ______________________
12. TERMINATION OF ESPP I understand that the Company has the right, exercisable in its sole discretion, to amend or terminate the ESPP at any time, and a termination may be effective as early as an Exercise Date, including the establishment of an alternative date for an Exercise Date within each outstanding Offer Period.
Date: _________________ Employee Signature:_____________________________
EXHIBIT B
BofI Holding, Inc. 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan
CHANGE OF STATUS NOTICE
WITHDRAWAL FROM ESPP
I hereby withdraw from the BofI Holding, Inc. 2004 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the "ESPP") and agree that my option under the applicable Offer Period will be automatically terminated and all accumulated payroll deductions credited to my account will be refunded to me or applied to the purchase of Common Stock depending on the alternative indicated below. No further payroll deductions will be made for the purchase of shares in the applicable Offer Period and I shall be eligible to participate in a future Offer Period only by timely delivery to the Company of a new Subscription Agreement.
[ ] WITHDRAWAL AND PURCHASE OF COMMON STOCK
Payroll deductions will terminate, but your account balance will be applied to purchase Common Stock on the next Exercise Date. Any remaining balance will be refunded.
[ ] WITHDRAWAL WITHOUT PURCHASE OF COMMON STOCK
Entire account balance will be refunded to me and no Common Stock will be purchased on the next Exercise Date provided this notice is submitted to the Company ten (10) business days prior to the next Exercise Date.
[ ] CHANGE IN PAYROLL DEDUCTION
I hereby elect to change my rate of payroll deduction under the ESPP as follows (select one):
Percentage to be Deducted (circle one) 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6% 7% 8% 9% 10% 11% 12% 13% 14% 15% |
An increase or a decrease in payroll deduction will be effective for the first full payroll period commencing no fewer than five (5) business days following the Company's receipt of this notice, unless this change is processed more quickly.
[ ] CHANGE OF BENEFICIARY [ ] I am single [ ]I am married
This change of beneficiary shall terminate my previous beneficiary designation under the ESPP. In the event of my death, I hereby designate the following person or trust as my beneficiary to receive all payments and shares due to me under the ESPP:
Beneficiary
(please print) __________________________ Relationship to Beneficiary (if any)
(Last) (First) (MI)
Street Address __________________________________________ _____________________
City, State/Country, Zip ________________________________
Date: _____________________ Employee Signature:_____________________________
Exhibit 10.5
ASSIGNMENT AND ASSUMPTION AGREEMENT
AND CONSENT TO ASSIGNMENT
EXECUTIVE CENTER DEL MAR
This Assignment and Assumption Agreement and Consent to Assignment (this "AGREEMENT") is made as of September 22, 1999, by and among PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION PARTNERS, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership ("LANDLORD") and CONTIASSET RECEIVABLES MANAGEMENT LLC, a Delaware limited liability company ("TENANT"), and BOFI.COM HOLDING, INC., a Delaware corporation ("ASSIGNEE"), and CONTIFINANCIAL CORPORATION, a Delaware corporation ("GUARANTOR").
R E C I T A L S :
A. Reference is hereby made to that certain Lease dated March 16, 1999, by and between Landlord and Tenant (the "LEASE"), for space on a portion of the second (2nd) floor commonly known as Suite 220 (the "PREMISES") in that certain office building located at 12220 El Camino Real, San Diego, California (the "BUILDING").
B. Pursuant to the terms of Article VIII of the Lease, Tenant has requested Landlord's consent with respect to the assignment (the" ASSIGNMENT") by Tenant of its rights, title, interest and obligations under the Lease to Assignee. Landlord is willing to consent to the Assignment on the terms and conditions contained herein.
C. All defined terms not otherwise expressly defined herein shall have the respective meanings given in the Lease.
A G R E E M E N T :
1. Landlord's Consent. Landlord hereby consents to the Assignment; provided, however, such consent is granted by Landlord only upon the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement. This Agreement shall not be construed to modify, waive or amend any of the terms, covenants and conditions of the Lease or to waive any breach thereof or any of Landlord's rights or remedies thereunder or to enlarge or increase any obligations of Landlord under the Lease. Any terms of the Assignment which are inconsistent with the terms of the Lease or this Agreement shall be of no force or effect.
2. Non-Release of Tenant and Guarantor; Further Transfers. Neither the Assignment nor this consent thereto shall release or discharge Tenant and Guarantor from any liability, whether past, present or future, under the Lease or alter the primary liability
of the Tenant to pay the rent and perform and comply with all of the obligations of Tenant to be performed under the Lease. Neither the Assignment nor this consent thereto shall be construed as a waiver of Landlord's right to consent to any subletting by the Assignee or to any assignment by the Assignee of its rights, title, interest and obligations under the Lease, or as a consent to any portion of the Premises being used or occupied by any other party. Landlord may consent to subsequent sublettings and assignments of the Lease or any amendments or modifications thereto without notifying Tenant or Guarantor or anyone else liable under the Lease and without obtaining their consent. No such action by Landlord shall relieve such persons from any liability to Landlord or otherwise with regard to the Premises.
3. Assignment and Assumption of Lease and Indemnification.
a. Assumption. Without limiting Tenant's and Guarantor's continuing liability under the Lease, Tenant hereby assigns to Assignee, as of 12:01 a.m. on September 22, 1999 (the "EFFECTIVE DATE"), all of its right, title, and interest in and to the Lease, subject to the execution and delivery of this Agreement by all the parties hereto. Further, without limiting Tenant's and Guarantor's continuing liability under the Lease, Assignee hereby accepts the above assignment from Tenant, and assumes all of Tenant's obligations and duties under the Lease as of the Effective Date. Assignee agrees fully and timely to satisfy, uphold, and perform all duties and obligations of Tenant pursuant to the Lease, including, but not limited to, the payment of Rent as referenced therein, accruing from the Effective Date forward. Assignee shall have no liability to Tenant or to any other party (including Landlord) for any payments due or other obligations which accrued or were required to be performed under the Lease prior to the Effective Date. Upon execution of this Agreement by all of the parties thereto, Assignee hereby agrees to deliver a check payable to the order of Tenant in an amount equal to Three Thousand Three Hundred Sixty-Eight and 70/100 Dollars ($3.368.70), which represents Assignee's pro rata portion of the monthly rent due under the Lease for September, 1999. As of October 1, 1999, Assignee shall pay all monthly rent due under the Lease directly to Landlord. In addition to the above, commencing as of October l, 1999, Assignee shall pay to Landlord any additional charges for supplemental air conditioning to the extent supplied to the Premises, which charges are currently approximately Three Hundred Dollars ($300.00) per month; Landlord hereby acknowledges and agrees that Tenant has paid such supplemental air conditioning charges owing through September 30, 1999.
b. Representations and Warranties of Tenant. Tenant represents and warrants to Assignee that, to its knowledge (i) the Lease is in full force and effect, covers the Premises, and has not been amended or modified by any agreements, whether written or oral, except this Assignment, (ii) Tenant has not assigned the Lease, or sublet any portion of the Premises, to any other party, and (iii) Tenant is not in default under, or
breach of, any provision of the Lease, and no event or circumstance has occurred that upon notice or the lapse of time, or both, would, constitute a default under, or breach of, any provision of the Lease.
c. Operating Costs. Tenant hereby agrees to pay Landlord its prorata share of all Operating Costs and Additional Rent set forth in the Lease for the portion of the calendar year 1999 ending on the Effective Date within thirty (30) days of the date hereof. If such amount can only be estimated by Landlord as of the date of such payment, Tenant shall pay such estimated amount within said thirty (30)-day period and Assignee and Tenant shall settle any overpayment or deficiency within thirty (30) days after Landlord bills Assignee for such items for the full year.
d. Indemnification by Tenant. Tenant for itself, its (past and present) partners, officers, directors, shareholders, attorneys, legal representatives, and constituent parent, subsidiary and affiliate corporations, including but not limited to Guarantor, and each of their past and present partners, officers, agents and employees, and each of their successors and assigns (collectively, the "TENANT PARTIES") hereby indemnifies, defends and holds Assignee (and/or any one (1) or more of the "ASSIGNEE PARTIES" (as defined below)) wholly free and harmless from and against any and all claims, demands, obligations, duties, liabilities, damages, expenses, indebtedness, debts, breaches of contract, duty or relationship, acts, omissions, misfeasance, malfeasance, causes of action, sums of money, accounts, compensation, contracts, controversies, promises, damages, costs, losses and remedies therefore, causes of action, rights of indemnity or liability of any type, kind, nature, description or character whatsoever, and irrespective of how, why or by reason of what facts, whether known or unknown, whether heretofore existing or hereafter arising, whether liquidated or unliquidated related to the Lease or the Premises (collectively, "CLAIMS") which Assignee may incur or which may be asserted against Assignee by reason of any breach of any representation or warranty of Tenant set forth herein, or any alleged obligation or undertaking of Tenant as lessee under the Lease, which Claims arise from events occurring or circumstances existing prior to the Effective Date.
e. Indemnification by Assignee. Assignee for itself, its (past and present) partners, officers, directors, shareholders, attorneys, legal representatives, and constituent parent, subsidiary and affiliate corporations and each of their past and present partners, officers. agents and employees, and each of their successors and assigns (collectively, the "ASSIGNEE PARTIES") hereby indemnifies, defends and holds Tenant (and/or any one (1) or more of the "TENANT PARTIES") wholly free and harmless from and against any and all Claims (as defined above) which Tenant and/or Guarantor may incur or which may be asserted against Tenant and/or Guarantor by reason of any alleged obligation or undertaking of Assignee as Lessee under the Lease, which Claims arise from events occurring on or after the Effective Date.
4. Security Deposit. Upon execution of this Agreement by all of the
parties thereto, Assignee shall deliver a check payable to the order of Landlord
in an amount equal to Thirty Three Thousand Six Hundred Eighty Nine and 70/100
Dollars ($33,689.70) as a security deposit (the "SECURITY DEPOSIT"). Landlord
shall release an amount equal to Twenty Two Thousand Four Hundred Fifty Nine and
80/100 Dollars ($22.459.80) from the Security Deposit (and the Security Deposit
shall thereafter be deemed to have been reduced by such amount released) within
thirty (30) days after authorization by notice from Assignee's counsel, Heller
Ehrman White & McAuliffe, certifying that the following conditions have been
satisfied. Landlord is hereby authorized, and agrees, to release the
aforementioned amount upon the satisfaction of both of the following conditions:
(i) Assignee is authorized to commence operations as a newly chartered federal
savings association by the Office of Thrift Supervision; and (ii) Assignee
receives irrevocable investor subscriptions in the amount of at least Thirteen
Million Dollars ($13,000,000.00). The Security Deposit shall be treated as
security for the performance of this Agreement and the Lease by the Assignee and
shall be held by Landlord in accordance with Article XXI of the Lease. The
receipt of the aforementioned investor subscriptions, and the issuance of shares
of Assignee's stock represented thereby, shall not constitute an "assignment"
for purposes of the Lease.
5. Notice and Cure Period. Assignee shall provide written notice of any
Event of Default (as defined in the Lease) to Tenant and Guarantor within five
(5) days of its occurrence. Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default, Landlord
agrees that it will not exercise any of its remedies under the Lease if Tenant
and/or Guarantor takes all action and pays all amounts necessary to cure such
Event of Default within the time periods specified in Article XIII of the Lease
after Landlord delivers notice to Tenant and/or Guarantor as, and if, required
in accordance with Article XIII of the Lease.
6. General Provisions.
6.1 Brokerage Commission. Assignee hereby agrees that under no circumstances shall Landlord, Tenant or Guarantor be liable for any brokerage commission or other charge or expense in connection with the Assignment and Assignee agrees to protect, defend, indemnify and hold Landlord, Tenant and Guarantor harmless from the same and from any cost or expense (including, but not limited to, attorney's fees) incurred by Landlord, Tenant and/or Guarantor in resisting any claim for any such brokerage commission. Upon execution of, this Agreement by all of the parties thereto, Assignee hereby agrees to deliver a check payable to the order, of Colliers International in an amount equal to Twenty Two Thousand and 00/100 Dollars ($22.000.00) in full and complete satisfaction of Colliers International's commission and other charges and expenses due in connection with the assignment of lease contemplated hereby.
6.2 Controlling Law. The terms and provisions of this Agreement shall be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of California.
6.3 Binding Effect. This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties hereto, their heirs, successors and assigns. As used herein, the singular number includes the plural and the masculine gender includes the feminine and neuter.
6.4 Captions. The paragraph captions utilized herein are in no way intended to interpret or limit the terms and conditions hereof; rather, they are intended for purposes of convenience only.
6.5 Partial Invalidity. If any term, provision or condition contained in this Agreement shall, to any extent, be invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement, or the application of such term, provision or condition to persons or circumstances other than those with respect to which it is invalid or unenforceable, shall not be affected thereby, and each and every other term, provision and condition of this Agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the fullest extent possible permitted by law.
6.6 Attorney's Fees. If either party commences litigation against the other for the specific performance of this Agreement, for damages for the breach hereof or otherwise for enforcement of any remedy hereunder, the parties hereto agree to and hereby do waive any right to a trial by jury and, in the event of any such commencement of litigation, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover from the other party such costs and reasonable attorneys' fees as may have been incurred.
6.7 Landlord's Costs. Within thirty (30) days after written request by Landlord, Tenant shall, in accordance with Section 8.4 of the Lease, pay to Landlord any costs and reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by Landlord in connection with the Assignment.
6.8 Guarantor's Consent. By its execution below, Guarantor consents to the Assignment and acknowledges and agrees that the Lease Guaranty (of even date with the Lease (and attached thereto as Exhibit "E")) shall remain in full force and effect during the initial Term of the Lease. Further, the parties hereto agree and acknowledge that the Option granted to Tenant in accordance with Section 3.6 of the Lease shall not apply to Assignee, in accordance with the terms of the Lease.
6.9 Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which shall constitute an original and all of which shall be one and the same Agreement.
6.10 Tenant's Costs. Within thirty (30) days after written request by Tenant, Assignee shall pay to Tenant any costs and reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by Landlord in connection with the Assignment, including, but not limited to, Landlord's costs under Section 6.7 above; provided that nothing in this Section 6.10 shall relieve Tenant of its obligation to pay Landlord's costs as set forth in Section 6.7 above.
6.11 Addresses for Notice. Any notices required to be sent to Tenant and Guarantor or Assignee pursuant to the Lease or this Agreement shall be sent to the following addresses:
To Tenant: ContiAsset Receivables Management LLC C/o ContiFinancial Corporation 277 Park Avenue New York, New York 10172 Attn: President Phone #: (212) 207-2800 Fax #: (212) 207-5251 To Guarantor: ContiFinancial Corporation 277 Park Avenue New York, New York 10172 Attn: President Phone #: (212) 207-2800 Fax #: (212) 207-5251 |
(provided that one (1) notice sent to the above address shall satisfy the notice requirement for both Tenant and Guarantor)
With a copy To:
ContiFinancial Corporation 277 Park Avenue New York, New York 10172 Attn: General Counsel Phone #: (212) 207-2800 Fax #: (212) 207-2937 To Assignee: BofI.com Holding, Inc. 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220 San Diego, California 92130 Attn: President |
Phone #: (858) 350-6200 Fax #: (858) 350-9870
With a copy to:
Heller, Ehrman, White & McAuliffe 4250 Executive Square, 7th Floor La Jolla, California 92037-9103 Attn: Alan Jacobs, Esq.
Phone #: (858) 450-8400
Fax #: (858) 450-8499
6.12 Tenant's Bill of Sale. Upon execution of this Agreement by all of the parties thereto, Assignee hereby agrees to deliver a check payable to the order of Tenant in an amount equal to Ten Thousand and 00/100 Dollars ($10,000.00) for the purchase of all of Tenant's office furnishings, fixtures, computers, servers, software, licenses and artwork as further detailed in that certain Bill of Sale, dated September 21, 1999, which shall be contemporaneously executed and delivered by Tenant.
6.13 Further Assurances. The parties hereto shall execute and deliver such further documents and instruments as any party hereto shall reasonably request to carry out the purpose and intent of this Agreement and to acknowledge and affirm the transfer and assignment of the leasehold interest conveyed hereby.
[The remainder of this page was intentionally left blank]
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Consent to Assignment Agreement as of the day and year first above written.
"LANDLORD" PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION
PARTNERS, L.P.,
a Delaware limited partnership
By: Prentiss Properties I, Inc.
a Delaware corporation
its sole general partner
By: /s/ Christopher M. Hipps -------------------------------- Name: Christopher M. Hipps Title: Senior Vice President "TENANT" CONTIASSET RECEIVABLES MANAGEMENT, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company By: /s/ Mitch Bonilla ---------------------- MITCH BONILLA Its: Vice President By: /s/ Glenn Goldman ---------------------- GLENN GOLDMAN Its: Chairman "ASSIGNEE" BOFI.COM HOLDING, INC., a Delaware corporation By: /s/ Jerry Englert ---------------------- JERRY ENGLERT Its: President |
"GUARANTOR" CONTIFINANCIAL CORPORATION, a Delaware corporation By: /s/ Glenn Goldman -------------------------- GLENN GOLDMAN Its: Authorized Signatory |
LEASE AGREEMENT
BETWEEN
PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION PARTNERS, L.P.,
A DELAWARE LIMITED PARTNERSHIP
(LANDLORD)
AND
CONTIASSET RECEIVABLES MANAGEMENT LLC,
A DELAWARE LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY
(TENANT)
EXECUTIVE CENTER DEL MAR
SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA
Dated: March 16, 1998
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE ARTICLE I BASIC LEASE INFORMATION AND CERTAIN DEFINITIONS..........................1 ARTICLE II PREMISES AND QUIET ENJOYMENT.............................................4 ARTICLE III TERM; COMMENCEMENT DATE DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE OF PREMISES..............4 ARTICLE IV RENT.....................................................................8 ARTICLE V OPERATING COSTS..........................................................9 ARTICLE VI PARKING.................................................................13 ARTICLE VII UTILITIES AND SERVICES..................................................14 ARTICLE VIII ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING...............................................17 ARTICLE IX REPAIRS.................................................................19 ARTICLE X ALTERATIONS.............................................................21 ARTICLE XI LIENS...................................................................22 ARTICLE XII ARTICLE XU USE AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS.................................23 ARTICLE XIII DEFAULT AND REMEDIES....................................................24 ARTICLE XIV INSURANCE...............................................................26 ARTICLE XV DAMAGE BY FIRE OR OTHER CAUSE...........................................28 ARTICLE XVI CONDEMNATION............................................................29 ARTICLE XVII INDEMNIFICATION.........................................................31 ARTICLE XVIII SUBORDINATION AND ESTOPPEL CERTIFICATES.................................32 ARTICLE XIX SURRENDER OF THE PREMISES...............................................34 ARTICLE XX LANDLORD'S RIGHT TO INSPECT.............................................34 ARTICLE XXI SECURITY DEPOSIT........................................................35 ARTICLE XXII BROKERAGE...............................................................35 ARTICLE XXIII OBSERVANCE OF RULES AND REGULATIONS.....................................36 ARTICLE XXIV NOTICES.................................................................36 ARTICLE XXV MISCELLANEOUS...........................................................36 ARTICLE XXVI SUBSTITUTION SPACE......................................................40 ARTICLE XXVII OTHER DEFINITIONS.......................................................42 ARTICLE XXVIII RIGHT OF FIRST OFFER....................................................44 EXHIBIT AND RIDERS EXHIBIT A - FLOOR PLAN OF THE PREMISES EXHIBIT B - THE LAND EXHIBIT C - WORK LETTER AGREEMENT EXHIBIT D - FORM OF COMMENCEMENT NOTICE EXHIBIT E - LEASE GUARANTY EXHIBIT F - SUBORDINATION, NON-DISTURBANCE AND ATTORNMENT AGREEMENT RIDER NO. 1 - RULES AND REGULATIONS |
INDEX OF DEFINED TERMS
Definitions of certain terms used in this Lease are found in the following sections:
TERM LOCATION OF DEFINITION Additional Rent.................................................................Section 1.1N Bankruptcy Code ................................................................Section 8.6 Base Rent.......................................................................Section 1.1M Basic Lease Information and Certain Definitions.................................Article 1 Broker(s).......................................................................Section 1.1S Building........................................................................Section 1.1B Building Standard...............................................................Exhibit C Business Days...................................................................Article 27 Central Areas...................................................................Article 27 Central Systems.................................................................Exhibit C Commencement Date...............................................................Section 1.1F Common Areas....................................................................Article 27 Comparison Area.................................................................Section 7.1A control.........................................................................Section 8.3 Controllable Operating Costs....................................................Section 5.1 days............................................................................Article 27 Economic Terms..................................................................Section 28.2 Events of Default ..............................................................Section 13.1 Expiration Date.................................................................Section 3.4 First Offer Notice..............................................................Section 28.1 First Offer Space...............................................................Article 28 Guarantor(s)....................................................................Section 1.1W herein, hereof, hereby, hereunder and words of similar import...................Article 27 Holidays........................................................................Article 27 include and including...........................................................Article 27 Interest Rate...................................................................Section 4.2 Land............................................................................Section 1.1C Landlord........................................................................Preamble Landlord's Address for Notice...................................................Section 1.1T Landlord's Address for Payment..................................................Section 1.1U Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate.............................................Section 5.1 Leasehold Improvements..........................................................Exhibit C Net Rentable Area...............................................................Article 27 Net Rentable Area of the Building...............................................Section 1.1J Net Rentable Area of the Premises...............................................Section 1.1I Non-Disturbance Agreement.......................................................Section 18.4 Operating Costs.................................................................Section 5.2A Original Tenant.................................................................Section 3.7 Parking Facility................................................................Section 1.1D Parking Permits.................................................................Section 1.1P Project.........................................................................Section 1.1E |
Premises .......................................................................Section 1.1A Rent............................................................................Section 1.1L repair..........................................................................Article 27 Security Deposit................................................................Section 1.1R Service Areas...................................................................Article 27 Space Availability Notice.......................................................Section 28.1 Substitution Space..............................................................Section 26.1 Successor Landlord..............................................................Section 18.2 Superior Leases.................................................................Article 28 Superior Rights.................................................................Article 28 Taxes...........................................................................Section 5.2 Tenant .........................................................................Preamble & Article 27 Tenant Delay ...................................................................Exhibit C Tenant's Address for Notice ....................................................Section 1.1V Tenant's Operating Costs Payment................................................Section 5.1 Tenant's Permitted Uses.........................................................Section 1.1Q Tenant's Property...............................................................Section 14.1A(a) Tenant's Share..................................................................Section 1.1K Term............................................................................Section 1.1H Termination Effective Date......................................................Article 3 Termination Notice..............................................................Article 3 termination of this Lease and words of like import..............................Article 27 terms of this Lease.............................................................Article 27 Trustee.........................................................................Section 8.6A Usable Area of Premises.........................................................Section 1.1G year............................................................................Article 27 |
COMMENCEMENT NOTICE
This Commencement Notice is delivered this 22nd day of June, 1998, by Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership ("LANDLORD") to ContiAsset Receivables Management LLC, a Delaware limited liability company ("TENANT"), pursuant to the provisions of Section 3.3 of that certain Lease Agreement (the "LEASE") dated March 16, 1998, by and between Landlord and Tenant covering certain space in the Building known as 12220 EI Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130. All terms used herein with their initial letter capitalized shall have the meaning assigned to such terms in the Lease.
W I T N E S S E T H:
1. The Building, the Premises, the Parking Facility, and all other improvements required to be constructed and furnished by Landlord in accordance with the terms of the Lease have been satisfactorily completed by the Landlord and accepted by the Tenant.
2. The Premises have been delivered to, and accepted by, the Tenant, subject to the completion of "punch list" items.
3. The Commencement Date of the Lease is the 15th day of June, 1998, and the Expiration Date is the 30th day of June, 2003.
4. The Premises consist of 5,478 square feet of Net Rentable Area on the second (2nd) floor of the Building.
5. The Base Rent is $131,472.00 per annum, payable in monthly installments of $10,956.00, subject, however, to the provisions of the Lease relating to adjustments of Tenant's Base Rent and Operating Costs Payment.
6. Remittance of the foregoing payments shall be made on the first day of each month in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Lease at the following address:
Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P.
P.O. Box 100435
Pasadena, California 91189-0435
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by Landlord as of the date first written above.
LANDLORD: Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership
By: Prentiss Properties I, Inc., general partner
By: /s/ Louay Alsadek ------------------------- Louay Alsadek Vice President By: /s/ J. Kevan Dilbeck ------------------------- J. Kevan Dilbeck Vice President |
LEASE AGREEMENT
THIS LEASE AGREEMENT ("this Lease") is made and entered into by and between PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION PARTNERS, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership ("Landlord"), and CONTIASSET RECEIVABLES MANAGEMENT LLC, a Delaware limited liability company ("Tenant"), upon all the terms set forth in this Lease and in all Exhibits and Riders hereto, to each and all of which terms Landlord and Tenant hereby mutually agree.
ARTICLE I
BASIC LEASE INFORMATION AND CERTAIN DEFINITIONS
1.1 Each reference in this Lease to information and definitions contained in !he Basic Lease Information and Certain Definitions and each use of the terms capitalized and defined in this Section 1.1 shall be deemed to refer to, and shall have the respective meaning set forth in, this Section 1.1.
A. Premises: That certain space identified by diagonal lines or shaded area on the floor plan attached hereto as Exhibit "A," commonly known as Suite 220 on the second (2nd) floor of the Building. B. Building: The building to be constructed at 12220 EI Camino Real, San Diego, California 92130 C. Land: Those certain parcels of land underlying the Project. D. Parking Facility: The parking structure located on the Land. E. Project: The Land and all improvements thereon, including the Building, the Parking Facility, and all Common Areas, initially and substantially as shown on Exhibit "B" attached hereto. F. Commencement Date: The date defined in Section 3.1 hereof. G. Usable Area of the Premises: 4,729 square feet. H. Term: Five (5) years, unless this Lease is sooner terminated as provided herein, beginning on the Commencement Date. I. Net Rentable Area of the Premises: 5,478 square feet |
J. Net Rentable Area of the Building: 56,551 square feet. K. Tenant's Share: 9.68%, representing a fraction, the numerator of which is the Net Rentable Area of the Premises and the denominator of which is the Net Rentable Area of the Building, subject to future adjustment pursuant to the provisions of Section 5.4 hereof. L. Rent: The Base Rent and the Additional Rent. M. Base Rent: The Base Rent shall be as shown in this Section 1.l(M) below. Base Rent includes Base Year Operating Costs. Month of Monthly Base Rent Monthly Base Rent Lease Term per Square Foot of Net Rentable Area 1-12 $ 10,956.00 $2.00 13-24 $ 11,229.90 $2.05 25-36 $ 11,503.80 $2.10 37-48 $ 11,777.70 $2.15 49-60 $ 12,051.60 $2.20 N. Additional Rent: The Additional Rent shall be all other sums due and payable by Tenant under the Lease, including, but not limited to, Tenant's Share of Operating Costs. O. Base Year Operating Costs: The grossed up (to 95% occupancy) Operating Costs for the calendar year 1998. P. Parking Permits: Tenant shall be entitled to take, at no charge during the initial Term, twenty-four (24) Parking Permits consisting of (i) nineteen (19) unassigned parking spaces to be used in common with others in the Parking Facility and (ii) five (5) reserved parking spaces in the Parking Facility. Q. Tenant's Permitted Uses: Tenant may use the Premises for general office use and for no other purpose. R. Security Deposit: None. |
S. Broker(s): Colliers Iliff Thorn representing Tenant and Business Real Estate Brokerage Company representing Landlord. T. Landlord's Address for Notice: Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P. 3890 West Northwest Highway, Suite 400 Dallas, Texas 75220 Attention: Thomas F. August With a copy to: Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P. 970 West 190th Street, Suite 550 Torrance, California 90502 Attention: Louay Alsadek U. Landlord's Address for Payment: Prentiss Properties Acquisition Partners, L.P. P.O. Box 100435 Pasadena, California 91189-0435 V. Tenant's Address for Notice: ContiAsset Receivables Management LLC l2220 El Camino Real, Suite 220 San Diego, California 92130 Attention: Mitchell J. Bonilla, Vice President and General Manager with a copy to: ContiFinancial Corporation 277 Park Avenue New York, NY 10172 Attention: Michael Valentino, Director Alan Langus, General Counsel W. Guarantor(s): ContiFinancial Corporation, a Delaware corporation X. Extension Option(s): See Section 3.6 hereof. Y. Allowance for Leasehold Improvements: See Exhibit "C" |
ARTICLE II
PREMISES AND QUIET ENJOYMENT
2.1 Landlord hereby leases the Premises to Tenant, and Tenant hereby rents and hires the Premises from Landlord, for the Term. During the Term, Tenant shall have the right to use, in common with others and in accordance with the Rules and Regulations, the Common Areas.
2.2 Provided that Tenant fully and timely performs all the terms of this Lease on Tenant's part to be performed, including payment by Tenant of all Rent, Tenant shall have, hold and enjoy the Premises during the Term without hindrance or disturbance from or by Landlord; subject., however, to all of the terms, conditions and provisions of any and all ground leases, deeds to secure debt, mortgages, restrictive covenants, easements, and other encumbrances now or hereafter affecting the Premises or the Project.
ARTICLE III
TERM; COMMENCEMENT DATE
DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE OF PREMISES
3.1 The Commencement Date shall be the earlier of (a) the date the
Premises are deemed available for occupancy pursuant to Section 3.2 hereof or
(b) the date Tenant, or anyone claiming by, through or under Tenant, occupies
any portion of the Premises for the purpose of the conduct of Tenant's (or such
other person's) business therein.
3.2 A. The Premises shall be deemed available for occupancy as soon as
the following conditions have been met: (a) the Leasehold Improvements (as
defined in Exhibit "C" to the Lease) have been substantially completed as
determined by Landlord's architect or space planner; (b) either a certificate of
occupancy (temporary or final) or other certificate permitting the lawful
occupancy of the Premises has been issued for the Premises, or such portion of
the Premises, as the case may be, by the appropriate governmental authority; and
(c) at least three (3) Business Days' notice of the anticipated occurrence of
the conditions in clauses (a) and (b) above has been given to Tenant.
B. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, if there is a delay in the availability for occupancy of the Premises as provided in Section 3.2.A. above due to Tenant Delays (as defined in Exhibit "C" to the Lease), then the Premises shall be deemed available for occupancy on the date on which the Premises would have been available for occupancy but for such Tenant Delay, even though a certificate of occupancy or other certificate permitting the lawful occupancy of the Premises has not been issued or the Leasehold Improvements have not been commenced or completed.
C. In the event that the Premises is not available for occupancy by the "Outside Date," which shall be July 1, 1998, as such July 1, 1998 date may be extended by the number of days of Tenant Delays and by the number of days of "Force Majeure Delays" (as defined below), then the sole remedy of Tenant shall be the right to deliver a notice to Landlord (the "Termination Notice") electing to terminate this Lease effective upon receipt of the Termination Notice by Landlord (the "Termination Effective Date"). Except as provided hereinbelow, the Termination Notice must be delivered by Tenant to Landlord, if at all, not
earlier than the Outside Date and not later than five (5) business days after the Outside Date. If Tenant delivers the Termination Notice to Landlord, then Landlord shall have the right to suspend the Termination Effective Date for a period ending thirty (30) days after the original Termination Effective Date. In order to suspend the Termination Effective Date, Landlord must deliver to Tenant, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Termination Notice, a certificate of the general contractor certifying that it is such contractor's best good faith judgment that the Premises will be available for occupancy within thirty (30) days after the original Termination Effective Date. If the Premises is available for occupancy within said thirty (30) day suspension period, then the Termination Notice shall be of no further force and effect; if, however, the Premises is not available for occupancy within said thirty (30) day suspension period, then this Lease shall terminate as of the date of expiration of such thirty (30) day period. If prior to the Outside Date Landlord determines that the Premises will not be available for occupancy by the Outside Date, Landlord shall have the right to deliver a written notice to Tenant stating Landlord's opinion as to the date by which the Premises will be available for occupancy and Tenant shall be required, within five (5) business days after receipt of such notice, to either deliver the Termination Notice (which will mean that this Lease shall thereupon terminate and shall be of no further force and effect) or agree to extend the Outside Date to that date which is set by Landlord. Failure of Tenant to so respond in writing within said five (5) business day period shall be deemed to constitute Tenant's agreement to extend the Outside Date to that date which is set by Landlord. If the Outside Date is so extended, Landlord's right to request Tenant to elect to either terminate or further extend the Outside Date shall remain and shall continue to remain, with each of the notice periods and response periods set forth above, until the Premises is available for occupancy or until this Lease is terminated. For purposes of this Section 3.2C, "Force Majeure Delays" shall mean and refer to a period of delay or delays encountered by Landlord affecting the work of construction of the Leasehold Improvements because of delays due to excess time in obtaining governmental permits or approvals beyond the time period normally required to obtain such permits or approvals for similar space, similarly improved, in first-class office buildings in the San Diego County area; fire, earthquake or other acts of God; acts of the public enemy; riot; insurrection; governmental regulations of the sales of materials or supplies or the transportation thereof; strikes or boycotts; shortages of material or labor or any other cause beyond the reasonable control of Landlord.
3.3 The Net Rentable Area of the Premises and the Building are as stated in Sections 1.1I and J, respectively. By written instrument substantially in the form of Exhibit "D" attached hereto, Landlord shall notify Tenant of the Commencement Date, the Net Rentable Area of the Premises and all other matters stated therein. The Commencement Notice shall be conclusive and binding on Tenant as to all matters set forth therein, unless within ten (10) days following delivery of such Commencement Notice, Tenant contests any of the matters contained therein by notifying Landlord in writing of Tenant's objections. The foregoing notwithstanding, Landlord's failure to deliver any Commencement Notice to Tenant shall not affect Landlord's determination of the Commencement Date.
3.4 Except as otherwise provided in Section 9 of Exhibit "C," Tenant may not enter or occupy the Premises prior to the Commencement Date without Landlord's express written consent and any entry by Tenant shall be subject to all of the terms of this Lease; provided however, that no such early entry shall change the Commencement Date or the date on which the Term expires (the "Expiration Date").
3.5 Occupancy of the Premises or any portion thereof by Tenant or anyone claiming through or under Tenant for the conduct of Tenant's or such other person's business therein shall be conclusive evidence that Tenant and all parties claiming through or under Tenant (a) have accepted the Premises or such portion as suitable for the purposes for which the Premises are leased hereunder, (b) have accepted the Common Areas as being in a good and satisfactory condition, and (c) have waived any defects in the Premises and the Project; provided however, that, if any Leasehold Improvements have been constructed and installed to prepare the Premises for Tenant's occupancy, Tenant's acceptance of the Premises, and waiver of any defect therein, shall occur upon Landlord's substantial completion of the Leasehold Improvements in accordance with the terms of Exhibit "C" hereof, subject only to Landlord's completion of items on Landlord's punchlist and latent defects of which Tenant has given Landlord notice within forty five (45) days following the date on which Landlord first makes the Premises available to Tenant for any work in the Premises to be undertaken by Tenant.
3.6 A. Subject to the terms of this Section 3.6 and Section 3.7, Landlord hereby grants to Tenant an option (the "Extension Option") to extend the Term of this Lease with respect to the entire Premises for one (1) additional period of five (5) years (the "Option Term"), on the same terms, covenants and conditions as provided for in this Lease during the initial Lease Term, except that all economic terms such as, without limitation, monthly Base Rent, a new Base Year for Operating Costs, if appropriate, parking charges, etc., shall be established based on the "fair market rental rate" for the Premises for the Option Term as defined and determined in accordance with the provisions of this Section 3.6 below.
B. The Extension Option must be exercised, if at all, by written notice ("Extension Notice") delivered by Tenant to Landlord no earlier than the date which is twelve (12) months, and no later than the date which is six (6) months, prior to the expiration of the then current Term of this Lease.
C. The term "fair market rental rate" as used herein shall mean the annual amount per rentable square foot, projected during the relevant period, that a willing, comparable, non-equity tenant (excluding sublease and assignment transactions) would pay, and a willing, comparable landlord of a comparable quality building located in the Comparison Area would accept, at arm's length (what Landlord is accepting in current transactions for the Building may be considered), for space comparable in size, quality and floor height as the leased area at issue taking into account the age, quality and layout of the existing improvements in the leased area at issue and taking into account items that professional real estate brokers customarily consider, including, but not limited to, rental rates, office space availability, tenant size, tenant improvement allowances, operating expenses and allowance, parking charges, and any other amounts then being charged by Landlord or the lessors of such similar office buildings.
D. Landlord's determination of fair market rental rate shall be delivered to Tenant in writing not later than thirty (30) days following Landlord's receipt of Tenant's Extension Notice. Tenant will have thirty (30) days ("Tenant's Review Period") after receipt of Landlord's notice of the fair market rental rate within which to accept such fair market rental rate or to object thereto in writing. Tenant's failure to accept the fair market rental rate submitted by Landlord in writing within Tenant's Review Period will conclusively be deemed Tenant's disapproval thereof if Tenant objects to the fair market rental rate submitted by Landlord within
Tenant's Review Period, then Landlord and Tenant win attempt in good faith to agree upon such fair market rental rate using their best good faith efforts. If Landlord and Tenant fail to reach agreement on such fair market rental rate within fifteen (15) days following the expiration of Tenant's Review Period (the "Outside Agreement Date"), then Tenant may, within five (5) business days following the Outside Agreement Date, demand by written notice to Landlord that each party's determination be submitted to appraisal in accordance with the provisions below. Tenant's failure to timely demand appraisal will constitute Tenant's rescission of its Extension Notice and the Extension Option will be void and of no further force or effect.
E. (1) Landlord and Tenant shall each appoint one independent, unaffiliated appraiser who shall by profession be a real estate broker who has been active over the five (5) year period ending on the date of such appointment in the leasing of high-rise office space in the Comparison Area. Each such appraiser will be appointed within thirty (30) days after the Outside Agreement Date.
(2) The two (2) appraisers so appointed will within fifteen (15) days of the date of the appointment of the last appointed appraiser agree upon and appoint a third appraiser who shall be qualified under the same criteria set forth herein above for qualification of the initial two (2) appraisers.
(3) The determination of the appraisers shall be limited solely to the issue of whether Landlord's or Tenant's last proposed (as of the Outside Agreement Date) new monthly Base Rent for the Premises is the closest to the actual new monthly Base Rent for the Premises as determined by the appraisers, taking into account the requirements of Paragraph C and this Paragraph E regarding same.
(4) The three (3) appraisers shall within thirty (30) days of the appointment of the third appraiser reach a decision as to whether the parties shall use Landlord's or Tenant's submitted new monthly Base Rent, and shall notify Landlord and Tenant thereof.
(5) The decision of the majority of the three (3) appraisers shall be binding upon Landlord and Tenant. The cost of each party's appraiser shall be the responsibility of the party selecting such appraiser, and the cost of the third appraiser (or arbitration, if necessary) shall be shared equally by Landlord and Tenant.
(6) If either Landlord or Tenant fails to appoint an appraiser within the time period in Paragraph E(l) herein above, the appraiser appointed by one of them shall reach a decision, notify Landlord and Tenant thereof and such appraiser's decision shall be binding upon Landlord and Tenant.
(7) If the two (2) appraisers fail to agree upon and appoint a third appraiser, both appraisers shall be dismissed and the matter to be decided shall be forthwith submitted to arbitration under the provisions of the American Arbitration Association.
(8) In the event that the new Monthly Base Rent is not established prior to end of the initial Term of the Lease, the monthly Base Rent immediately payable at the commencement of such Option Term shall be the monthly Base Rent payable in the immediately preceding month. Notwithstanding the above, once the fair market rental is determined in
accordance with this section, the parties shall settle any underpayment on the next monthly Base Rent payment date falling not less than thirty (30) days after such determination.
3.7 A. As used in this Section, the word "Option" means the Extension Option pursuant to Section 3.6 herein.
B. The Option is personal to the original Tenant executing this Lease ("Original Tenant") or any successor by merger or acquisition of all or substantially all of Tenant's assets (the "Permitted Transferee") and may be exercised only by the original Tenant executing this Lease or a Permitted Transferee while occupying the entire Premises and without the intent of thereafter assigning this Lease or subletting the Premises and may not be exercised or be assigned, voluntarily or involuntarily, by any person or entity other than the original Tenant executing this Lease or a Permitted Transferee. The Option is not assignable separate and apart from this Lease, nor may the Option be separated from this Lease in any manner, either by reservation or otherwise.
C. Tenant shall have no right to exercise the Option, notwithstanding any provision of the grant of Option to the contrary, and Tenant's exercise of the Option may be nullified by Landlord and deemed of no further force or effect, if (i) Tenant shall be in default of any monetary obligation or material non-monetary obligation under the terms of this Lease as of Tenant's exercise of the Option or at any time after the exercise of such Option and prior to the commencement of the Option event, or (ii) Landlord has given Tenant two (2) or more notices of monetary default, whether or not such defaults are subsequently cured, during any twelve (12) consecutive month period of the Lease.
ARTICLE IV
RENT
4.1 Tenant shall pay to Landlord, without notice, demand, offset or deduction, in lawful money of the United States of America, at Landlord's Address for Payment, or at such other place as Landlord shall designate in writing from time to time: (a) the Base Rent in equal monthly installments, in advance, on the first day of each calendar month during the Term, and (b) the Additional Rent, at the respective times required hereunder. The first monthly installment of Base Rent and the Additional Rent payable under Article 5 hereof shall be paid in advance on the date of Tenant's execution of this Lease and applied to the first installments of Base Rent and such Additional Rent coming due under this Lease. Payment of Rent shall begin on the Commencement Date; provided, however, that, if either the Commencement Date or the Expiration Date falls on a date other than the first day of a calendar month, the Rent due for such fractional month shall be prorated on a per diem basis between Landlord and Tenant so as to charge Tenant only for the portion of such fractional month falling within the Term.
4.2 All installments of Rent not paid within five (5) days after notice that such amount is due shall be subject to a late charge of five percent (5%) of the amount of the late payment and shall further bear interest until paid at a rate per annum (the "Interest Rate") equal to the greater of fifteen percent (15%) or four percent (4%) above the prime rate of interest from time to time publicly announced by Bank of America, a national banking association, or any successor thereof; provided, however, that, if at the time such interest is sought to be imposed the
rate of interest exceeds the maximum rate permitted under federal law or under the laws of the State of California, the rate of interest on such past due installments of Rent shall be the maximum rate of interest then permitted by applicable law.
ARTICLE V
OPERATING COSTS
5.1 Tenant shall pay to Landlord, as Additional Rent, for each year or fractional year during the Term, an amount ("Tenant's Operating Costs Payment") of money equal to Tenant's Share of Operating, Costs, for such year in excess of Tenant's Share of Base Year Operating Costs, such amount to be calculated and paid as follows:
A. Beginning on January 1st of the year following the year in which the Commencement Date occurs, and on the first day of January of each year during the Term thereafter, or as soon thereafter as is practicable, Landlord shall furnish Tenant with a statement ("Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate") setting forth Landlord's reasonable estimate of grossed up Operating Costs for the forthcoming year and Tenant's Operating Costs Payment for such year. On the first day of each calendar month during such year, Tenant shall pay to Landlord one-twelfth (1/12th) of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment as estimated on Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate. If for any reason Landlord has not provided Tenant with Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate on the first day of January of any year during the Term, then (a) until the first day of the calendar month following the month in which Tenant is given Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate, Tenant shall continue to pay to Landlord on the first day of each calendar month the sum, if any, payable by Tenant under this Section 5.1 for the month of December of the preceding year, and (b) promptly after Landlords' Operating Costs Estimate is furnished to Tenant, Landlord shall give notice to Tenant stating whether the installments of Tenant's Operating Costs Payments previously made for such year were greater or less than the installments of Tenant's Operating Costs Payments to be made for such year, and (i) if there shall be a deficiency, Tenant shall pay the amount thereof to Landlord within ten (10) days after the delivery of Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate, or (ii) if there shall have been an overpayment, Landlord shall apply such overpayment as a credit against the next accruing monthly installment(s) of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment due from Tenant until fully credited to Tenant (or pay such amount to Tenant if this Lease has expired or terminated), and (iii) on the first day of the calendar month following the month in which Landlord's Operating Costs Estimate is given to Tenant and on the first day of each calendar month throughout the remainder of such year, Tenant shall pay to Landlord an amount equal to one twelfth (1/12th) of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment.
B. On the first day of March of each year during the Term (beginning on the first day of March of the second year following the year in which the Commencement Date occurs), or as soon thereafter as is practicable, Landlord shall furnish Tenant with a statement of the grossed up Operating Costs for the preceding year. Within thirty (30) days after Landlord's giving of such statement, Tenant shall make a lump sum payment to Landlord in the amount, if any, by which Tenants' Operating Costs Payment for such preceding year as shown on such Landlord's statement, exceeds the aggregate of the monthly installments of Tenant's Operating Costs Payments paid during such preceding year. If Tenant's Operating Costs Payment, as shown on such Landlord's statement, is less than the aggregate of the monthly installments of
Tenant's Operating Costs Payment actually paid by Tenant during such preceding year, then Landlord shall apply such amount to the next accruing monthly installment(s) of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment due from Tenant until fully credited to Tenant.
C. If the Term ends on a date other than the last day of December, the actual Operating Costs for the year in which the Expiration Date occurs shall be prorated so that Tenant shall pay that portion of Tenant's Operating Costs Payment for such year represented by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the number of days during such fractional year falling within the Term, and the denominator of which is 365 (or 366, in the case of a leap year). The provisions of this Section 5.1 shall survive the Expiration Date or any sooner termination provided for in this Lease.
D. The term "Controllable Operating Costs" shall mean those Operating Costs described in subsections 5.2(A)(a) and 5.2(A)(b) below. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the aggregate Controllable Operating Costs for any year after the 1998 Base Year shall not increase more than seven percent (7%) over the maximum permitted Controllable Operating Costs for the immediately preceding year. There shall be no maximum permitted Controllable Operating Costs for the 1995 Base Year and the maximum permitted Controllable Operating Costs for the calendar year 1999 shall be one hundred seven percent (107%) of the actual Controllable Operating Costs for the 1998 Base Year (all calculated on a grossed up basis). By way of example only, not as a limitation upon the foregoing, the following chart illustrates maximum Controllable Operating Costs:
Year Actual Operating Costs Maximum Controllable (per Square Foot of Net Operating Costs (Per Square Rentable Area) Foot of Net Rentable Area) 1998 $3.00 $3.00 1999 $3.25 $3.11 2000 $3.40 $3.43 2001 $3.70 $3.68 2001 $3.83 $3.93 |
5.2 A. For purposes of this Lease, the term "Operating Costs" shall mean any and all expenses, costs and disbursements of every kind which Landlord pays, incurs or becomes obligated to pay in connection with the operation, management, repair and maintenance of all portions of the Project. All Operating Costs shall be determined according to generally accepted accounting principles which shall be consistently applied. Operating Costs include the following: (a) Wages, salaries, benefits and fees (including all reasonable education, travel and professional fees) of all personnel or entities to the extent engaged in the operation, repair, maintenance, management, or safekeeping of the Project, including taxes, insurance, and benefits relating thereto and tile costs of all supplies and materials (including work clothes and uniforms) used in the operation, repair, maintenance and security of tile Project; (b) Cost of performance by Landlord's personnel of, or of all service agreements for, maintenance, janitorial services, access control, alarm service, window cleaning, elevator maintenance and landscaping for the Project. Such cost shall include the rental of personal property used by Landlord's personnel in the
maintenance and repair of the Project; (c) Cost of utilities for the Project, including water, sewer, power, electricity for common areas, gas, fuel, lighting and all air-conditioning, heating and ventilating costs; (d) Cost of all insurance, including casualty and liability insurance applicable to the Project and to Landlord's equipment, fixtures and personal property used in connection therewith, business interruption or rent insurance against such perils as are commonly insured against by prudent landlords, such other insurance as may be required by any lessor or mortgagee of Landlord, and such other insurance which Landlord considers reasonably necessary in the operation of the Project, together with all appraisal and consultants' fees in connection with such insurance; (e) All Taxes. For purposes hereof, the term "Taxes" shall mean, all taxes, assessments, and other governmental charges, applicable to or assessed against the Project or any portion thereof, or applicable to or assessed against Landlord's personal property used in connection therewith, whether federal, state, county or municipal and whether assessed by taxing districts or authorities presently taxing the Project or the operation thereof or by other taxing authorities subsequently created, or otherwise, and any other taxes and assessments attributable to or assessed against all or any part of the Project or its operation: including any reasonable expenses, including fees and disbursements of attorneys, tax consultants, arbitrators, appraisers, experts and other witnesses, incurred by Landlord in contesting any taxes or the assessed valuation of all or any part of the Project. If at any time during the Term there shall be levied, assessed, or imposed on Landlord or all or any part of the Project by any governmental entity any general or special ad valorem or other charge or tax directly upon rents received under leases, or if any fee, tax, assessment, or other charge is imposed which is measured by or based, in whole or in part, upon such rents, or if any charge or tax is made based directly or indirectly upon the transactions represented by leases or the occupancy or use of the Project or any portion thereof, such taxes, fees, assessments or other charges shall be deemed to be Taxes; provided, however, that any (a) franchise, corporation, income or net profits tax, unless substituted for real estate taxes or imposed as additional charges in connection with the ownership of the Project, which may be assessed against Landlord or the Project or both, (b) transfer taxes assessed against Landlord or the Project or both, (c) penalties or interest on any late payments of Landlord, and (d) personal property taxes of Tenant or other tenants in the Project, shall be excluded from Taxes. If, as of the Commencement Date, the Project has not been fully assessed as a completed project, for purposes of computing the Operating Costs (including the Operating Costs for the Base Year), Taxes shall be adjusted to reflect full completion and occupancy of the Project. If any or all of the Taxes paid hereunder are by law permitted to be paid in installments, notwithstanding how Landlord pays the same, then, for purposes of calculating Operating Costs, such Taxes shall be deemed to have been divided and paid in the maximum number of installments permitted by law, and there shall be included in Operating Costs for each year only such installments as are required by law to be paid within such year, together with interest thereon and on future such installments as provided by law; (f) Legal and accounting costs incurred by Landlord or paid by Landlord to third parties (exclusive of legal fees with respect to disputes with individual tenants, negotiations of tenant leases, or with respect to the ownership rather than the operation of the Project), appraisal fees, consulting fees, all other professional fees and disbursements and all association dues; (g) Cost of non-capitalized repairs and general maintenance for the Project (excluding repairs and general maintenance paid by proceeds of insurance or by Tenant, other tenants of the Project or other third parties); (h) Amortization of the cost of improvements or equipment which are capital in nature and which (i) are for the purpose of reducing Operating Costs for the Project, up to the amount saved as a result of the
installation thereof, as reasonably estimated by Landlord, or (ii) are required by any governmental authority, or (iii) replace any Building equipment needed to operate the Project at the same quality levels as prior to the replacement. All such costs, including interest thereon, shall be amortized on a straight-line basis over the useful life of the capital investment items, as reasonably determined by Landlord, but in no event beyond the reasonable useful life of the Project as a first class office project; (i) the Project management office rent or rental value; (j) a management fee of three percent (3%) of revenues from the Building (whether or not Landlord engages a manager for the Project or manages the Project with Landlord's personnel) and all items reimbursable to the Project manager, if any, pursuant to any management contract for the Project; and (k) amounts payable to any associations created under any instruments of record affecting the Building or the Land, as amended from time to time.
B. "Operating Costs" shall not include (a) specific costs for any
capital repairs, replacements or improvements, except as provided above; (b)
expenses for which Landlord is reimbursed or indemnified (either by an insurer,
condemnor, tenant, warrantor or otherwise), to the extent of funds received by
Landlord; (c) expenses incurred in leasing or procuring tenants (including lease
commissions, advertising expenses and expenses of renovating space for tenants);
(d) payments for rented equipment, the cost of which would constitute a capital
expenditure not permitted pursuant to the foregoing if the equipment were
purchased; (e) interest or amortization payments on any mortgages; (f) net basic
rents under ground leases; (g) costs representing an amount paid to an affiliate
of Landlord which is in excess of the amount which would have been paid in the
absence of such relationship; (h) costs specifically billed to and paid by
specific tenants; (i) damage and repairs to the extent actually covered under
any insurance policy carried by Landlord in connection with the Building, Common
Areas or Parking Facilities; (j) Landlord's general overhead expenses not
related to the Building, Common Areas or Parking Facility; (k) costs (including
permit, license and inspection fees) incurred in renovating or otherwise
improving, decorating, painting or altering space for other tenants or other
occupants of the vacant space within the Building; or (l) costs incurred due to
a violation by Landlord or any other tenant in the Building of the terms and
conditions of any lease. There shall be no duplication of costs or reimbursement
Operating Costs attributable to the Common Areas or Parking Facilities in
general will be equitably prorated among all of the buildings in the Project and
Tenant shall be responsible for Tenant's Share of those costs attributable to
the Building. In the event of any dispute as to the amount of Tenant's Share of
Operating Costs, Tenant or an accounting firm selected by Tenant and reasonably
satisfactory to Landlord (billing hourly and not on a contingency fee basis)
will have the right, by prior written notice ("Audit Notice") given within sixty
(60) days ("Audit Period") following receipt of Landlord's annual reconciliation
("Actual Statement") and at reasonable times during normal business hours, to
audit Landlord's accounting records with respect to Operating Costs relative to
the year to which such Actual Statement relates at the offices of Landlord's
property manager. In no event will Landlord or its property manager be required
to (i) photocopy any accounting records or other items or contracts, (ii) create
any ledgers or schedules not already in existence, (iii) incur any costs or
costs relative to such inspection, or (iv) perform any other tasks other than
making available such accounting records as aforesaid. Neither Tenant nor its
auditor may leave the offices of Landlord's property manager with copies of any
materials supplied by Landlord. Tenant must pay its Share of Operating Costs
when due pursuant to the terms of this Lease and may not withhold payment of
Operating Costs or any other rent pending results of the audit or during a
dispute regarding Operating Costs. The audit must be completed within thirty
(30) days
of the date of Tenant's Audit Notice and the results of such audit shall be delivered to Landlord within forty-five (45) days of the date of Tenant's Audit Notice. If Tenant does not comply with any of the aforementioned time frames, then such Actual Statement will be conclusively binding on Tenant. If such audit or review correctly reveals that Landlord has overcharged Tenant then within thirty (30) days after the results of such audit are made available to Landlord, Landlord agrees to reimburse Tenant the amount of such overcharge. If the audit reveals that Tenant was undercharged, then within thirty (30) days after the results of the audit are made available to Tenant, Tenant agrees to reimburse Landlord the amount of such undercharge. In all cases, Tenant agrees to pay the cost of such audit Tenant agrees to keep the results of the audit confidential and will cause its agents, employees and contractors to keep such results confidential. To that end, Landlord may require Tenant and its auditor to execute a confidentiality agreement provided by Landlord.
5.3 If The Building is not fully occupied (meaning ninety-five percent (95%) of the Net Rentable Area of the Building) during any full or fractional year of the Term, the actual Operating Costs shall be adjusted for such year to an amount which Landlord estimates would have been incurred in Landlord's reasonable judgment had the Building been ninety-five percent (95%) occupied.
5.4 If during the Term any change occurs in either the number of square feet of the Net Rentable Area of the Premises or of the Net Rentable Area of the Building, Tenant's Share of Operating Costs shall be adjusted, effective as of the date of any such change. Landlord shall promptly notify Tenant in writing of such change and the reason therefor. Any changes made pursuant to this Section 5.4 shall not alter the computation of Operating Costs as provided in this Article 5, but, on and after the date of any such change, Tenant's Operating Costs Payment pursuant to Section 5.1A shall be computed upon Tenant's Share thereof, as adjusted. If such estimated payments of Tenant's Share are so adjusted during a year, a reconciliation payment for Tenant's Share of Operating Costs pursuant to this Article 5 for the calendar year in which such change occurs shall be computed pursuant to the method set forth in Section 5.1B, such computation to take into account the daily weighted average of Tenant's Share of Operating Costs during such year.
ARTICLE VI
PARKING
6.1 Subject to the terms hereof, Landlord hereby grants to Tenant, throughout the Term of this Lease, a license to use in common with other tenants and with the public the Parking Facility and shall issue Parking Permits for such use. Each unassigned Parking Permit shall entitle Tenant to one (1) unassigned parking space in the Parking Facility. Each reserved Parking Permit shall entitle Tenant to one (1) reserved parking space in the Parking Facility in a location to be designated by Landlord from time to time. Any costs incurred by Landlord to designate Tenant's reserved parking spaces as reserved for Tenant shall be paid by Tenant, as additional rent, within ten (10) days after Tenant's receipt of an invoice therefor. All such parking shall be free of charge throughout the initial Lease Term. Thereafter, Landlord shall have the right to charge Tenant for all such parking to the extent that landlords of buildings comparable to the Building in the general vicinity of the Building are charging their tenants for comparable parking privileges; provided, however, that any such parking charge parable by
Tenant hereunder shall not exceed the prevailing rate charged by such landlords of comparable buildings for comparable parking privileges. The number of Parking Permits to be issued to Tenant is set forth in Section 1.1P. Landlord shall not be obligated to provide Tenant with any additional Parking Permits. If Tenant fails to observe the Rules and Regulations with respect to the Parking Facility, then Landlord, at its option, shall have the right to treat such failure as a default under this Lease and to terminate Tenant's Parking Permits, without legal process, and to remove Tenant's vehicles and those of its employees, licensees or invitees and all of Tenant's personal property from the Parking Facility. If all or any portion of the Parking Facility shall be damaged or rendered unusable by fire or other casualty or any taking pursuant to eminent domain proceeding (or deed in lieu thereof), and as a result thereof Landlord or the garage operator is unable to make available to Tenant the parking provided, for herein, then the number of cars which Tenant shall be entitled to park hereunder shall be proportionately reduced so !hat the number of cars which Tenant may park in the Parking Facility after the casualty or condemnation in question shall bear the same ratio to the total number of cars which can be parked in the Parking Facility at such time as the number of cars Tenant had the right to park in the Parking Facility prior to such casualty condemnation bore to the aggregate number of cars which could be parked therein at that time.
ARTICLE VII
UTILITIES AND SERVICES
7.1 A. During the Term, Landlord shall furnish Tenant with the
following services: (a) hot and cold water in Building Standard bathrooms and
chilled water in Building Standard drinking fountains; (b) heating, ventilating
or air-conditioning, as appropriate, during Business Hours at such temperatures
and in such amounts as customarily and seasonally provided to tenants occupying
comparable space in first-class office buildings in the San Diego Corporate
Center of Del Mar Heights office submarket area ("Comparison Area"); (c)
electric lighting for the Common Areas of the Project; (d) passenger elevator
service, in Common with others for access to and from the Premises twenty-four
(24) hours per day, seven (7) day per week; provided, however, that Landlord
shall have the right to limit the number of (but not cease to operate all)
elevators to be operated after Business Hours and on Saturdays, Sundays and
Holidays; (e) janitorial cleaning services; (f) facilities for Tenant's loading,
unloading, delivery and pick-up activities, including access thereto during
Business Hours, subject to the Rules and Regulations, the type of facilities,
and other limitations of such loading facilities; and (g) replacement, as
necessary, of all Building Standard lamps and ballasts in Building Standard
light fixtures within the Premises. All services referred to in this Section
7.1A shall be provided by Landlord and paid for by Tenant as part of Tenant's
Operating Costs Payment.
B. If Tenant requires air-conditioning, heating or other services, including cleaning services, routinely supplied by Landlord for hours or days in addition to the hours and days specified in Section 7.1A, Landlord shall make reasonable efforts to provide such additional service after reasonable prior written request therefor from Tenant, and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for the cost of such additional service plus an administrative fee of ten percent (10%). Landlord shall have no obligation to provide any additional service to Tenant at any time Tenant is in default under this Lease unless Tenant pays to Landlord, in advance, the cost of such additional service. If any machinery or equipment which generates abnormal heat or otherwise creates unusual demands on the air-conditioning or heating system serving the Premises is used
in the Premises and if Tenant has not, within five (5) days after demand from Landlord, taken such steps, at Tenant's expense, as shall be necessary to cease such adverse affect on the air-conditioning or heating system, Landlord shall have the right to install supplemental air-conditioning or heating units in the Premises, and the fun cost of such supplemental units (including the cost of acquisition, installation, operation, use and maintenance thereof) shall be paid by Tenant to Landlord in advance or on demand. Subject to Tenant's compliance with the terms of Article 10 of this Lease, Tenant shall have the right to install a supplemental HVAC unit on the roof of the Building without additional charge. Said HVAC unit shall be installed, operated, screened, maintained, repaired and removed at the sole expense of Tenant.
C. All charges for electricity used within the Premises shall be separately metered and billed directly to Tenant by the electricity supplier. Tenant therefore covenants to contract directly with the electricity supplier for service to the Premises; and at its sole cost and expense, shall pay all service establishment fees, other service fees which may be imposed by the supplier in conjunction with its service to Tenant, and all charges for electric current used by Tenant during the Term of this Lease within the Premises. Tenant shall make all such payments directly to the electricity supplier as and when bills are rendered. Should Tenant fail to pay such amounts, Landlord shall have the right to pay same on Tenant's behalf and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for all costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in conjunction with such payment within ten (10) days after demand therefor. All such costs and expenses incurred by Landlord on Tenant's behalf shall be deemed Additional Rent payable by Tenant and collectible by Landlord as such. Notwithstanding any contrary provision herein, Tenant acknowledges that in addition to the foregoing charges, Tenant's Share of electricity charges for the Common Areas of the Project shall be included as part of Tenant's Share of Operating Costs, Throughout the Term, Tenant shall keep its electricity meter and appurtenant equipment in good working order and condition, and shall repair and if necessary, replace same at Tenant's sole cost and expense should Tenant fail to so repair and maintain the meter and equipment, Landlord may, but shall have no obligation to, cause such meter and equipment to be repaired or replaced at Tenant's sole cost and expense, in which event Tenant shall pay to Landlord as Additional Rent, all costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in conjunction with maintenance, repair and/or replacement of the electricity meter and equipment. Any such amounts shall be due and payable by Tenant within ten (10) days after demand therefor from Landlord. At no time shall use of electricity in the Premises exceed the capacity of existing feeders and risers to or wiring in the Premises. Any risers or wiring to meet Tenant's excess electrical requirements shall, upon Tenant's written request, be installed by Landlord, at Tenant's sole cost, if, in Landlord's reasonable judgment, the same are necessary and shall not (i) cause permanent damage or injury to the Project, the Building or, the Premises, (ii) cause or create a dangerous or hazardous condition, (iii) entail excessive or unreasonable alterations, repairs or expenses, or (iv) interfere with or disturb other tenants or occupants of the Building.
7.2 Landlord's obligation to furnish the utility services specified herein shall be subject to the rules and regulations of the supplier of such electricity of other utility services and the rules and regulations of any municipal or other governmental authority regulating the business of providing electricity and other utility services. Landlord shall have the right, at Landlord's option, upon not less than thirty (30) days' prior written notice to Tenant (provided such prior notice will be less if either the discontinuance of such service is required by applicable law or Landlord receives shorter notice from the utility company providing electricity or other
utility service), to discontinue utility services to the Premises and arrange for a direct connection thereof through a public utility supplying such service. If Landlord gives such notice of discontinuance, Landlord shall make all necessary arrangements with the public utility supplying such utility service directly to the Building to furnish such utility service to the Premises, and, unless prohibited by law or regulations of such public utility, Landlord shall not discontinue such utility service to the Premises until such public utility is ready to supply service to the Premises, Tenant shall, however, be responsible for contracting promptly and directly with such public utility supplying such service and for paying all deposits for, and all costs relating to, such service.
7.3 No failure to furnish, or any stoppage of, the services referred to in this Article 7 resulting from any, cause shall make Landlord liable in any respect for damages to any person, property or business, or be construed as an eviction of Tenant, or entitle, except as expressly provided below in Section 7.4, Tenant to any abatement of Rent or other relief from any of Tenant's obligations under this Lease. Should any malfunction of any systems or facilities occur within the Project or should maintenance or alterations of such systems or facilities become necessary, Landlord shall repair the same promptly and with reasonable diligence, and Tenant shall have no claim for rebate, abatement of Rent, or damages because of malfunctions or any such interruptions in service. Tenant hereby waives the provisions of California Civil Code Section 1932(1) or any other applicable existing or future law, ordinance or governmental regulation permitting the termination of this Lease due to an interruption, failure or inability to provide any services.
7.4 Notwithstanding anything above to the contrary, in the event that Tenant is prevented from using, and does not use, the Premises or any portion thereof, as a result of any failure to provide services to the Premises (an "ABATEMENT EVENT"), then Tenant shall give Landlord notice ("ABATEMENT NOTICE") of such Abatement Event, and if such Abatement Event continues beyond the "Eligibility Period" (as that term is defined below), then the Base Rent and Tenant's Share of Operating Costs and Tenant's obligation to pay for parking (if any) shall be abated entirely or reduced, as the case may be, after expiration of the Eligibility Period for such time that Tenant continues to be so prevented from using, and does not use, the Premises or a portion thereof, in the proportion that the rentable area of the portion of the Premises that Tenant is prevented from using, and does not use, bears to the total rentable area of the Premises; provided, however, in the event that Tenant is prevented from using, and does not use, a portion of the Premises for a period of time in excess of the Eligibility Period and the remaining portion of the Premises is not sufficient to allow Tenant to effectively conduct its business therein, and if Tenant does not conduct its business from such remaining portion, then for such time after expiration of the Eligibility Period during which Tenant is so prevented from effectively conducting its business therein, the Base Rent and Tenant's Share of Operating Costs and Tenant's obligation to pay for parking (if any) for the entire Premises shall be abated entirely for such time as Tenant continues to be so prevented from using, and does not use the Premises. If, however, Tenant reoccupies any portion of the Premises during such period, the rent allocable to such reoccupied portion, based on the proportion that the rentable area of such reoccupied portion of the Premises bears to the total rentable area of the Premises, shall be payable by Tenant from the date Tenant reoccupies such portion of the Premises. The term "ELIGIBILITY PERIOD" shall mean a period of three (3) consecutive business days after Landlord's receipt of any Abatement Notice(s). Such right to abate Base Rent and Tenant's Share of Operating Costs
shall be Tenant's sole and exclusive remedy at law or in equity for an Abatement Event. This paragraph shall not apply in case of damage to, or destruction of, the Premises or the Building, or any eminent domain proceedings which shall be governed by separate provisions of this Lease.
ARTICLE VIII
ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
8.1 Neither Tenant nor its legal representatives or successors in interest shall, by operation of law or otherwise, assign, mortgage, pledge, encumber or otherwise transfer this Lease or any part hereof, or the interest of Tenant under this Lease, or in any sublease or the rent thereunder. The Premises or any part thereof shall not be sublet, occupied or used for any purpose by anyone other than Tenant, without Tenant's obtaining in each instance the prior written consent of Landlord in the manner hereinafter provided. As indicated in, and subject to, Section 8.4 below, Landlord's consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed. Tenant shall not modify, extend, or amend a sublease previously consented to by Landlord without obtaining Landlord's prior written consent thereto.
8.2 An assignment of this Lease shall be deemed to have occurred (a) if, in a single transaction or in a series of transactions, a more than 50% interest in Tenant, any guarantor of this Lease, or any subtenant (whether stock, partnership, interest or otherwise) is transferred, diluted, reduced, or otherwise affected with the result that the present holder or owners of Tenant, such guarantor, or such subtenant have less than a 50% interest in Tenant, such guarantor or such subtenant, or (b) if Tenant's obligations under this Lease are taken over or assumed in consideration of Tenant leasing space in another office building. The transfer of the outstanding capital stock of any corporate Tenant, guarantor or subtenant through the "over-the-counter" market or any recognized national securities exchange (other than by persons owning 5% or more of the voting calculation of such 50% interest of clause 8.2(a) above) shall not be included in the calculation of such 50% interest in clause (a) above.
8.3 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Section 8.1, Tenant shall have the right, upon notice to Landlord, to (a) sublet all or part of the Premises to any related corporation or other entity which controls Tenant, is controlled by Tenant or is under common control with Tenant; or (b) assign this Lease to a successor corporation into which or with which Tenant is merged or consolidated or which acquired substantially all of Tenant's assets and property; provided that (i) such successor corporation assumes substantially all of the obligations and liabilities of Tenant and shall have assets, capitalization and net worth at least sufficient to perform the obligations of Tenant under this Lease, accounting for the obligations assumed by such successor in such transaction, and (ii) Tenant shall provide in its notice to Landlord the information required in Section 8.4. No such transaction shall operate to release Tenant from any liability under this Lease. For the purpose hereof "control" shall mean ownership of not less than 50% of all the voting stock or legal and equitable interest in such corporation or entity.
8.4 If Tenant should desire to assign this Lease or sublet the Premises (or any part thereof), Tenant shall give Landlord written notice no later than the time required for notice under Section 8.3 in the case of an assignment or subletting, or thirty (30) days in advance of the proposed effective date of any other proposed assignment or sublease, specifying (a) the name, current address, and business of the proposed assignee or sublessee, {b) the amount "and
location of the space within the Premises proposed to be so subleased, (c) the proposed effective date and duration of the assignment or subletting, and (d) the proposed rent or consideration to be paid to Tenant by such assignee or sublessee. Tenant shall promptly supply Landlord with financial statements and other information as Landlord may reasonably request to evaluate the proposed assignment or sublease. For assignments and sublettings other than those permitted by Section 8.3, Landlord shall have fifteen (15) days following receipt of such notice and other information requested by Landlord within which to notify Tenant in writing that Landlord elects: (i) to terminate this Lease as to the space so affected as of the proposed effective date set forth in Tenant's notice, in which event Tenant shall be relieved of all further obligations hereunder as to such space, except for obligations under Articles 17, 19 and 22 and all other provisions of this Lease which expressly survive the termination hereof; or (ii) to permit Tenant to assign or sublet such space; provided, however, that, if the rent rate agreed upon between Tenant and its proposed subtenant is greater than the rent rate that Tenant must pay Landlord hereunder for that portion of the Premises, or if any consideration shall be promised to or received by Tenant in connection with such proposed assignment or sublease (in addition to rent), then fifty percent (50%) of such excess rent and other consideration shall be considered Additional Rent owed by Tenant to Landlord (less brokerage commissions, attorneys' fees and other disbursements reasonably incurred by Tenant for such assignment and subletting if acceptable evidence of such disbursements is delivered to Landlord), and shall be paid by Tenant to Landlord in the case of excess rent, in the same manner that Tenant pays Base Rent and, in the case of any other consideration, within ten (10) Business Days after receipt thereof by Tenant; or (iii) to refuse, in Landlord's reasonable discretion, to consent to Tenant's assignment or subleasing of such space and to continue this Lease in full force and effect as to the entire Premises. Landlord cannot unreasonably withhold, condition or delay its consent, but the parties agree that Landlord may reasonably refuse to consent to an assignment or subletting if the proposed assignee or subtenant is not financially creditworthy, is a governmental authority or agency, an organization or person enjoying sovereign or diplomatic immunity, a medical or dental practice or a user that will attract a volume, frequency or type of visitor or employee to the Building which is not consistent with the standards of a high quality office building or that will impose an excessive demand on or use of the facilities or services of the Building. It shall also be reasonable for Landlord to refuse to consent to any assignment or subletting if (x) Tenant is then in default under this Lease, or (y) such assignment of subletting would cause a default under another lease in the Building or under any ground lease, deed of trust, mortgage, restrictive ,covenant, easement or other encumbrance affecting the Project. If Landlord should fail to notify Tenant in writing of such election within the aforesaid fifteen (15) day period, Landlord shall be deemed to have elected option (iii) above. Tenant agrees to reimburse Landlord for reasonable legal fees and any other reasonable costs incurred by Landlord in connection with any permitted assignment or subletting and such payment shall not be deducted from the Additional Rent owed to Landlord pursuant to subsection (ii) above. Tenant shall deliver to Landlord copies of all documents executed in connection with any permitted assignment or subletting, which documents shall be in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to Landlord and which shall require any assignee to assume performance of all terms of this Lease to be performed by Tenant or any subtenant to comply with all the terms of this Lease to be performed by Tenant. No acceptance by Landlord of any Rent or any other sum of money from any assignee, sublessee or other category of transferee shall be deemed to constitute Landlord's consent to any assignment, sublease, or transfer.
8.5 Any attempted assignment or sublease by Tenant in violation of the terms and provisions of this Article 8 shall be void and shall constitute a material breach of this Lease. In no event, shall any assignment, subletting or transfer, whether or not with Landlord's consent, relieve Tenant of its primary liability under this Lease for the entire Term, and Tenant shall in no way be released from the full and complete performance of all the terms hereof. If Landlord takes possession of the Premises before the expiration of the Term of this Lease, Landlord shall have the right, at its option, to terminate all subleases, or to take over any sublease of the Premises or any portion thereof and such subtenant shall attorn to Landlord, as its landlord, under all the terms and obligations of such sublease occurring from and after such date, but excluding previous acts, omissions, negligence, or defaults of Tenant and any repair or obligation in excess of available net insurance proceeds or condemnation award.
8.6 A. Tenant acknowledges that this Lease is a lease of nonresidential real property and therefore agrees that Tenant, as the debtor in possession, or the trustee for Tenant (collectively the "Trustee") in any proceeding under Title 11 of the United State Bankruptcy Code relating to Bankruptcy, as amended (the "Bankruptcy Code"), shall not seek or request any extension of time to assume or reject this Lease or to perform any obligations of this Lease which arise from or after the order of relief.
B. The Trustee shall have the right to assume or assign Tenant's rights and obligations under this Lease only if the Trustee: (a) promptly cures or provides adequate assurance that the Trustee will promptly cure any default under the Lease; (b) compensates or provides adequate assurance that the Trustee will promptly compensate Landlord for any actual pecuniary loss incurred by Landlord as a result of Tenant's default under this Lease; and (c) provides adequate assurance of future performance under the Lease. All payments of Rent required of Tenant under this Lease, whether or not expressly denominated as such in this Lease, shall constitute rent for the purposes of Title 11 of the Bankruptcy Code.
8.7 The term "Landlord," as used in this Lease, so far as covenants or obligations on the part of Landlord are concerned, shall be limited to mean and include only the owner or owners, at the time in question, of the fee title to, or a lessee's interest in a ground lease of, the Land or the Building. In the event of any transfer, assignment or other conveyance or transfers of any such title or interest, Landlord herein named (and in case of any subsequent transfers or conveyances, the then grantor) shall be automatically freed and relieved from and after the date of such transfer, assignment or conveyance of all liability as respects the performance of any covenants or obligations on the part of Landlord contained in this Lease thereafter to be performed and, without further agreement, the transferee of such title or interest shall be deemed to have assumed and agreed to observe and perform any and all obligations of Landlord hereunder, during its ownership of the Project. Landlord may transfer its interest in the Project without the consent of Tenant and such transfer or subsequent transfer shall not be deemed a violation on Landlord's part of any of the terms of this Lease.
ARTICLE IX
REPAIRS
9.1 Landlord agrees to repair and maintain the structural portions of the Building and the plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning and electrical systems installed or furnished
by Landlord, unless such maintenance and repairs are (i) attributable to items installed in the Premises by Tenant or which are above standard interior improvements (such as, for example, custom lighting, special HVAC and/or electrical panels or systems, kitchen or restroom facilities and appliances constructed or installed within the Premises) or (ii) caused by the negligence or willful misconduct or gross negligence of Tenant or its agents, contractors, invitees and licensees, in which case Tenant will pay to Landlord, as additional rent, the cost of such maintenance and repair plus a fee equal to ten percent (10%) of the actual costs to cover overhead and a fee for Landlord's agent or manager. Amounts payable by Tenant pursuant to this Section 9.1 shall be payable on demand after receipt of an invoice therefor from Landlord. Landlord has no obligation and has made no promise to maintain, alter, remodel, improve, repair, decorate, or paint the Premises or any part thereof, except as specifically set forth in this Lease. In no event shall Landlord have any obligation to maintain, repair or replace any furniture, furnishings, fixtures or personal property of Tenant. Tenant hereby waives the provisions of California Civil Code Sections 1932(1), 1941 and 1942 and of any similar law, statute or ordinance now or hereafter in effect.
9.2 Tenant shall keep the Premises (including the Leasehold Improvements) in good order and in a safe, neat and clean condition, and, when and if needed, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, shall make all repairs to the Premises and every part thereof. No representations respecting the condition of the Premises or the Building or the other portions of the Project have been made by Landlord to Tenant except as specifically set forth in this Lease. In the event Tenant fails to promptly commence and diligently pursue the performance of such maintenance or the making of such repairs or replacements, then Landlord, at its option, may perform such maintenance or make such repairs and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord, on demand after Tenant receives an invoice therefor, the cost thereof plus a fee equal to fifteen percent (15%) of the actual costs to cover overhead and a fee for Landlord's agent or manager.
9.3 All repairs made by Tenant pursuant to Section 9.2 shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner by contractors or other repair personnel selected by Tenant from an approved list of contractors and repair personnel maintained by Landlord in the Project's management office; provided, however, that neither Tenant nor its contractors or repair personnel shall be permitted to do any work affecting the Central Systems. In no event shall such work be done for Landlord's account or in a manner which allows any liens to be filed in violation of Article 11. To the extent any repairs involve the making of alterations to the Premises, Tenant shall comply with the provisions of Article 10.
9.4 Subject to the other provisions of this Lease imposing obligations regarding repair upon Tenant, Landlord shall repair all machinery and equipment necessary to provide the services of Landlord described in Article 7 (provided that Tenant shall pay the costs of any repair to such systems or any part thereof damaged by Tenant and Tenant's employees, customers, clients, agents, licensees and invitees) and for repair of all portions of the Project which do not comprise a part of the Premises and are not leased to others.
ARTICLE X
ALTERATIONS
10.1 Tenant shall not at any time during the Term make any alterations to the Premises without first obtaining Landlord's written consent thereto, which consent Landlord shall not reasonably withhold or delay; provided, however, that Landlord shall not be deemed unreasonable by refusing to consent to any alterations which are visible from the exterior of the Building or the Project, which will or are likely to cause any weakening of any part of the structure of the Premises, the Building or the Project or which will or are likely to cause damage or disruption to the Central Systems or which are prohibited by any underlying ground lease or mortgage. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Landlord's prior approval will not be required for any cosmetic, alterations to the interior of the Premises which are not visible from the exterior of the Premises which are either cosmetic in nature (such as floor or wall coverings) or are nonstructural in nature and do not affect any Central Systems and cost less than Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000), provided Landlord receives prior notice thereof and the other conditions set forth in this Article X are satisfied. Should Tenant desire to make any alterations to the Premises, Tenant shall submit all plans and specifications for such proposed alterations to Landlord for Landlord's review before Tenant allows any such work to commence, and Landlord shall promptly approve or disapprove such plans and specifications for any of the reasons set forth in this Section 10.1 or for any other reason reasonably deemed sufficient by Landlord. Tenant shall select and use only contractors, subcontractors or other repair personnel from those listed on Landlord's approved list maintained by Landlord in the Project management office. Upon Tenant's receipt of written approval from Landlord, and upon Tenant's payment to Landlord of a reasonable fee prescribed by Landlord for the work of Landlord and Landlord's employees and representatives in reviewing and approving such plans and specifications, Tenant shall have the right to proceed with the construction of all approved alterations, but only so long as such alterations are in strict compliance with the plans and specifications so approved by Landlord and with the provisions of this Article 10. All alterations shall be made at Tenant's sole cost and expense, either by Tenant's contractors or, at Tenant's option, by Landlord on terms reasonably satisfactory to Tenant, including a fee of ten percent (10%) of the actual costs of such work to cover Landlord's overhead and a fee for Landlord's agent or manager in supervising and coordinating such work. In no event, however, shall anyone other than Landlord or Landlord's employees or representatives perform work to be done which affects the Central Systems.
10.2 All construction, alterations and repair work done by or for Tenant shall (a) be performed in such a manner as to maintain harmonious labor relations; (b) not adversely affect the safety of the Project, the Building or the Premises or the systems thereof and not affect the Central Systems; (c) comply with all building, safety, fire, plumbing, electrical, and other codes and governmental and insurance requirements; (d) not result in any usage in excess of Building Standard of water; electricity, gas, or other utilities or of heating, ventilating or air-conditioning (either during or after such work) unless prior written arrangements satisfactory to Landlord are made with respect thereto; (e) be completed promptly and in a good and workmanlike manner and in compliance with all rules and regulations promulgated by Landlord; and (f) not disturb Landlord or other tenants in the Building. After completion of any alterations to the Premises, Tenant will deliver to Landlord a copy of "as built" plans and specifications depicting and describing such alterations.
10.3 All Leasehold Improvements, alterations and other physical additions made to or installed by or for Tenant in the Premises shall be and remain Landlord's property (except for Tenant's furniture, personal property and movable trade fixtures) and shall not be removed without Landlord's written consent; provided, however, Landlord may, by notice to Tenant given concurrently with Landlord's approval of any alterations or physical additions made to the Premises after the Commencement Date, elect to require Tenant to remove same upon the expiration or earlier termination of the Term of this Lease. Tenant agrees to remove, at its sole cost and expense, all of Tenant's furniture, personal property and movable trade fixtures, and, if directed to or permitted to do so by Landlord in writing, all, or any part of, the alterations and other physical additions made by Tenant to the Premises, on or before the Expiration Date or any earlier date of termination of this Lease. Tenant shall repair, or promptly reimburse Landlord for the cost of repairing, all damage done to the Premises or the Building by such removal. Any alterations or physical additions made by Tenant which Landlord does not direct or permit Tenant to remove at any time during or at the end of the Term shall become the property of Landlord at the end of the Term without any payment to Tenant. Landlord reserves the right to require Tenant to remove any alterations or physical additions made by Tenant to which Landlord did not expressly consent. If Tenant fails to remove any of Tenant's furniture, personal property or movable trade fixtures by the Expiration Date or any sooner date of termination of the Lease or, if Tenant fails to remove any alterations and other physical additions made by Tenant to the Premises which Landlord has in writing directed Tenant to remove, Landlord shall have the right, on the fifth (5th) day after Landlord's delivery of written notice to Tenant to deem such property abandoned by Tenant and to remove, store, sell, discard or otherwise deal with or dispose of such abandoned property in a commercially reasonable manner. Tenant shall be liable for all costs of such disposition of Tenant's abandoned property, and Landlord shall have no liability to Tenant in any respect regarding such property of Tenant. The provisions of this Section 10.3 shall survive the expiration or any earlier termination of this Lease.
ARTICLE XI
LIENS
11.1 Tenant shall keep the Project, the Building and the Premises and
Landlord's interest therein from any liens arising from any work performed,
materials furnished, or obligations incurred by, or on behalf of Tenant (other
than by Landlord pursuant to Exhibit "C"). Notice is hereby given that neither
Landlord nor any mortgagee or Lessor of Landlord shall be liable for any labor
or materials furnished to Tenant except as furnished to Tenant by Landlord
pursuant to Exhibit "C". If any lien is filed for such work or materials, such
lien shall encumber only Tenant's interest in leasehold improvements on the
Premises. Within ten (10) days after Tenant learns of the filing of any such
lien, Tenant shall notify Landlord of such lien and shall either discharge and
cancel such lien of record or post a bond sufficient under the laws of the State
of California to cover the amount of the lien claim plus any penalties,
interest, attorneys' fees, court costs, and other legal expenses in connection
with such lien. If Tenant fails to so discharge or bond such lien within ten
(10) calendar days after written demand from Landlord, Landlord shall have the
right, at Landlord's option, to pay the full amount of such lien without inquiry
into the validity thereof, and Landlord shall be promptly reimbursed by Tenant,
as Additional Rent, for all amounts so paid by Landlord, including expenses,
interest, and attorneys' fees.
ARTICLE XII
USE AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
12.1 The Premises shall be used only for executive and administrative
offices for the uses specifically set forth in Section 1.1Q and for no other
purposes whatsoever. Tenant shall use and maintain the Premises in a clean,
careful, safe, lawful and proper manner and shall not allow within the Premises,
any offensive noise, odor, conduct or private or public nuisance or permit
Tenant's employees, agents, licensees or invitees to create a public or private
nuisance or act in a disorderly manner within the Building or in the Project.
Any statement as to the particular nature of the business to be conducted by
Tenant in the Premises and uses to be made thereof by Tenant as set forth in
Section 1.1Q hereof shall not constitute a representation or warranty by
Landlord that such business or uses are lawful or permissible under any
certificate or occupancy for the Premises or the Building or are otherwise
permitted by law. Landlord does, however, represent that any certificate of
occupancy issued with respect to the Premises shall allow use for executive and
administrative offices.
12.2 Tenant shall, at Tenant's sole expense, (a) comply with all laws,
orders, ordinances, and regulations of federal, state, county, and municipal
authorities having jurisdiction over the Premises, (b) comply with any
directive, order or citation made pursuant to Law by any public officer
requiring abatement of any nuisance or which imposes upon Landlord or Tenant any
duty or obligation arising from Tenant's occupancy or use of the Premises or
from conditions which have been created by or at the request or insistence of
Tenant, or required by reason of a breach of any of Tenant's obligations
hereunder or by or through other fault of Tenant, (c) comply with all insurance
requirements applicable to the Premises and (d) indemnify and hold Landlord
harmless from any loss, cost, claim or expense which Landlord incurs or suffers
by reason of Tenant's failure to comply with its obligations under clauses (a),
(b) or (c) above. If Tenant receives notice of any such directive, order
citation or of any violation of any law, order, ordinance, regulation or any
insurance requirement, Tenant shall promptly notify Landlord in writing of such
alleged violation and furnish Landlord with a copy of such notice. Nothing
contained herein shall be interpreted to require Tenant to perform structural or
capital improvement work unless required due to Tenant's specific use of the
Premises as opposed to office use in general. Landlord shall be responsible for
compliance pursuant to subparagraphs (a), (b) and (c) above to the extent such
compliance relates to the Building or the Project (exclusive of the Premises),
which compliance costs shall be part of Operating Costs, subject to the terms of
Section 5.2A above. If Tenant receives notice of any such directive, order,
citation or of any violation of any law, order, ordinance, regulation or any
insurance requirement, Tenant shall promptly notify Landlord in writing of such
alleged violation and furnish Landlord with a copy of such notice.
12.3 After completion of the Leasehold Improvements in the Premises, Tenant shall be responsible for causing, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, the Premises to comply with the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990, as subsequently amended (then ADAM), and all similar federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations and subsequent amendments thereof. Landlord shall also be responsible for causing the initial Leasehold Improvements to comply with the requirements of the ADA then in effect. Landlord shall be responsible for causing, as and when deemed appropriate by Landlord, the Common Areas to comply with the ADA, the costs for which shall constitute a component of Operating Costs, except to the extent such costs
are incurred as a result of Tenant's specific use of the Premises, or as a result of any alterations to the Premises made by or on behalf of Tenant, in which case such costs will be the sole responsibility of Tenant.
ARTICLE XIII
DEFAULT AND REMEDIES
13.1 The occurrence of any one or more of the following events shall
constitute an Event of Default (herein so called) of Tenant under this Lease:
(a) if Tenant fails to pay any Rent hereunder as and when such Rent becomes due
and such failure shall continue for more than five (5) days after Landlord gives
Tenant notice of past due Rent; (b) if an Event of Default in Tenant's
obligation to pay Rent hereunder occurs more than twice in any period of twelve
(12) months; (c) if the Premises are abandoned; (d) if Tenant permits to be done
anything which creates a lien upon the Premises and fails to discharge or bond
such lien or post such security with Landlord as is required by Article 11; (e)
if Tenant violates the provisions of Article 8 by attempting to make an
unpermitted assignment or sublease; (f) if Tenant fails to maintain in force all
policies of insurance required by this Lease and such failure shall continue for
more than ten (10) days after Landlord gives Tenant notice of such failure; (g)
if any petition is filed by or against Tenant or any guarantor of this Lease
under any present or future Section or chapter of the Bankruptcy Code, or under
any similar law or statute of the United States or any state thereof (which, in
the case of an involuntary proceeding, is not permanently discharged, dismissed,
stayed, or vacated, as the case may be, within sixty (60) days of commencement),
or if any order for relief shall be entered against Tenant or any guarantor of
this Lease in any such proceedings; (h) if Tenant or any guarantor of this Lease
becomes insolvent or makes a transfer in fraud of creditors or makes an
assignment for the benefit of creditors; (i) if a receiver, custodian, or
trustee is appointed for the Premises or for all or substantially all of the
assets of Tenant or of any guarantor of this Lease, which appointment is not
vacated within sixty (60) days following the date of such appointment; or (j) if
Tenant fails to perform or observe any other terms of this Lease and such
failure shall continue for more than thirty (30) days after Landlord gives
Tenant notice of such failure, or, if such failure cannot be corrected within
such thirty (30) day period, if Tenant does not commence to correct such default
within said thirty (30) day period .and thereafter diligently prosecute the
correction of same to completion within a reasonable time and in any event prior
to the time a failure to complete such correction could cause Landlord to be
subject to prosecution for violation of any law, rule, ordinance or regulation
or causes, or could cause, a default under any mortgage, underlying lease,
tenant leases or other agreements applicable to the Project. The provisions of
any notice given pursuant to the foregoing will be in lieu of, and not in
addition to, any notice required under applicable law (including, without
limitation, California Code of Civil Procedure Section 1161 regarding unlawful
detainer actions and any successor statute or similar law).
13.2 If an Event of Default occurs, Landlord shall have the right at any time to give a written termination notice to Tenant and, on the date specified in such notice, Tenant's right to possession shall terminate and this Lease shall terminate. Upon such termination, Landlord shall have the right to recover from Tenant:
A. The worth at the time of award of all unpaid Base Rent and Additional Rent which had been earned at the time of termination;
B. The worth at the time of award of the amount by which all unpaid Base Rent and Additional Rent which would have been earned after termination until the time of award exceeds the amount of such rental loss that Tenant proves could have been reasonably avoided;
C. The worth at the time of award of the amount by which all unpaid Base Rent and Additional Rent for the balance of the term of this Lease after the time of award exceeds the amount of such rental loss that Tenant proves could be reasonably avoided; and
D. All other amounts necessary to compensate Landlord for all the detriment proximately caused by Tenant's failure to perform all of Tenant's obligations under this Lease or which in the ordinary course of things would be likely to result therefrom. The "worth at the time of award" of the amounts referred to in clauses (a) and (b) above shall be computed by allowing interest at the Interest Rate. The "worth at the time of award" of the amount referred to in clause (c) above shall be computed by discounting such amount at the discount rate of the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco at the time of award plus one percent (1%).
Notwithstanding the occurrence of an Event of Default, pursuant to California Civil Code Section 1951.4, or any successor statute thereof, Landlord may continue this Lease in effect after Tenant's breach and abandonment and recover all rent as it becomes due, if Tenant has the right to sublet or assign, subject only to reasonable restrictions. Acts of maintenance or preservation or efforts to relet the Premises or the appointment of a receiver upon initiative of Landlord to protect Landlord's interest under this Lease shall not constitute a termination of Tenant's right to possession unless written notice of termination is given by Landlord to Tenant. The remedies provided for in this Lease are in addition to all other remedies available to Landlord at law or in equity by statute or otherwise.
13.3 No agreement to accept a surrender of the Premises and no act or omission by Landlord or Landlord's agents during the Term shall constitute an acceptance or surrender of the Premises unless made in writing and signed by Landlord. No re-entry or taking possession of the Premises by Landlord shall constitute an election by Landlord to terminate this Lease unless a written notice of such intention is given to Tenant.
13.4 No provision of this Lease shall be deemed to have been waived by Landlord unless such waiver is in writing and signed by Landlord. Landlord's acceptance of Rent following an Event of Default hereunder shall not be construed as a waiver of such Event of Default. No custom or practice which may arise between the parties in connection with the terms of this Lease shall be construed to waive or lessen Landlord's right to insist upon strict performance of the terms of this Lease, without a written notice thereof to Tenant from Landlord.
13.5 The rights granted to Landlord in this Article 13 shall be cumulative of every other right or remedy provided in this Lease or which Landlord may otherwise have at law or in equity or by statute, and the exercise of one or more rights or remedies shall not prejudice or impair the concurrent or subsequent exercise of other rights or remedies or constitute a forfeiture or waiver of Rent or damages accruing to Landlord by reason of any Event of Default under this Lease. Tenant agrees to pay to Landlord all costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in the
enforcement of this Lease, including all attorneys' fees incurred in connection with the collection of any sums due hereunder or the enforcement of any right or remedy of Landlord.
13.6 Landlord win not be in default in the performance of any obligation required to be performed by Landlord under this Lease unless Landlord fails to perform such obligation within thirty (30) days after the receipt of written notice from Tenant specifying in detail Landlord's failure to perform; provided however, that if the nature of Landlord's obligation is such that more than thirty (30) days are required for performance, then Landlord will not be deemed in default if it commences such performance within such thirty (30) day period and thereafter diligently pursues the same to completion. Upon any default by Landlord, Tenant may exercise any of its rights provided at law or in equity, subject to the limitations on liability set forth in Section 25.5 of this Lease. Tenant shall also be entitled to its professional fees from Landlord to the extent Tenant is the prevailing party in any action against Landlord as provided in Section 25.1 hereof.
ARTICLE XIV
INSURANCE
14.1 A. Tenant, at its sole expense, shall obtain and keep in force during the Term the following insurance: (a) "All Risk" insurance insuring all property located in the Premises, including furniture, equipment, fittings, installations, fixtures, supplies and any other personal property, leasehold improvements and alterations, other than the Leasehold Improvements ("Tenant's Property"), in an amount equal to the full replacement value, it being understood that no lack or inadequacy of insurance by Tenant shall in any event make Landlord subject to any claim by virtue of any theft of or loss or damage to any uninsured or inadequately insured property; (b) Business Interruption insurance in an amount that will reimburse Tenant for direct or indirect loss of earnings attributable to all perils insured against under Section 14.1(a) or attributable to the prevention of access to the Premises by civil authority; and sufficient to reimburse Tenant for Rent in the event of a casualty to, or temporary taking of the Building or the Premises; (c) Commercial general public liability insurance including personal injury, bodily injury, broad form property damage, operations hazard, owner's protective coverage, contractual liability, with a cross liability clause and a severability of interests clause to cover Tenant's indemnities set forth herein, and products and completed operations liability, in limits not less than $2,000,000.00 inclusive per occurrence or such higher limits as Landlord may reasonably require from time to time during the Term; (d) Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability insurance, with a waiver of subrogation endorsement, in form and amount as required by applicable law for Worker's Compensation, and $1,000,000 per occurrence for Employer's Liability; and (e) any other form or forms of insurance or any changes or endorsements to the insurance required herein as Landlord, or any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord may reasonably require, from time to time, in form or in amount, and for insurance risks against which a prudent tenant would protect itself, but only to the extent coverage for such risks and amounts are available in the insurance market at commercially acceptable rates.
B. Tenant shall have the right to include the insurance required by Section l4.1A under Tenant's policies of "blanket insurance," provided that no other loss which may also be insured by such blanket insurance shall affect the insurance coverages required hereby and further provided that Tenant delivers to Landlord a certificate specifically stating that such
coverages apply to Landlord, the Premises and the Project. All policies of insurance required by Section 14.1A(c) shall name Landlord as additional insured and shall also name all mortgagees and lessors of Landlord, of which Tenant has been notified, additional insureds, all as their respective interest may appear. An such policies or certificates shall be issued by insurers reasonably acceptable to Landlord and in form satisfactory to Landlord. Tenant shall deliver to Landlord certificates with copies of policies, together with satisfactory evidence of payment of premiums for such policies, by the Commencement Date and, with respect to renewals of such policies, not later than thirty (30) days prior to the end of the expiring term of coverage. All policies of insurance shall be endorsed to be primary and noncontributory to any insurance which may be carried by Landlord. All such policies shall contain an agreement by the insurers that the insurers shall notify Landlord and any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord in writing, by certified mail, return receipt requested, not less than thirty (30) days before any material change, reduction in coverage, cancellation, including cancellation for nonpayment of premium, or other termination thereof or change therein and shall (with respect to the insurance required by clauses (a) and (b) of Section 14.1A) include a clause or endorsement denying the insurer any rights or subrogation against Landlord.
14.2 Landlord shall insure the Building and Leasehold Improvements against damage with property insurance and shall carry commercial general public liability insurance, all in such amounts and with such deductible as Landlord reasonably deems appropriate. Notwithstanding any contribution by Tenant to the cost of insurance premiums, as provided hereinabove, Landlord shall not be required to carry insurance of any kind on Tenant's Property, and Tenant hereby agrees that Tenant shall have no right to receive any proceeds from any insurance policies carried by Landlord.
14.3 Tenant shall not knowingly conduct or permit to be conducted in the Premises any activity, or place any equipment in or about the Premises or the Building, which will invalidate the insurance coverage in effect or increase the rate of insurance on the Premises or the Building, and Tenant shall comply with all requirements and regulations of Landlord's insurers. If any invalidation of coverage or increase in the rate of fire insurance or other insurance occurs or is threatened by any insurance company due to any act or omission by Tenant, or its agents, employees, representatives, or contractors, such statement or threat shall be conclusive evidence that the increase in such rate is due to such act of Tenant or the contents or equipment in or about the Premises, and, as a result thereof, Tenant shall be liable for such increase and shall be considered Additional Rent payable with the next monthly installment of Base Rent due under this Lease. In no event shall Tenant introduce or permit to be kept on the Premises or brought into the Building any dangerous, noxious, radioactive or explosive substance.
14.4 Landlord and Tenant each hereby waive any right of subrogation and right of recovery or cause of action for injury or loss to the extent that such injury or loss is covered by fire, extended coverage, "All Risk" or similar policies covering real property or personal property (or which would have been covered if Tenant or Landlord, as the case may be, was carrying the insurance required by this Lease). Said waivers shall be in addition to, and not in limitation or derogation of, any other waiver or release contained in this Lease. Insurance policies shall be properly endorsed, if necessary, to prevent the invalidation of said policies by reason of such waivers.
ARTICLE XV
DAMAGE BY FIRE OR OTHER CAUSE
15.1 Within sixty (60) days after the date Landlord learns of the necessity for repairs as a result of a casualty, Landlord shall notify Tenant ("Damage Repair Estimate") of Landlord's estimated assessment of the period of time in which the repairs will be completed, which assessment shall be based upon the opinion of a contractor reasonably selected by Landlord and experienced in comparable repairs of comparable buildings. If the Premises or the Building or any portion thereof (exclusive of the Premises) is damaged or destroyed by any casualty to the extent that, in Landlord's reasonable judgment, (a) repair of such damage or destruction would not be economically feasible, or (b) the damage or destruction to the Building and/or the Premises cannot be repaired within one hundred eighty (180) days after the date Landlord learns (if the necessity for repairs as a result of such damage or destruction, or if the proceeds from insurance remaining after any required payment to any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord are insufficient to repair such damage or destruction, Landlord shall have the right, at Landlord's option, to terminate this Lease (provided Landlord terminates, with respect to a damage or destruction to the Building only, the leases of all of the other tenants of the Building similarly situated) by giving Tenant notice of such termination, within sixty (60) days after the date Landlord learns of the necessity for repairs as a result of such damage or destruction.
15.2 If Landlord does not elect to terminate this Lease pursuant to Landlord's termination right as provided above, and the Damage Repair Estimate indicates that repairs cannot be completed within one hundred eighty (180) days after being commenced, Tenant may elect, not later than thirty (30) days after Tenant's receipt of the Damage Repair Estimate, to terminate this Lease by written notice to Landlord effective as of the date specified in Tenant's notice.
15.3 In the event of partial destruction or damage to the Building or
the Premises which is not subject to Section 15.1 or 15.2, but which renders the
Premises partially but not wholly untenantable, this Lease shall not terminate
and Rent shall be abated in proportion to the area of the Premises which cannot
be used or occupied by Tenant as a result of such casualty. Landlord shall in
such event, within a reasonable time after the date of such destruction or
damage, subject to force majeure (as defined in Section 25.6) or to Tenant Delay
and to the extent and availability of insurance proceeds, restore the Premises
to as near the same condition as existed prior to such partial damage or
destruction. If Landlord fails to proceed with reasonable diligence to rebuild
the Premises, or if the Premises are not repaired or rebuilt within one hundred
eighty (180) days, for a reason other than force majeure or Tenant Delays, then
Tenant may, at Tenant's sole option, elect to terminate this Lease upon thirty
(30) days written notice to Landlord, unless Landlord cures the failure within
such thirty (30) day period of time, in which case Tenant's termination notice
shall be of no effect. In no event shall Rent abate (except to the extent
Landlord recovers insurance therefor) or shall any termination by Tenant occur
if damage to or destruction of the Premises is the result of the negligence or
willful act of Tenant, or Tenant's agents, employees, representatives,
contractors, successors, assigns, licensees or invitees.
15.4 If any material portion of the Premises is destroyed by fire or other causes at any time during the last year of the Term, such that the Premises or a material portion thereof cannot
be occupied for in excess of thirty (30) days as a result thereof, then either Landlord or Tenant shall have the right, at the option of either party, to terminate this Lease by giving written notice to the other within fifteen (15) days after the date of such destruction.
15.5 Landlord shall have no liability to Tenant for inconvenience, loss of business, or annoyance arising from any repair of any portion of the Premises or the Building, provided that Landlord shall use good faith efforts to minimize such inconvenience, loss or annoyance. Tenant hereby waives California Civil Code Sections 1932(2) and 1933(4), providing for termination of hiring upon destruction of the thing hired and Sections 1941 and 1942, providing for repairs to and of the Premises.
15.6 In the event of termination of this Lease pursuant to Sections 15.1, 15.2 or 15.4, all Rent shall be apportioned and paid to the date on which possession is relinquished or the date of such damage, whichever last occurs, and Tenant shall immediately vacate the Premises according to such notice of termination: provided, however, that those provisions of this Lease which are designated to cover matters of termination and the period thereafter shall survive the termination hereof.
ARTICLE XVI
CONDEMNATION
16.1 In the event the whole or substantially the whole of the Building or the Premises are taken or condemned by eminent domain or by any conveyance in lieu thereof (such taking, condemnation or conveyance in lieu thereof being hereinafter referred to as "condemnation"), this Lease shall terminate on the earlier of the date the condemning authority takes possession or the date title vests in the condemning authority.
16.2 In the event any portion of the Building shall be taken by condemnation (whether or not such taking includes any portion of the Premises), which taking, in Landlord's judgment, is such that the Building cannot be restored in an economically feasible manner for use substantially as originally designed, then Landlord shall have the right, at Landlord's option, to terminate this Lease (provided Landlord also terminates the leases of the other tenants of the Building similarly situated), effective as of the date specified by Landlord (at least sixty (60) days in the future) in a written notice of termination from Landlord to Tenant.
16.3 In the event any portion of the Parking Facility shall be taken by condemnation, which taking in Landlord's judgment is such that the Parking Facility cannot be restored in an economically feasible manner for use substantially as originally designed, including in such consideration the possible use of additional Parking Facility in the vicinity of the Building, then Landlord shall have the right, at Landlord's option, to terminate this Lease (provided Landlord also terminates the leases of the other tenants of the Building similarly situated), effective as of the date specified by Landlord (at least sixty (60) days in the future) in a written notice of termination from Landlord to Tenant. In addition, Tenant shall have the right to terminate this Lease if twenty-five percent (25%) or more of the parking spaces in the Parking Facility is taken and Landlord does not provide reasonably suitable alternative parking within walking distance from the Building.
16.4 In the event that a portion, but less than substantially the whole, of the Premises shall be taken by condemnation, then this Lease shall be terminated as of the date of such condemnation as to the portion of the Premises so taken, and unless Landlord exercises its option to terminate this Lease pursuant to Section 16.2 or Tenant exercises its option to terminate this Lease pursuant to this Section 16.4 below, this Lease shall remain in full force and effect as to the remainder of the Premises. If (i) more than ten percent (10%) of the Net Rentable Area of the Premises shall be taken by condemnation and such condemnation renders the Premises unusable for the business of Tenant, as reasonably determined by Tenant, or (ii) a substantial portion of the Building or the Parking Facility is taken by condemnation rendering the Premises unusable for the business of Tenant, as reasonably determined by Tenant, or (iii) all or any portion of the Premises is taken by condemnation for a period in excess of sixty (60) days, then in any such event Tenant may elect to terminate this Lease as of the date specified by Tenant in a written notice of termination from Tenant to Landlord, which date shall not be later than sixty (60) days following the date of the taking. If such condemnation is not sufficiently extensive to render the Premises unusable for the business of Tenant as reasonably determined by Tenant, and Landlord has not elected to terminate this Lease in accordance with the provisions of Section 16.2, 16.3 or this Section 16.4, then Landlord shall promptly restore the Premises to a condition comparable to its condition immediately prior to such condemnation (excluding Tenant's alterations, furniture, fixtures and equipment), less the portion thereof lost in such condemnation, and this Lease shall continue in full force and effect, except that after the date of any such taking of the Premises, the Rent shall be equitably apportioned from and after such date.
16.5 In the event of termination of this Lease pursuant to the provisions of Section 16.1, 16.2, or 16.3, the Rent shall be apportioned as of such date of termination; provided, however, that those provisions of this Lease which are designated to cover matters of termination and the period thereafter shall survive the termination hereof.
16.6 All compensation awarded or paid upon a condemnation of any portion of the Project shall belong to and be the property of Landlord without participation by Tenant. Nothing herein shall be construed, however, to preclude Tenant from prosecuting any claim directly against the condemning authority for loss of business, loss of good will, moving expenses, damage to, and cost of removal of, trade fixtures, furniture and other personal property belonging to Tenant.
16.7 If any portion of the Project other than the Building or the
Parking Facility is taken by condemnation, or if the temporary use or occupancy
of all or any part of the Premises shall be taken by condemnation during the
Term for a period of less than sixty (60) days, this Lease shall, subject to
Section 16.4 above, be and remain unaffected by such condemnation, and Tenant
shall continue to pay in full the Rent payable hereunder. In the event of any
such temporary taking for use or occupancy of all or any part of the Premises,
Tenant shall be entitled to appear, claim, prove and receive the portion of the
award for such taking that represents compensation for use or occupancy of the
Premises during the Term and Landlord shall be entitled to appear, claim, prove
and receive the portion of the award that represents the cost of restoration of
the Premises and the use or occupancy of the Premises after the end of the Term
hereof. In the event of any such condemnation of any portion of the Project
other than the Building, Landlord shall be entitled to appear, claim, prove and
receive all of that award. In the event of any permanent taking of the Premises,
Tenant will have the right to recover from the
condemning authority (but not from Landlord) any compensation as may be separately awarded or recoverable by Tenant for the taking of Tenant's furniture, fixtures, equipment and other personal property within the Premises, for Tenant relocation expenses, and for any loss of good will or other damage to Tenant's business by reason of such taking, but Tenant will not be entitled to any so-called bonus or excess value of this Lease, which will be the sole property of Landlord.
16.8 Landlord and Tenant each hereby waive the provisions of California Code of Civil Procedure Section 1265.130 and any other applicable existing or future law, ordinance or governmental regulation providing for, or allowing either party to petition the courts of the state in which the Project is located for, a termination of this Lease upon a partial taking of the Premises and/or the Building.
ARTICLE XVII
INDEMNIFICATION
17.1 Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Article XVII, Tenant shall, and hereby agrees to, indemnify, defend and hold Landlord harmless from any Claims (as such term is defined below) arising from the use or occupancy of the Common Areas and the Premises by Tenant or any Tenant Party (as such term is defined below). Notwithstanding the foregoing, Tenant shall not be required to indemnify, defend, and/or hold Landlord harmless from any Claims to the extent any such Claim results from the negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord or any Landlord Party (as such term is defined below). Additionally, without limiting the foregoing, because Landlord maintains insurance on the Building and the Leasehold Improvements pursuant to Section 14.2 of this Lease, and because Tenant compensates Landlord for such insurance as part of Tenant's Share of Operating Costs, and because of the existence of waivers of subrogation set forth in Section 14.4 of this Lease, the foregoing obligation of Tenant to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Landlord shall not apply to any Claims pertaining to loss or damage to any property to the extent such Claim is covered by such insurance required to be carried by Landlord under this Lease, even if such Claim results in whole or in part from the negligent acts, omissions/or willful misconduct of Tenant or any Tenant Party. If Landlord is made a party to any litigation commenced by or against Tenant pertaining to any Claim caused or alleged to have been caused by Tenant or any Tenant Party for which Tenant is obligated pursuant to the foregoing to indemnify Landlord, and provided that in any such litigation Landlord or a Landlord Party is not finally adjudicated to be at fault, then Tenant shall pay all costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees and court costs, incurred by or imposed upon Landlord because of any such litigation, and the amount of all such costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees and court costs, shall be a demand obligation owing by Tenant to Landlord.
17.2 Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Article XVII, Landlord shall, and hereby agrees to, indemnify, defend, and hold harmless Tenant from any Claims which result from the negligent or willful misconduct of Landlord or any Landlord Party. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Landlord shall not be required to indemnify, defend, and/or hold Tenant harmless from any Claims to the extent any such Claim results from the negligence or willful misconduct of Tenant or any Tenant Party. Without limiting the foregoing, Landlord shall not be liable for any Claims caused by other tenants or persons in the Building or by occupants of adjacent property thereto, or by the public, or caused by construction (except if such construction is
carried out by or under the direction of Landlord or any Landlord Party), or by any private, public, or quasi-public work. Additionally, without limiting the foregoing, because Tenant is required to carry insurance covering Tenant's Property pursuant to Section 14.1 of this Lease, and because of the existence of waivers of subrogation set forth in Section 14.4 of this Lease, the foregoing obligation of Landlord to indemnify, defend, and hold harmless Tenant shall not apply to any Claims pertaining to loss or damage to any of Tenant's Property to the extent such Claim is covered by such insurance required to be carried by Tenant under this Lease, even if such Claim results in whole or in part from the negligent acts, omissions, or willful misconduct of Landlord or any Landlord Party. If Tenant is made a party to any litigation commenced by or against Landlord pertaining to any Claim caused or alleged to have been caused by Landlord or any Landlord Party for which Landlord is obligated pursuant to the foregoing to indemnify Tenant, and provided that in any such litigation Tenant or a Tenant Party is not finally adjudicated to be at fault, then Landlord shall pay all costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees and court costs, incurred by or imposed upon Tenant because of any such litigation, and the amount of all such costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees and court costs, shall be a demand obligation owing by Landlord to Tenant.
17.3 For purposes of this Article XVII: "Claims" shall mean and refer to any damage to any property or injury to, or death of, any person, including, without limitation, attorneys' fees and costs; "Landlord Party" and "Tenant Party," respectively, shall mean and refer to Landlord and Tenant, and their respective agents, employees, representatives, contractors, successors, assigns, and licensees. The provisions of this Article XVII shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease with respect to any Claims arising before such expiration or termination.
ARTICLE XVIII
SUBORDINATION AND ESTOPPEL CERTIFICATES
18.1 This Lease and all rights of Tenant hereunder are subject and
subordinate to all underlying leases now or hereafter in existence, and to any
supplements, amendments, modifications, and extensions of such leases heretofore
or hereafter made and to any deeds to secure debt, mortgages, or other security
instruments which now or hereafter cover all or any portion of the Project or
any interest of Landlord therein, and to any advances made on the security
thereof, and to any increases, renewals, modifications, consolidations,
replacements, and extensions of any of such mortgages. Except as expressly
provided in this Section 18.1 below, this provision is declared by Landlord and
Tenant to be self-operative and no further instrument shall be required to
effect such subordination of this Lease. Upon demand, however, Tenant shall
execute, acknowledge, and deliver to Landlord any further instruments and
certificates evidencing such subordination as Landlord, and any mortgagee or
lessor of Landlord shall reasonably require, and if Tenant fails to so execute,
acknowledge and deliver such Instruments within ten (10) days after Landlord's
request, Tenant shall be in default of this Lease. Tenant shall not unreasonably
withhold, delay, or defer its written consent reasonable modifications in this
Lease which are a condition of any construction, interim or permanent financing
for the Project or any reciprocal easement agreement with facilities in the
vicinity of the Building, provided that such modifications do not increase the
obligations of Tenant hereunder or materially and adversely affect Tenant's use
and enjoyment of the Premises. This Lease is further subject and subordinate to:
(a) all applicable ordinances of any government authority
having jurisdiction over the Project, relating to easements, franchises, and other interests or rights upon, across, or appurtenant to the Project; and (b) all utility easements and agreements, now or hereafter created for the benefit of the Project. Notwithstanding anything above to the contrary, Landlord agrees to provide Tenant with commercially reasonable non-disturbance agreement(s) in favor of Tenant from any ground lessors, mortgage holders and deed of trust beneficiaries of Landlord acquiring an interest in the Building or the underlying land after the date of this Lease until the expiration of the Term of this Lease in consideration of, and as an express condition precedent to, any subordination of the Lease provided hereunder. Further, Landlord agrees to use commercially reasonable efforts to provide to Tenant, within ninety (90) days after the date hereof, the Subordination, Non-Disturbance and Attornment Agreement substantially in the form of Exhibit "F" attached hereto and made a part hereof, in recordable form, fully executed by any ground lessors, mortgage holders and deed of trust beneficiaries in existence as of the date hereof, which Subordination, Non-Disturbance and Attornment Agreement Tenant shall execute and deliver to Landlord within ten (10) days of Tenant's receipt thereof.
18.2 Notwithstanding the generality of the foregoing provisions of
Section 18.1, any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord shall have the right at any
time to subordinate any such mortgage or underlying lease to this Lease, or to
any of the provisions hereof, on such terms and subject to such conditions as
such mortgagee or lessor of Landlord may consider appropriate in its discretion.
At any time, before or after the institution of any proceedings for the
foreclosure of any such mortgage, or the sale of the Building under any such
mortgage, or the termination of any underlying lease, Tenant shall, upon request
of such mortgagee or any person or entities succeeding to the interest of such
mortgagee or the purchaser at any foreclosure sale ("Successor Landlord"),
automatically become the Tenant (or if the Premises has been validly subleased,
the subtenant) of the Successor Landlord, without change in the terms or other
provisions of this Lease (or, in the case of a permitted sublease, without
change in this Lease or in the instrument setting forth the terms of such
sublease); provided, however, that the Successor Landlord shall not be (i) bound
by any payment made by Tenant of Rent or Additional Rent for more than one (1)
month in advance, except for a Security Deposit previously paid to Landlord (and
then only if such Security Deposit has been deposited with and is under the
control of the Successor Landlord), (ii) bound by any termination, modification,
amendment or surrender of the Lease done without the Successor Landlord's
consent, (iii) liable for any damages or subject to any offset or defense by
Tenant to the payment of Rent by reason of any act or omission of any prior
landlord (including Landlord), or (iv) personally or corporately liable, in any
event, beyond the limitations on liability set forth in Section 25.5 of this
Lease. This agreement of Tenant to attorn to a Successor Landlord shall survive
any such foreclosure sale, trustee's sale conveyance in lieu thereof or
termination of any underlying lease. Tenant shall upon demand at any time,
before or after any such foreclosure or termination execute, acknowledge, and
deliver to the Successor Landlord any written instruments and certificates
evidencing such attornment as such Successor Landlord may reasonably require;
provided, however, that Landlord shall use its reasonable efforts to require
that such agreement provide that upon such attornment, as long as Tenant is not
in default hereunder, Tenant's possession of the Premises under this Lease shall
not be disturbed.
18.3 Tenant shall, from time to time, within ten (10) days after request from Landlord, or from any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord, execute, acknowledge and deliver in recordable form a certificate certifying, to the extent true, that this Lease is in full force and effect and
unmodified (or, if there have been modifications, that the same is in full force and effect as modified and stating the modifications); that the Term has commenced and the full amount of the Rent then accruing hereunder; the dates to which the Rent has been paid; that Tenant has accepted possession of the Premises and that any improvements required by the terms of this Lease to be made by Landlord have been completed to the satisfaction of Tenant; the amount, if any, that Tenant has paid to Landlord as a Security Deposit; that no Rent under this Lease has been paid more than thirty (30) days in advance of its due date; that the address for notices to be sent to Tenant is as set forth in this Lease (or has been changed by notice duly given and is as set forth in the certificate); that Tenant, as of the date of such certificate, has no charge, lien, or claim of offset under this Lease or otherwise against Rent or other charges due or to become due hereunder; that, to the knowledge of Tenant, Landlord is not then in default under this Lease; and such other matters as may be requested by Landlord or any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord. Any such certificate may be relied upon by Landlord, any Successor Landlord, or any mortgagee or lessor of Landlord.
ARTICLE XIX
SURRENDER OF THE PREMISES
19.1 Upon the Expiration Date or earlier termination of this Lease, or upon any re-entry of the Premises by Landlord in accordance with this Lease without terminating this Lease pursuant to Section 13.2, Tenant, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, shall peacefully vacate and surrender the Premises to Landlord in good order, broom clean and in the same condition as at the beginning of the Term or as the Premises may thereafter have been improved by Landlord or Tenant (subject to Section 10.3 hereof), reasonable use and wear thereof and repairs which are Landlord's obligations under Articles 9, 15 and l6 only excepted, and Tenant shall remove all of Tenant's Property and turn over all keys for the Premises to Landlord. No provision of this Lease shall impose upon Landlord any obligation to care for or preserve any of Tenant's Property left upon the Premises, and Tenant hereby waives and releases Landlord from any claim or liability in connection with the removal of such property from the Premises and the storage thereof and specifically waives the provisions of California Civil Code Section 1542 with respect to such release. Should Tenant continue to hold the Premises after the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease, such holding over, unless otherwise agreed to by Landlord in writing, shall constitute and be construed as a tenancy at sufferance at monthly installments of Rent equal to one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the monthly portion of Rent in effect as of the date of expiration or earlier termination, and subject to all of the other terms, charges and expenses set forth herein except any right to renew this Lease or to expand the Premises or any right to additional services. Tenant shall also be liable to Landlord for all damage which Landlord suffers because of any holding over by Tenant, and Tenant shall indemnify Landlord against all claims made by any other tenant or prospective tenant against Landlord resulting from delay by Landlord in delivering possession of the Premises to such other tenant or prospective tenant. The provisions of this Article 19 shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease.
ARTICLE XX
LANDLORD'S RIGHT TO INSPECT
20.1 Landlord shall retain duplicate keys to all doors of the Premises. Tenant shall provide Landlord with new keys should Tenant receive Landlord's consent to change the locks.
Landlord shall have the right to enter the Premises to provide janitorial service as required under this Lease and other times at reasonable hours following reasonable prior notice (or, in the event of an emergency, at any hour) (a) to exhibit the same to present to prospective mortgagees, lessors or purchasers during the Term and to prospective tenants during the last year of the Term, (b) to inspect the Premises, (c) to confirm that Tenant is complying with all of Tenant's covenants and obligations under this Lease, (d) to make repairs required of Landlord under the terms of this Lease, (e) to make repairs to areas adjoining the Premises, and (f) to repair and service utility lines or other components of the Building; provided, however, Landlord shall use reasonable efforts to minimize interference with Tenant's business.
ARTICLE XXI
SECURITY DEPOSIT
21.1 Tenant's Security Deposit shall be held by Landlord, without liability for interest except to the extent required by law, as security for the performance of Tenant's obligations under this Lease. Unless required by applicable law, Landlord shall not be required to keep the Security Deposit segregated from other funds of Landlord. Tenant shall not assign or in any way encumber the Security Deposit. Upon the occurrence of any Event of Default by Tenant, Landlord shall have the right, without prejudice to any other remedy, to use the Security Deposit, or portions thereof, to the extent necessary to pay any arrearages in Rent, and any other damage, injury or expense. Following any such application of all or any portion of the Security Deposit, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, on demand, the amount so applied in order to restore the Security Deposit to its original amount. If Tenant is not in default at the termination of this Lease, any remaining balance of the Security Deposit shall be returned to Tenant, provided that Tenant surrenders the Premises without damage pursuant to Article 19 hereof. If Landlord transfers its interest in the Premises during the Term, Landlord shall assign the Security Deposit to the transferee, and thereafter Landlord shall have no further liability to Tenant for the Security Deposit.
ARTICLE XXII
BROKERAGE
22.1 Tenant and Landlord each represent and warrant to the other that it has not entered into any agreement with, or otherwise had any dealings with, any broker or agent in connection with the negotiation or execution of this Lease which could form the basis of any claim by any such broker or agent for a brokerage fee or commission, finder's fee, or any other compensation of any kind or nature in connection herewith, other than with Broker(s) (who shall be paid by Landlord in accordance with Landlord's separate agreement(s) with the Broker(s)) and each party shall, and hereby agrees to, indemnity and hold the other harmless from all costs (including court costs, investigation costs, and attorneys' fees), expenses, or liability for commissions or other compensation claimed by any broker or agent with respect to this Lease which arise out of any agreement or dealings, or alleged agreement or dealings, between the indemnifying party and any such agent or broker, other than with Broker(s). This provision shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease.
ARTICLE XXIII
OBSERVANCE OF RULES AND REGULATIONS
23.1 Tenant and Tenant's servants, employees, agents, visitors, and licensees shall observe faithfully and comply strictly with all Rules and Regulations (herein so called) attached to this Lease as such Rules and Regulations may be changed from time to time. Landlord shall at all times have the right to make reasonable changes in and additions to such Rules and Regulations; provided Landlord gives Tenant prior notice of such changes and provided that such new rules and regulations or changes in existing rules and regulations do not conflict with this Lease, and do not materially interfere with the lawful conduct of Tenant's business in the Premises. Any failure by Landlord to enforce any of the Rules and Regulations now or hereafter in effect, either against Tenant or any other tenant in the Building, shall not constitute a waiver of any such Rules and Regulations. Landlord shall not be liable to Tenant for the failure or refusal by any other tenant, guest, invitee, visitor, or occupant of the Building to comply with any of the Rules and Regulations.
ARTICLE XXIV
NOTICES
24.1 All notices, consents, demands, requests, documents, or other communications (other than payment of Rent) required or permitted hereunder (collectively, "notices") shall be deemed given, whether actually received or not, when dispatched for hand delivery or delivery by air express courier (with signed receipts) to the other party, or on the second Business Day after deposit in the United States mail, postage prepaid, certified, return receipt requested, except for notice of change of address which shall be deemed given only upon actual receipt. The addresses of the parties for notices are set forth in Article 1, or any such other addresses subsequently specified by each party in notices given pursuant to this Section 24.1.
ARTICLE XXV
MISCELLANEOUS
25.1 Professional Fees. In any action or proceeding brought by either party against the other under this Lease, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover from the other party its professional fees for attorneys, appraisers and accountants, its investigation costs, and any other legal expenses and court costs incurred by the prevailing party in such action or proceeding.
25.2 Reimbursements. Wherever the Lease requires Tenant to reimburse Landlord for the cost of any item, such costs will be the reasonable and customary charge periodically established by Landlord for such item. Landlord shall keep in its on-site manager's office a schedule of such charges (which Landlord may periodically change) for Tenant's examination. The schedule of charges may include, at the discretion of Landlord, a reasonable allocation of overhead, administrative, and related costs and a reasonable fee for Landlord's agent or manager who performs such services or arranges for performance of such services. All such charges shall be payable upon demand as Additional Rent.
25.3 Severability. Every agreement contained in this Lease is, and shall be construed as, a separate and independent agreement. If any term of this Lease or the application thereof to
any person or circumstances shall be invalid or unenforceable, the remaining agreements contained in this Lease shall not be affected.
25.4 Non-Merger. There shall be no merger of this Lease with any ground leasehold interest or the fee estate in the Project or any part thereof by reason of the fact that the same person may acquire or hold, directly or indirectly, this Lease or any interest in this Lease as well as any ground leasehold interest or fee estate in the Project or any interest in such fee estate.
25.5 Landlord's Liability. Anything contained in this Lease to the contrary notwithstanding, Tenant agrees that Tenant shall look solely to the estate and property of Landlord in the Project for the collection of any judgment or other judicial process requiring the payment of money by Landlord for any default or breach by Landlord under this Lease, subject, however, to the prior rights of any mortgagee or lessor of the Project. No other assets of Landlord or any members, partners, shareholders, or other principals of Landlord shall be subject to levy, execution or other judicial process for the satisfaction of Tenant's claim.
25.6 Force Majeure. Whenever the period of time is herein prescribed for action to be taken by Landlord or Tenant, Landlord or Tenant shall not be liable or responsible for, and there shall be excluded from the computation for any such period of time, any delays due to force majeure, which term shall include strikes, riots, acts of God, shortages of labor or materials, war, governmental approvals, laws, regulations, or restrictions, or any other cause of any kind whatsoever which is beyond the reasonable control of Landlord or Tenant. Force Majeure shall not excuse or delay Tenant's obligation to pay Rent or any other amount due under this Lease.
25.7 Headings. The article headings contained in this Lease are for convenience only and shall not enlarge or limit the scope or meaning of the various and several articles hereof. Words in the singular number shall be held to include the plural, unless the context otherwise requires. All agreements and covenants herein contained shall be binding upon the respective heirs, personal representatives, and successors and assigns of the parties thereto.
25.8 Successors and Assigns. All agreements and covenants herein contained shall be binding upon the respective heirs, personal representatives, successors and assigns or the parties hereto. If there be more than one Tenant; the obligations hereunder imposed upon Tenant shall be joint and several. If there is a guarantor of Tenant's obligations hereunder, Tenant's obligations shall be joint and several obligations of Tenant and such guarantor, and Landlord need not first proceed against Tenant hereunder before proceeding against such guarantor, and any such guarantor shall not be released from its guarantee for any reason, including any amendment of this Lease, any forbearance by Landlord or waiver of any of Landlord's rights, the failure to give Tenant or such guarantor any notices, or the release of any party liable for the payment or performance of Tenant's obligations hereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing contained in this Section 25.8 shall be deemed to override Article 8.
25.9 Landlord's Representations. Neither Landlord nor Landlord's agents or brokers have made any representations or promises with respect to the Premises, the Building, the Parking Facility, the Land, or any other portions of the Project except as herein expressly set forth and all reliance with respect to any representations or promises is based solely on those
contained herein. No rights, easements, or licenses are acquired by Tenant under this Lease by implication or otherwise except as, and unless, expressly set forth in this Lease.
25.10 Entire Agreements; Amendments. This Lease and the Exhibits and Riders attached hereto set forth the entire agreement between the parties and cancel all prior negotiations, arrangements, brochures, agreements, and understandings, if any, between Landlord and Tenant regarding the subject matter of this Lease. No amendment or modification of this Lease shall be binding or valid unless expressed in writing executed by both parties hereto.
25.11 Tenant's Authority. If Tenant signs as a corporation, execution hereof shall constitute a representation and warranty by Tenant that Tenant is a duly organized and existing corporation, that Tenant has been and is qualified to do business in the State of California and in good standing with the State of California, that the corporation has full right and authority to enter into this Lease, and that all persons signing on behalf of the corporation were authorized to do so by appropriate corporate action. If Tenant signs as a limited liability company, partnership, trust; or other legal entity, execution hereof shall constitute a representation and warranty by Tenant that Tenant has complied with all applicable laws, rules, and governmental regulations relative to Tenant's right to do business in the State of California, that such entity has the full right and authority to enter into this Lease, and that all persons signing on behalf of Tenant were authorized to do so by any and all necessary or appropriate company, partnership, trust, or other actions.
25.12 Governing Law. This Lease shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California. Should any provision of this Lease require judicial interpretation, Landlord and Tenant hereby agree and stipulate that the court interpreting or considering same shall not apply the presumption that the terms hereof shall be more strictly construed against a party by reason of any rule or conclusion that a document should be construed more strictly against the party who itself or through its agents prepared the same, it being agreed that all parties hereto have participated in the preparation of this Lease and that each Party had full opportunity to consult legal counsel of its choice before the execution of this Lease.
25.13 Tenant's Use of Name of the Building. Tenant shall not, without the prior written consent of Landlord, use the name of the Building for any purpose other than as the address of the business to be conducted by Tenant in the Premises, and Tenant shall not do or permit the doing of anything in connection with Tenant's business or advertising (including brokers' flyers promoting sublease space) which in the reasonable judgment of Landlord may reflect unfavorably on Landlord or the Building or confuse or mislead the public as to any apparent connection or relationship between Tenant and Landlord, the Building, or the Land.
25.14 Ancient Lights. Any elimination or shutting off of light, air, or view by any structure which may be erected on lands adjacent to the Building shall in no way affect this Lease and Landlord shall have no liability to Tenant with respect thereto.
25.15 Changes to Project by Landlord. Landlord shall have the unrestricted right to make changes to all portions of the Project in Landlord's reasonable discretion for the purpose of improving access or security to the Project or the flow of pedestrian and vehicular traffic therein.
Landlord shall have the right at any time, without the same constituting an actual or constructive eviction and without incurring any liability to Tenant therefor, to change the arrangement or location of entrances or passageways, doors and doorways, corridors, elevators, stairs, bathrooms, or any other Common Areas so long as reasonable access to the Premises remains available. Landlord shall also have the right to (a) rearrange, change, expand or contract portions of the Project constituting Common Areas, (b) to use Common Areas while engaged in making improvements, repairs or alterations to the Project, or any portion thereof, and (c) to do and perform such other acts and make such other changes in to or with respect to the Project, or any portion thereof, as Landlord may, in the exercise of sound business judgment, deem to be appropriate. Landlord shall be entitled to change the name or address of the Building or the Project. Landlord shall have the right to close, from time to time, the Common Areas and other portions of the Project for such temporary periods as Landlord deems legally sufficient to evidence Landlord's ownership and control thereof and to prevent any claim of adverse possession by, or any implied or actual dedication to, the public or any party other than Landlord.
25.16 Time of Essence. Time is of the essence of this Lease.
25.17 Landlord's Acceptance of Lease. The submission of this Lease to Tenant shall not be construed as an offer and Tenant shall not have any rights with respect thereto unless said Lease is consented to by mortgagee, and any lessor of Landlord, to the extent such consent is required, and Landlord executes a copy of this Lease and delivers the same to Tenant.
25.18 Performance by Tenant. All covenants and agreements to be performed by Tenant under any of the terms of this Lease shall be performed by Tenant, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, and without any abatement of Rent. If Tenant shall fail to pay any Rent, other than Base Rent, required to be paid by it hereunder or shall fail to perform any other act on its part to be performed hereunder, and such failure shall continue for longer than the period of cure, if any, permitted in Section 13.l, Landlord may, at its option, without waiving or releasing Tenant from obligations of Tenant, make any such payment or perform any such other act on behalf of Tenant. All sums so paid by Landlord and all necessary incidental costs, together with interest thereon at the Interest Rate, from the date of such payment by Landlord, shall be payable to Landlord on demand. Tenant covenants to pay any such sums, and Landlord shall have (in addition to any other right or remedy of Landlord) the same rights and remedies in the event of the non-payment thereof by Tenant as in the case of default by Tenant in the payment of Rent.
25.19 Financial Statements. At any time during the term of this Lease, Tenant shall, upon ten (10) days prior written notice from Landlord, provide Landlord with, if available, the most recent existing financial statement and existing financial statements of the two (2) years prior to the most recent financial statement year. Such statements shall be prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and, if such is the normal practice of Tenant, shall be audited by an independent certified public accountant.
25.20 Guaranty. For the benefit of Landlord, this Lease is subject to and conditional upon the Guarantor(s)' delivery to Landlord, concurrently with Tenant's execution and delivery of this Lease to Landlord, of Guaranty in the form of and upon the terms contained in Exhibit
"E" attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference, which shall be fully executed by the Guarantor(s) specified in Section 1.1W of Article I of this Lease.
25.21 Quiet Enjoyment. Landlord covenants and agrees with Tenant that upon Tenant paying the rent required under this Lease and paying all other charges and performing all of the covenants and provisions on Tenant's part to be observed and performed under this Lease, Tenant may peaceably and quietly have, hold and enjoy the Premises in accordance with this Lease without hindrance or molestation by Landlord or its employees or agents.
25.22 Directory; Signs. Landlord shall provide to Tenant entry door signage at Tenant's cost, and such entry door signage shall be comparable to that used by Landlord for other similar floors in the Building and shall comply with Landlord's Building standard signage program. Tenant shall also be entitled to have Tenant's name, as well as the names of Tenant's employees, at Tenant's sole cost and expense, listed on a directory sign in the main lobby of the Building, up to a maximum of five (5) directory strips. Any signs, notices, logos, pictures, names or advertisements which are installed and that have not been separately approved by Landlord may be removed without notice by Landlord at the sole expense of Tenant. Tenant may not install any signs on the exterior or roof of the Project or the Common Areas. Any signs, window coverings, or blinds (even if the same are located behind the Landlord-approved window coverings for the Building), or other items visible from the exterior of the Premises or Building, shall be subject to the prior approval of Landlord, in its sole discretion.
ARTICLE XXVI
SUBSTITUTION SPACE
26.1 Landlord shall have a one-time right, which right may be exercised by Landlord at any time prior to the end of the Term of this Lease, or any renewal or extension hereof, to substitute, instead of the Premises, other space within the Project (which space shall have a Net Rentable Area of not less than the Net Rentable Area in the Premises as of the date of such substitution and shall be located on a floor of a building in the Project no lower than the floor on which the original Premises are located and in an area substantially similar to the location of the original Premises in the Building), hereinafter called the "Substitution Space".
26.2 If Landlord desires to exercise such right prior to the Commencement Date, Landlord shall give written notice thereof to Tenant not later than thirty (30) days prior to the effective date of such substitution, which notice shall specify the Substitution Space in question and the description of the Premises set forth in this Lease shall, without further act on the part of Landlord or Tenant, be deemed amended so that the Substitution Space shall, for all purposes, be deemed the Premises hereunder and all of the terms, covenants, conditions, provisions, and agreements of this Lease, including those agreements to pay Rent, shall continue in full force and effect and shall apply to the Substitution Space. The Leasehold Improvements in the Substitution Space shall be completed in the manner set forth in Exhibit "C" of this lease, and the costs thereof shall be allocated between Landlord and Tenant as described therein; provided, however, that if, prior to Landlord's notice of its election to substitute the Substitution Space for the Premises, Tenant has reasonably incurred costs or expenses in connection with planning or construction of the Leasehold Improvements in the original Premises and Tenant is (i) unable to use the plans or materials in question in connection with the Leasehold Improvements in the
Substitution Space or (ii) unable to cancel orders for or return the materials in question for credit. Landlord shall reimburse Tenant for such costs and expenses (net of all applicable credits) upon presentation by Tenant of appropriate invoices and other substantiating materials therefor.
26.3 If Landlord desires to exercise such right after the Commencement Date, Landlord shall give Tenant at least sixty (60) days' prior written notice thereof specifying the effective date of such substitution, whereupon, as of such effective date: (a) the description of the Premises set forth in this Lease shall, without further act on the part of Landlord or Tenant, be deemed amended so that the Substitution Space shall, for all purposes, be deemed the Premises hereunder, and all of the terms, covenants, conditions, provisions, and agreements of this Lease, including those agreements to pay Rent, shall, subject to adjustment as provided in Section 26.6 below, continue in full force and effect and shall apply to the Substitution Space, and (b) Tenant shall move from the present Premises into the Substitution Space and shall vacate and surrender possession to Landlord of the present Premises, and if Tenant continues to occupy the present Premises after such effective date, then thereafter, during the period of such occupancy, Tenant shall pay Rent for the present Premises as set forth in this Lease, in addition to the Rent for the Substitution Space at the above-described rates. Tenant shall accept possession of the Substitution Space in its "as-is" condition as of such effective date.
26.4 Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 26.3 above, if Landlord exercises its right to substitute the Substitution Space for the Premises after the Commencement Date, then Tenant shall have the option to require Landlord, at Landlord's expense, to alter the Substitution Space in a manner substantially similar to the manner as the present Premises were finished out or altered pursuant to this Lease. Such option shall be exercised, if at all, by notice from Tenant to Landlord within fifteen (15) days after the aforesaid notice from Landlord to Tenant of such proposed substitution; otherwise, such option in favor of Tenant shall be null and void. If such option is validly so exercised by Tenant: (a) Tenant shall continue to occupy the present Premises (upon all of the terms, covenants, conditions, provisions, and agreements of this Lease, including the covenant for the payment of Rent) until the date on which Landlord shall have substantially completed such alteration work in the Substitution Space such that Tenant can commence business operations from the Substitution Space; and (b) Tenant shall move from the present Premises into the Substitution Space immediately upon the date of such substantial completion by Landlord and shall vacate and surrender possession to Landlord of the present Premises after such date, and if Tenant continues to occupy the present Premises following such date of substantial completion, then, thereafter during the period of such occupancy, Tenant shall pay Rent for the present Premises as set forth in this lease in addition to the Rent for the Substitution Space at the above-described rates. Landlord shall use its good faith efforts to allow Tenant to move into the Substitution Space over the weekend immediately prior to the date of substantial completion of the same. With respect to such alteration work in the Substitution Space, if Tenant requests materials or installations other than those originally installed by Landlord, or if Tenant shall make changes in the work (such non-original materials or installations or changes being subject to Landlord's prior written approval), and if such non-original materials or installations or changes shall delay the work to be performed by Landlord, or if Tenant shall otherwise delay the substantial completion of the work, the occurrence of such delays shall in no event postpone the date for the commencement of the payment of Rent for such Substitution Space beyond the date on which such work would have been substantially completed but for such delays, and in addition, Tenant shall continue to pay Rent for the present
Premises as set forth in this Lease until it vacates and surrenders same as aforesaid. Landlord at its discretion may substitute materials of like quality for the materials originally utilized.
26.5 If Landlord exercises this relocation right after the Commencement Date, Landlord shall reimburse Tenant for Tenant's reasonable out-of-pocket expenses for moving Tenant's furniture, equipment (including computer equipment), supplies and telephones and telephone equipment from the present Premises to the Substitution Space and for reprinting Tenant's stationery of the same quality and quantity of Tenant's stationery supply on hand immediately prior to Landlord's notice to Tenant of the exercise of this substitution right.
26.6 Notwithstanding anything above to the contrary, in the event the Net Rentable Area of the Substitution Space is greater than the Net Rentable Area of the Premises, then Tenant's Share and Base Rent shall be proportionately adjusted (but shall not be increased by more than five percent (5%).
ARTICLE XXVII
OTHER DEFINITIONS
When used in this Lease, the terms set forth hereinbelow shall have the following meanings:
(a) "BUSINESS DAYS" shall mean Monday through Friday (except for Holidays); "Business Hours" shall mean 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. on Monday through Friday and 9:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m. on Saturdays (except for Holidays); and "Holidays" shall mean those holidays designated by Landlord, which holidays shall be consistent with those holidays designated by landlords of other first-class office buildings in the Comparison Area.
(b) "COMMON AREAS" shall mean those certain areas and facilities of the Building and the Parking Facility and those certain improvements to the Land which are from time to time provided by Landlord for the use of tenants of the Building and their employees, clients, customers, licensees and invitees or for use by the public, which facilities and improvements include any and all corridors, elevator foyers, vending areas, bathrooms, electrical and telephone rooms, mechanical rooms, janitorial areas and other similar facilities of the Building and of the Parking Facility and any and all grounds, parks, landscaped areas, outside sitting areas, sidewalks, walkways, tunnels, pedestrian ways, skybridges, and generally all other improvements located on the Land, or which connect the Land to other buildings.
(c) The words "DAY" or "DAYS" shall refer to calendar days, except where "Business Days" are specified.
(d) The words "HEREIN", "HEREOF", "HEREBY", "HEREUNDER" and words of similar import shall be construed to refer to this Lease as a whole and not to any particular Article or Section thereof unless expressly so stated.
(e) The wards "INCLUDE" and "INCLUDING" shall be construed as if followed by the phrase "without being limited to."
(f) "NET RENTABLE AREA" and "USABLE AREA" shall mean "Net Rentable Area" and "Usable Area" (as applicable) determined in accordance with the Standard Method For Measuring Floor Area in Office Buildings ANSI/BOMA Z265.1-1996 ("BOMA STANDARD"); Landlord shall have the right, within ninety (90) days after the Commencement Date, to verify the Net Rentable Area and/or Usable Area of the Premises in accordance with the BOMA Standard. If, as a result of such verification, it is determined that the Net Rentable Area and/or Usable Area of the Premises are different than the amounts set forth in Section 1.1 above, all corresponding amounts set forth this Lease (including, without limitation, Tenant's Share, the amount of monthly Base Rent, the amount of the Security Deposit and the Allowance) shall be retroactively adjusted and appropriate payments, if applicable, shall be made by Landlord to Tenant or Tenant to Landlord (as applicable) within ten (10) days after written notice of such determination is delivered to Tenant. Both parties agree to execute a commercially reasonable instrument in order to document such revised amounts.
(g) Reference to Landlord as having "NO LIABILITY TO TENANT" or being "WITHOUT LIABILITY TO TENANT" or words of like import shall mean that Tenant is not entitled to terminate this Lease, or to claim actual or constructive eviction, partial or total, or to receive any abatement or diminution of rent, or to be relieved in any manner of any of Tenant's other obligations hereunder, or to be compensated for loss or injury suffered or to enforce any other right or kind of liability whatsoever against Landlord under or with respect to this Lease or with respect to Tenant's use or occupancy of the Premises.
(h) A "REPAIR" shall be deemed to include such rebuilding, replacement and restoration as may be necessary to achieve and maintain good working order and condition.
(i) The "TERMINATION OF THIS LEASE" and words of like import includes the expiration of the Term or the cancellation of this Lease pursuant to any of the provisions of this Lease or to law. Upon the termination of this Lease, the Term shall end at 11:59 p.m. (local time for the Building) on the date of termination as if such date were the Expiration Date, and neither party shall have any further obligation or liability to the other after such termination except (i) as shall be expressly provided for in this Lease and (ii) for such obligations as by their nature or under the circumstances can only be, or by the provisions of this Lease, may be, performed after such termination and, in any event, unless expressly otherwise provided in this Lease, any liability for a payment (which shall be apportioned as of the date of such termination) which shall have accrued to or with respect to, any period ending at the time of termination shall survive the termination of this Lease.
(j) The "TERMS OF THIS LEASE" shall be deemed to include all terms, covenants, conditions, provisions, obligations, limitations, restrictions, reservations and agreements contained in this Lease.
(k) "TENANT" shall be deemed to include Tenant's successors and assigns (to the extent permitted by Landlord) and any and all occupants of the Premises permitted by Landlord and claiming by, through or under Tenant.
(l) A "YEAR" shall mean twelve (12) consecutive months.
ARTICLE XXVIII
RIGHT OF FIRST OFFER
Landlord hereby grants to Tenant a right of first offer with respect to
the remaining space on the second (2nd) floor of the Building ("First Offer
Space"). Notwithstanding the foregoing (i) such first offer right of Tenant
shall commence only following the expiration or ear1ier termination of any then
existing lease pertaining to the First Offer Space (collectively, the "Superior
Leases"), including any renewal or extension of such lease(s), whether or not
such renewal or extension is pursuant to an express written provision in such
lease(s), and regardless of whether any such renewal or extension is consummated
pursuant to a lease amendment or a new lease, and (ii) such first offer right
shall be subordinate and secondary to all rights of expansion, first refusal,
first offer or similar rights granted to (A) the tenants of the Superior Leases
and (B) any other tenant of the Project (the rights described in items (i) and
(ii), above to be known collectively as "Superior Rights"). Tenant's right of
first offer shall be on the terms and conditions set forth in this Article 28.
28.1 Procedure for Offer. Tenant may, at any time during the Lease Term, provide written notice to Landlord (the "Space Availability Notice") that Tenant requests a list of any First Offer Space then available for lease; provided, however, that Tenant may not provide a Space Availability Notice to Landlord more than one (1) time in any ninety (90) day period. Within ten (10) business days after Landlord's receipt of a Space Availability Notice, Landlord shall provide Tenant with written notice (the "First Offer Notice") listing any then available First Offer Space and offering Tenant the opportunity to lease such space. The First Offer Notice shall describe the space so offered to Tenant and shall set forth Landlord's proposed economic terms and conditions applicable to Tenant's lease of such space (collectively, the "Economic Terms"). Notwithstanding the foregoing, Landlord's obligation to deliver the First Offer Notice shall not apply during the last six (6) months of the initial Lease Term unless Tenant has exercised its Extension Option pursuant to Section 3.6 above.
28.2 Procedure for Acceptance. If Tenant wishes to exercise Tenant's right of first offer with respect to the space described in the First Offer Notice, then within five (5) business days after delivery of the First Offer Notice to Tenant, Tenant shall deliver notice to Landlord of Tenant's intention to exercise its right of first offer with respect to the entire space described in the First Offer Notice. If concurrently with Tenant's exercise of the first offer right, Tenant notifies Landlord that it does not accept the Economic Terms set forth in the First Offer Notice, Landlord and Tenant shall, for a period of fifteen (15) days after Tenant's exercise, negotiate in good faith to reach agreement as to such Economic Terms. If Tenant does not so notify Landlord that it does not accept the Economic Terms set forth in the First Offer Notice concurrently with Tenant's exercise of the first offer right, the Economic Terms shall be as set forth in the First Offer Notice. In addition, if Tenant does not exercise its right of first offer within the five (5) business day period, or, if Tenant exercises its first offer right but timely objects to Landlord's determination of the Economic Terms and if Landlord and Tenant are unable to reach agreement on such Economic Terms within said fifteen (15) day period, then Landlord shall be free to lease the space described in the First Offer Notice to anyone to whom Landlord desires on any terms Landlord desires and Tenant's right of first offer shall terminate as to the First Offer Space described in the First Office Notice. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, Tenant must elect to exercise its right of first offer, if at all, with respect to all of the space
offered by Landlord to Tenant at any particular time, and Tenant may not elect to lease only a portion thereof.
28.3 Construction of First Offer Space. Except as included in the Economic Terms, Tenant shall take the First Offer Space in its "as-is" condition.
28.4 Lease of First Offer Space. If Tenant timely exercises Tenant's right to lease the First Offer Space as set forth herein, Landlord and Tenant shall execute an amendment adding such First Offer Space to this Lease upon the same non-economic terms and conditions as applicable to the initial Premises, and the economic terms and conditions as provided in this Article 28. Tenant shall commence payment of rent for the First Offer Space and the Lease Term of the First Offer Space shall commence upon the date of delivery of such space to Tenant. The Lease Term for the First Offer Space shall expire co-terminously with Tenant's lease of the initial Premises.
28.5 No Defaults. The rights contained in this Article 28 shall be personal to the Original Tenant or any Permitted Transferee, and may only be exercised by the Original Tenant or any Permitted Transferee (and not any other assignee, sublessee or other transferee of the Tenant's interest in this Lease) if Tenant occupies the entire Premises as of the date of the First Offer Notice. Tenant shall not have the right to lease First Office Space as provided in this Article 28 if, as of the date of the First Offer Notice, or, at Landlord's option, as of the scheduled date of delivery of such First Offer Space to Tenant, Tenant is in default under this Lease or Tenant has previously been in default under this Lease more than once.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Landlord and Tenant have executed this Lease as of the date set forth on the cover page hereof.
TENANT*: LANDLORD: PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION CONTIASSET RECEIVABLES PARTNERS, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership MANAGEMENT LLC, a Delaware limited liability company By: Prentiss Properties I, Inc. Its: General Partner By: /s/ Glenn S. Goldman -------------------- Name: Glenn S. Goldman By: /s/ Louay Alsadek Title: Chairman ----------------- Name: Louay Alsadek Title: Vice President By: /s/ Samir M. Shah ----------------- By: /s/ J. Kevan Dilbeck Name: Samir M. Shah ---------------------- Title: Vice President Name: J. Kevan Dilbeck Title: Vice President |
If Tenant is a California corporation, then one of the following alternative requirements must be satisfied:
(A) This Lease must be signed by two (2) officers of such corporation: one being the chairman of the board, the president or a vice president, and the other being the secretary, an assistant secretary, the chief financial officer or an assistant treasurer. If one (1) individual is signing in two (2) of the foregoing capacities, that individual must sign twice; once as one officer and again as the other officer.
(B) If there is only one (1) individual signing in two (2)
capacities, or if the two (2) signatories do not satisfy the requirements of (A) above, then Tenant shall deliver to Landlord a certified copy of a corporate resolution acceptable to Landlord authorizing the signatory(ies) to execute this Lease.
FIRST AMENDMENT TO LEASE
(EXECUTIVE CENTER DEL MAR)
THIS FIRST AMENDMENT TO LEASE ("FIRST AMENDMENT") is made and entered into as of the 15th day of November, 2002, by and between PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION PARTNERS, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership ("LANDLORD") and BANK OF INTERNET U.S.A., a Federal Savings Bank ("TENANT").
R E C I T A L S :
A. Landlord and ContiAsset Receivables Management, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company ("ORIGINAL TENANT") entered into that certain Lease Agreement dated as of March 16, 1998 (the "Lease"), whereby Landlord leased to Original Tenant and Original Tenant leased from Landlord certain office space located in that certain building located and addressed at 12220 El Camino Real, San Diego, California (the "BUILDING"). Tenant is the successor-in-interest in the Lease to Bofi.com Holding, Inc. a Delaware corporation, successor-in-interest in the Lease to Original Tenant pursuant to that certain Assignment and Assumption Agreement and Consent to Assignment dated as of September 22, 1999 by and between Landlord, Original Tenant (as assignor), Tenant (as assignee), and ContiFinancial Corporation, a Delaware corporation (as "GUARANTOR" under the Lease).
B. By this First Amendment, Landlord and Tenant desire to (i) expand
the Existing Premises (as defined below), (ii) extend the Term of the Lease, and
(iii) otherwise modify the Lease as provided herein.
C. Unless otherwise defined herein, capitalized terms as used herein shall have the same meanings as given thereto in the Lease.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing recitals and the mutual covenants contained herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto hereby agree as follows:
A G R E E M E N T :
1. The Existing Premises. Landlord and Tenant hereby agree that pursuant to the Lease, Landlord currently leases to Tenant and Tenant currently leases from Landlord that certain office space in the Building containing 5,478 square feet of Net Rentable Area (4,729 square feet of Usable Area) located on the second (2nd) floor of the Building and known as Suite 220 (the "EXISTING PREMISES"), as outlined on Exhibit "A" to the Lease.
2. Expansion of the Existing Premises. That certain space contiguous to
the Existing Premises located on the second (2nd) floor of the Building and
outlined on the floor plan attached hereto as Exhibit "A" and made a part
hereof, may be referred to herein as the "EXPANSION SPACE." Landlord and Tenant
hereby stipulate that the Expansion Space contains 2,251 square feet of Net
Rentable Area (1,743 square feet of Usable Area). Effective as of the earlier of
(i) the date of substantial completion of Landlord's Work (as defined in Section
5.2 below); or (ii) the date Tenant commences business operations in all or any
portion of the
Expansion Space ("EXPANSION COMMENCEMENT DATE"), Tenant shall, subject to
Section 13 below, lease from Landlord and Landlord shall lease to Tenant the
Expansion Space. Accordingly, effective upon the Expansion Commencement Date,
the Existing Premises shall, subject to Section 13 below, be increased to
include the Expansion Space. Landlord and Tenant hereby agree that such addition
of the Expansion Space to the Existing Premises shall, effective as of the
Expansion Commencement Date (but subject to Section 13 below), increase the
number of square feet leased by Tenant in the Building to a total of 7,729
square feet of Net Rentable Area (6,472 square feet of Usable Area). Effective
as of the Expansion Commencement Date, all references to the "Premises" shall
mean and refer to the Existing Premises as expanded by the Expansion Space. The
anticipated Expansion Commencement Date is February 1, 2003.
3. Expansion Space Term and Monthly Base Rent for the Expansion Space. The Lease Expiration Date of June 30, 2003 shall be extended by two (2) years such that the Lease shall terminate on June 30, 2005 ("NEW TERMINATION DATE"). The Term for Tenant's lease of the Expansion Space ("EXPANSION SPACE TERM") shall, subject to Section 13 below, commenced on the Expansion Commencement Date and shall expire co-terminously with Tenant's lease of the Existing Premises on New Termination Date. During the Expansion Space Term, Tenant shall pay, in accordance with the provisions of this Section 3, monthly Base Rent for the Premises (including the Existing Premises and the Expansion Space) as follows:
MONTHLY BASE RENT PER SQUARE FOOT OF NET TIME PERIOD *MONTHLY BASE RENT RENTABLE AREA OF PREMISES ----------- ------------------ ------------------------ Expansion Commencement $17,003.80 $2.20 Date -06/30/03 07/01/03-06/30/04 $17,776.70 $2.30 07/01/04-06/30/05 $18,317.73 $2.37 |
4. Tenant's Share and Base Year. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Lease, during the Expansion Space Term, Tenant's Share of any increase in Operating Costs for the Premises (including the Existing Premises and the Expansion Space) shall be 13.67%. Accordingly, effective as of the Expansion Commencement Date, Tenant's Share, as set forth in Section 1.1.K of the Basic Lease Information of the Lease, shall be deemed revised to be 13.67%. Effective as of July 1, 2003, the Base Year set forth in Section 1.1.0 of the Lease shall be deemed revised to be the calendar year 2003.
5. Condition of Expansion Space and Tenant Improvements.
5.1 Condition of Expansion Space. Tenant hereby agrees to accept the Expansion Space in its "as-is" condition and Tenant hereby acknowledges that Landlord, except as otherwise provided in this First Amendment, shall not be obligated to provide or pay for any improvement work or services related to the improvement of the Expansion space. Tenant also acknowledges that Landlord has made no representation or warranty regarding the condition of the Expansion Space.
5.2 Tenant Improvements. As soon as reasonably possible after the date of the full execution and delivery of this First Amendment by Landlord and Tenant, Landlord shall, at Landlord's sole cost and expense using Building-standard materials and in Landlord's Building-standard manner, perform the improvement work in the Expansions Space described on Exhibit "B" attached hereto ("LANDLORD'S WORK").
6. Parking. Effective as of the Expansion Commencement Date and continuing throughout the Expansion Space Term, Tenant shall have the right (but not the obligation) to use, at no additional cost to Tenant, a total of thirty-four (34) Parking Permits consisting of twenty-seven (27) unreserved Parking Permits and seven (7) reserved Parking Permits for use in the Building's Parking Facility. Tenant's use of such Parking Permits shall be in accordance with, and subject to, all of the provisions of Article VI of the Lease.
7. Security Deposit. Tenant has previously deposited with Landlord Thirty-Three Thousand Six Hundred Eighty-Nine And 70/100 Dollars ($33,689.70) as a Security Deposit under the Lease. Landlord shall continue to hold the Security Deposit in accordance with the terms and conditions of Article XXI of the Lease.
8. Commencement Notice. Landlord may deliver to Tenant a Commencement
Notice in a form substantially similar to that attached hereto as Exhibit "C"
and made a part hereof at any time after the Expansion Commencement Date. The
Commencement Notice shall be conclusive and binding upon Tenant as to all
matters set forth herein unless Tenant objects thereto in writing within five
(5) days following delivery of such Commencement Notice.
9. Brokers. Except for Prentiss Properties Management, LP. ("LANDLORD'S BROKER"), each party represents and warrants to the other that no broker, agent or finder negotiated or was instrumental in negotiating or consummating this First Amendment. Each party further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the other party from and against any claim for commission or finder's fee by any entity (other than Landlord's Broker) who claims or alleges that they were retained or engaged by the first party or at the request of such party in connection with this First Amendment.
10. Defaults. Tenant hereby represents and warrants to Landlord that, as of the date of this First Amendment, Tenant is in full compliance with all terms, covenants and conditions of the Lease and that there are no breaches or defaults under the Lease by Landlord or Tenant.
11. Signing Authority. Each individual executing this First Amendment on behalf of Tenant hereby represents and warrants that Tenant is a duly formed and existing entity qualified to do business in California and that Tenant has the full right and authority to execute and deliver this First Amendment and that each person signing on behalf of Tenant is authorized to do so.
12. No Further Modification. Except as set forth in this First Amendment, all of the terms and provisions of the Lease shall apply with respect to the Expansion Space and shall remain unmodified and in full force and effect.
13. Condition Precedent. Notwithstanding anything above to the contrary, Landlord and Tenant acknowledge and agree that the rights and obligations of Landlord and Tenant under this First Amendment are expressly conditioned upon the full execution and delivery by
Landlord and Smith Consulting Architects ("SMITH") of a lease amendment pertaining to a reduction of a portion of Smith's premises in the Building (i.e., the Expansion Space), and Smith's surrender, vacation and delivery of the Expansion Space to Landlord when and as required by Landlord, which lease amendment shall be on terms and conditions acceptable to Landlord in Landlord's sole and absolute discretion (collectively, the "CONDITION PRECEDENT"). Landlord and Tenant acknowledge and agree that if the Condition Precedent is not satisfied on or before December 1, 2002, either party may terminate this First Amendment (but not the Lease) by giving the other written notice thereof.
14. Release of Guarantor. Effective as of the Expansion Commencement Date, Guarantor is hereby released from all obligations under the Lease accruing after the Expansion Commencement Date.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this First Amendment has been executed as of the day and year first above written.
"LANDLORD" PRENTISS PROPERTIES ACQUISITION PARTNERS, L.P., a Delaware limited partnership By: Prentiss Properties I, Inc. a Delaware corporation general partner By: /s/ Deborah Street ----------------------------------- Print Name: Deborah Street Print Title: Vice President By: /s/ J. Kevan Dilbeck ----------------------------------- Print Name: J. Kevan Dilbeck Print Title: Senior Vice President "TENANT" BANK OF INTERNET U.S.A., a Federal Savings Bank By: /s/ Gary Evans ---------------------------------- Print Name: Gary Evans Print Title: President and CEO |
EXHIBIT 10.6
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT
This Employment Agreement (the "Agreement") is dated for reference purposes and entered into as of July 1, 2003 (the "Effective Date"), by and between Bank of Internet USA, a federal savings bank ("Bank"), having a principal place of business at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego, California, and Gary Lewis Evans ("Executive"), whose address is 4925 Caminito Exquisito, San Diego, CA 92130. Bank and Executive are sometimes collectively referred to in this Agreement as the "Parties." As used in this Agreement, the term "Effective Date" means the date this Employment Agreement becomes effective.
RECITALS
A. Bank desires to employ Executive and avail itself of his skill, knowledge and experience in the management of Bank's business.
B. The Parties desire to set forth in this Agreement the terms of Executive's employment by Bank.
The Parties therefore agree as follows:
A. TERM OF EMPLOYMENT
1. Term. Bank employs Executive to perform the duties described in this Agreement, and Executive accepts such employment, for a term of one year commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the day preceding the one year anniversary of the Effective Date, except (i) that the Term of this Agreement shall be renewed without further notice for a one year period commencing on the annual anniversary date of the Effective Date (the "Anniversary Date") and on each subsequent Anniversary Date following any such one year period of employment, and (ii) this Agreement may be terminated prior to the end of such Term by Bank or Employee in accordance with and subject to the terms of Paragraph F. (Termination) of this Agreement, including, but not limited to, Paragraph F.2.(a) providing Executive with a
Severance Payment (as defined therein) upon termination of this Agreement by Bank other than for cause. When used in this Agreement, "Term" shall refer to the entire period of employment of Executive by Bank under this Agreement.
B. DUTIES OF EXECUTIVE
Subject to the powers and directions of the policies, procedures and directives of the board of directors, as adopted and modified from time to time, Executive shall perform the duties and shall have the titles of President & Chief Executive Officer. During the Term, Executive shall perform exclusively for Bank the services contemplated in this Agreement to be performed by Executive, faithfully, diligently and to the best of Executive's ability, consistent with the highest and best standards of the banking industry and in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations and the Bank's federal stock charter and bylaws. Except as permitted by the prior written consent of Bank's board of directors, Executive shall devote Executive's entire working time, ability and attention to the business of Bank during the Term.
C. COMPENSATION
1. Base Salary. In consideration of Executive's services to be performed under this Agreement, Bank shall pay or cause to be paid to Executive a base salary in the following amounts, payable in equal installments in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods:
a. $171,000 per annum, effective as of July 1, 2003.
b. $180,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2004, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $399,098,000.
c. $200,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2005, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $532,964,000.
Executive's salary shall be reviewed by the board of directors from time to time at its discretion and Executive shall receive such additional or other salary increases, if any, as the board of directors, in its sole discretion, shall determine.
2. One-Time Deferred Compensation. Executive is entitled to one-time deferred compensation in the amount of $75,000 (the "One-Time Deferred Compensation"), subject to the terms of this Agreement and the Bank of Internet USA Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, adopted effective as of July 1, 2003 (the "Deferred Comp Plan". The Executive's deferred compensation account shall be credited for $75,000 plus 4% on July 1, 2004. The One-Time Deferred Compensation amount and all earnings in the account shall vest to the Executive on the following:
July 1,2004...................................... 20% July 1,2005...................................... 40% July 1,2006...................................... 60% July 1,2007...................................... 80% July 1,2008...................................... 100% |
The bank shall pay 4% only on July 1, 2004. Thereafter, investment of the Executive's Account shall comply with the investment provision of the Deferred Comp Plan.
3. Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Executive shall be entitled to a benefit based on the pre-tax net income of the Bank, as calculated in accordance with the formula and terms set forth in Exhibit A, the terms of which are incorporated by this reference as if set forth in full in this paragraph (the "Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit"). The amount of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, if any, to which Executive shall be entitled shall be subject to the terms governing the deferral of such benefit set forth in Exhibit A. Executive shall be eligible for such other benefits and other incentive compensation, if any, that may be made available to the Bank's senior executive officers from time to time by the board of directors in its sole discretion.
D. EXECUTIVE BENEFITS
1. Vacation. Executive shall be entitled to vacation as prescribed in the Bank's Employee Manual maintained on the Bank's Intranet. In the event this Agreement is terminated pursuant to Paragraph F.2, Bank reserves the right to require Executive to take any unused vacation time prior to the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2).
2. Directors and Officers Liability Insurance. Bank shall provide for Executive, at Bank's expense, coverage under a directors and officers liability insurance policy in such amounts and on such terms as may be approved by Bank's board of directors and as may be consistent with such coverage provided by Bank for its other officers and directors.
3. Group Insurance Benefits; and Death Benefit. Executive shall participate in all group insurance plans provided by Bank for all of its senior executive officers at Bank's expense to the same extent and on the same terms as Bank's other senior executive officers. Throughout the term of employment, the Bank shall, at its sole cost, will provide a death benefit on the life of Executive in an amount equal to three times Executive's then-current annual salary.
4. Stock Options. As of Effective Date, BofI Holding, Inc. a Delaware corporation ("Holding"), the sole shareholder of Bank, had granted to Executive incentive stock options, as provided in Section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code (ISOs"), pursuant to the Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan of BOI Holding, Inc. (the "Plan") and as memorialized in three Incentive Stock Option Agreements, dated April 27, 2000, April 2, 2001, and January 28, 2002. (collectively, the "Grant"), which such agreements provide for, among other things, the vesting of such ISOs. Notwithstanding the terms of the Plan, in the event that the Bank terminates Executive under this Agreement for any reason other than for cause pursuant to Paragraph F.I or in the event Executive's death or disability causes the termination of this Agreement, all of Executive's lSOs issued pursuant to the Grant and any subsequently issued grant of ISOs under the Plan, including all ISOs held by Executive
that are not otherwise vested at such time, shall become fully vested and Executive may exercise such vested ISOs, in whole or in part, at any time within the terms of the option plan. In the event that Executive terminates this Agreement, Executive shall be entitled to exercise only those lSOs that are vested as of the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2, below), and may be exercised within a 90 day period in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.7(a) of the Plan. Neither Bank nor Holding shall enter into any transaction during or after the Term that would have the effect of canceling any of Executive's ISOs issued under the Grant.
5. Retirement, Profit Sharing and Other Plans. Executive shall be entitled to participate in any retirement plans, profit-sharing plans, salary deferral and other deferred compensation plans, medical expense reimbursement plans and other similar plans that Bank may establish with respect to all employees; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require Bank to establish or maintain any of such plans.
E. BUSINESS EXPENSES AND REIMBURSEMENT
1. Business Expenses. In addition to Bank's payment or reimbursement of costs of the type described in Paragraph E.2, Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for any ordinary and necessary business expenses incurred by Executive in the performance of his duties and in acting for or on behalf of Bank during the Term, provided that: (a) each such expenditure is of a nature qualifying it as a proper deduction on the federal and state income tax returns of Bank as a business expense and not as deductible compensation to Executive, (b) Executive furnishes to Bank adequate records and other documentary evidence required by federal and state statutes and regulations issued by the appropriate taxing authorities for the substantiation of such expenditures and deductible business expenses of Bank, and (c) Executive's expense reimbursement reports are submitted for approval in accordance with Bank's internal policies.
2. Additional Expenses. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for
the costs and expenses set forth below, subject to the following requirements:
(a) Executive shall comply with the Bank's expense payment or reimbursement
guidelines and procedures as the Bank may amend such guidelines and procedures
or may adopt new guidelines and procedures from time to time, and (b) prior to
the Bank becoming liable for any expenses or reimbursement relating to
equipment, publications, education, training or professional organizations
pursuant to subparagraphs (iii) through (vi) below, any such expenses or
reimbursement shall be approved by Bank's board of directors or any committee or
person authorized by the board of directors to grant such approval, in advance
of incurring any such expenses. Subject to such prior approval of incurring
expenses or reimbursement and to compliance with Bank's payment or reimbursement
procedures, Bank's obligation to make any such payment or reimbursement pursuant
to this paragraph shall not be contingent on whether or to what extent a
particular expense may constitute a deductible business expense of Bank or be
excludable from Executive's taxable compensation.
(i) Automobile Allowance. Standard business mileage reimbursement will be provided to Executive.
(ii) Parking. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for his reasonable automobile parking expenses during the Term.
(iii) Equipment. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for a digital cellular telephone (including the initial purchase price and connection charges as well as all business-related air charges), and other equipment as needed. Such equipment shall be the property of the Bank and upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, all of such equipment shall be returned to Bank, as more particularly provided in Paragraph G.3.
(iv) Publications. Bank shall reimburse Executive for the costs incurred by Executive during the term for subscriptions to business-related periodical publications that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.
(v) Education and Training. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for attending business-related seminars, training programs, conferences and conventions that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties to Bank.
(vi) Professional Organizations. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for membership fees and dues of professional organizations that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.
F. TERMINATION
1. Termination for Cause. Bank may terminate this Agreement for cause at any time without advance notice and without further obligation or liability to Executive, by action of Bank's board of directors:
(a) If Executive materially fails to perform his duties in a
satisfactory manner or habitually neglects his duties; provided, however, that
before any termination pursuant to this subparagraph (a) shall become effective,
(i) Bank shall have given Executive written notice setting forth the specific
grounds for termination ("Warning Notice"), (ii) Bank shall have met and
informed Executive of the grounds for termination, of the extent and nature of
his unsatisfactory or negligent performance and of what Executive must do to
correct such deficiencies, and (iii) Executive shall have been afforded a
reasonable opportunity over a period of not less than forty-five (45) days from
the date of the Warning Notice to correct the unsatisfactory or negligent
performance described in the Warning Notice to the satisfaction of the board of
directors, provided, however, that Executive shall be terminated at the end of
such period if Executive fails to correct his deficient performance in the
manner prescribed by and to the reasonable satisfaction of the board of
directors;
(b) If Executive is convicted of illegal activity which materially adversely affects Bank's reputation in the community or which evidences the lack of Executive's fitness or ability to perform Executive's duties as determined by the board of directors, in good faith;
(c) If Executive commits any act which causes termination of coverage under Bank's Bankers Blanket Bond as to Executive, as distinguished from termination of coverage as to Bank as a whole;
(d) If Executive dies;
(e) If Executive is found to be physically or mentally
incapable of performing Executive's duties for a consecutive period of ninety
(90) days or greater by the board of directors, reasonably and in good faith.
Termination pursuant to this subparagraph (e) shall become effective immediately
on written notice of termination given by Bank to Executive after the expiration
of such 90-day period;
(f) If Bank is closed or taken over by any of the bank regulatory authorities having jurisdiction over Bank's activities; or
(g) If any bank regulatory authority should successfully exercise its cease and desist powers to remove Executive from office.
The Parties understand and agree that notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement: (1) this Agreement is subject to the requirements and terms set forth in the regulations of the Office of Thrift Supervision ("OTS") contained in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39; (2) specifically, without limitation, the required provisions set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) are incorporated by reference in this Agreement as if set forth in full; (3) to the greatest extent possible, this Agreement shall be interpreted so as to be consistent with said regulation; and (4) in the event of conflict or inconsistency between the terms of this Agreement and said regulation, the required provisions of said OTS regulation shall supersede any inconsistent or conflicting provisions of this Agreement. The termination of this Agreement for any of the reasons set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) shall be considered termination for cause pursuant to this Paragraph F.1.
2. Termination at Will. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated by either party at any time upon thirty (30) days' written notice of termination to the other Party ("Notice of Termination"). As used in this Paragraph F.2, "Date of Termination" means the thirtieth (30th) day following the date on which Notice of Termination is given.
(a) Termination by Bank. In the event Bank elects to terminate
this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the
Term, Executive shall be entitled to compensation from Bank as follows: (i) Bank
shall pay Executive his normal compensation then in effect through the Date of
Termination; and (ii) Bank shall pay to Executive a severance payment equal to
his then-current base monthly salary, multiplied by twelve (12) (the "Severance
Payment"), which amount shall be paid by the Bank in either of the following two
ways, in the sole discretion of the board of directors: (A) the Bank may pay the
Severance Payment in twelve (12) equal installments during the succeeding twelve
(12) month period beginning on the Date of Termination (the "Severance Period")
in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods, or (B) the Bank may pay the
Severance Payment in one lump sum, subject to such withholding and other
deductions as may be required by applicable law. In addition, Executive shall be
entitled to the continuation of the group insurance benefits provided under
Paragraph D.3, subject to Executive's reasonable cooperation with Bank, until
the first to occur of: (x) the expiration of the Severance Period, or (y)
Executive's commencement of work for a new employer that provides group medical
insurance benefits to Executive. Executive's acceptance of new employment or
earnings from other sources during the Severance Period shall not affect Bank's
obligation to make the Severance Payment as provided above. At any time between
Bank giving Executive Notice of Termination and the Date of Termination, Bank,
in its sole discretion, may direct Executive to cease performing services for
Bank or to absent himself from Bank's premises and operations, provided that
Bank shall nonetheless compensate Executive as provided above.
(b) Termination by Executive. In the event Executive elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to such compensation as may be due and payable to him through and including such Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any other compensation except as may be required by law or by written agreement, including this Agreement and the Deferred Comp Plan.
3. Effect of Termination. In the event of the termination of this Agreement prior to the completion of the Term for any of the reasons specified in Paragraphs F.1 and F.2, Executive shall be entitled to the compensation earned by Executive prior to the Date of Termination, as provided in this Agreement, computed pro rata up to and including the Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any further compensation or other benefits for services rendered after the Date of Termination, except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement. As used in this Paragraph F.3. "Date of Termination" includes the effective date of any termination, whether pursuant to Paragraph F.1 or F.2.
G. GENERAL PROVISIONS
1. Solicitation of Customers and Employees. For any period during which Executive receives any salary from Bank and for a one (1) year period following any termination of Executive from Bank, Executive shall not solicit any customers or employees of Bank to move their banking or employment relationships from Bank. Nothing in this Agreement shall preclude Executive from any mass solicitation to groups and individual follow-up solicitations of persons or businesses named in any list or data base not specifically related to or previously defined by the Bank, even though the names of certain Bank customers may appear in such list or data base.
2. Indemnification. To the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank
shall pay any and all expenses incurred by Executive in connection with the
defense or settlement of, and shall pay and satisfy any judgments, awards, fines
and penalties rendered, assessed or levied against Executive in, any judicial,
arbitration, mediation or administrative suit, action, hearing, inquiry or
proceeding (whether or not Bank is joined as a party) relating to acts or
omissions of Executive alleged to have occurred while an "agent" of Bank, or by
Bank, or by both, provided however, that Bank shall not be obligated to defend,
indemnify or hold Executive harmless from the consequences of his own negligent
or reckless act or omission or willful misconduct or dishonesty. In addition, to
the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall advance to Executive, upon
receipt of the undertaking required by California Corporations Code Section
317(f), any expenses incurred in defending against any such proceeding to which
Executive is a party or has been threatened to be made a party.
3. Return of Property. Executive expressly agrees that all manuals, documents, files, reports, studies, instruments, equipment and other materials and property used and/or developed by Bank or Executive (whether on his personal time or while performing services for the Bank) during the Term ("Preparatory Work") are the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest in such property. Executive further agrees that, subject to the execution of this Agreement, all Preparatory Work is the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest, legal or beneficial, in such Preparatory Work or in any benefits that may arise from such Preparatory Work. Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, Executive or Executive's representative shall promptly deliver possession of all of said property to Bank in original or good, operating condition, normal wear and tear excepted.
4. Notices. Any notice, request, demand or other communication required or permitted hereunder shall be considered to be properly given when personally served in writing, when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, or when delivered to a generally recognized overnight courier service (such as, for example, Federal Express or United Parcel Service) addressed to the Party at such Party's address appearing at the beginning of this Agreement. Either Party may change its address by written notice in accordance with this paragraph.
5. Benefit of Agreement; Assignment. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Parties and their respective executors, administrators, successors and assigns. This Agreement is for the personal services of Executive and may not be assigned by Executive.
6. Applicable Law. Except to the extent governed by the laws of the United States, this Agreement is to be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California.
7. Captions and Paragraphs Headings. Captions and paragraph headings used herein are for convenience only and are not a part of this Agreement and shall not be used in constructing it.
8. Invalid Provisions. Should any provision of this Agreement for any reason be declared invalid, void, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the validity and binding effect of any remaining portion shall not be affected, and the remaining portions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect as if this Agreement had been executed with said provision eliminated.
9. Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the Parties. It supersedes any and all other agreements or understandings, whether oral or written, between the Parties with respect to the employment of Executive by Bank. The terms of this Agreement in Paragraph D.4 applicable to stock options supersede the terms of the Plan or any agreement between the Parties to the extent the terms of the Plan and any other agreement are inconsistent with the terms of Paragraph D.4. Each party to this Agreement acknowledges that no representations, inducements, promises, or agreements, oral or otherwise, have been made by any party, or anyone acting on behalf of any party, that are not embodied in this Agreement, and that no other agreement, statement, or promise not contained in this Agreement shall be valid or binding. This Agreement, may be modified or amended only in a written document signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. The amendment or other modification of the Plan or other any other agreement generally applicable to the grant of stock options or issuance of ISOs by the Holding Company to employees, including Executive will not supersede the terms of this Agreement pertaining to ISOs without the express written approval of the Parties contained in a writing expressly stating its intent to supersede the specific terms of this Agreement applicable to ISOs. Additionally, terms of this Agreement will prevail in any conflicts with other agreements.
10. Attorney's Fees. Each party shall bear his or its own attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and delivery of this Agreement. However, if any action is instituted to enforce or interpret any of the obligations set forth in this Agreement, the prevailing party(ies) shall be entitled to recover its (their) reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the enforcement or interpretive action.
11. Trade Secrets. To the extent that during the Term Bank develops any trade secrets, as that term is defined under California law, the Parties agree that such trade secrets belong to and are the property of the Bank. Executive agrees that for a period of one (1) year after the termination of this Agreement. Executive shall not disclose any of Bank's trade secrets, directly or indirectly, or use them in any way in contravention of the rights of the Bank to such trade secrets.
12. Restricted Securities. The ISOs, the underlying common stock issuable upon the exercise of the lSOs and the shares of Holding's common stock issuable pursuant thereto shall be issued by Holding without registration under the Securities Act of 1933, or registration or qualification of such securities under any state securities or "blue sky" laws in reliance upon certain exemptions from registration or qualification, as the case may he. Upon issuance, such securities shall be considered "restricted securities," subject to certain limitations on transfer or other disposition imposed under applicable federal and state securities or "blue sky" laws and regulations and such restrictions shall be set forth in one or more legends appearing on the certificate or agreement evidencing such securities.
13. Accounting Principles. Wherever in this Agreement, including any exhibit hereto, there is a reference to or need to use or rely upon accounting principles and procedures, such accounting principles and procedures shall be those used by the Bank in the preparation and filing of its reports of financial condition and operations in the form of Thrift Financial Reports, as filed with the Office of Thrift Supervision in the ordinary course ("TFRs"). By way of example, such items as Total Assets and loan loss reserves shall be computed as they are computed for purposes of reporting such information in the Bank's TFRs.
The Parties execute this Agreement as of the Effective Date first above written.
EXECUTIVE: BANK OF INTERNET, USA
a federal savings bank /s/ Gary Lewis Evans By: /s/ Jerry Englert ------------------------------ --------------------------------- Gary Lewis Evans Name: Jerry Englert 4925 Caminito Exquisito Title: Chairman of the Board San Diego, CA 92130 Attest:/s/ C. Michelle Paulus ----------------------------- Secretary |
CONSENT OF BOFI HOLDING, INC.
By execution of this Agreement below, BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation, consents to and agrees to perform its obligations under Paragraph D.4.
BofI Holding, Inc. By: /s/ Jerry Englert Attest:/s/ C. Michelle Paulus --------------------------------- ------------------------- Jerry Englert, Chairman of the Board Name: C. Michelle Paulus Title: Secretary |
EXHIBIT A
PRE-TAX NET INCOME BENEFIT
The following terms apply to the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit provided in Paragraph C.2 of the Agreement.
A. Definitions.
1. "Adjusted Net Income" refers to Net Income Before Income Taxes
(as defined below) as reported in a TFR (as defined below), reduced by the
amount of Specific Reserves (as defined below), as reported in a TFR, and
increased by the sum of (a) the amount of General Reserves (as defined below),
(b) the amount of any expense accrued by the Bank for the Pre-Tax Net Income
Benefit, and (c) the amount of any non-taxable or tax preferred income "grossed
up" to its pre-tax equivalent or equivalent income without such tax preference
(the "Tax Preferred Income "gross up").
2. "Average Asset Balance" refers to the average amount of Total Assets reported by the Bank on a daily for the period covered by a TFR.
3. "Asset Target" refers to the level of Total Assets reported in the Bank's TFR at June 30, 2004 and at June 30, 2005. The Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2004 is $399,098,000 and is referred to as the "2004 Asset Target" and the Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2005 is $532,963,000 and is referred to as the "2005 Asset Target."
4. "Bonus Calculation Table" refers to the following table showing the Bonus Percentage (which will be applied as a percentage of Net Income Before Income Taxes earned by Executive) if the Bank attains certain levels of profitability (expressed as a percentage attained by dividing Adjusted Net Income by the Average Asset Balance):
If the Bank's Return on Assets Before Taxes (as defined below) is
Bonus Percentage at least: but not greater than: ---------- -------- -------------------- 0.10 1.200% 1.399% 0.15 1.400% 1.799% 0.25 1.800% 2.199% 0.35 2.200% No limit |
5. "TFR" refers to the Thrift Financial Report of the Bank, consisting of various financial statements, including balance sheet, statement of operations and other statements, prepared by the Bank in the ordinary course and filed quarterly with the Office of Thrift Supervision.
6. "General Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of a reserve or an allowance against loan losses generally and not allocable to one or more specific assets, as set forth in its TFR for the applicable period.
7. "Net Income Before Income Taxes" refers to the amount reported as "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes" in a TFR for the applicable period.
8. "Deferred Comp Plan" has the meaning set forth in Section C.3 of the Agreement.
9. "Pre-Tax Net Income" refers to the "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes," as set forth on the Statement of Operations included in a TFR.
10. "Return on Assets Before Taxes" refers to the percentage derived from dividing (a) the Adjusted Net Income for such TFR period, by (b) the Average Asset Balance with respect to such period.
10. "Specific Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of reserves or allowances against loan losses specifically attributable to actual losses or to prospective losses from one or more identified assets, as set forth in a TFR.
B. Calculation of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit
1. Executive shall be entitled to a Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and June 30, 2005. All calculations leading to the computation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit for each of such years shall be based upon the results reported in the Bank's TFRs for each such 12-month period. No Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit shall be calculated or payable with respect to any period less than a full 12-month fiscal year.
2. As promptly as possible after the filing of the TFR for the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and 2005, as the case may be, but in no event later than 30 days after such filing, the Bank shall (i) determine the Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, (ii) calculate the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with this Agreement, and (iii) report the results of such calculation to Executive and the board of directors of the Bank. As promptly as possible after reporting such calculation, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, Executive and the Bank shall meet to confirm their agreement on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. On the date that the Executive and the Bank mutually agree on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit (the "Determination Date"), the Executive shall have a right to the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit as provided in this Agreement.
3. As a condition precedent to Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the 2004 and 2005 fiscal years, the Bank shall have achieved the 2004 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2004, and the Bank shall have achieved the 2005 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2005.
4. Provided that the Bank shall have achieved the applicable Asset Target and subject to the provisions of Paragraph C.3, below, governing the payment and crediting, as the case may be, of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in an amount equal to the product of multiplying: (1) the Bonus Percentage for which the Executive is eligible for such fiscal year, based on the Bank's Return on Assets Before Income Taxes, as derived from the Bonus Calculation Table, times (2) Executive's rate of annual salary payable as of the end of such fiscal year.
5. The following is an example only of the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Assume: that the Bank has achieved the applicable Asset Target.
Net Income Before Income Taxes (from TFR) $ 4,600,000 Adjustments: Add/Increase: General Reserves $ 300,000 Accrued Expense for Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit $ 60,000 Tax Preferred Income "gross up" $ 70,000 Subtract/Reduce: Specific Reserves/Charge-Offs $ (20,000) Adjusted Net Income $ 5,010,000 ============ Average Asset Balance $405,000,000 ============ Return on Assets Before Taxes: Adjusted Net Income / Average Asset Balance = $ 5,010,000 = 1.237% ------------- $ 405,000,000 |
Bonus Percentage based on 1.237% Return on Average Assets = 0.10
(from Bonus Calculation Table)
Calculation of Bonus (assuming at end of fiscal year, Executive's rate of annual salary is $171,000 per annum):
Bonus Percentage X Executive's Annual Salary = Bonus
C. Payment and Crediting of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit
1. Within thirty days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and subject to the Deferred Comp Plan.
2. As of each Determination Date, Executive is entitled to receive no more than one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in cash (the "Cash Portion") and at least one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in the form of a credit to Executive's Account (as such term is defined under the Deferred Comp Plan)("Executive's Account. In accordance with the requirements of the Deferred Comp Plan, Executive shall make in a timely manner any and all elections with respect to the Deferred Comp Plan, including, but not limited to, elections with respect to the deferral of compensation.
3. Within 30 days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall pay the Cash Portion, if any, to Executive in cash, subject to any withholding required by law.
4. The Deferred Portion shall be credited to Executive's Account effective on July 1 of the year closest to the calculation date of the specific Pre Tax Net Income Benefit. Installments vest annually over 3 years on July 1, and annually on July 1 thereafter until fully vested as provide in the deferred compensation plan.
5. If this Agreement is terminated by Executive pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(b) or by the Bank for cause (other than due to Executive's death or disability) pursuant to Paragraph F.1, Executive shall be entitled only to that part of the Deferred Portion that has been vested prior to the Date of Termination.
6. If this Agreement is terminated due to Executive's death or disability or by the Bank without cause pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(a), then, on the Date of Termination of this Agreement on such basis, Executive's Account shall be credited with all remaining portions of any Deferred Portion that have not previously been fully vested as of such Date of Termination.
7. In the event of the termination of Executive's employment, the amount in Executive's Account shall be distributed to Executive in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.
EXHIBIT 10.7
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT
This Employment Agreement (the "Agreement") is dated for reference purposes and entered into as of July 1, 2003 (the "Effective Date"), by and between Bank of Internet USA, a federal savings bank ("Bank'), having a principal place of business at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego, California, and Patrick Dunn ("Executive"), whose address is 2864 Anaheim Street, Escondido, CA 92025. Bank and Executive are sometimes collectively referred to in this Agreement as the "Parties." As used in this Agreement, the term "Effective Date" means the date this Employment Agreement becomes effective.
RECITALS
A. Bank desires to employ Executive and avail itself of his skill, knowledge and experience in the management of Bank's business.
B. The Parties desire to set forth in this Agreement the terms of Executive's employment by Bank.
The Parties therefore agree as follows:
A. TERM OF EMPLOYMENT
1. Term. Bank employs Executive to perform the duties described in this Agreement, and Executive accepts such employment, for a term of one year commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the day preceding the one year anniversary of the Effective Date, except (i) that the Term of this Agreement shall be renewed without further notice for a one year period commencing on the annual anniversary date of the Effective Date (the "Anniversary Date") and on each subsequent Anniversary Date following any such one year period of employment, and (ii) this Agreement may be terminated prior to the end of such Term by Bank or Employee in accordance with and subject to the terms of Paragraph F. (Termination) of this Agreement, including, but not limited to, Paragraph F.2.(a) providing Executive with a
Severance Payment (as defined therein) upon termination of this Agreement by Bank other than for cause. When used in this Agreement, "Term" shall refer to the entire period of employment of Executive by Bank under this Agreement.
B. DUTIES OF EXECUTIVE
Subject to the powers and directions of the policies, procedures and directives of the board of directors, as adopted and modified from time to time, Executive shall perform the duties and shall have the titles of Vice President and Chief Credit Officer. During the Term, Executive shall perform exclusively for Bank the services contemplated in this Agreement to be performed by Executive, faithfully, diligently and to the best of Executive's ability, consistent with the highest and best standards of the banking industry and in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations and the Bank's federal stock charter and bylaws. Except as permitted by the prior written consent of Bank's board of directors, Executive shall devote Executive's entire working time, ability and attention to the business of Bank during the Term.
C. COMPENSATION
1. Base Salary. In consideration of Executive's services to be performed under this Agreement, Bank shall pay or cause to be paid to Executive a base salary in the following amounts, payable in equal installments in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods:
a. $152,000 per annum, effective as of July 1, 2003.
b. $160,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2004, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $399,098,000.
c. $175,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2005, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $532,964,000.
Executive's salary shall be reviewed by the board of directors from time to time at its discretion and Executive shall receive such additional or other salary increases, if any, as the board of directors, in its sole discretion, shall determine.
2. One-Time Deferred Compensation. Executive is entitled to one-time deferred compensation in the amount of $50,000 (the "One-Time Deferred Compensation"), subject to the terms of this Agreement and the Bank of Internet USA Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, adopted effective as of July 1, 2003 (the "Deferred Comp Plan". The Executive's deferred compensation account shall be credited for $50,000 plus 4% on July 1, 2004. The One-Time Deferred Compensation amount and all earnings in the account shall vest to the Executive on the following:
July 1, 2004...................................... 20% July 1, 2005...................................... 40% July 1, 2006...................................... 60% July 1, 2007...................................... 80% July 1, 2008...................................... 100% |
The bank shall pay 4% only on July 1, 2004. Thereafter, investment of the Executive's Account shall comply with the investment provision of the Deferred Comp Plan.
3. Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Executive shall be entitled to a benefit based on the pre-tax net income of the Bank, as calculated in accordance with the formula and terms set forth in Exhibit A, the terms of which are incorporated by this reference as if set forth in full in this paragraph (the "Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit"). The amount of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, if any, to which Executive shall be entitled shall be subject to the terms governing the deferral of such benefit set forth in Exhibit A. Executive shall be eligible for such other benefits and other incentive compensation, if any, that may be made available to the Bank's senior executive officers from time to time by the board of directors in its sole discretion.
4. Special Discretionary Contribution. Executive shall be eligible to receive the Special Discretionary Contribution as defined and to the extent described in
Exhibit B, attached to this Agreement and incorporated in this Agreement as if set forth in full in this paragraph.
D. EXECUTIVE BENEFITS
1. Vacation. Executive shall be entitled to vacation as prescribed in the Bank's Employee Manual maintained on the Bank's Intranet. In the event this Agreement is terminated pursuant to Paragraph F.2, Bank reserves the right to require Executive to take any unused vacation time prior to the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2).
2. Directors and Officers Liability Insurance. Bank shall provide for Executive, at Bank's expense, coverage under a directors and officers liability insurance policy in such amounts and on such terms as may be approved by Bank's board of directors and as may be consistent with such coverage provided by Bank for its other officers and directors.
3. Group Insurance Benefits; and Death Benefit. Executive shall participate in all group insurance plans provided by Bank for all of its senior executive officers at Bank's expense to the same extent and on the same terms as Bank's other senior executive officers. Throughout the term of employment, the Bank shall, at its sole cost, will provide a death benefit on the life of Executive in an amount equal to three times Executive's then-current annual salary.
4. Stock Options. As of Effective Date, BofI Holding, Inc. a Delaware corporation ("Holding"), the sole shareholder of Bank, had granted to Executive incentive stock options, as provided in Section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code (ISOs"), pursuant to the Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan of BOI Holding, Inc. (the "Plan") and as memorialized in three Incentive Stock Option Agreements, dated April 27, 2000, April 2, 2001, and January 28, 2002. (collectively, the "Grant"), which such agreements provide for, among other things, the vesting of such ISOs. Notwithstanding the terms of the Plan, in the event that the Bank terminates
Executive under this Agreement for any reason other than for cause pursuant to Paragraph F.I or in the event Executive's death or disability causes the termination of this Agreement, all of Executive's lSOs issued pursuant to the Grant and any subsequently issued grant of ISOs under the Plan, including all ISOs held by Executive that are not otherwise vested at such time, shall become fully vested and Executive may exercise such vested ISOs, in whole or in part, at any time within the terms of the option plan. In the event that Executive terminates this Agreement, Executive shall be entitled to exercise only those lSOs that are vested as of the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2, below), and may be exercised within a 90 day period in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.7(a) of the Plan. Neither Bank nor Holding shall enter into any transaction during or after the Term that would have the effect of canceling any of Executive's ISOs issued under the Grant.
5. Retirement, Profit Sharing and Other Plans. Executive shall be entitled to participate in any retirement plans, profit-sharing plans, salary deferral and other deferred compensation plans, medical expense reimbursement plans and other similar plans that Bank may establish with respect to all employees; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require Bank to establish or maintain any of such plans.
E. BUSINESS EXPENSES AND REIMBURSEMENT
1. Business Expenses. In addition to Bank's payment or reimbursement of costs of the type described in Paragraph E.2, Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for any ordinary and necessary business expenses incurred by Executive in the performance of his duties and in acting for or on behalf of Bank during the Term, provided that: (a) each such expenditure is of a nature qualifying it as a proper deduction on the federal and state income tax returns of Bank as a business expense and not as deductible compensation to Executive, (b) Executive furnishes to Bank adequate records and other documentary evidence required by federal and state statutes and regulations issued by the appropriate taxing authorities for the substantiation of such expenditures and deductible business expenses of Bank, and (c)
Executive's expense reimbursement reports are submitted for approval in accordance with Bank's internal policies.
2. Additional Expenses. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for
the costs and expenses set forth below, subject to the following requirements:
(a) Executive shall comply with the Bank's expense payment or reimbursement
guidelines and procedures as the Bank may amend such guidelines and procedures
or may adopt new guidelines and procedures from time to time, and (b) prior to
the Bank becoming liable for any expenses or reimbursement relating to
equipment, publications, education, training or professional organizations
pursuant to subparagraphs (iii) through (vi) below, any such expenses or
reimbursement shall be approved by Bank's board of directors or any committee or
person authorized by the board of directors to grant such approval, in advance
of incurring any such expenses. Subject to such prior approval of incurring
expenses or reimbursement and to compliance with Bank's payment or reimbursement
procedures, Bank's obligation to make any such payment or reimbursement pursuant
to this paragraph shall not be contingent on whether or to what extent a
particular expense may constitute a deductible business expense of Bank or be
excludable from Executive's taxable compensation.
(i) Automobile Allowance. Standard business mileage reimbursement will be provided to Executive.
(ii) Parking. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for his reasonable automobile parking expenses during the Term.
(iii) Equipment. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for a digital cellular telephone (including the initial purchase price and connection charges as well as all business-related air charges), and other equipment as needed. Such equipment shall be the property of the Bank and upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, all of such equipment shall be returned to Bank, as more particularly provided in Paragraph G.3.
(iv) Publications. Bank shall reimburse Executive for the costs incurred by Executive during the term for subscriptions to business-related periodical publications that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.
(v) Education and Training. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for attending business-related seminars, training programs, conferences and conventions that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties to Bank.
(vi) Professional Organizations. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for membership fees and dues of professional organizations that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.
F. TERMINATION
1. Termination for Cause. Bank may terminate this Agreement for cause at any time without advance notice and without further obligation or liability to Executive, by action of Bank's board of directors:
(a) If Executive materially fails to perform his duties in a
satisfactory manner or habitually neglects his duties; provided, however, that
before any termination pursuant to this subparagraph (a) shall become effective,
(i) Bank shall have given Executive written notice setting forth the specific
grounds for termination ("Warning Notice"), (ii) Bank shall have met and
informed Executive of the grounds for termination, of the extent and nature of
his unsatisfactory or negligent performance and of what Executive must do to
correct such deficiencies, and (iii) Executive shall have been afforded a
reasonable opportunity over a period of not less than forty-five (45) days from
the date of the Warning Notice to correct the unsatisfactory or negligent
performance described in the Warning Notice to the satisfaction of the board of
directors, provided, however, that Executive shall be terminated at the end of
such
period if Executive fails to correct his deficient performance in the manner prescribed by and to the reasonable satisfaction of the board of directors;
(b) If Executive is convicted of illegal activity which materially adversely affects Bank's reputation in the community or which evidences the lack of Executive's fitness or ability to perform Executive's duties as determined by the board of directors, in good faith;
(c) If Executive commits any act which causes termination of coverage under Bank's Bankers Blanket Bond as to Executive, as distinguished from termination of coverage as to Bank as a whole;
(d) If Executive dies;
(e) If Executive is found to be physically or mentally
incapable of performing Executive's duties for a consecutive period of ninety
(90) days or greater by the board of directors, reasonably and in good faith.
Termination pursuant to this subparagraph (e) shall become effective immediately
on written notice of termination given by Bank to Executive after the expiration
of such 90-day period;
(f) If Bank is closed or taken over by any of the bank regulatory authorities having jurisdiction over Bank's activities; or
(g) If any bank regulatory authority should successfully exercise its cease and desist powers to remove Executive from office.
The Parties understand and agree that notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement: (1) this Agreement is subject to the requirements and terms set forth in the regulations of the Office of Thrift Supervision ("OTS") contained in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39; (2) specifically, without limitation, the required provisions set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) are incorporated by reference in this Agreement as if set forth in full; (3) to the greatest extent possible, this Agreement shall be interpreted
so as to be consistent with said regulation; and (4) in the event of conflict or inconsistency between the terms of this Agreement and said regulation, the required provisions of said OTS regulation shall supersede any inconsistent or conflicting provisions of this Agreement. The termination of this Agreement for any of the reasons set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) shall be considered termination for cause pursuant to this Paragraph F.1.
2. Termination at Will. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated by either party at any time upon thirty (30) days' written notice of termination to the other Party ("Notice of Termination"). As used in this Paragraph F.2, "Date of Termination" means the thirtieth (30th) day following the date on which Notice of Termination is given.
(a) Termination by Bank. In the event Bank elects to terminate
this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the
Term, Executive shall be entitled to compensation from Bank as follows: (i) Bank
shall pay Executive his normal compensation then in effect through the Date of
Termination; and (ii) Bank shall pay to Executive a severance payment equal to
his then-current base monthly salary, multiplied by twelve (12) (the "Severance
Payment"), which amount shall be paid by the Bank in either of the following two
ways, in the sole discretion of the board of directors: (A) the Bank may pay the
Severance Payment in twelve (12) equal installments during the succeeding twelve
(12) month period beginning on the Date of Termination (the "Severance Period")
in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods, or (B) the Bank may pay the
Severance Payment in one lump sum, subject to such withholding and other
deductions as may be required by applicable law. In addition, Executive shall be
entitled to the continuation of the group insurance benefits provided under
Paragraph D.3, subject to Executive's reasonable cooperation with Bank, until
the first to occur of: (x) the expiration of the Severance Period, or (y)
Executive's commencement of work for a new employer that provides group medical
insurance benefits to Executive. Executive's acceptance of new employment or
earnings from other sources during the Severance Period shall not affect Bank's
obligation to make the Severance Payment as provided above. At any time between
Bank giving
Executive Notice of Termination and the Date of Termination, Bank, in its sole discretion, may direct Executive to cease performing services for Bank or to absent himself from Bank's premises and operations, provided that Bank shall nonetheless compensate Executive as provided above.
(b) Termination by Executive. In the event Executive elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to such compensation as may be due and payable to him through and including such Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any other compensation except as may be required by law or by written agreement, including this Agreement and the Deferred Comp Plan.
3. Effect of Termination. In the event of the termination of this Agreement prior to the completion of the Term for any of the reasons specified in Paragraphs F.1 and F.2, Executive shall be entitled to the compensation earned by Executive prior to the Date of Termination, as provided in this Agreement, computed pro rata up to and including the Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any further compensation or other benefits for services rendered after the Date of Termination, except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement. As used in this Paragraph F.3. "Date of Termination" includes the effective date of any termination, whether pursuant to Paragraph F.1 or F.2.
G. GENERAL PROVISIONS
1. Solicitation of Customers and Employees. For any period during which Executive receives any salary from Bank and for a one (1) year period following any termination of Executive from Bank, Executive shall not solicit any customers or employees of Bank to move their banking or employment relationships from Bank. Nothing in this Agreement shall preclude Executive from any mass solicitation to groups and individual follow-up solicitations of persons or businesses named in any list or data base not specifically related to or previously defined by the Bank, even though the names of certain Bank customers may appear in such list or data base.
2. Indemnification. To the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank
shall pay any and all expenses incurred by Executive in connection with the
defense or settlement of, and shall pay and satisfy any judgments, awards, fines
and penalties rendered, assessed or levied against Executive in, any judicial,
arbitration, mediation or administrative suit, action, hearing, inquiry or
proceeding (whether or not Bank is joined as a party) relating to acts or
omissions of Executive alleged to have occurred while an "agent" of Bank, or by
Bank, or by both, provided however, that Bank shall not be obligated to defend,
indemnify or hold Executive harmless from the consequences of his own negligent
or reckless act or omission or willful misconduct or dishonesty. In addition, to
the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall advance to Executive, upon
receipt of the undertaking required by California Corporations Code Section
317(f), any expenses incurred in defending against any such proceeding to which
Executive is a party or has been threatened to be made a party.
3. Return of Property. Executive expressly agrees that all manuals, documents, files, reports, studies, instruments, equipment and other materials and property used and/or developed by Bank or Executive (whether on his personal time or while performing services for the Bank) during the Term ("Preparatory Work") are the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest in such property. Executive further agrees that, subject to the execution of this Agreement, all Preparatory Work is the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest, legal or beneficial, in such Preparatory Work or in any benefits that may arise from such Preparatory Work. Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, Executive or Executive's representative shall promptly deliver possession of all of said property to Bank in original or good, operating condition, normal wear and tear excepted.
4. Notices. Any notice, request, demand or other communication required or permitted hereunder shall be considered to be properly given when personally served in writing, when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, or when delivered to a generally recognized overnight courier service (such as, for
example, Federal Express or United Parcel Service) addressed to the Party at such Party's address appearing at the beginning of this Agreement. Either Party may change its address by written notice in accordance with this paragraph.
5. Benefit of Agreement; Assignment. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Parties and their respective executors, administrators, successors and assigns. This Agreement is for the personal services of Executive and may not be assigned by Executive.
6. Applicable Law. Except to the extent governed by the laws of the United States, this Agreement is to be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California.
7. Captions and Paragraphs Headings. Captions and paragraph headings used herein are for convenience only and are not a part of this Agreement and shall not be used in constructing it.
8. Invalid Provisions. Should any provision of this Agreement for any reason be declared invalid, void, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the validity and binding effect of any remaining portion shall not be affected, and the remaining portions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect as if this Agreement had been executed with said provision eliminated.
9. Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the Parties. It supersedes any and all other agreements or understandings, whether oral or written, between the Parties with respect to the employment of Executive by Bank. The terms of this Agreement in Paragraph D.4 applicable to stock options supersede the terms of the Plan or any agreement between the Parties to the extent the terms of the Plan and any other agreement are inconsistent with the terms of Paragraph D.4. Each party to this Agreement acknowledges that no representations, inducements, promises, or agreements, oral or otherwise, have been made by any party, or anyone acting on behalf of any party, that are not embodied in this Agreement, and that no
other agreement, statement, or promise not contained in this Agreement shall be valid or binding. This Agreement, may be modified or amended only in a written document signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. The amendment or other modification of the Plan or other any other agreement generally applicable to the grant of stock options or issuance of ISOs by the Holding Company to employees, including Executive will not supersede the terms of this Agreement pertaining to ISOs without the express written approval of the Parties contained in a writing expressly stating its intent to supersede the specific terms of this Agreement applicable to ISOs. Additionally, terms of this Agreement will prevail in any conflicts with other agreements.
10. Attorney's Fees. Each party shall bear his or its own attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and delivery of this Agreement. However, if any action is instituted to enforce or interpret any of the obligations set forth in this Agreement, the prevailing party(ies) shall be entitled to recover its (their) reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the enforcement or interpretive action.
11. Trade Secrets. To the extent that during the Term Bank develops any trade secrets, as that term is defined under California law, the Parties agree that such trade secrets belong to and are the property of the Bank. Executive agrees that for a period of one (1) year after the termination of this Agreement. Executive shall not disclose any of Bank's trade secrets, directly or indirectly, or use them in any way in contravention of the rights of the Bank to such trade secrets.
12. Restricted Securities. The ISOs, the underlying common stock issuable upon the exercise of the lSOs and the shares of Holding's common stock issuable pursuant thereto shall be issued by Holding without registration under the Securities Act of 1933, or registration or qualification of such securities under any state securities or "blue sky" laws in reliance upon certain exemptions from registration or qualification, as the case may he. Upon issuance, such securities shall be considered "restricted securities," subject to certain limitations on transfer or other disposition imposed under applicable federal and state securities or "blue sky" laws and regulations
and such restrictions shall be set forth in one or more legends appearing on the certificate or agreement evidencing such securities.
13. Accounting Principles. Wherever in this Agreement, including any exhibit hereto, there is a reference to or need to use or rely upon accounting principles and procedures, such accounting principles and procedures shall be those used by the Bank in the preparation and filing of its reports of financial condition and operations in the form of Thrift Financial Reports, as filed with the Office of Thrift Supervision in the ordinary course ("TFRs"). By way of example, such items as Total Assets and loan loss reserves shall be computed as they are computed for purposes of reporting such information in the Bank's TFRs.
The Parties execute this Agreement as of the Effective Date first above written.
EXECUTIVE: BANK OF INTERNET, USA
a federal savings bank /s/ Patrick Dunn By: /s/ Jerry Englert ------------------------------ --------------------------------- Patrick Dunn Name: Jerry Englert 2864 Anaheim Street Title: Chairman of the Board Escondido, CA 92025 Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus ----------------------------- Secretary |
CONSENT OF BOFI HOLDING, INC.
By execution of this Agreement below, BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation, consents to and agrees to perform its obligations under Paragraph D.4.
BofI Holding, Inc. By: /s/ Jerry Englert Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus ----------------------------------------- ------------------------ Jerry Englert, Chairman of the Board Name: C. Michelle Paulus Title: Secretary |
EXHIBIT A
PRE-TAX NET INCOME BENEFIT
The following terms apply to the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit provided in Paragraph C.2 of the Agreement.
A. Definitions.
1. "Adjusted Net Income" refers to Net Income Before Income Taxes
(as defined below) as reported in a TFR (as defined below), reduced by the
amount of Specific Reserves (as defined below), as reported in a TFR, and
increased by the sum of (a) the amount of General Reserves (as defined below),
(b) the amount of any expense accrued by the Bank for the Pre-Tax Net Income
Benefit, and (c) the amount of any non-taxable or tax preferred income "grossed
up" to its pre-tax equivalent or equivalent income without such tax preference
(the "Tax Preferred Income "gross up").
2. "Average Asset Balance" refers to the average amount of Total Assets reported by the Bank on a daily for the period covered by a TFR.
3. "Asset Target" refers to the level of Total Assets reported in the Bank's TFR at June 30, 2004 and at June 30, 2005. The Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2004 is $399,098,000 and is referred to as the "2004 Asset Target" and the Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2005 is $532,963,000 and is referred to as the "2005 Asset Target."
4. "Bonus Calculation Table" refers to the following table showing the Bonus Percentage (which will be applied as a percentage of Net Income Before Income Taxes earned by Executive) if the Bank attains certain levels of profitability (expressed as a percentage attained by dividing Adjusted Net Income by the Average Asset Balance):
If the Bank's Return on Assets Before Taxes (as defined below)
is
Bonus Percentage at least: but not greater than: ---------- -------- -------------------- 0.05 1.200% 1.399% 0.10 1.400% 1.799% 0.20 1.800% 2.199% 0.30 2.200% No limit |
5. "TFR" refers to the Thrift Financial Report of the Bank, consisting of various financial statements, including balance sheet, statement of operations and other statements, prepared by the Bank in the ordinary course and filed quarterly with the Office of Thrift Supervision.
6. "General Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of a reserve or an allowance against loan losses generally and not allocable to one or more specific assets, as set forth in its TFR for the applicable period.
7. "Net Income Before Income Taxes" refers to the amount reported as "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes" in a TFR for the applicable period.
8. "Deferred Comp Plan" has the meaning set forth in Section C.3 of the Agreement.
9. "Pre-Tax Net Income" refers to the "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes," as set forth on the Statement of Operations included in a TFR.
10. "Return on Assets Before Taxes" refers to the percentage derived from dividing (a) the Adjusted Net Income for such TFR period, by (b) the Average Asset Balance with respect to such period.
10. "Specific Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of reserves or allowances against loan losses specifically attributable to actual losses or to prospective losses from one or more identified assets, as set forth in a TFR.
B. Calculation of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit
1. Executive shall be entitled to a Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and June 30, 2005. All calculations leading to the computation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit for each of such years shall be based upon the results reported in the Bank's TFRs for each such 12-month period. No Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit shall be calculated or payable with respect to any period less than a full 12-month fiscal year.
2. As promptly as possible after the filing of the TFR for the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and 2005, as the case may be, but in no event later than 30 days after such filing, the Bank shall (i) determine the Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, (ii) calculate the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with this Agreement, and (iii) report the results of such calculation to Executive and the board of directors of the Bank. As promptly as possible after reporting such calculation, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, Executive and the Bank shall meet to confirm their agreement on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. On the date that the Executive and the Bank mutually agree on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit (the "Determination Date"), the Executive shall have a right to the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit as provided in this Agreement.
3. As a condition precedent to Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the 2004 and 2005 fiscal years, the Bank shall have achieved the 2004 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2004, and the Bank shall have achieved the 2005 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2005.
4. Provided that the Bank shall have achieved the applicable Asset Target and subject to the provisions of Paragraph C.3, below, governing the payment and crediting, as the case may be, of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in an amount equal to the product of multiplying: (1) the Bonus Percentage for which the Executive is eligible for such fiscal year, based on the Bank's Return on Assets Before Income Taxes, as derived from the Bonus Calculation Table, times (2) Executive's rate of annual salary payable as of the end of such fiscal year.
5. The following is an example only of the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Assume: that the Bank has achieved the applicable Asset Target.
Net Income Before Income Taxes (from TFR) $ 4,600,000 Adjustments: Add/Increase: General Reserves $ 300,000 Accrued Expense for Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit $ 60,000 Tax Preferred Income "gross up" $ 70,000 Subtract/Reduce: Specific Reserves/Charge-Offs $ (20,000) Adjusted Net Income $ 5,010,000 ============ Average Asset Balance $405,000,000 ============ Return on Assets Before Taxes: Adjusted Net Income / Average Asset Balance = $ 5,010,000 = 1.237% ------------ $405,000,000 |
Bonus Percentage based on 1.237% Return on Average Assets = 0.05
(from Bonus Calculation Table)
Calculation of Bonus (assuming at end of fiscal year, Executive's rate of annual salary is $152,000 per annum):
Bonus Percentage X Executive's Annual Salary = Bonus
C. Payment and Crediting of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit
1. Within thirty days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and subject to the Deferred Comp Plan.
2. As of each Determination Date, Executive is entitled to receive no more than one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in cash (the "Cash Portion") and at least one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in the form of a credit to Executive's Account (as such term is defined under the Deferred Comp Plan)("Executive's Account. In accordance with the requirements of the Deferred Comp Plan, Executive shall make in a timely manner any and all elections with respect to the Deferred Comp Plan, including, but not limited to, elections with respect to the deferral of compensation.
3. Within 30 days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall pay the Cash Portion, if any, to Executive in cash, subject to any withholding required by law.
4. The Deferred Portion shall be credited to Executive's Account effective on July 1 of the year closest to the calculation date of the specific Pre Tax Net Income Benefit. Installments vest annually over 3 years on July 1, and annually on July 1 thereafter until fully vested as provide in the deferred compensation plan.
5. If this Agreement is terminated by Executive pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(b) or by the Bank for cause (other than due to Executive's death or disability) pursuant to Paragraph F.1, Executive shall be entitled only to that part of the Deferred Portion that has been vested prior to the Date of Termination.
6. If this Agreement is terminated due to Executive's death or disability or by the Bank without cause pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(a), then, on the Date of Termination of this Agreement on such basis, Executive's Account shall be credited with all remaining portions of any Deferred Portion that have not previously been fully vested as of such Date of Termination.
7. In the event of the termination of Executive's employment, the amount in Executive's Account shall be distributed to Executive in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.
EXHIBIT B
SPECIAL DISCRETIONARY CONTRIBUTION
The Bank acknowledges that since his joining the Bank, Executive has been a major contributor to the success of the Bank. In recognition of that valuable contribution, the Bank agrees that Executive is entitled to a special Discretionary Contribution in the amount of $250,000 (the "Special Discretionary Contribution"), payable subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Eligibility. Executive shall be eligible for the Special Discretionary Contribution when the Total Assets of the Bank as of the end of a calendar month, as reported by the Bank in the ordinary course, shall equal or exceed $500,000,000. The first day of the calendar month immediately following the month in which the Bank shall have reported at month end Total Assets equal to or exceeding $500,000,000, is referred in this Agreement as the "Eligibility Date."
2. Allocation to Deferred Comp Plan. The Special Discretionary Contribution shall be allocated and credited to Executive's Account in the Deferred Comp Plan in three installments as follows, except as provided in Paragraph 3, below:
a. First Allocation. On the first anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank shall allocate and credit to Executive's Account $100,000 of the Special Discretionary Contribution.
b. Second Allocation. On the second anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank shall allocate and credit to Executive's Account $100,000 of the Special Discretionary Contribution.
c. Third Allocation. On the third anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank shall allocate and credit to Executive's Account the remaining $50,000 of the Special Discretionary Contribution.
All amounts allocated and credited to Executive's Account in the Deferred Comp Plan shall be allocated and credited irrevocably and shall be held subject to the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.
3. Termination. The following terms govern the allocation and payment of the Special Discretionary Contribution only in the event this Agreement is terminated before all of the Special Discretionary Contribution has been allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan. If at the time of termination of this Agreement all of the Special Discretionary Contribution has been allocated and credited to the Deferred Comp Plan, the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan alone shall govern the disposition of the amounts in Executive's Account.
a. Termination by Death or Disability of Executive and Termination by the Bank Without Cause. In the event this Agreement is terminated pursuant to
Paragraph F.1(d) (death of Executive), Paragraph F.1(e)(disability of Executive) or Paragraph F.2(a) (by Bank upon giving Notice of Termination):
(1) The portion, if any, of the Special Discretionary Contribution that was previously allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to such Date of Termination shall be distributed in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.
(2) The portion, if any, of the Special Discretionary Contribution that has not already been allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to the Date of Termination for such reason shall be paid by the Bank directly to Executive in a lump cash sum within 30 business days of the Date of Termination.
b. Termination By Bank for Cause and Termination by Executive. In the event this Agreement is terminated by the Bank for cause pursuant to Paragraph F.1 (other than for death or disability of Executive) or by the Executive pursuant to Paragraph F.2(b)(upon Executive giving Notice of Termination):
(1) The portion, if any, of the Special Discretionary Contribution that was previously allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to such Date of Termination shall be distributed in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.
(2) The portion or portions, if any, of the Special Discretionary Contribution that has not already been allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to the Date of Termination for such reason shall be paid by the Bank directly to Executive (i) in the amount(s) and (ii) at the time(s), of the remaining scheduled allocation(s) set forth in Paragraph 2, above.
c. Examples. For purposes of the following examples, assume the Eligibility Date is October 1, 2004.
(1) Example 1: Assume that this Agreement is terminated before the one year anniversary of the Eligibility Date for a reason described in Paragraph 3a., above (death or disability of Executive or by Bank without cause). As of the date of such termination, no portion of the Special Discretionary Contribution has been allocated or credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan. In this case, all of the $250,000 Special Discretionary Contribution shall be paid to Executive directly by the Bank in a lump cash sum within 30 business days of the Date of Termination.
(2) Example 2: Assume that on the first anniversary of the
Eligibility Date, October 1, 2005, the Bank allocated and credited $100,000 to
Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan. Assume further that this
Agreement is terminated on January 10, 2006 for a reason described in Paragraph
3.a., above (that is, due to the death or disability of Executive or terminated
by the Bank without cause). Within 30 days of January 10, 2006, the remaining
portion of the Special Discretionary Contribution that has not previously been
allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan (that
is, $150,000) will be paid by the Bank to the Executive or his estate, as the
case may be, in a lump cash sum. The portion of the Special Discretionary
Contribution that was previously allocated and credited to Executive's Account
under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to such Date of Termination (that is, the
$100,000 allocated and credited on October 1, 2005) shall be distributed in
accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.
(3) Example 3: Assume that this Agreement is terminated on January 10, 2006 for a reason described in Paragraph 3b., above (the Executive resigns or is terminated by Bank for cause). In that case, no action of any kind shall be taken with respect to the Special Discretionary Contribution on or about the Date of Termination, January 10, 2006. However, on October 1, 2006, the second anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank will pay $100,000 directly to Executive in a lump cash sum, and on October 1, 2007, the third anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank will pay $50,000 to Executive directly in a lump cash sum. The portion of the Special Discretionary Contribution that was previously allocated and credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan prior to such Date of Termination (that is, the $100,000 allocated and credited on October 1, 2005) shall be distributed in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.
(4) Example 4: Assume that this Agreement is terminated on January 10, 2005 for a reason described in Paragraph 3b., above (the Executive resigns or is terminated by Bank for cause). As of that date, no portion of the Special Discretionary Contribution has yet been allocated or credited to Executive's Account under the Deferred Comp Plan. In that case, no action of any kind shall be taken with respect to the Special Discretionary Contribution on or about the Date of Termination, January 10, 2005. However, on October 1, 2005, the first anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank will pay $100,000 directly to Executive in a lump cash sum, and on October 1, 2006, the second anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank will pay $100,000 directly to Executive in a lump cash sum, and on October 1, 2007, the third anniversary of the Eligibility Date, the Bank will pay $50,000 to Executive directly in a lump cash sum.
EXHIBIT 10.8
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT
This Employment Agreement (the "Agreement") is dated for reference purposes and entered into as of July 1, 2003 (the "Effective Date"), by and between Bank of Internet USA, a federal savings bank ("Bank'), having a principal place of business at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego, California, and Andrew Micheletti ("Executive"), whose address is 831 Havenhurst Drive, La Jolla, CA 92037. Bank and Executive are sometimes collectively referred to in this Agreement as the "Parties." As used in this Agreement, the term "Effective Date" means the date this Employment Agreement becomes effective.
RECITALS
A. Bank desires to employ Executive and avail itself of his skill, knowledge and experience in the management of Bank's business.
B. The Parties desire to set forth in this Agreement the terms of Executive's employment by Bank.
The Parties therefore agree as follows:
A. TERM OF EMPLOYMENT
1. Term. Bank employs Executive to perform the duties described in this Agreement, and Executive accepts such employment, for a term of one year commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the day preceding the one year anniversary of the Effective Date, except (i) that the Term of this Agreement shall be renewed without further notice for a one year period commencing on the annual anniversary date of the Effective Date (the "Anniversary Date") and on each subsequent Anniversary Date following any such one year period of employment, and (ii) this Agreement may be terminated prior to the end of such Term by Bank or Employee in accordance with and subject to the terms of Paragraph F. (Termination) of this Agreement, including, but not limited to, Paragraph F.2.(a) providing Executive with a
Severance Payment (as defined therein) upon termination of this Agreement by Bank other than for cause. When used in this Agreement, "Term" shall refer to the entire period of employment of Executive by Bank under this Agreement.
B. DUTIES OF EXECUTIVE
Subject to the powers and directions of the policies, procedures and directives of the board of directors, as adopted and modified from time to time, Executive shall perform the duties and shall have the titles of Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. During the Term, Executive shall perform exclusively for Bank the services contemplated in this Agreement to be performed by Executive, faithfully, diligently and to the best of Executive's ability, consistent with the highest and best standards of the banking industry and in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations and the Bank's federal stock charter and bylaws. Except as permitted by the prior written consent of Bank's board of directors, Executive shall devote Executive's entire working time, ability and attention to the business of Bank during the Term.
C. COMPENSATION
1. Base Salary. In consideration of Executive's services to be performed under this Agreement, Bank shall pay or cause to be paid to Executive a base salary in the following amounts, payable in equal installments in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods:
a. $133,000 per annum, effective as of July 1, 2003.
b. $151,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2004, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $399,098,000.
c. $168,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2005, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $532,964,000.
Executive's salary shall be reviewed by the board of directors from time to time at its discretion and Executive shall receive such additional or other salary increases, if any, as the board of directors, in its sole discretion, shall determine.
2. One-Time Deferred Compensation. Executive is entitled to one-time deferred compensation in the amount of $50,000 (the "One-Time Deferred Compensation"), subject to the terms of this Agreement and the Bank of Internet USA Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, adopted effective as of July 1, 2003 (the "Deferred Comp Plan". The Executive's deferred compensation account shall be credited for $50,000 plus 4% on July 1, 2004. The One-Time Deferred Compensation amount and all earnings in the account shall vest to the Executive on the following:
July 1, 2004................................... 20% July 1, 2005................................... 40% July 1, 2006................................... 60% July 1, 2007................................... 80% July 1, 2008................................... 100% |
The bank shall pay 4% only on July 1, 2004. Thereafter, investment of the Executive's Account shall comply with the investment provision of the Deferred Comp Plan.
3. Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Executive shall be entitled to a benefit based on the pre-tax net income of the Bank, as calculated in accordance with the formula and terms set forth in Exhibit A, the terms of which are incorporated by this reference as if set forth in full in this paragraph (the "Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit"). The amount of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, if any, to which Executive shall be entitled shall be subject to the terms governing the deferral of such benefit set forth in Exhibit A. Executive shall be eligible for such other benefits and other incentive compensation, if any, that may be made available to the Bank's senior executive officers from time to time by the board of directors in its sole discretion.
D. EXECUTIVE BENEFITS
1. Vacation. Executive shall be entitled to vacation as prescribed in the Bank's Employee Manual maintained on the Bank's Intranet. In the event this Agreement is terminated pursuant to Paragraph F.2, Bank reserves the right to require Executive to take any unused vacation time prior to the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2).
2. Directors and Officers Liability Insurance. Bank shall provide for Executive, at Bank's expense, coverage under a directors and officers liability insurance policy in such amounts and on such terms as may be approved by Bank's board of directors and as may be consistent with such coverage provided by Bank for its other officers and directors.
3. Group Insurance Benefits; and Death Benefit. Executive shall participate in all group insurance plans provided by Bank for all of its senior executive officers at Bank's expense to the same extent and on the same terms as Bank's other senior executive officers. Throughout the term of employment, the Bank shall, at its sole cost, will provide a death benefit on the life of Executive in an amount equal to three times Executive's then-current annual salary.
4. Stock Options. As of Effective Date, BofI Holding, Inc. a Delaware corporation ("Holding"), the sole shareholder of Bank, had granted to Executive incentive stock options, as provided in Section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code (ISOs"), pursuant to the Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan of BOI Holding, Inc. (the "Plan") and as memorialized in two Incentive Stock Option Agreements, dated April 2, 2001, and January 28, 2002. (collectively, the "Grant"), which such agreements provide for, among other things, the vesting of such ISOs. Notwithstanding the terms of the Plan, in the event that the Bank terminates Executive under this Agreement for any reason other than for cause pursuant to Paragraph F.I or in the event Executive's death or disability causes the termination of this Agreement, all of Executive's lSOs issued pursuant to the Grant and any subsequently issued grant of
ISOs under the Plan, including all ISOs held by Executive that are not otherwise vested at such time, shall become fully vested and Executive may exercise such vested ISOs, in whole or in part, at any time within the terms of the option plan. In the event that Executive terminates this Agreement, Executive shall be entitled to exercise only those lSOs that are vested as of the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2, below), and may be exercised within a 90 day period in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.7(a) of the Plan. Neither Bank nor Holding shall enter into any transaction during or after the Term that would have the effect of canceling any of Executive's ISOs issued under the Grant.
5. Retirement, Profit Sharing and Other Plans. Executive shall be entitled to participate in any retirement plans, profit-sharing plans, salary deferral and other deferred compensation plans, medical expense reimbursement plans and other similar plans that Bank may establish with respect to all employees; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require Bank to establish or maintain any of such plans.
E. BUSINESS EXPENSES AND REIMBURSEMENT
1. Business Expenses. In addition to Bank's payment or reimbursement of costs of the type described in Paragraph E.2, Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for any ordinary and necessary business expenses incurred by Executive in the performance of his duties and in acting for or on behalf of Bank during the Term, provided that: (a) each such expenditure is of a nature qualifying it as a proper deduction on the federal and state income tax returns of Bank as a business expense and not as deductible compensation to Executive, (b) Executive furnishes to Bank adequate records and other documentary evidence required by federal and state statutes and regulations issued by the appropriate taxing authorities for the substantiation of such expenditures and deductible business expenses of Bank, and (c) Executive's expense reimbursement reports are submitted for approval in accordance with Bank's internal policies.
2. Additional Expenses. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for
the costs and expenses set forth below, subject to the following requirements:
(a) Executive shall comply with the Bank's expense payment or reimbursement
guidelines and procedures as the Bank may amend such guidelines and procedures
or may adopt new guidelines and procedures from time to time, and (b) prior to
the Bank becoming liable for any expenses or reimbursement relating to
equipment, publications, education, training or professional organizations
pursuant to subparagraphs (iii) through (vi) below, any such expenses or
reimbursement shall be approved by Bank's board of directors or any committee or
person authorized by the board of directors to grant such approval, in advance
of incurring any such expenses. Subject to such prior approval of incurring
expenses or reimbursement and to compliance with Bank's payment or reimbursement
procedures, Bank's obligation to make any such payment or reimbursement pursuant
to this paragraph shall not be contingent on whether or to what extent a
particular expense may constitute a deductible business expense of Bank or be
excludable from Executive's taxable compensation.
(i) Automobile Allowance. Standard business mileage reimbursement will be provided to Executive.
(ii) Parking. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for his reasonable automobile parking expenses during the Term.
(iii) Equipment. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for a digital cellular telephone (including the initial purchase price and connection charges as well as all business-related air charges), and other equipment as needed. Such equipment shall be the property of the Bank and upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, all of such equipment shall be returned to Bank, as more particularly provided in Paragraph G.3.
(iv) Publications. Bank shall reimburse Executive for the costs incurred by Executive during the term for subscriptions to business-related periodical
publications that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.
(v) Education and Training. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for attending business-related seminars, training programs, conferences and conventions that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties to Bank.
(vi) Professional Organizations. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for membership fees and dues of professional organizations that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.
F. TERMINATION
1. Termination for Cause. Bank may terminate this Agreement for cause at any time without advance notice and without further obligation or liability to Executive, by action of Bank's board of directors:
(a) If Executive materially fails to perform his duties in a
satisfactory manner or habitually neglects his duties; provided, however, that
before any termination pursuant to this subparagraph (a) shall become effective,
(i) Bank shall have given Executive written notice setting forth the specific
grounds for termination ("Warning Notice"), (ii) Bank shall have met and
informed Executive of the grounds for termination, of the extent and nature of
his unsatisfactory or negligent performance and of what Executive must do to
correct such deficiencies, and (iii) Executive shall have been afforded a
reasonable opportunity over a period of not less than forty-five (45) days from
the date of the Warning Notice to correct the unsatisfactory or negligent
performance described in the Warning Notice to the satisfaction of the board of
directors, provided, however, that Executive shall be terminated at the end of
such period if Executive fails to correct his deficient performance in the
manner prescribed by and to the reasonable satisfaction of the board of
directors;
(b) If Executive is convicted of illegal activity which materially adversely affects Bank's reputation in the community or which evidences the lack of Executive's fitness or ability to perform Executive's duties as determined by the board of directors, in good faith;
(c) If Executive commits any act which causes termination of coverage under Bank's Bankers Blanket Bond as to Executive, as distinguished from termination of coverage as to Bank as a whole;
(d) If Executive dies;
(e) If Executive is found to be physically or mentally
incapable of performing Executive's duties for a consecutive period of ninety
(90) days or greater by the board of directors, reasonably and in good faith.
Termination pursuant to this subparagraph (e) shall become effective immediately
on written notice of termination given by Bank to Executive after the expiration
of such 90-day period;
(f) If Bank is closed or taken over by any of the bank regulatory authorities having jurisdiction over Bank's activities; or
(g) If any bank regulatory authority should successfully exercise its cease and desist powers to remove Executive from office.
The Parties understand and agree that notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement: (1) this Agreement is subject to the requirements and terms set forth in the regulations of the Office of Thrift Supervision ("OTS") contained in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39; (2) specifically, without limitation, the required provisions set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) are incorporated by reference in this Agreement as if set forth in full; (3) to the greatest extent possible, this Agreement shall be interpreted so as to be consistent with said regulation; and (4) in the event of conflict or inconsistency between the terms of this Agreement and said regulation, the required
provisions of said OTS regulation shall supersede any inconsistent or conflicting provisions of this Agreement. The termination of this Agreement for any of the reasons set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) shall be considered termination for cause pursuant to this Paragraph F.1.
2. Termination at Will. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated by either party at any time upon thirty (30) days' written notice of termination to the other Party ("Notice of Termination"). As used in this Paragraph F.2, "Date of Termination" means the thirtieth (30th) day following the date on which Notice of Termination is given.
(a) Termination by Bank. In the event Bank elects to terminate
this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the
Term, Executive shall be entitled to compensation from Bank as follows: (i) Bank
shall pay Executive his normal compensation then in effect through the Date of
Termination; and (ii) Bank shall pay to Executive a severance payment equal to
his then-current base monthly salary, multiplied by twelve (12) (the "Severance
Payment"), which amount shall be paid by the Bank in either of the following two
ways, in the sole discretion of the board of directors: (A) the Bank may pay the
Severance Payment in twelve (12) equal installments during the succeeding twelve
(12) month period beginning on the Date of Termination (the "Severance Period")
in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods, or (B) the Bank may pay the
Severance Payment in one lump sum, subject to such withholding and other
deductions as may be required by applicable law. In addition, Executive shall be
entitled to the continuation of the group insurance benefits provided under
Paragraph D.3, subject to Executive's reasonable cooperation with Bank, until
the first to occur of: (x) the expiration of the Severance Period, or (y)
Executive's commencement of work for a new employer that provides group medical
insurance benefits to Executive. Executive's acceptance of new employment or
earnings from other sources during the Severance Period shall not affect Bank's
obligation to make the Severance Payment as provided above. At any time between
Bank giving Executive Notice of Termination and the Date of Termination, Bank,
in its sole discretion, may direct Executive to cease performing services for
Bank or to absent
himself from Bank's premises and operations, provided that Bank shall nonetheless compensate Executive as provided above.
(b) Termination by Executive. In the event Executive elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to such compensation as may be due and payable to him through and including such Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any other compensation except as may be required by law or by written agreement, including this Agreement and the Deferred Comp Plan.
3. Effect of Termination. In the event of the termination of this Agreement prior to the completion of the Term for any of the reasons specified in Paragraphs F.1 and F.2, Executive shall be entitled to the compensation earned by Executive prior to the Date of Termination, as provided in this Agreement, computed pro rata up to and including the Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any further compensation or other benefits for services rendered after the Date of Termination, except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement. As used in this Paragraph F.3. "Date of Termination" includes the effective date of any termination, whether pursuant to Paragraph F.1 or F.2.
G. GENERAL PROVISIONS
1. Solicitation of Customers and Employees. For any period during which Executive receives any salary from Bank and for a one (1) year period following any termination of Executive from Bank, Executive shall not solicit any customers or employees of Bank to move their banking or employment relationships from Bank. Nothing in this Agreement shall preclude Executive from any mass solicitation to groups and individual follow-up solicitations of persons or businesses named in any list or data base not specifically related to or previously defined by the Bank, even though the names of certain Bank customers may appear in such list or data base.
2. Indemnification. To the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank
shall pay any and all expenses incurred by Executive in connection with the
defense or settlement of, and shall pay and satisfy any judgments, awards, fines
and penalties rendered, assessed or levied against Executive in, any judicial,
arbitration, mediation or administrative suit, action, hearing, inquiry or
proceeding (whether or not Bank is joined as a party) relating to acts or
omissions of Executive alleged to have occurred while an "agent" of Bank, or by
Bank, or by both, provided however, that Bank shall not be obligated to defend,
indemnify or hold Executive harmless from the consequences of his own negligent
or reckless act or omission or willful misconduct or dishonesty. In addition, to
the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall advance to Executive, upon
receipt of the undertaking required by California Corporations Code Section
317(f), any expenses incurred in defending against any such proceeding to which
Executive is a party or has been threatened to be made a party.
3. Return of Property. Executive expressly agrees that all manuals, documents, files, reports, studies, instruments, equipment and other materials and property used and/or developed by Bank or Executive (whether on his personal time or while performing services for the Bank) during the Term ("Preparatory Work") are the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest in such property. Executive further agrees that, subject to the execution of this Agreement, all Preparatory Work is the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest, legal or beneficial, in such Preparatory Work or in any benefits that may arise from such Preparatory Work. Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, Executive or Executive's representative shall promptly deliver possession of all of said property to Bank in original or good, operating condition, normal wear and tear excepted.
4. Notices. Any notice, request, demand or other communication required or permitted hereunder shall be considered to be properly given when personally served in writing, when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, or when delivered to a generally recognized overnight courier service (such as, for example, Federal Express or United Parcel Service) addressed to the Party at such
Party's address appearing at the beginning of this Agreement. Either Party may change its address by written notice in accordance with this paragraph.
5. Benefit of Agreement; Assignment. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Parties and their respective executors, administrators, successors and assigns. This Agreement is for the personal services of Executive and may not be assigned by Executive.
6. Applicable Law. Except to the extent governed by the laws of the United States, this Agreement is to be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California.
7. Captions and Paragraphs Headings. Captions and paragraph headings used herein are for convenience only and are not a part of this Agreement and shall not be used in constructing it.
8. Invalid Provisions. Should any provision of this Agreement for any reason be declared invalid, void, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the validity and binding effect of any remaining portion shall not be affected, and the remaining portions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect as if this Agreement had been executed with said provision eliminated.
9. Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the Parties. It supersedes any and all other agreements or understandings, whether oral or written, between the Parties with respect to the employment of Executive by Bank. The terms of this Agreement in Paragraph D.4 applicable to stock options supersede the terms of the Plan or any agreement between the Parties to the extent the terms of the Plan and any other agreement are inconsistent with the terms of Paragraph D.4. Each party to this Agreement acknowledges that no representations, inducements, promises, or agreements, oral or otherwise, have been made by any party, or anyone acting on behalf of any party, that are not embodied in this Agreement, and that no other agreement, statement, or promise not contained in this Agreement shall be valid
or binding. This Agreement, may be modified or amended only in a written document signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. The amendment or other modification of the Plan or other any other agreement generally applicable to the grant of stock options or issuance of ISOs by the Holding Company to employees, including Executive will not supersede the terms of this Agreement pertaining to ISOs without the express written approval of the Parties contained in a writing expressly stating its intent to supersede the specific terms of this Agreement applicable to ISOs. Additionally, terms of this Agreement will prevail in any conflicts with other agreements.
10. Attorney's Fees. Each party shall bear his or its own attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and delivery of this Agreement. However, if any action is instituted to enforce or interpret any of the obligations set forth in this Agreement, the prevailing party(ies) shall be entitled to recover its (their) reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the enforcement or interpretive action.
11. Trade Secrets. To the extent that during the Term Bank develops any trade secrets, as that term is defined under California law, the Parties agree that such trade secrets belong to and are the property of the Bank. Executive agrees that for a period of one (1) year after the termination of this Agreement. Executive shall not disclose any of Bank's trade secrets, directly or indirectly, or use them in any way in contravention of the rights of the Bank to such trade secrets.
12. Restricted Securities. The ISOs, the underlying common stock issuable upon the exercise of the lSOs and the shares of Holding's common stock issuable pursuant thereto shall be issued by Holding without registration under the Securities Act of 1933, or registration or qualification of such securities under any state securities or "blue sky" laws in reliance upon certain exemptions from registration or qualification, as the case may he. Upon issuance, such securities shall be considered "restricted securities," subject to certain limitations on transfer or other disposition imposed under applicable federal and state securities or "blue sky" laws and regulations
and such restrictions shall be set forth in one or more legends appearing on the certificate or agreement evidencing such securities.
13. Accounting Principles. Wherever in this Agreement, including any exhibit hereto, there is a reference to or need to use or rely upon accounting principles and procedures, such accounting principles and procedures shall be those used by the Bank in the preparation and filing of its reports of financial condition and operations in the form of Thrift Financial Reports, as filed with the Office of Thrift Supervision in the ordinary course ("TFRs"). By way of example, such items as Total Assets and loan loss reserves shall be computed as they are computed for purposes of reporting such information in the Bank's TFRs.
The Parties execute this Agreement as of the Effective Date first above written.
EXECUTIVE: BANK OF INTERNET, USA a federal savings bank /s/ Andrew Micheletti By: /s/ Jerry Englert ------------------------------------ -------------------------------- Andrew Micheletti Name: Jerry Englert 831 Havenhurst Drive Title: Chairman of the Board La Jolla, CA 92037 Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus ---------------------------- Secretary |
CONSENT OF BOFI HOLDING, INC.
By execution of this Agreement below, BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation, consents to and agrees to perform its obligations under Paragraph D.4.
BofI Holding, Inc. By: /s/ Jerry Englert Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus --------------------------------- ---------------------------- Jerry Englert, Chairman of the Board Name: C. Michelle Paulus Title: Secretary |
EXHIBIT A
PRE-TAX NET INCOME BENEFIT
The following terms apply to the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit provided in Paragraph C.2 of the Agreement.
A. Definitions.
1. "Adjusted Net Income" refers to Net Income Before Income Taxes
(as defined below) as reported in a TFR (as defined below), reduced by the
amount of Specific Reserves (as defined below), as reported in a TFR, and
increased by the sum of (a) the amount of General Reserves (as defined below),
(b) the amount of any expense accrued by the Bank for the Pre-Tax Net Income
Benefit, and (c) the amount of any non-taxable or tax preferred income "grossed
up" to its pre-tax equivalent or equivalent income without such tax preference
(the "Tax Preferred Income "gross up").
2. "Average Asset Balance" refers to the average amount of Total Assets reported by the Bank on a daily for the period covered by a TFR.
3. "Asset Target" refers to the level of Total Assets reported in the Bank's TFR at June 30, 2004 and at June 30, 2005. The Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2004 is $399,098,000 and is referred to as the "2004 Asset Target" and the Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2005 is $532,963,000 and is referred to as the "2005 Asset Target."
4. "Bonus Calculation Table" refers to the following table showing the Bonus Percentage (which will be applied as a percentage of Net Income Before Income Taxes earned by Executive) if the Bank attains certain levels of profitability (expressed as a percentage attained by dividing Adjusted Net Income by the Average Asset Balance):
If the Bank's Return on Assets Before Taxes (as defined below) is
Bonus Percentage at least: but not greater than: ---------- -------- -------------------- 0.05 1.200% 1.399% 0.10 1.400% 1.799% 0.20 1.800% 2.199% 0.30 2.200% No limit |
5. "TFR" refers to the Thrift Financial Report of the Bank, consisting of various financial statements, including balance sheet, statement of operations and other statements, prepared by the Bank in the ordinary course and filed quarterly with the Office of Thrift Supervision.
6. "General Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of a reserve or an allowance against loan losses generally and not allocable to one or more specific assets, as set forth in its TFR for the applicable period.
7. "Net Income Before Income Taxes" refers to the amount reported as "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes" in a TFR for the applicable period.
8. "Deferred Comp Plan" has the meaning set forth in Section C.3 of the Agreement.
9. "Pre-Tax Net Income" refers to the "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes," as set forth on the Statement of Operations included in a TFR.
10. "Return on Assets Before Taxes" refers to the percentage derived from dividing (a) the Adjusted Net Income for such TFR period, by (b) the Average Asset Balance with respect to such period.
10. "Specific Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of reserves or allowances against loan losses specifically attributable to actual losses or to prospective losses from one or more identified assets, as set forth in a TFR.
B. Calculation of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit
1. Executive shall be entitled to a Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and June 30, 2005. All calculations leading to the computation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit for each of such years shall be based upon the results reported in the Bank's TFRs for each such 12-month period. No Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit shall be calculated or payable with respect to any period less than a full 12-month fiscal year.
2. As promptly as possible after the filing of the TFR for the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and 2005, as the case may be, but in no event later than 30 days after such filing, the Bank shall (i) determine the Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, (ii) calculate the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with this Agreement, and (iii) report the results of such calculation to Executive and the board of directors of the Bank. As promptly as possible after reporting such calculation, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, Executive and the Bank shall meet to confirm their agreement on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. On the date that the Executive and the Bank mutually agree on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit (the "Determination Date"), the Executive shall have a right to the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit as provided in this Agreement.
3. As a condition precedent to Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the 2004 and 2005 fiscal years, the Bank shall have achieved the 2004 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2004, and the Bank shall have achieved the 2005 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2005.
4. Provided that the Bank shall have achieved the applicable Asset Target and subject to the provisions of Paragraph C.3, below, governing the payment and crediting, as the case may be, of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in an amount equal to the product of multiplying: (1) the Bonus Percentage for which the Executive is eligible for such fiscal year, based on the Bank's Return on Assets Before Income Taxes, as derived from the Bonus Calculation Table, times (2) Executive's rate of annual salary payable as of the end of such fiscal year.
5. The following is an example only of the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Assume: that the Bank has achieved the applicable Asset Target.
Net Income Before Income Taxes (from TFR) $ 4,600,000 Adjustments: Add/Increase: General Reserves $ 300,000 Accrued Expense for Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit $ 60,000 Tax Preferred Income "gross up" $ 70,000 Subtract/Reduce: Specific Reserves/Charge-Offs $ (20,000) Adjusted Net Income $ 5,010,000 ============ Average Asset Balance $405,000,000 ============ |
Return on Assets Before Taxes:
Adjusted Net Income / Average Asset Balance =
Bonus Percentage based on 1.237% Return on Average Assets = 0.05
(from Bonus Calculation Table)
Calculation of Bonus (assuming at end of fiscal year, Executive's rate of annual salary is $133,000 per annum):
Bonus Percentage X Executive's Annual Salary = Bonus
C. Payment and Crediting of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit
1. Within thirty days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and subject to the Deferred Comp Plan.
2. As of each Determination Date, Executive is entitled to receive no more than one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in cash (the "Cash Portion") and at least one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in the form of a credit to Executive's Account (as such term is defined under the Deferred Comp Plan)("Executive's Account. In accordance with the requirements of the Deferred Comp Plan, Executive shall make in a timely manner any and all elections with respect to the Deferred Comp Plan, including, but not limited to, elections with respect to the deferral of compensation.
3. Within 30 days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall pay the Cash Portion, if any, to Executive in cash, subject to any withholding required by law.
4. The Deferred Portion shall be credited to Executive's Account effective on July 1 of the year closest to the calculation date of the specific Pre Tax Net Income Benefit. Installments vest annually over 3 years on July 1, and annually on July 1 thereafter until fully vested as provide in the deferred compensation plan.
5. If this Agreement is terminated by Executive pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(b) or by the Bank for cause (other than due to Executive's death or disability) pursuant to Paragraph F.1, Executive shall be entitled only to that part of the Deferred Portion that has been vested prior to the Date of Termination.
6. If this Agreement is terminated due to Executive's death or disability or by the Bank without cause pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(a), then, on the Date of Termination of this Agreement on such basis, Executive's Account shall be credited with all remaining portions of any Deferred Portion that have not previously been fully vested as of such Date of Termination.
7. In the event of the termination of Executive's employment, the amount in Executive's Account shall be distributed to Executive in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.
EXHIBIT 10.9
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT
This Employment Agreement (the "Agreement") is dated for reference purposes and entered into as of July 1, 2003 (the "Effective Date"), by and between Bank of Internet USA, a federal savings bank ("Bank'), having a principal place of business at 12220 El Camino Real, Suite 220, San Diego, California, and Michael J. Berengolts ("Executive"), whose address is 10621 Queen Avenue, La Mesa, CA 91941. Bank and Executive are sometimes collectively referred to in this Agreement as the "Parties." As used in this Agreement, the term "Effective Date" means the date this Employment Agreement becomes effective.
RECITALS
A. Bank desires to employ Executive and avail itself of his skill, knowledge and experience in the management of Bank's business.
B. The Parties desire to set forth in this Agreement the terms of Executive's employment by Bank.
The Parties therefore agree as follows:
A. TERM OF EMPLOYMENT
1. Term. Bank employs Executive to perform the duties described in this Agreement, and Executive accepts such employment, for a term of one year commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the day preceding the one year anniversary of the Effective Date, except (i) that the Term of this Agreement shall be renewed without further notice for a one year period commencing on the annual anniversary date of the Effective Date (the "Anniversary Date") and on each subsequent Anniversary Date following any such one year period of employment, and (ii) this Agreement may be terminated prior to the end of such Term by Bank or Employee in accordance with and subject to the terms of Paragraph F. (Termination) of this Agreement, including,
but not limited to, Paragraph F.2.(a) providing Executive with a Severance Payment (as defined therein) upon termination of this Agreement by Bank other than for cause. When used in this Agreement, "Term" shall refer to the entire period of employment of Executive by Bank under this Agreement.
B. DUTIES OF EXECUTIVE
Subject to the powers and directions of the policies, procedures and directives of the board of directors, as adopted and modified from time to time, Executive shall perform the duties and shall have the title of Chief Technology Officer. During the Term, Executive shall perform exclusively for Bank the services contemplated in this Agreement to be performed by Executive, faithfully, diligently and to the best of Executive's ability, consistent with the highest and best standards of the banking industry and in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations and the Bank's federal stock charter and bylaws. Except as permitted by the prior written consent of Bank's board of directors, Executive shall devote Executive's entire working time, ability and attention to the business of Bank during the Term.
C. COMPENSATION
1. Base Salary. In consideration of Executive's services to be performed under this Agreement, Bank shall pay or cause to be paid to Executive a base salary in the following amounts, payable in equal installments in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods:
a. $115,000 per annum, effective as of July 1, 2003.
b. $120,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2004, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $399,098,000.
c. $130,000 per annum, provided that such base salary shall begin (i) no earlier than July 1, 2005, and (ii) effective as of the first day of the calendar month immediately following the end of the calendar month at which the Bank's Total Assets (as reported in accordance with Paragraph G.13, below) equals or exceeds $532,964,000.
Executive's salary shall be reviewed by the board of directors from time to time at its discretion and Executive shall receive such additional or other salary increases, if any, as the board of directors, in its sole discretion, shall determine.
2. One-Time Deferred Compensation. Executive is entitled to one-time deferred compensation in the amount of $25,000 (the "One-Time Deferred Compensation"), subject to the terms of this Agreement and the Bank of Internet USA Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, adopted effective as of July 1, 2003 (the "Deferred Comp Plan". The Executive's deferred compensation account shall be credited for $25,000 plus 4% on July 1, 2004. The One-Time Deferred Compensation amount and all earnings in the account shall vest to the Executive on the following:
July 1, 2004.............................. 20% July 1, 2005.............................. 40% July 1, 2006.............................. 60% July 1, 2007.............................. 80% July 1, 2008.............................. 100% |
The bank shall pay 4% only on July 1, 2004. Thereafter, investment of the Executive's Account shall comply with the investment provision of the Deferred Comp Plan.
3. Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Executive shall be entitled to a benefit based on the pre-tax net income of the Bank, as calculated in accordance with the formula and terms set forth in Exhibit A, the terms of which are incorporated by this reference as if set forth in full in this paragraph (the "Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit"). The amount of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, if any, to which Executive shall be entitled shall be subject to the terms governing the deferral of such benefit set forth in Exhibit A. Executive shall be eligible for such other benefits and other incentive compensation, if any, that may be made available to the Bank's senior executive officers from time to time by the board of directors in its sole discretion.
D. EXECUTIVE BENEFITS
1. Vacation. Executive shall be entitled to vacation as prescribed in the Bank's Employee Manual maintained on the Bank's Intranet. In the event this Agreement is terminated pursuant to Paragraph F.2, Bank reserves the right to require Executive to take any unused vacation time prior to the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2).
2. Directors and Officers Liability Insurance. Bank shall provide for Executive, at Bank's expense, coverage under a directors and officers liability insurance policy in such amounts and on such terms as may be approved by Bank's board of directors and as may be consistent with such coverage provided by Bank for its other officers and directors.
3. Group Insurance Benefits; and Death Benefit. Executive shall participate in all group insurance plans provided by Bank for all of its senior executive officers at Bank's expense to the same extent and on the same terms as Bank's other senior executive officers. Throughout the term of employment, the Bank shall, at its sole cost, will provide a death benefit on the life of Executive in an amount equal to three times Executive's then-current annual salary.
4. Stock Options. As of Effective Date, BofI Holding, Inc. a Delaware corporation ("Holding"), the sole shareholder of Bank, had granted to Executive incentive stock options, as provided in Section 422 of the United States Internal Revenue Code (ISOs"), pursuant to the Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan of BOI Holding, Inc. (the "Plan") and as memorialized in three Incentive Stock Option Agreements, dated April 27, 2000, April 2, 2001, and January 28, 2002. (collectively, the "Grant"), which such agreements provide for, among other things, the vesting of such ISOs. Notwithstanding the terms of the Plan, in the event that the Bank terminates Executive under this Agreement for any reason other than for cause pursuant to Paragraph F.I or in the event Executive's death or disability causes the termination of this Agreement, all of
Executive's lSOs issued pursuant to the Grant and any subsequently issued grant of ISOs under the Plan, including all ISOs held by Executive that are not otherwise vested at such time, shall become fully vested and Executive may exercise such vested ISOs, in whole or in part, at any time within the terms of the option plan. In the event that Executive terminates this Agreement, Executive shall be entitled to exercise only those lSOs that are vested as of the Date of Termination (as defined in Paragraph F.2, below), and may be exercised within a 90 day period in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.7(a) of the Plan. Neither Bank nor Holding shall enter into any transaction during or after the Term that would have the effect of canceling any of Executive's ISOs issued under the Grant.
5. Retirement, Profit Sharing and Other Plans. Executive shall be entitled to participate in any retirement plans, profit-sharing plans, salary deferral and other deferred compensation plans, medical expense reimbursement plans and other similar plans that Bank may establish with respect to all employees; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require Bank to establish or maintain any of such plans.
E. BUSINESS EXPENSES AND REIMBURSEMENT
1. Business Expenses. In addition to Bank's payment or reimbursement of costs of the type described in Paragraph E.2, Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for any ordinary and necessary business expenses incurred by Executive in the performance of his duties and in acting for or on behalf of Bank during the Term, provided that: (a) each such expenditure is of a nature qualifying it as a proper deduction on the federal and state income tax returns of Bank as a business expense and not as deductible compensation to Executive, (b) Executive furnishes to Bank adequate records and other documentary evidence required by federal and state statutes and regulations issued by the appropriate taxing authorities for the substantiation of such expenditures and deductible business expenses of Bank, and (c) Executive's expense reimbursement reports are submitted for approval in accordance with Bank's internal policies.
2. Additional Expenses. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for
the costs and expenses set forth below, subject to the following requirements:
(a) Executive shall comply with the Bank's expense payment or reimbursement
guidelines and procedures as the Bank may amend such guidelines and procedures
or may adopt new guidelines and procedures from time to time, and (b) prior to
the Bank becoming liable for any expenses or reimbursement relating to
equipment, publications, education, training or professional organizations
pursuant to subparagraphs (iii) through (vi) below, any such expenses or
reimbursement shall be approved by Bank's board of directors or any committee or
person authorized by the board of directors to grant such approval, in advance
of incurring any such expenses. Subject to such prior approval of incurring
expenses or reimbursement and to compliance with Bank's payment or reimbursement
procedures, Bank's obligation to make any such payment or reimbursement pursuant
to this paragraph shall not be contingent on whether or to what extent a
particular expense may constitute a deductible business expense of Bank or be
excludable from Executive's taxable compensation.
(i) Automobile Allowance. Standard business mileage reimbursement will be provided to Executive.
(ii) Parking. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for his reasonable automobile parking expenses during the Term.
(iii) Equipment. Bank shall pay or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for a digital cellular telephone (including the initial purchase price and connection charges as well as all business-related air charges), and other equipment as needed. Such equipment shall be the property of the Bank and upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, all of such equipment shall be returned to Bank, as more particularly provided in Paragraph G.3.
(iv) Publications. Bank shall reimburse Executive for the costs incurred by Executive during the term for subscriptions to business-related
periodical publications that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.
(v) Education and Training. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for attending business-related seminars, training programs, conferences and conventions that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties to Bank.
(vi) Professional Organizations. Bank shall pay for or reimburse Executive for costs incurred by Executive during the Term for membership fees and dues of professional organizations that Executive reasonably considers useful and relevant to the discharge of his duties for Bank.
F. TERMINATION
1. Termination for Cause. Bank may terminate this Agreement for cause at any time without advance notice and without further obligation or liability to Executive, by action of Bank's board of directors:
(a) If Executive materially fails to perform his duties in a
satisfactory manner or habitually neglects his duties; provided, however, that
before any termination pursuant to this subparagraph (a) shall become effective,
(i) Bank shall have given Executive written notice setting forth the specific
grounds for termination ("Warning Notice"), (ii) Bank shall have met and
informed Executive of the grounds for termination, of the extent and nature of
his unsatisfactory or negligent performance and of what Executive must do to
correct such deficiencies, and (iii) Executive shall have been afforded a
reasonable opportunity over a period of not less than forty-five (45) days from
the date of the Warning Notice to correct the unsatisfactory or negligent
performance described in the Warning Notice to the satisfaction of the board of
directors, provided, however, that Executive shall be terminated at the end of
such period if
Executive fails to correct his deficient performance in the manner prescribed by and to the reasonable satisfaction of the board of directors;
(b) If Executive is convicted of illegal activity which materially adversely affects Bank's reputation in the community or which evidences the lack of Executive's fitness or ability to perform Executive's duties as determined by the board of directors, in good faith;
(c) If Executive commits any act which causes termination of coverage under Bank's Bankers Blanket Bond as to Executive, as distinguished from termination of coverage as to Bank as a whole;
(d) If Executive dies;
(e) If Executive is found to be physically or mentally
incapable of performing Executive's duties for a consecutive period of ninety
(90) days or greater by the board of directors, reasonably and in good faith.
Termination pursuant to this subparagraph (e) shall become effective immediately
on written notice of termination given by Bank to Executive after the expiration
of such 90-day period;
(f) If Bank is closed or taken over by any of the bank regulatory authorities having jurisdiction over Bank's activities; or
(g) If any bank regulatory authority should successfully exercise its cease and desist powers to remove Executive from office.
The Parties understand and agree that notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement: (1) this Agreement is subject to the requirements and terms set forth in the regulations of the Office of Thrift Supervision ("OTS") contained in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39; (2) specifically, without limitation, the required provisions set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b)
are incorporated by reference in this Agreement as if set forth in full; (3) to the greatest extent possible, this Agreement shall be interpreted so as to be consistent with said regulation; and (4) in the event of conflict or inconsistency between the terms of this Agreement and said regulation, the required provisions of said OTS regulation shall supersede any inconsistent or conflicting provisions of this Agreement. The termination of this Agreement for any of the reasons set forth in 12 C.F.R. Section 563.39(b) shall be considered termination for cause pursuant to this Paragraph F.1.
2. Termination at Will. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated by either party at any time upon thirty (30) days' written notice of termination to the other Party ("Notice of Termination"). As used in this Paragraph F.2, "Date of Termination" means the thirtieth (30th) day following the date on which Notice of Termination is given.
(a) Termination by Bank. In the event Bank elects to terminate
this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the
Term, Executive shall be entitled to compensation from Bank as follows: (i) Bank
shall pay Executive his normal compensation then in effect through the Date of
Termination; and (ii) Bank shall pay to Executive a severance payment equal to
his then-current base monthly salary, multiplied by twelve (12) (the "Severance
Payment"), which amount shall be paid by the Bank in either of the following two
ways, in the sole discretion of the board of directors: (A) the Bank may pay the
Severance Payment in twelve (12) equal installments during the succeeding twelve
(12) month period beginning on the Date of Termination (the "Severance Period")
in conformity with Bank's normal payroll periods, or (B) the Bank may pay the
Severance Payment in one lump sum, subject to such withholding and other
deductions as may be required by applicable law. In addition, Executive shall be
entitled to the continuation of the group insurance benefits provided under
Paragraph D.3, subject to Executive's reasonable cooperation with Bank, until
the first to occur of: (x) the expiration of the
Severance Period, or (y) Executive's commencement of work for a new employer that provides group medical insurance benefits to Executive. Executive's acceptance of new employment or earnings from other sources during the Severance Period shall not affect Bank's obligation to make the Severance Payment as provided above. At any time between Bank giving Executive Notice of Termination and the Date of Termination, Bank, in its sole discretion, may direct Executive to cease performing services for Bank or to absent himself from Bank's premises and operations, provided that Bank shall nonetheless compensate Executive as provided above.
(b) Termination by Executive. In the event Executive elects to terminate this Agreement by giving Notice of Termination prior to the expiration of the Term, Executive shall be entitled to such compensation as may be due and payable to him through and including such Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any other compensation except as may be required by law or by written agreement, including this Agreement and the Deferred Comp Plan.
3. Effect of Termination. In the event of the termination of this Agreement prior to the completion of the Term for any of the reasons specified in Paragraphs F.1 and F.2, Executive shall be entitled to the compensation earned by Executive prior to the Date of Termination, as provided in this Agreement, computed pro rata up to and including the Date of Termination, but Executive shall not be entitled to any further compensation or other benefits for services rendered after the Date of Termination, except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement. As used in this Paragraph F.3. "Date of Termination" includes the effective date of any termination, whether pursuant to Paragraph F.1 or F.2.
G. GENERAL PROVISIONS
1. Solicitation of Customers and Employees. For any period during which Executive receives any salary from Bank and for a one (1) year
period following any termination of Executive from Bank, Executive shall not solicit any customers or employees of Bank to move their banking or employment relationships from Bank. Nothing in this Agreement shall preclude Executive from any mass solicitation to groups and individual follow-up solicitations of persons or businesses named in any list or data base not specifically related to or previously defined by the Bank, even though the names of certain Bank customers may appear in such list or data base.
2. Indemnification. To the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank
shall pay any and all expenses incurred by Executive in connection with the
defense or settlement of, and shall pay and satisfy any judgments, awards, fines
and penalties rendered, assessed or levied against Executive in, any judicial,
arbitration, mediation or administrative suit, action, hearing, inquiry or
proceeding (whether or not Bank is joined as a party) relating to acts or
omissions of Executive alleged to have occurred while an "agent" of Bank, or by
Bank, or by both, provided however, that Bank shall not be obligated to defend,
indemnify or hold Executive harmless from the consequences of his own negligent
or reckless act or omission or willful misconduct or dishonesty. In addition, to
the maximum extent permitted by law, Bank shall advance to Executive, upon
receipt of the undertaking required by California Corporations Code Section
317(f), any expenses incurred in defending against any such proceeding to which
Executive is a party or has been threatened to be made a party.
3. Return of Property. Executive expressly agrees that all manuals, documents, files, reports, studies, instruments, equipment and other materials and property used and/or developed by Bank or Executive (whether on his personal time or while performing services for the Bank) during the Term ("Preparatory Work") are the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest in such property. Executive further agrees that, subject to the execution of this Agreement, all Preparatory Work is the sole property of Bank, and that Executive has no right, title or interest, legal or beneficial, in such
Preparatory Work or in any benefits that may arise from such Preparatory Work. Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, Executive or Executive's representative shall promptly deliver possession of all of said property to Bank in original or good, operating condition, normal wear and tear excepted.
4. Notices. Any notice, request, demand or other communication required or permitted hereunder shall be considered to be properly given when personally served in writing, when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, or when delivered to a generally recognized overnight courier service (such as, for example, Federal Express or United Parcel Service) addressed to the Party at such Party's address appearing at the beginning of this Agreement. Either Party may change its address by written notice in accordance with this paragraph.
5. Benefit of Agreement; Assignment. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Parties and their respective executors, administrators, successors and assigns. This Agreement is for the personal services of Executive and may not be assigned by Executive.
6. Applicable Law. Except to the extent governed by the laws of the United States, this Agreement is to be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California.
7. Captions and Paragraphs Headings. Captions and paragraph headings used herein are for convenience only and are not a part of this Agreement and shall not be used in constructing it.
8. Invalid Provisions. Should any provision of this Agreement for any reason be declared invalid, void, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the validity and binding effect of any remaining portion shall not be affected, and the remaining portions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect as if this Agreement had been executed with said provision eliminated.
9. Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the Parties. It supersedes any and all other agreements or understandings, whether oral or written, between the Parties with respect to the employment of Executive by Bank. The terms of this Agreement in Paragraph D.4 applicable to stock options supersede the terms of the Plan or any agreement between the Parties to the extent the terms of the Plan and any other agreement are inconsistent with the terms of Paragraph D.4. Each party to this Agreement acknowledges that no representations, inducements, promises, or agreements, oral or otherwise, have been made by any party, or anyone acting on behalf of any party, that are not embodied in this Agreement, and that no other agreement, statement, or promise not contained in this Agreement shall be valid or binding. This Agreement, may be modified or amended only in a written document signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. The amendment or other modification of the Plan or other any other agreement generally applicable to the grant of stock options or issuance of ISOs by the Holding Company to employees, including Executive will not supersede the terms of this Agreement pertaining to ISOs without the express written approval of the Parties contained in a writing expressly stating its intent to supersede the specific terms of this Agreement applicable to ISOs. Additionally, terms of this Agreement will prevail in any conflicts with other agreements.
10. Attorney's Fees. Each party shall bear his or its own attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the negotiation, preparation and delivery of this Agreement. However, if any action is instituted to enforce or interpret any of the obligations set forth in this Agreement, the prevailing party(ies) shall be entitled to recover its (their) reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred in connection with the enforcement or interpretive action.
11. Trade Secrets. To the extent that during the Term Bank develops any trade secrets, as that term is defined under California law, the Parties agree that such trade secrets belong to and are the property of the Bank.
Executive agrees that for a period of one (1) year after the termination of this Agreement. Executive shall not disclose any of Bank's trade secrets, directly or indirectly, or use them in any way in contravention of the rights of the Bank to such trade secrets.
12. Restricted Securities. The ISOs, the underlying common stock issuable upon the exercise of the ISOs and the shares of Holding's common stock issuable pursuant thereto shall be issued by Holding without registration under the Securities Act of 1933, or registration or qualification of such securities under any state securities or "blue sky" laws in reliance upon certain exemptions from registration or qualification, as the case may he. Upon issuance, such securities shall be considered "restricted securities," subject to certain limitations on transfer or other disposition imposed under applicable federal and state securities or "blue sky" laws and regulations and such restrictions shall be set forth in one or more legends appearing on the certificate or agreement evidencing such securities.
13. Accounting Principles. Wherever in this Agreement, including any exhibit hereto, there is a reference to or need to use or rely upon accounting principles and procedures, such accounting principles and procedures shall be those used by the Bank in the preparation and filing of its reports of financial condition and operations in the form of Thrift Financial Reports, as filed with the Office of Thrift Supervision in the ordinary course ("TFRs"). By way of example, such items as Total Assets and loan loss reserves shall be computed as they are computed for purposes of reporting such information in the Bank's TFRs.
The Parties execute this Agreement as of the Effective Date first above written.
EXECUTIVE: BANK OF INTERNET, USA a federal savings bank /s/ Michael Berengolts By: /s/ Jerry Englert ------------------------------ -------------------------------- Michael Berengolts Name: Jerry Englert 10621 Queen Avenue Title: Chairman of the Board La Mesa, CA 91941 Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus --------------------------- Secretary |
CONSENT OF BOFI HOLDING, INC.
By execution of this Agreement below, BofI Holding, Inc., a Delaware corporation, consents to and agrees to perform its obligations under Paragraph D.4.
BofI Holding, Inc. By: /s/ Jerry Englert Attest: /s/ C. Michelle Paulus --------------------------------- ---------------------- Jerry Englert, Chairman of the Board Name: C. Michelle Paulus Title: Secretary |
EXHIBIT A
PRE-TAX NET INCOME BENEFIT
The following terms apply to the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit provided in Paragraph C.2 of the Agreement.
A. Definitions.
1. "Adjusted Net Income" refers to Net Income Before Income Taxes
(as defined below) as reported in a TFR (as defined below), reduced by the
amount of Specific Reserves (as defined below), as reported in a TFR, and
increased by the sum of (a) the amount of General Reserves (as defined below),
(b) the amount of any expense accrued by the Bank for the Pre-Tax Net Income
Benefit, and (c) the amount of any non-taxable or tax preferred income "grossed
up" to its pre-tax equivalent or equivalent income without such tax preference
(the "Tax Preferred Income "gross up").
2. "Average Asset Balance" refers to the average amount of Total Assets reported by the Bank on a daily for the period covered by a TFR.
3. "Asset Target" refers to the level of Total Assets reported in the Bank's TFR at June 30, 2004 and at June 30, 2005. The Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2004 is $399,098,000 and is referred to as the "2004 Asset Target" and the Asset Target for the period ended June 30, 2005 is $532,963,000 and is referred to as the "2005 Asset Target."
4. "Bonus Calculation Table" refers to the following table showing the Bonus Percentage (which will be applied as a percentage of Net Income Before Income Taxes earned by Executive) if the Bank attains certain levels of profitability (expressed as a percentage attained by dividing Adjusted Net Income by the Average Asset Balance):
If the Bank's Return on Assets Before Taxes (as defined below) is
Bonus Percentage at least: but not greater than: ---------- -------- -------------------- 0.05 1.200% 1.399% 0.10 1.400% 1.799% 0.15 1.800% 2.199% 0.20 2.200% No limit |
5. "TFR" refers to the Thrift Financial Report of the Bank, consisting of various financial statements, including balance sheet, statement of
operations and other statements, prepared by the Bank in the ordinary course and filed quarterly with the Office of Thrift Supervision.
6. "General Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of a reserve or an allowance against loan losses generally and not allocable to one or more specific assets, as set forth in its TFR for the applicable period.
7. "Net Income Before Income Taxes" refers to the amount reported as "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes" in a TFR for the applicable period.
8. "Deferred Comp Plan" has the meaning set forth in Section C.3 of the Agreement.
9. "Pre-Tax Net Income" refers to the "Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes," as set forth on the Statement of Operations included in a TFR.
10. "Return on Assets Before Taxes" refers to the percentage derived from dividing (a) the Adjusted Net Income for such TFR period, by (b) the Average Asset Balance with respect to such period.
10. "Specific Reserves" refers to the amount recorded by the Bank as non-interest expense arising from the establishment of reserves or allowances against loan losses specifically attributable to actual losses or to prospective losses from one or more identified assets, as set forth in a TFR.
B. Calculation of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit
1. Executive shall be entitled to a Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and June 30, 2005. All calculations leading to the computation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit for each of such years shall be based upon the results reported in the Bank's TFRs for each such 12-month period. No Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit shall be calculated or payable with respect to any period less than a full 12-month fiscal year.
2. As promptly as possible after the filing of the TFR for the Bank's fiscal years ending June 30, 2004 and 2005, as the case may be, but in no event later than 30 days after such filing, the Bank shall (i) determine the Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, (ii) calculate the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with this Agreement, and (iii) report the results of such calculation to Executive and the board of directors of the Bank. As promptly as possible after reporting such calculation, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, Executive and the Bank shall meet to confirm their agreement on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net
Income Benefit. On the date that the Executive and the Bank mutually agree on the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit (the "Determination Date"), the Executive shall have a right to the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit as provided in this Agreement.
3. As a condition precedent to Executive's eligibility for the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit with respect to the 2004 and 2005 fiscal years, the Bank shall have achieved the 2004 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2004, and the Bank shall have achieved the 2005 Asset Target for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2005.
4. Provided that the Bank shall have achieved the applicable Asset Target and subject to the provisions of Paragraph C.3, below, governing the payment and crediting, as the case may be, of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in an amount equal to the product of multiplying: (1) the Bonus Percentage for which the Executive is eligible for such fiscal year, based on the Bank's Return on Assets Before Income Taxes, as derived from the Bonus Calculation Table, times (2) Executive's rate of annual salary payable as of the end of such fiscal year.
5. The following is an example only of the calculation of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit. Assume: that the Bank has achieved the applicable Asset Target.
Net Income Before Income Taxes (from TFR) $ 4,600,000 Adjustments: Add/Increase: General Reserves $ 300,000 Accrued Expense for Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit $ 60,000 Tax Preferred Income "gross up" $ 70,000 Subtract/Reduce: Specific Reserves/Charge-Offs $ (20,000) Adjusted Net Income $ 5,010,000 ============ Average Asset Balance $405,000,000 ============ Return on Assets Before Taxes: |
Adjusted Net Income / Average Asset Balance =
Bonus Percentage based on 1.237% Return on Average Assets = 0.05
(from Bonus Calculation Table)
Calculation of Bonus (assuming at end of fiscal year, Executive's rate of annual salary is $115,000 per annum):
Bonus Percentage X Executive's Annual Salary = Bonus
C. Payment and Crediting of Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit
1. Within thirty days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall provide to Executive the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and subject to the Deferred Comp Plan.
2. As of each Determination Date, Executive is entitled to receive no more than one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in cash (the "Cash Portion") and at least one-half of the Pre-Tax Net Income Benefit in the form of a credit to Executive's Account (as such term is defined under the Deferred Comp Plan)("Executive's Account. In accordance with the requirements of the Deferred Comp Plan, Executive shall make in a timely manner any and all elections with respect to the Deferred Comp Plan, including, but not limited to, elections with respect to the deferral of compensation.
3. Within 30 days of the Determination Date, the Bank shall pay the Cash Portion, if any, to Executive in cash, subject to any withholding required by law.
4. The Deferred Portion shall be credited to Executive's Account effective on July 1 of the year closest to the calculation date of the specific Pre Tax Net Income Benefit. Installments vest annually over 3 years on July 1, and annually on July 1 thereafter until fully vested as provide in the deferred compensation plan.
5. If this Agreement is terminated by Executive pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(b) or by the Bank for cause (other than due to Executive's death or disability) pursuant to Paragraph F.1, Executive shall be entitled only to that part of the Deferred Portion that has been vested prior to the Date of Termination.
6. If this Agreement is terminated due to Executive's death or disability or by the Bank without cause pursuant to Paragraph F.2.(a), then, on the Date of Termination of this Agreement on such basis, Executive's Account shall be credited with all remaining portions of any Deferred Portion that have not previously been fully vested as of such Date of Termination.
7. In the event of the termination of Executive's employment, the amount in Executive's Account shall be distributed to Executive in accordance with the terms of the Deferred Comp Plan.
Exhibit 23.2
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT
REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
We consent to the use in this
Registration Statement of BofI Holding, Inc. on Form S-1 of our
report dated October 13, 2004, appearing in the Prospectus,
which is part of this Registration Statement.
We also consent to the
reference to us under the headings Experts in such
Prospectus.
Los Angeles, California
December 16, 2004